Audi 2017 A8 / S8 Owner Manual

Owner's 2017 Manual AS Vorsprung durch Te ~~?~ (HO Foreword Thank you for choosing an Audi - we value your trust in us. Your new Audi wi ll allow you to experience the best in groundbreaking technology and premium quality equipment a vehicle has to offer. We recommend that you read your Owner's Manual thorough ly so that you quickly become acquainted with your Audi and make use of all of its features . In addition to explaining how the different features work, we provide many useful tips and information concerning your safety, how to care for your vehicle and how to maintain your vehicle's value. We also give you useful tips and information on how to drive your vehicle more efficiently and in an environmentally friendly manner. We hope you enjoy driving your Audi and we wish you safe and pleasant motoring. AUDIAG 0 co .... N ,..._ .... N 0 0 :c '<t Table About of contents this Owner's Manual Cockpit . . . . . . .............. Cockpit overview .......... Controls at a glance ... ........ ...... 6 . ... . . . ... . . . . ....... 7 7 7 9 Instrument cluster . . .......... .. Multifunction steering wheel ... . . Driver information system ............ Time and date display . . .... . . . . . Head-up Display . . . . .. .. .. . .. . . . Indicato r lights . ................ On Board Diagnostic System (OBD) ..... ..... . . ... . ..... .... .... . Starting and driving ......... Opening and closing . . . ... Central locking . ... . .......... Luggage compartment lid ...... Child safety lock . . . ........ ... Power window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sunroof. . . ... . . . . . .......... Panorama glass roof . . . . . . . . . . Valet parking function . . . . . . . . . Garage door opener (Homelink) . ... . ... . . . ... . . . ... . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... . . . . . . . . . . L ights and Vision . . . . Exterior lighting . . . . . . . . Interior lighting . . . . . . . . V1s1on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield wipe rs . . . . . . Digital compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Seats and storage ..... General inf ormation . . . . . . Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Head restraints .......... Memory function . . . . . . . . . 12 volt sockets . . . . . . . . . . . llSvoltsocket ... . .......... Full-length center console. . Sto rage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggage compartment .... Pass-through w ith ski bag . . Refrigerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .... .... .... .... .... .... .... . ... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... Warm and cold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deluxe automatic climat e control . . . . . . . 2 11 12 16 16 17 25 27 27 27 33 36 37 38 39 40 41 43 43 46 47 SO 52 54 54 54 55 58 59 60 61 62 63 65 66 67 69 69 Driving ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... General information . . ... .......... Steering .......... . . . . . .......... Start ing and stopping the eng ine ..... Start/Stop system . . . . . ............ Electromechanical parking brake ...... Start ing from a stop . . . . ...... .. . . . Automat ic transmission .. .. .. .. .. . .. 73 73 75 76 78 81 82 83 Trailer mode . . . . . . . . ...... .. . . . . . Driving with a trailer . . .............. . Traile r mode notes . . . . . ............ .. 89 89 Driver assistance . . .............. Assist . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . .. . . Speed warning system . . . . .......... Cruise control sys t em . . . . .......... Audi adaptive cruise control .......... Audi active lane assist (lane departure assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audi side assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Night vision assist w ith pedestrian and wild animal detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audi drive select (drive settings) . . . . . . . .. .. .. . 92 92 92 92 94 .. .. 102 104 .. .. 107 110 Parking systems ................. General information ................. Parking system plus .. . ..... . ...... . .. Rearv iew camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Peripheral cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjus ting the display and the wa rning tones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error messages ..................... Trailer hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 114 115 116 119 Intelligent Technology .......... Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC) . . . . Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electromechanical steering, dynamic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All wheel drive (quattro) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Energy management ................. Notice about data recorded by the Event Data Recorder and veh icle control modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 126 128 91 124 124 124 129 130 130 132 Table Infotainment system ............ Multi Med ia Interface ............ Traffic safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching the MMI on and off . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting the volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Infotainment display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMI operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMI touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Letter/number speller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menus and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice recogni t ion sy st em Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command overview information Global commands . . . . . . . . . . Telephone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Info..... . ......................... Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 134 134 134 134 134 134 135 135 136 137 138 . 14 1 . 140 . 141 . 142 . . . . . . . . . . . 142 . . . . . . . . . . . 143 144 . . . . . . . . . . . 144 . . . . . . . . . . . 145 ........................ ........................ 146 146 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening the telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dialing a telephone number . . . . . . . . . . . Storing a phone number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accepting/ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . During a phone call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency call functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening the directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Searching for a contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Import ing and exporting contacts . . . . . . Storing a new contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Name tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Addit ional settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 147 148 149 149 149 150 150 lSl 152 153 153 154 154 154 156 Telephone Introduction Audi connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 0 co .... N ,..._ .... N 0 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating the browser . . . . . . . . . Overview of Audi connect services Wi-Fi hotspot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conf iguring a data connection . . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 157 . 158 . 159 . 160 . 161 of contents About Audi connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 164 . . N a v1gat1on . . . . . . . ................ . Opening navigation . ................ . Entering a destination ............... . Starting/canceling route guidance . . . . . . Operating the map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Online map view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing traffic information . . . . . . . . . . Other sett ings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 165 165 170 170 171 172 175 176 176 Radio ... . . . . . . . . ........ Accessing the radio . . . . . . . . Radio funct ions . . . . . . . . . . . Other settings . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 177 177 178 178 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 ... ... ...... ...... ...... .. .. .. .. Media d r ives and connections . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SD card reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 180 180 180 181 DVD drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 DVD changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Jukebox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Bluetooth audio player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Wi-Fi audio player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Audi music interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Supported med ia and file formats . . . . . . 186 Troub leshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Playing medi a . . . Accessing media . . . . Media functions . . . . Other settings . . . . . R e ar Seat ..... ..... ..... ..... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Enter t ainm e nt .. .. .. .. 189 189 190 190 ........ 193 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. RSEcomponents overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Switching the RSEon and off . . . . . . . . . . 193 Adjusting the volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Adjusting the sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Restarting the RSE(reset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Display settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Parental control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 0 :c '<t 3 Tabl e of content s Other settings . . . . . . . . . Headphon es . . . . . . . . . . . Media drives/connections Navigat ion . . . . . . . . . . . . Ent ert ainment syst em s . . Video playback information Troubleshoot ing . . . . . . . . ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ...... ........ .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . 196 197 200 200 201 202 203 System settings ............. Sett ing the time and date . . . . . . . . Adjusting the sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adju sti ng the system vol ume . . . . . Othe r settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . 204 204 204 20 5 205 .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. Audi . . . 216 pre sense . . ..... .. ....... . . . . . . . . 207 207 207 20 8 212 212 213 214 Safety . . . . . . . . . ... . . .... . . . . ... Driving safety ................. Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Correct passenger seating positions . . Driver's and front passenger 's footwell Pedal area. ... . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . Storing cargo correctly . . . . . . . . . . . . Reporting Safety Defects... . ....... Preventative passenger protection . . . . . 218 218 219 221 224 Airbag system ................... Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mon it or ing the Advanced Airbag System Knee airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 226 230 236 24 0 24 3 24 5 .. .. .. .. .. .... .... .... .... .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 I mportant info rmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Securing chi ld seats . . . . . . . . . . . LATCHsystem (Lower anchorages t ethe rs for children) . . . . . . . . . . Addit ional information . . . . . . . . 4 and Care . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Checking and Filling ......... Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalytic converter . . . . . ............ Engine compartment ................. Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ... .. . Cooling syst em . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake fl uid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Batt ery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshie ld washer system . . . . . . . . Service interva l display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 . . . . 267 . . . . 268 . . 271 271 . . .. 274 . . . . 277 . . . . 279 . . . . 279 . . . . 281 . . . . 282 Wheels .. . . . . . . . . . . . ............ .. Whee ls and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire Pressure Monitoring System (A8, 58) Tir e Pressure Monitor ing System (58 pl us) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 283 301 Care and cleaning .......... General information . . . . . . . . . . . Car washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning and care information . . . Placing your vehicle out of service .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 306 306 306 307 311 Troubleshooting ........... Emergency assistance ........ General info rmation . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment . . . . . . . . . . ... ... .... Replacing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare ti res . . . . . . . . . . . ............ ...... ... ...... ..... ...... .. 312 312 312 312 313 319 .. .. .. .. .. 302 216 .. .. .. .. .. Safety belts ......... General information . . . . Why use safety belts? . . . Safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . Belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . Maintenance . . . . . . . 258 and . . . . . . . 261 . . . . . . . 266 Fuses and bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Electr ical fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 .. .... .... .... .... .... .. 327 327 327 327 328 329 331 Technical data and accessories .. Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle specificat ions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes about technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 333 333 333 Emergency situations .......... General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start ing by pushing or tow ing . . . . Starting with ju mper cables . . . . . Using the jump start cable . . . . . . Towing with a tow truck . . . . . . . . Raising the vehicle . . . . . ............ .. .. .. .. .. Table of contents Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 We ights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Gasoline engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 336 336 Consumer information . . . . . . ... . Warranty coverages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating your veh icle outs ide the U.S.A. or Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aud i Service Repair Manuals and Lit erature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessor ies and t echnical changes . . . . . . Declarat ion of Compliance, Telecommun ication or Electron ic Systems 339 Index 340 . . . . . . . . ............ . . . . . . . .. 336 336 336 338 0 co .... N ,..... .... N 0 0 :c '<t 5 About this Owner's Manual This Owne r's Man ual applies to a ll versions of this mode l. It contains important information, tips, suggestions and warn ings for using your vehicle. Keep this manua l in your vehicle at all times . This is especially important if you loan your vehicle to others or sell it. This owner's manua l describes the equipment range specified for this mode l at the time of printing. Individual equipment options described may on ly be available at a later date or may only be offered in certain countries . Some sections in this manual do not apply to all vehicles. When this is the case, the beginning of the sect ion ind icates the validity, for example "Applies to vehicles : with cruise contro l system". Optional or vehicle-specific equipment is also ident ified with an asterisk "*" . The illustrations are designed as a general guide and on your vehicle may look s light ly different than what is illustrated. All directions, such as "left", "right", "front" and "rear", are based on the vehicle's direct ion of travel. Optional equipment or vehicle-specific equipment .,._ The section continues on t he next page. * ~ & Cross reference to a "WARNING"within a section. If a page number is indica t ed, the WARNING is located outs ide of the section. _8 WARNING Text with this symbol contains information about safety and how to reduce the risk of serious personal inju ry or death. (D Note Text with this symbol contains information about reducing the risk of damage to your vehicle. @ For the sake of the environment Text with this symbol contains info rmat ion on protecting the environment. 6 (D Tips Text with this symbol contains additional usefu l information. Cockpit Cockpit Controls overview overview at a glance Fig. 1 Cockpit : left section C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 0 :r <t Fig. 2 Cockpit: right sect ion 7 Cockpi t o v er v iew CDDoor hand le @ Side assist disp lay 104 ® Cent ral locking switch ....... ... 31 © ® ® Side assist button . . . .... . . . . . . Air vents with thumbwheel 104 Lever for: - Turn signals and high beams - High beam assistant ... . . . . . . - Active lane assist . . .... . . . . . . @ Inst rument cluster . . .... . . . . . . ® Windshield washer system lever @ Head-up Display . . . ........ @ Buttons/ indicator light for : ... - Start/Stop system . ... . . .. . . . - Extending/retracting the Infota inment display . . .... ... .. . - Electron ic Stabili zation Contro l (ESC) . . . . . .............. ... - Emergency flashers ......... . 44 44 102 ~ Buttons for : - Stee ring wheel adjustmen t . . . . - Stee ring wheel heat ing 8 ... 43 . . . 107 . 33 . . 37 . 59 135 - PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF .... . - Parking system .. . .......... . - Power sunshade (rear blind) .. . 23 7 lid ........ 12 11 86 . . . ... . .......... - Power windows . . . ......... - Child safety lock . . . . . . . . .... @ Memory funct ion buttons ...... @ Infotainment system display @ Buttons/indicator light for: 9 so 16 78 135 127 46 240 75 72 92 94 @ Butto n for switching the Head-up display on/off , adjust ing t he height . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 25 43 47 @ Buttons for: @ Leverfor: - Cruise control system .. . .... . - Adaptive cruise control .... . . . - All-weather lights - Night vision assist . ......... - Rear fog lights . . . . . . ....... @ Exterior mirror adjustment .... 230 78 ...... 271 @ Switch for luggage compartment @ Starting the engine if there is a malfunction @ Knee airbag . . . . . . . . .... Diagnos t ic Syst em (OBD II) ..... 43,47 @ Light switch @ Buttons for: (J) Multifunction steering wheel with : - Horn . b ag . . .. ... . . .. . . . - D.rivers' air - Driver informat ion system controls . . . . . . .......... . .... . - Audio/video, telephone, navigat ion and voice recognition cont rols . . . . . . . . . . .. ... . . .. . . . - Shift paddles and ~ button for ma nual shifting . . . ... . . .. . . . @ Instrument illumination . . . .... . @ Hood release . . . . . . . . . ....... . @ Dat a link connector for On Board 16 @ @) @ @ @ Glove compartment . . . ....... 36 114 49 . 63 . 230 Valet Parking function ........ . 40 Analog clock . . . . . . . . . . . . .... Climate contro l system ........ . . 16 Front passenger 's airbag ...... @) Infotainment system unit ..... . @ Selector lever (automatic transm ission) ... . . . . . . . . . . . ......... . @) Center conso le with cup holder .. @) Buttons for: - Electromechan ical park ing brake @ ISTART E N GINE STO P ! button (D 70 134 83 63 81 76 Tips Some the equipment listed here is only instal led in certa in models or is available as an option. Cockpit Instrument overview cluster Instrument cluster overview The instrument cluster is the central information center for the driver. Fig. 3 Instrume nt cluste r overview CDEng ine coolan t temperature @ Tachometer ® © . . . . . . .... gauge 9 ........ 44 Turn signals Disp lay with - Driver information system .... . - Indicator lights . .... . . . . . . . . ® Trip odometer reset button (D C) .... C0 ,.... "' .... "' 0 0 :r 12 17 Speedometer @ Fuel level . . . . . ... .... ..... 0 10 .... ... 10 . 10 Tips The instrument illumination for the need les and dia ls t ur ns on when the ignition is turned on and the lights are turned off. The illumina tion for the ga uges reduces automat ically and eventua lly turns off as brightness outside increases. This function reminds the drive r to t ur n t he low beams on at the appropriate time. Coolant temperature indicator The coo la nt tempe rature disp lay CD c>page 9, fig. 3 only func t ions when the ignit ion is switched o n. To preven t engine damage , please obse rve t he following notes abo ut t he temperatu re ranges. Cold range If only the LEDs at the bottom of the gauge t urn on, the eng ine has not reached operat ing temperature yet . Avoid high eng ine speeds, full acce le rat ing and heavy e ng ine loads. Normal range The eng ine has reached its operating temperature o nce the LEDs up to the center of the gauge tu rn on. If the . indica t or light in the display tu rns on, t he coolant temperat ure is too high ¢ page 20. <t 9 Cockpi t o v erv ie w CDNote - Auxiliary headlights and other accessories in front of the cooling-a ir intake impair the cooling effect of the coolant. This increases the risk of the engine overheat ing during high outside temperatures and heavy engine load. - The front spoiler also he lps to distr ibute cooling air correctly wh ile driving. If the spoiler is damaged, the cooling effect will be impaired and the risk of the engine overhea t ing will increase. See an authorized Audi dealer or aut horized Audi Service Facility for assistance . The fuel tank capacity of your vehicle is listed in the Techn ical Data section <=:> page 334 . CDNote Never dr ive until t he ta nk is comp letely empty. The irreg ular supply of fuel t hat res ults from that can cause engine m isfires . Uncombuste d fue l will then enter the exhaust system. This can cause overheating and damage to the catalyt ic converter. Odometer Tachometer The tachometer display s the engine speed in revolutions per minute (RPM). You shou ld shift to the next lowest gea r whe n the speed is below 1,500 RPM. The beginn ing of the red zone in t he t achometer indicates the maxim um permissible eng ine speed fo r all gears once the engine has been broken in and when it is warmed up to operating temperature . Before reaching this zone, you should shift into the next highest gear, select the D selector lever pos ition, or remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. CDNote The needle in the tachometer @ <=:> page 9, fig . 3 may only be in the red area of the gauge for a short t ime or the re is a risk of engine damage. The locat ion where the red zone begins varies depending on t he engine. @ For the sake of the environment Upshifting early helps you to save fuel and reduce operating noise. Fuel level The display ® only works when the ignition is switched on. If the fuel level drops below 4 gal (15 L), a red LED will light up and the ll) ind icator light will tur n on <=:> page 24 . The red LED will blink when the fuel level is very low. 10 Fig. 4 Instru ment cluster: odometer and reset button Upper odomet er The trip odometer shows the distance driven s ince it was last reset. It can be used to measure short distances. The t rip odometer can be reset to zero by press ing the ~ reset button. Lower odometer The lower odomete r shows the tota l distance that t he vehicle has driven. Malfunction indicator If there is a malfunction in the instr ument cluste r, DEF will appear in the trip odometer display. Have the malfu nction corrected as soon as possible. Cockpit Multifunction wheel steering Operating App lies to: vehicles with mu lt ifunction steer ing wheel You can operate various MMI functions and the driver information system, change the volume, and turn the voice recognition system* on and off with the multifunction steering wheel. Third tab b) overview Night vision assist* <=:> page 107 Fourth tab Radio/media ¢ page 13 Fifth tab Telephone* ¢page 14 Sixth tab Navigation* <=:> page 15 •l This tab is only visible if at least one indicat or ligh t o r messa ge is show n or if the correspo nding syste m is switched on . bl This tab is on ly vis ible if Night vision ass ist* has been act i· vated . @ Button ~ - Switching tabs: press the l<11>I button repeatedly until the desired tab is shown (for example, Radio). Fig. 5 Driver information system @ Button [i] - Opening/closing the submenu: press the~ button. ® Left thumbwheel - Selecting a function in a menu/list : tu rn the Fig. 6 Multifunct ion steer ing wheel operat ion Requirement: the ignition and the MMI must be switched on <=:>page 134. Operating the driver information system The driver information system contains multiple fig. 5 that display various information tabs © <=:> left thumbwheel to the desired function (for example, selecting a frequency). - Confirming a selection: press the left thumbwheel. - Zooming in/out on the map : when a map is disp layed, turn the left thumbwheel to zoom in and out on the map. - Quick scrolling through lists: turn the left thumbwheel quickly. Additional function buttons Applies to: vehicles wit h mult ifunct ion steeri ng wheel @. The following tabs are available, depending on vehicle equipment: First tab Second tab C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 0 :r Vehicle information, assistance systems a) Indicator lights, driver messages, speed warning system Fig. 7 Right s ide of mu ltifu nction steer ing whee l <t 11 Cockpit overview (D button (;;g - Repeating the last navigation prompt : press the ~ button. - Changing the voice guidance volume : turn the right thumbwheel guidance. up o r down dur ing voice @ button ~ - Switching the voice recognition system* on: press the 5J button briefly on the multifunc tion st eer ing whee l. Say the desired command after the Beep. - Switching the voice recognition system* off : press and hold the 5J butto n. Or: say the command Cancel. For more information abo ut the voice recog nit ion system, see ~ page 141. @ Right thumbwheel You can call up the fo llowing information in the on-board computer: - Dat e - Driving time from the short-te rm memory -Average consumption from the short -term memory - Average speed from the short-term memory - Distance driven from t he short-term memory - Current fuel consumption - Short-term memory overv iew - Long-te rm memory overv iew The short-term memory collects driv ing information from the time the ign ition is switched on until it is switched off . If you continue driving within two hours after switch ing the ignit ion off, the new values are included when ca lculating the current trip information. You can adjust the volume of an audio source or a system message (for example, from the voice recognit ion system*) whe n the sound is playing. Unlike the sho rt-t erm memory, the long-term memory is not erased automatically. You can select the time period for evaluating trip informa tion yourself . - Increasing or decreasing the volume: turn the Fuel consumption right thumbwheel up or down . - Muting or pausing : turn the right thumbwheel down. Or: press the right thumbwheel. - Un muting or resuming: turn the right thumbwheel up . Or: press the right thumbwheel. The current f uel consumption can be shown using a bar graph ¢ fig. 8. The average consumption stored in the short-term memory is also displayed . If the bar is green, your vehicle is saving fuel through one of the fo llowing functions : © Manual - Recuperation : electrical energy can be stored in See ¢ shifting page 86 . Driver information system On-board computer Fig. 8 Instrument cluster: fuel consump tio n display 12 the vehicle battery when t he vehicle is coast ing or dr iving down hill. The bar will move towa rd 0 . - Cylinder on demand system*: the engine automatically switches four cylinders (4 .0L TFSI) or six cylinders (6.3L FSI) off when low er power output is required and other conditions are met. This change is not noticeable to the passengers . The cylinders w ill switch on again when higher power output is needed . Cockpit Efficiency program Applies to: vehicles with efficiency prog ram overview Economy tips In certain situations, economy tips appear automatically for a short time in the efficiency pro gram ¢ fig. 10 . If you follow these economy tips, you can reduce your vehicle's fuel consumption. To turn an economy tip off immediately after it appears, press any button on the mu ltifunction steering wheel. (D Fig. 9 Instrument cluster : energy consumers Tips - If you erase the data in the eff icien cy program, the values in the on -board computer will also be reset. - Once you have turned an economy tip off, it w ill only appear again after you turn t he ignition on again. - The economy tips are not displayed in every instance, but rather in interva ls over a period of time . Radio Fig. 10 Instrument cluste r : economy t ip Applies to: vehicles with mult ifunction steering wheel The efficiency program can help you to use less fuel. It shows other consumers that are using fuel and economy tips give advice on how to drive efficiently. The efficiency program receives distance and consumption data from the on-board computer. To disp lay the efficiency program, open the Vehicle functions menu and se lect the Efficiency program menu item . Other consumers The Energy consumers view lists other equipment that is currently affecting fuel consump tion. The display shows up to three other equipment items @9 fig. 9. The equipment using the most power is listed first. If more than three items using power are sw itched on, the eq uipment that is currently using the most power is displayed. C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 A gauge @ also shows the current total consumpt ion of all oth er consumers. Fig. 11 Radio me nu Requirement: radio mode must be started 9 page 177 and the radio/media tab must be displayed. .,. Press the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel. - Selecting the frequency band: select and confi rm a frequency band. - Selecting a station from the station list: select and confirm a radio station. - Selecting a station from the presets list: select and confirm Presets and then select a radio station . 0 :r <t 13 Cockpit overview Media Applies to: vehicles with mu ltifunct ion steering wheel Requirement: a ce ll phone must be connected to the MMI ¢ page 146 and the telephone tab must be d isp layed ~ fig . 13 . .. Press t he ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel. Fig. 12 Media menu Requirement: a media drive must contain audio/ video files ¢ page 180 and the radio/media tab must be displayed . .. Playing an audio/video file : select and conf irm a f ile. .. Pausing / continuing playback : Press the right thumbwheel. To resume playback, press the right thumbwheel again. .. Restarting playback of an audio file : select t he file that is currently playing, if necessary. Press the left thumbwheel. The following functions are available when you press the ~ but ton: - Selecting a source: select and confirm a source such as the Jukebox . - Selecting a radio station using the source list: select and confirm a frequency band and then select a station from the station list. Telephone Appl ies to : vehicles with multifunct ion steering wheel and telep hone - Calling a contact in the directory : select and confirm Directory . Select and confirm a contact. - Calling a contact in a call list : select and confirm Dialed numbers , Missed calls or Received calls. Select and confirm a contact. Directory contacts: the driver information system on ly disp lays directory contacts that have a phone number stored . If several phone numbers are stored with a contact, the list of stored numbers is displayed first when the entry is selected . For more information about the displayed symbols, refer to ¢ page 150 . Caller information : the name, phone number or Unknown appears in the driver information sys tem display depending on if the caller has been stored in the directory and if the phone number has been transm itted. - Accepting a call : press the when there is an incoming - Ignoring a call : se lect and when there is an incoming left thumbwheel call. confirm Ignore call. - Ending a phone call : select and confirm End call. Functions during a phone call - Making an additional phone call* : se lect and > Directory or an enconfirm Hold >~button try in one of the call Lists. - Accepting an incoming call when there is an active call and a call on hold: select and confirm Replace . The active call is replaced with the incoming call . Additional functions: Mute *: if you select and confirm this function, the other pe rson on the phone cannot hear you. You can hear the other person. Fig. 13 Telephone menu 14 Holding / resuming a call : you can put a current ca ll on hold and res ume a ca ll. .,.. Cockpit overview Swap call*: you can alternate between two phone calls at the same time. One of the calls will be on hold. End call ends the active phone call. A call that was placed on hold stays on hold and can be taken off hold with Resume. Conference*: a call on hold and up to five active parties (depending on the network) can be added to a conference call. To make an additional call, put all participants in the current conference call on hold using Hold. If you press the~ button, you can make an additional calls from the directory or one of the call lists. Resume takes all parties off hold. (D Tips - The telephone functions can only be controlled with the multifunction steering wheel if the telephone equipment was installed at the factory. - The telephone and call options depend on the cell phone service provider and the cell phone . You can obtain more information from your cell phone service provider. - The call options depend on the cell phone and service provider. You can obtain more information from your cell phone service provider. - The Call waiting function must be activated in your cell phone and in the MMI to be alerted when there is an incoming call during an active call. Fig. 15 Turn display Requirement: a destination or a route plan must be entered ¢ page 165, route guidance must be started c:>page 170 and the navigation tab must be displayed. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the active route guidance will be displayed in the street view* in the driver information system: (D Total mileage to the destination or stopover @ Displaying an expressway, highway or main road as preparation for an upcoming change in direction @ Distance to the next maneuver @ The name of the expressway, highway or main road onto which you will be turning ® Additional information (on-board computer) @ Calculated arrival time 0 A bar graph appears when a direction arrow is displayed . The fewer bars are shown, the shorter the distance is until the turn. @ Direction arrow for the upcoming maneuver Navigation Applies to: vehicles with multifu nctio n steering wheel and naviga tio n system ® Current vehicle position The following functions are also available when route guidance is active: - Repeating the last navigation prompt: press the ~ button. - Changing the voice guidance volume: turn the right thumbwheel guidance. up or down during voice - Selecting Street view/Arrow view: press the§] button and select and confirm Street view or Arrow view. C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 Fig. 14 Lane display If you have not started route guidance, a compass will display in the navigat ion tab. 0 :r <t 15 Cockpit overview Head-up _& WARNING The route calculated by the navigation system is a recommendation for reaching your destination. Obey traffic lights, stopping restrictions, one-way streets, lane change restrictions, etc. An asterisk " *" in front of the street name indicates that the information about this street or this section of the route is not complete in the navigation data that the MMI contains . Obey traffic laws in one-way streets and pedestr ian zones. Time and date Display Applies to: vehicles with Head-up Display Fig. 17 Examp le : indicators in the Head-up Display display Fig. 18 Instrument panel: knob for the head-up disp lay Fig. 16 Center conso le: analog clock The date and time are shown in the instrument cluster display . There is also an analog clock in the center console <=:> fig. 16 . When you open the driver's door, the date and time appear in the display for 30 seconds. When the ignition is switched on, the time is always displayed in the status line © regardless of the current display. You can set the time on both clocks and the date (disp lay) in the Infotainment system <=:> page 204. The Head-up Display projects certain wa rnings or selected information from the assist syst ems* or navigation* on the windsh ield. The display appears within the driver's field of vision. Switching on/off .,.To switch the Head-up Display on or off, press the knob~ ¢ fig. 18. Adjusting the height The height of the display can be adjusted to the individ ual driver . .,.Make sure you are seated correctly <=:>page 208 . .,.Turn the knob~ to adjust the display. Settings in the Infotainment system .,.Select: the ICARI function button > (Car)* Systems contro l button > Driver assist > Head-up display > Head-up display contents or Display brightness. 16 Coc k pit o v e rv iew Display content In t he Infotainmen t system, you can specify which informa t ion should be displayed: This could be Navigation information* or Night vision assist *, for example. The display of certa in information and some of the red indicator lights cannot be hidden in the Infotainment system . Display brightness You can adjust the display brightness in the Infotainment system. The display brightness decreases automati cally as the amoun t of light decreases. The backg round brightness is adjusted with the instrument illumination ¢ page 47 . (D Note Indicator lights Description The indicato r lights in the inst rument cluster blink or t urn on. They indicate functions or malf unctions. co .... N ,..._ .... N 0 0 Overview ' Some indicator lights t urn on briefly as a function check when you switch the ignition on . These systems are marked with a./ in the fo llow ing tab les. If one of these ind icator lights does not turn on, there is a malfunct io n in that system. Red indicator light s ------------- USA models: Brake system./ ¢ page 19 Brake system ./ ¢ page 19 USA model s: Electrome chanica l par king brake ¢ page20 Tips - Sunglasses w ith polar izat ion filte rs a nd unfavorab le lighting conditions can have a negative effect on the display. - An optim um display depends on the seat position and the height adjustment of the head -up display. - A specia l windshield is needed for the head up disp lay function. - For information on cleaning, refer t o¢ table on page 308 . 0 Some indicato r lights in the display ca n d isp lay in severa l colors. Canada model s: To preven t scratches on the g lass cove ring t he head -up d isplay, do not place any objects in the projection opening . (D t ions, you can disp lay them one at a time using the thumbwheel. W it h some ind icator lights, messages may appear and wa rning signals may sound . The indicator lights and messages in the center of the displays may be replaced by other d isp lays. To show them again, se lect t he tab for ind icator lights and messages using the m ultif unction steering wheel ¢ page 12. If there are seve ral malfunc - Canadamodels: Electromechanica l parking brake ¢ page20 Cooling system ¢ page 20 Engine oil pressure ¢ page 21 Engine oil leve l ¢ page 21 Generator ¢page 21 Engine stop while driving ¢ page 21 Safety belt ./ ¢ page20 Electromechanical ¢ page 129 steering./ Steering lock ¢ page 21 Engine start system ¢ page 22 :c '<t 17 Cockpi t o v er v iew USA mo de ls: speed warning system ¢ page92 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Canada mo dels: speed warning system ¢ page92 Engine speed limitation ¢ page23 Adaptive cruise control*../ ¢ page 96 Air suspension ¢ page22 Night vision assist* ¢ page 108 Night vision assist* ¢ page 108 Yello w indicator light s ------------Electr onic Stab ili zat ion Control (ESC) ../ ¢ page22 Electronic Stabilizat ion Control (ESC)../ ¢ page22 USA models : Ant i-lock braking system (ABS)../ ¢ page22 Canada mod e ls: Anti-lock braking system (ABS) ../ ¢ page22 USA models: safety systems ¢ page23 Canada mod e ls : safety systems ¢ page23 Brake pads ¢ page23 Electromechanical parking brake ¢ page20 Tire pressure monitoring system ¢page 23 Engine oil level ¢page 21 Engine oil sensor ¢page24 Engine wa rm-up request ¢ page24 Battery charge ¢ page 21 Tank system ¢ page24 Washer flu id level ¢ page24 Windshield wipers ¢ page24 Remote contro l key ¢ page 77 Remote contro l key ¢ page 78 Battery in remo t e control key ¢page29 Bul b fa ilu re indicator ¢ page24 Rear fog lights ¢ page24 Headlight range control system ¢ page24 Adaptive light* ¢ page44 Light/rain sensor ¢ page 25 ¢ page 301 Active lane assist * ¢ page 103 Tire pressure mon itor ing system ¢ page 301 Transm ission ¢ page 87 Engine control (gasol ine engine) Transmission ¢page 87 ,I TPMS ,I ¢ page 23 18 ,I Coc k pit o v e rv iew Steering lock ¢ page 21 llll (USA model s) / . (Canada model s) Stop vehicle and che ck brake fl uid level Eng ine start system ¢ page22 Stop t he veh icle a nd check t he brake fl uid level. See an author ized Audi dealer or author ized Audi Service Facility for assistance if necessary. Brake booster <=> page23 Electromechanical power steering, dynam ic steering*./ <=> page 129 Air suspension ¢ poge22 Sport differe ntia l* ¢ poge 25 Other indicator lights ------------- Turn sig na ls ¢ poge25 USA mod e ls: Cruise contro l system <=> page 92 Canada model s : Cruise contro l system <=> page 92 Adaptive cruise contro l* ¢ page 96 Adaptive cruise contro l* ¢ page 96 Adaptive cruise contro l* ¢ page 96 Active lane assist* ¢ page 103 Start/Stop system* ¢ page 78 Start/Stop system* <=> page 78 High beam ass istant <=> poge44 High beams ¢ page 44, <=> page 44 0 co .... N ,..... .... 0 N 0 :c BRAKE /((J)) Brake system If th is ind icator light tu rns on, there is a malfunction in the brake system. 1111(USA mod e ls)ta (Canada model s) Brakes: malfunction! Please st op vehicle s afel y If the ABS ind icator light ll.JJJ (USA models) / ~ (Canada models), the ESC ind icator light and the brake system indicato r light (USA models) / . (Can ada models) all turn o n and t his message appea rs, then the ABS, ESC and braking d istribution are ma lfunctioning ¢ &. . Bl, 1111 Do not continue dr iving. See a n author ized Audi dealer or authori zed Audi Se rvice Facility for assistance ¢ &. . 1111(USA mod e ls) / . (Canada mod e ls) Parking brake: System fault! See owner's manual - If the ind icator light and the message appear when the vehicle is stationary or after switching the ignition on , check if yo u can re lease the pa rking bra ke. If you cannot release the pa rking brake , see your author ized Audi dealer or au t hor ized Audi Se rvice Facility. If you can release the parking brake and the message still appears, see an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the ma lfunction corrected. - If the indicator light and message appear while driving , the hill start ass ist or emergency braking function may be ma lfunctioning. It may not be possible to set the parking brake or release it once it has been set . Do not park you r vehicle on hills. See an authorized Audi dea le r or a uthori zed Audi Service Fac ility for assistance. App lies to: USA mode ls 1111 Ei1 If the and tur n on at the same time, the brake pads are worn out ¢ page 2 3 . .&, WARNING - Read and fo llow the warnings in ¢ page 2 71, Working in the engine comportment befo re opening t he hood a nd checking t he brake fluid level. '<t 19 Cockpi t o v er v iew - If t he brake system indicator light does not turn off or it t urns on while driv ing, the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low, and this increases the risk of an acc ident . Stop the vehicle a nd do not continue dr iving . See an author ized Audi dealer or aut ho rized Aud i Serv ice Facility fo r ass istance. - If the brake system indicator light turns on togethe r with the ABS and ESC ind icator light s, the ABS/ ESC regula t ing func t ion may be malfunctioning. Functions that stabilize the vehicle are no longer ava ilable . This could cause the vehicle to swerve, whic h increases the risk that the vehicle will slide. Do not continue driving. See an author ized Audi dealer or author ized Audi Service Facility for assistance. PARK/( ®) Electromechanical parking brake If the (USA models) / . (Canada models) indicator light t ur ns on, the park ing brake was set . (USA models) / . (Canada models) Cau· tion : Vehicle parked too steep If the indicator light blinks and the message appears, the re is not enough brak ing power to secure t he vehicle . The b rakes have overhea t ed. The ve hicle could roll away eve n on a small incline. ( USA models) /. (Canada models) Press brake pedal to release parking brake To re lease the parking brake, press the brake pedal and press the ~ button at the same time or start driv ing with hill start ass ist ¢ page 82 . Ill Parking brake! There is a malfunction in the park ing brake . Drive t o a n author ized Audi dealer or au t hor ized Audi Serv ice Facility immediately to have t he mal func tion correc t ed. (j) Tips For add it io na l information on the park ing page 81. brake, see c::> _L Cooling • system Swit ch off engine and check coolant level! The coolant level is too low . Do not continue dr iving and switch the eng ine page 2 77 . off. Check the coolant level c::> - If the coo lant level is too low , add coolant c::> page 2 78 . Only continue driving once the indicator light turns off. • Coolant temperature too high! Please let engine run with vehicle stationary Let the engine ru n at idle fo r a few min utes to cool off, until t he ind icator light t ur ns off . - If the ind icator light does not turn off , do not cont inue driving the veh icle. See an authorized Aud i dea le r or aut horized Audi Serv ice Facility for assistance. .&_WARNING - Never ope n t he hood if you can see or hear steam or coo lant escaping from the engine compa rtment. This increases the risk of burns. Wait until you no longer see o r hear steam or coolant escaping. - The engine compartment in any vehicle can be a dange rous a rea. Stop the engine and allow it to cool before working in the engine compa rtment . Always follow the information fo und in c::> page 2 71. (I) Note Do not continue driv ing if the . indicator light turns on - this increases the risk of engine damage . ~ Safety belt The . indicator light stays on unti l the dr iver 's and front passenge r's safety belts are faste ned . Above a certa in speed, the re will a lso be a warning tone. @ Tips For addi t ional info rmat ion on saf et y belts, see c::> page 218 . 20 Cockpit 0 Generator / vehicle battery • There is a malfunction in the alternator or the vehicle electrical system . Drive to an authori zed Aud i dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately . Because the vehicle battery is discharg ing, turn off all unnecessary electr ical equipment such as the radio . See your author ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility if the battery charge level is too low . - If the engine oil level is too low, add engine oil c::;.page 276. Only continue driving once the indicator light turns off. - If the engine oil level is correct and the indicator light still turns on, turn the engine off and do not cont inue driving. See an authorized Aud i dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance . (D If th is message turns off after a litt le while, the vehicle battery charged enough wh ile driving. If the message does not turn off, have an author ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility repair the malfunction. ~ . Engine oil level .P • Engine stopped: No power steering and brake support. Add engine oil immediately c::;.page 2 74. Add the displayed amount of oil immedia t ely c::;.page 2 74. There is a malfunction in the engine or in the fuel supp ly system . More force is needed to steer and brake the mov ing vehicle when the engine is stopped . If the vehicle is rolling, try to bring it to a stop off to the side from moving traffic. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Aud i Service Facility for assistance . co .... N ,..._ lease add oil immediately. l!IAdd oil max. x qt (l) You may continue driving ~ Engine 0 Tips The oil pressure warning is not an oil level indicator. Always check the oil level regularly . The start ing ability may be impaired . If the eng ine stops while dr iving, you will need to use more force to brake the vehicle. Thi s increases the risk of an accident. There will still be power steering if the ignition is switched on whi le th e vehicle is rolling and there is sufficient battery charge. Otherwise, you must use greater force when steering . Turn off engine and check oil level Stop the engine and do not cont inu e driving. Check the eng ine oil level c::;. page 276. (•) Low battery charge: Battery will be charged while driving _& WARNING Engine oil pressure <t::;r: • Electrical system: malfunction! Battery is not being charged overview - ~ - Steering lock • Do not drive vehicle: Steering defective There is a malfunction in the electron ic st eering lock. You cannot turn the ign ition on. Do not tow your vehicle because it cannot be stee red. See an author ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance . !II Steering lock: System fault Please contact dealer There is a ma lfunction in the electron ic steering lock. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immed iate ly to have the malfunction corrected. .... N 0 0 :c -<t 21 .,.. Cockpi t o v er v iew & WARNING Do not tow your veh icle when there is a malfunction in the electronic steering lock - this increases the risk of an accide nt. Drive to an aut horized Audi dealer or authori zed Audi Service Facility immediate ly to have the malfunction corrected. rl Air suspension: Vehicle is too low. Ground clearance limited ©- Engine start system • Engine start syst em fault . Please contact dealer Do not switch the ignit ion off because you may not be able to switch it on aga in. Drive to an authorized Audi dea ler or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunct ion corrected. 1111 Engine start system fault. Please contact dealer There is a malfunct ion in the eng ine start ing system . Drive to an aut horized Audi dealer or aut horized Audi Service Facility immedi at ely to have t he malfunct ion corre cted . ~ Air suspension The gro und clea rance is very low due t o a system malfunction . Wait unti l t he air sus pension system has restored normal ground clear ance. Otherwise, conditions such as an uneven road surface can lead to vehicle damage. . ;;.lu Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC) If the G) indicator light blinks while driving, the ESCor ASR (Anti-Slip Regulation) is act ively regulating. If the G) indicator light turns on, the system has switched the ESCoff. In th is case, you can switch the ignit ion off and then on to switch the ESCon again. The indicator light tu rns off whe n the system is functioning fully. II indicator light turns on, the ESCwas If the switched off us ing the lli] button o page 126. Stabilization control (ESC/ABS): malfunction! See owner's manual • Air suspension: System fault Driving slowly at maximum 35 mph is possible. There is a malfunction that can resul t in restrict ed driving stability . Drive to an aut horized Audi dea ler or authorize d Audi Service Facility immedi ately at a ma ximum speed of 3S mph (60 km/ h) to have the malfunction corrected. • Air suspension: Service mode. Vehicle can only be moved with restriction s Carefully drive to your author ized Audi dealer or author ized Audi Service Facility immed iate ly to have the service mode deactivated. rl Air suspension: System fault There is a system malfunct ion that can result in restricted driving stability or reduced gro und clearance. 22 If t he If.) indicator light and t he ABS indicat or light~ (USA mode ls) I [IJ (Canada models) turn on and this message appears, there is a malfunctio n in the ABSsystem or electro nic differentia l lock. This also causes the ESCto malfunction. The brakes still function with their normal power, but ABS is not active . Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediate ly to have the malfunction corrected . & WARNING If t he ... (USAmodels) • (Canada mod els) bra ke system indicator light turns on toget her with the ABSand ESCindicator light s, the ABSand ESC regulating fu nction may have malfunct ioned. Funct ions t hat stab ilize t he vehicle are no long er available. This could cause t he vehicle to swerve, which increases Cockpit Drive to an authori zed Audi dealer or aut horized Audi Service Facility immediate ly to have the brake pads checked. the risk that the vehicle will slide. Drive carefully to the nearest authori zed Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility and have the malfunction corrected. (D Applies to USA models The For addit ional information on ESCand ABS, refer to ¢ page 126. EPC Engine m If the II (USA mode ls)/ m(Canada models) inII dicator light turns on or blinks, there is a malfunction in a safety system such as the airbag or belt tensioner system . - & Brake booste r II Brake servo: limited functionality . You can continue driving. Contact workshop There is a malfunction in the brake boost er. The brake booster is availab le, but its effec t iveness is reduced. Braking behavior may be diffe rent from how it normally functions and t he brake pedal may vibrate. (0) Brake pads .... llJBrake pads! .... 0 The brake pads are wo rn. 0 co N ,..._ N 0 control (gasoline engine) There is an engine contro l ma lf unction. Immed iate ly dr ive slow ly to an author ized Audi dealer or aut hor ized Audi Service Facility to have t he mal f unct ion corre cted. Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) The malf unction indicator lamp (MIL) is part of the On Board Diagnostic system (OBD II). The c;ymbol tu rns on when the ignition is switched on and turns off again once the engine is started and ru nning at a steady idle speed . This indicates t hat the MIL is f unct ion ing cor rectly . ¢4 Have the malf unct ion in the safety systems inspected immediately. Otherwise, the re is a risk t hat the systems may not activate du ring a collision, which increases the risk of serio us injury or death. Drive to an aut horized Audi dealer or autho rized Audi Service Facility immediately to have t he malfunct ion corrected. light dealer a Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authori zed Audi Service Facility immedia t ely to have the malfunct ion corrected. WARNING t urns on togethe r wi t h the ~ Engine start system fault . Please contact Safety systems The (USA models)/ (Canada mode ls) indicator light monitors the safety systems. A llJindicat or light 1111indicator Tips ffl;/!f o v erview The ind icator light turns on if there is a malfunct ion in the engine electronics . See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili ty to have t he mal f unct ion cor rected . For additional informa t ion, see ¢ page 25 . The ind icator light can also turn on if the fuel filler cap is not closed correctly ¢ page 269 . !?'\ Engine speed limitation Applies to : vehicles with engine speed limitatio n ~ Maximum engine speed XXXX RPM The eng ine speed is automatically li mited to the RPM shown in the instrument cluster display. This protects the engi ne from overheat ing . The eng ine speed limitation deactivates once the engine is no longe r in the critical temperatu re range and you have released the accelerator pedal once. If the engine speed limitation was activated by an engine cont rol malfunction, the ~ indicator :c '<t 23 ..,. Cockpi t o v er v iew light also turns on. Make sure t hat the speed does not go above the speed displayed. Drive to an author ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Serv ice Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected . _ ,.,. Engine oil sensor • Oil leve l! Se nsor def ective The sensor to check the engine oil leve l has fa iled. Drive to an authori zed Aud i dea ler or author ized Audi Service Facility immediate ly to have the malfunction corrected . rEngine warm-up n request Please warm up e ngine Fuel has entered the engine oil, either from low outside temperatures or frequent short drives . Drive unt il the engine is warm so that the fuel in the eng ine oi l will evaporate . Avoid high engine speeds, full acce le rating and heavy eng ine loads when doing this. Fill the washer fluid fo r the windshie ld washer system and the headlight washer system when the ignit ion is switched off c:>page 281 . • Windshield wipers mWindshield wiper defecti ve There is a ma lfunction with the winds hield wipers . Drive t o a n authori zed Audi dealer or au t ho rized Audi Se rvice Facility immediate ly to have t he malfunction corrected. ~/0~Bulb failure indicator S:i If the indicator light turns on, a bulb has failed . The message indicates the location of the bulb. II indicator light also t urns on, then a rear If the fog light has failed. The position of the indicator light corresponds with the location on the vehicle. Vehicle light s : system fault! BilTank system There is a m al function in the headlights o r the light sw itch . liDPlease refuel If the indicator light t urns on for the first time and the mess age appears, t here ar e abo ut 4 gal lons (15 lite rs) of fue l left in t he tank. II] Fuel tank system malfunction! Please contact dealer There is a malfunction in the fue l tank system . Drive to an authorized Audi dea ler or authorized Aud i Serv ice Facility immediately to have the malfunct ion corrected. (D Tips More information on ref ue ling is avai lab le on page c:>page 268. Drive to an author ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Se rvice Facility immediate ly to have the malfunction correc t ed . _& WARNING - Light bulbs a re under pressure and can explode when bulbs are replaced, whic h increases the risk of injury. - With HI D headlights * (xenon -plus head lights), the high-vo ltage component must be handled correct ly. Otherwise, there is a risk of fatal inju ry. ~(i) Headlight range control system II Headlight range cont rol system: ~ Washer fluid level C Please refill washer flu id 24 - system fault! There is a ma lfunction in the headlight range contro l system, which may cause glare for other drivers. Coc k pit o v e rv iew Drive to an autho rized Aud i dea ler o r a uthorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunct ion corrected. fi.D Light/rain sensor El Automatic headl ights / automatic wipers : System fault The light/ra in sensor is malfunction ing. The low beams remain switched on at all times for safety reasons when the light switch is in the AUTO position. You can continue to turn the lights on and off using the light switch . You can still control all functions that are independent of the ra in sensor through the windshield w iper lever . Drive to an authori zed Aud i dea ler or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunct ion corrected. ¢ Q Turn signals B If t he . or indicator light blinks , the tu rn signals a re act ivated. If bot h ind icator lights are blinking, the emergency flashers are activated. If an ind icator light blinks tw ice as fast as usual, a turn signal bu lb has fai led. Carefully d rive to an autho rized Aud i dea le r or a uthorized Aud i Serv ice Facility immed iate ly to have t he ma lfunction co rrected . The indicator light does not indicate a malfunction if a turn signal on the trailer or on the vehicle fa ils in trailer towing mode. (D Tips For more information page 44. fer to <=> on the turn signa ls, re- On Board Diagnostic System (OBD) Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) !-: Sport differential Applies to: vehicles with sport differential Ill Sport differential : System fault There is a malfunction with the spo rt differentia l. Drive to an authorized Aud i dea le r o r a uthorized Aud i Service Facility immediately to have the malfunct ion corrected. Ill Sport differential : Overheating The transm ission temperature has increased s ignificantly due to the sporty driving manne r. Drive in a less sporty manner until the temperature returns to the normal range and the indic ator light switches of . & WARNING Cont act your authori zed Audi dealer or a qualified workshop if the sport differentia l is faulty or malfunctioning. The repair must be performed by trained personnel using the correct oil in order to ensure safety. 0 The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ¢,ijin the inst rument cluster is part of the On-Boa rd Diagnostic (OBD II) system . The wa rning/indicator light illuminates when the ignition is sw itched on and goes out after the engine starts and the idle has stabilized. This indicates that the MIL is working properly. If the lig ht does not go out after the eng ine is sta rted, or illuminates while you are driving, a malfunction may exist in the engine system. If the lig ht illuminates, the catalytic converter could be damaged. Cont inue driving with reduced power (avoiding s ustained high speeds and/o r rapid accelerations) and have the condit ion corrected. Contact your authori zed Aud i dea ler . If the light illum inates, the elect ronic speed limiter may also be malf unct ion ing. For more information c>page 26, Electronic speed limiter . An improperly closed fue l filler cap may also ca use the MIL light to illuminate ¢ page 269. co .... N ,..._ .... N 0 0 :c '<t 25 Cockpit overview failure and loss of control if the vehicle is operated at excessive speeds, your vehicle also has an electronic speed limiter. The electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from going faster than the tire speed rating. For more information On-Board Diagnostics ¢ page 290. If the engine control unit receives faulty vehicle road speed signals, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ¢'4willilluminate. If this occurs, contact the nearest authorized Audi dealer for ass istance. Fig. 19 Location of Data Link Connector (DLC) 58 On-Board Diagnostics monitors the components of your emission control system. Each monitored component in your engine system has been assigned a code . In case of a malfunction, the component will be identified and the fault stored as a code in the control module memory. The MIL light may also illuminate if there is a leak in the on-board fuel vapor recovery system . If the light illuminates after a refueling, stop the vehicle and make sure the fuel filler cap is properly closed ¢ page 269. In order to make an accurate diagnosis, the stored data can only be displayed using special diagnostic equipment (generic scan tool for OBD). In order to connect the special diagnostic equipment, push the plug into the Data Link Connector (DLC). The DLC is located to the right of the hood release ¢ fig. 19. Your authorized Audi dealer or a qualified service station can interpret the code and perform the necessary repair. A WARNING - Do not use the diagnostic connector for personal use. Incorrect usage can cause malfunctions, which can increase the risk of a collision! Electronic speed limiter Your vehicle may be factory equipped with tires that are rated for a maximum speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). This is less than the maximum speed of your vehicle . To reduce the risk of sudden tire 26 Your vehicle's top speed is electronically limited to 155 mph (250 km/h). If the engine control unit receives faulty vehicle roadspeed signals, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ¢'4willilluminate. If this occurs, contact the nearest authorized Audi dealer for assistance. A WARNING Always observe the posted speed limits and adjust your speed to suit prevailing road, traffic and weather conditions. Never drive your vehicle faster than the maximum speed rating of the ti res installed. - Opening Opening Central and closing locking Description You can lock and unlock the veh icle centrally . You have the following options: - Remote control key ¢ page 30 Sensors in the door handles* ¢ page 30 Lock cylinder in the driver's door ¢ page 32 Inter central locking switch ¢ page 31 Turn signals The turn signals flash tw ice when you un lock the vehicle and flash once when you lock the veh icle. If the vehicle is un locked and the flashing continues, then - one of the doors, the luggage compartment or the hood is open. - the ignition is st ill switched on . - the selector lever is not in the P position lid Auto Lock The Auto Lock function locks all doors and the luggage compartment lid once the speed has exceeded approximately 15 km/h. The vehicle can be unlocked if the opening function in the centra l locking system switch is used or one of the door handles is pulled. The Auto Lock function can be switched on and off in the Infotainment system ¢ page 32 . In the event of a crash with airbag deployment, the doors will also automatically unlock to allow access to the vehicle. Selective door unlocking The doo rs and luggage compartment lid will lock when they close. You can set in the Infotainment system whether only the driver 's door or the entire vehicle should be unlocked when unlocking ¢page 32. Unintentionally locking yourself out 0 co .... ~ .... N The following cond itions prevent you from locking your remote control key in the vehicle: and closing - If the driver's door is open, the vehicle cannot be locked by pressing the ~ button on the remote contro l key or touching the locking sensor on a door. - When locking using the ~ button in the central locking switch, the vehicle will not lock if a door is open ¢ page 31. - If the most recently used convenience key* is in the luggage compartment, the luggage compartment lid automatically unlocks again after closing it ¢ page 33 . The emergency flashers blink four times. Do not lock your vehicle with the remote control key or convenience key* until all doors and the luggage compartment lid are closed . This helps to prevent you from locking yourself out acc identally . Closing aid on the doors* The vehicle doors are equipped with closing aids. When closing a door, you only have to let it fall lightly into the latch . It then closes automatically ¢ &_. .&, WARNING '"--- - - When you lock your vehicle from outs ide, nobody - espec ially children - should rema in inside the vehicle. Remember, when you lock the vehicle from the outside the windows cannot be opened from the inside . - When you leave the vehicle, always take the ignition key with you. This will prevent passengers (children, for examp le) from accidentally being locked in the vehicle should they accidentally press the power locking switch in the doors. - Do not leave children ins ide the vehicle unsupervised. In an emergency it would be impossible to open the doors from the outside without the key. - Applies to vehicles with power side door closer*: - When closing a door, make sure nothing can interfere with the door. This could cause serious personal injury. 0 0 :c '<t 27 Opening and c lo s i n g - You can stop the door from closing at any time by pulling on the inside or outside door handle. @ Tips - Do not leave valuables unattended in the vehicle . A locked vehicle is not a safe! - The LED in the driver's door rail blinks when you lock the vehicle . If the LEDlights up for approximately 30 seconds after locking, there is a malfunction in the central locking system. Have the problem corrected by an a uthorized Audi dea ler or authorized Audi Service Facility . Number of keys You can chec k t he number of keys assigned to your vehicle in the Infota inment system. Select : the ICAR Ifunction button > Car systems control button > Servicing & checks > Programmed keys. This way, you can make sure that you have all the keys when purchasing a used vehicle. Electronic immobiliz er The immobilizer prevents unauthorized the vehicle . use of Under certai n circumstances, t he vehicle may not be a ble t o start if t here is a key from a d ifferen t vehicle manufacturer on the key chain. Data in the master key Key set When dr iving, service and ma intenance-re levant da t a is cont inuo us ly st o red in you r remo t e contro l key . Your Audi se rvice advisor can read out th is data and tell you abo ut t he work your vehicle needs . This applies also to vehicles with a con venience key*. Personal convenience settings Fig. 2 0 Your vehicle key set @ Remote control key with integrated mechanical key You can unlock and lock your vehicle w ith the re mote cont rol key. A mechanical key is integrated in the remote con tr ol key ~ page 29 . @ Separate mechanical key This key is not intended for constant use. It should only be used in an emergency . Do not carry it on your key ring and do not store it in the vehicle . Replacing a key If a key is lost, see an authorized Audi dealer or author ized Audi Service Facility. Have th is key deactivated . It is impo rtant to bring a ll keys with you . If a key is lost, you should report it to your insurance company. 28 If t wo peo ple use one vehicle, it is recommended that each person alw ays uses their own remote contro l key. When the ignit ion is turned off or when the vehicle is locked, personal convenience settings for the follow ing systems are stored and ass igned to the remote master key. - Climate cont rol system Central locking Window and rea r shade* Interior lighting* Memory function Park ing system * Adaptive cruise control * Act ive la ne assist* - Side assist* Drive se lect Night vision assist* Steering wheel heating* The stored settings are a utomat ica lly recalled when you unlock the vehicle, open the doo rs or turn on the ignition. II> Open in g and closing ,&_ WARNING Always take the veh icle key with you when leaving the vehicle, even for a short period of time . This applies particularly when children remain in the vehicle. Otherwise the children could start the engine or operate electrical equipment such as power windows . (D LED and battery in the remote control key - Tips - The operation of the remote control key can be temporarily disrupted by interference from transmitters in the vicinity of the vehicle work ing in the same frequency range (such as a cell phone or radio equipment). - Using the mechanical key, you can: - Locking/unlocking the g love compartment opage 63. - Manually lock/unlock the vehicle opage 32 . - Mechanically lock the doors o page 32. - Unlock the luggage compartment lid using the emergency re lease o page 36. - For an explanation on conformity with the FCCregulations in the United States and the Industry Canada regulations, see opage339. @ Tips Removing the integrated mechani cal key Fig. 22 Remote control key: removing the ba ttery holder LED in the remote control key The LED@ informs you about the function of the remote control key. .. If you press a button briefly, the LEDblinks once . .. If the LEDdoes not blink, the remote control indicator light and key battery is dead. The the message Please change key battery appear . Replace the battery in the remote control key. Ill Replacing the remote control key battery .. Remove the mechanical key o page 29. .. Press the release button ® on the battery holder and pull the battery holder out of the remote control key in the d irect ion of the arrow at the same time . .. Insert the new battery with the"+ " symbol facing down . .. Slide the battery holder carefully into the remote contro l key . .. Insert the mechanical key. @) For the sake of the environment Discharged batteries must be disposed of using methods that will not harm the environment. Do not d ispose of them in household trash. Fig. 21 Remote contro l maste r key: remov ing the mechanical key C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 .. Press the release button @ o fig. 21. .. Pull the mechan ical key @ out of the remote contro l key. @ Tips The replacement battery must meet the same specificat ions as the origina l battery in the remote control key. 0 :r <t 29 Opening and c lo s i n g Unlocking and locking with the remote control tried to start the engine or open a door, the alarm would be triggered. If this happens, press the m unlock button. - Only use the pan ic function in an emergency. Unlocking and locking with the convenience key Applies to: vehicles with convenience key Fig. 23 Remot e cont rol key: butt on prog ram m ing • To unlock the vehicle, press the@ button o fig. 23. • To lock the vehicle, press the ~ button one time ¢ _&.. • To unlock the luggage compartment lid, press th e ~ button bri efly. • To trigge r the ala rm , press the IPANIC Ibutton. The vehicle horn and emergency flashers are activated. • To turn the alarm off , press the red IPANIC I button again . The doors and luggage compartment lid can be unlocked/locked wi thout using the remo te control key. ~ .. N 0 ± m Fig. 2 4 Door handle: locking with the convenie nce key Unlocking the vehicle If the vehicle is unlocked and none of the doo rs, the rear lid or hood are opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle locks aga in automatically . This feature prevents the vehicle from being accidentally left unlocked over a long per iod of t ime . • Grip the door hand le. The door unlocks auto matically . • Pull the door hand le to open the door . The settings in the Infotainment system determ ine if the entire vehicle or only one of the doors is unlocked when unlocking the vehicle ¢ page 32. Requirement : the se lector lever must be in P. .&_WARNING Read and heed al l WARNINGS ¢ .&. in Description on page 27. {D) Tips - Only use the remote control key when you a re w ithin view of the vehicle. - The vehicle can only be locked when theselector lever is in the P posit ion. - Do not use the remote control when you are inside the vehicle. Otherwise, you could unintent ionally lock the vehicle. If you then 30 Locking th e vehicle • To lock the vehicle, close the door and touch the sensor in the door handle once ¢ fig. 24, o &_. Do not hold the door handle while doing this . You can unlock/lock the veh icle at every door . The remote control key cannot be more than approximately 4 feet (1.5 meters) away from the door handle or the luggage compartment. It makes no d ifference whether the master key is in your jacket poc ket or in you r briefcase, for example. The door cannot be opened for a brief period d irectly after locking it. This way you have the oppor t uni ty to check if the doors locked cor rectly. "' Open in g and closing The settings in the Infotainment system determine if the entire vehicle or only one of th e doors is unlocked when unlocking the vehicle ¢ page 32. A WARNING Read and heed all WARNINGS ¢ .& in Description on page 2 7. @ Tips If your vehicle is left standing for a long period of time, note the following: - The proximity sensor switches off after a few days to save energy. You then have to pull once on the door handle to unlock the vehicle and a second t ime to open it. - The energy management system gradually turns off unnecessary convenience functions to prevent the vehicle battery from draining and to mainta in the vehicle's ab ility to start for as long as possible. You may not be able to unlock your vehicle using the convenience key. - For an explanation on conformity with the FCCregulations in the United States and the Industry Canada regulations, see ¢ page 339 . Central locking switch Fig. 26 Rear door s : central locking switch "' To lock the vehicle, press the@ button ¢ fig . 25 or ¢ fig . 26, ¢ &_. "' To unlock the vehicle , press the crlbutton. When locking the vehicle with the central locking switch, the following applies: - Opening the door and the luggage compartment lid from the outside is not possible (for secur ity reasons, such as when stopped at a light) . - The LEDin the central locking switch turns on when all doors are closed and locked . - Front doors: you can open the doors individually from the inside by pulling the door handle . - Rear doors: to unlock the doors, pull on the door ha ndle one time . To open the doors, pull on the door handle again . - In the event of a crash with airbag deployment, the doors unlock automat ically to allow access to the vehicle. A Fig. 25 Driver's door: cent ral locking switc h C) .... WARNING - The central locking switch also works when the ignition is switched off and automaticalbut ly locks the entire vehicle when the CD ton is pressed. - The central locking switch is inoperative when the vehicle is locked from the outside. - Locked doors make it more difficult for emergency workers to get into the vehicle, which puts lives at risk. Do not leave anyone behind in the vehicle, especially children . @ Tips C0 "' ""'.... 0 0 :r Your vehicle locks automatically when it reaches a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) (Auto Lock) ¢ page 27 . You can unlock the vehicle <t 31 Opening and closing again using the ing switch. cabutton in the central lock- Setting the central locking system Emergency locking and unlocking the doors Each door must be locked separately if the power locking system fails . <O ~ In the Infotainment system, you can set which doors the central locking system will unlock. 0 0 t!, m .., .- Select : the ICARI function button> Car systems control button > Vehicle settings > (Central locking) . Lock when driving - if you select On, the entire vehicle will lock automatically when the speed reaches 9 mph (15 km/h). All of the doors and the luggage compa rtment lid lock. Fig. 27 Driver's door: door lock cylinder Central locking Unlock doors - you can set which doors are un - locked : - If you select All and press the ffibutton one time on the remote control key, all of the doors and the luggage compartment will unlock. - If you select Driver and then press the ffibutton one time on the remote control key, only the driver's door will unlock . In veh icles with a convenience key, on ly the door whose handle you pull will unlock. If you press the@ button twice , the entire veh icle will unlock. If you press the always lock. rnbutton, the ent ire vehicle will Lock exterior trunk handle - if you select On, open ing the luggage compartment lid by the handle is disab led. In th is case, the luggage compartment lid can be opened with the~ button on the remote control key o r with the~ button in t he dr iver's door. In veh icles with a convenience key*, you can still ope n the luggage compartment lid using the handle if an authorized remote control key is near the proximity sensor *. Fig. 28 Door: emergency locking If the central locking system malfunctions, you can un lock/lock the doors separately using the mechanica l key. Unlocking/locking mechanical key the driver's door with the .- Remove the integrated mechanical key c::> page 29 or use the separate mechanica l key. .- To unlock the driver's door, turn the key to the open position @ c::>fig. 2 7. .- To lock the driver's doo r, se lect the ® posit ion and turn the key once to the closing position @ c::> ,&.. Locking the front passenger's door/rear doors with the mechanical key Fold mirrors* - if you select On, the exterior rear - view mirrors fold in automatically when you press button on the remote control key or t ouch the the sensor* in the hand le . An emergency lock is located on the front end of the front passenger's door and the rear doors . It is only visible when t he doo r is open. Tone when locking - if you select On, a to ne will .- Remove the integrated mechan ical key c::> page 29 or use the separate mechanical key. ..,. .- Pull the cap out of the open ing c::>fig . 28 . rn sound when you lock the vehicle. 32 Open in g and closing 0 .. Inse rt the key in the inside slot and turn it all the way to the right (right door) or left (left door). Once the front passenger's door/rear doors close, it is no longer possible to open them from the outside . The door can be opened from the inside by pull ing the door handle . If the child safety lock in one of the rear doors is activated , you must first pull the door handle from the inside . Then you can open the door from the outside . .,&.WARNING Read and heed all WARNINGS c:>&. in Description on page 27. Anti-theft alarm system If the anti-theft alarm system detects a vehicle break-in, audio and visual warning signals are triggered. The anti-theft alarm system is activated when the vehicle is locked as usual. It switches off when the vehicle is unlocked. If the alarm is triggered, it w ill shut off automatically after a ce rt ain amount of time. Switch the ignition on or press the ~ button on the remote control key to turn off the alarm. Luggage Lid compartment Opening/closing the luggage compartment lid Fig. 29 Driver's door : unloc king th e lug ga ge compar tment lid C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 0 N 9 ~ Cl) fffD AU£,,. Fig. 30 Handle in t he rea r lid Opening the luggage compartment lid .. Briefly press the~ button on the remote con trol key. The rear lid will unlock . .. Press the ~ button on the remote control key for at least several seconds to open the luggage compar t ment lid. Or .. Pull the button~ in the driver's door c:>fig. 29 briefly . Or .. Press the hand le in the luggage compartment fig . 30 . lid <=> Closing the luggage compartment lid .. Pull down the luggage compartment lid at the grip and let it close using a gent le push c:>,A . The sett ings in the Infotainment system deter mine if the luggage compartment lid can be opened using the handle ¢ page 32. A WARNING - After closing the luggage compartment lid, make sure that it is latched. Otherwise the luggage compartment lid could open suddenly when driving, which increases the risk of an acc ident. - Never drive with the luggage compartment lid ajar or open, because poisonous gases can enter the vehicle interior and create the risk of asphyx iation . - Never leave your veh icle unattended when the luggage compartment lid is open. A child cou ld climb into the vehicle through the luggage compartment. If the luggage compartment lid was then closed, the child wou ld be trapped in the vehicle and unab le to escape . To reduce the risk of injury, do not allow children to play in or around the :r <t 33 Opening and closing vehicle. Always keep the luggage compartment lid and the doors closed when the vehicle is not in use. - Always make sure no one is in the luggage compartment lid's range of motion when it is closing, especially near the hinges . Fingers or hands could be pinched . (D Tips When the vehicle is locked, the luggage compartment lid can be unlocked separately by pressing the e:5 button on the remote control key. The luggage compartment lid locks auto matically when it is closed again . • Press and hold the button l.ol on the remote control key until the luggage compartment lid is closed (vehicles with convenience key*) c::> Or • Press the [@]button c::>fig. 31 in the luggage compartment lid (vehicles with convenience key*) . The remote control key must not be more than approximately 4 ft (1.5 m) away from the luggage compartment and it must not be inside the vehicle. The luggage compartment lid will automatically close and lock. The vehicle locks ~ ,& . Or A. • Press the handle in the luggage compartment lid . The luggage compartment lid will go down automatically and close c::>,& . App lies to: vehicles with automat ic luggage compar t me nt lid The opening/closing ately if: The luggage compartment lid can be opened and closed automatically . - You pull/release door, or Automatic luggage compartment lid process will stop immedi- the l=Ibutton in the driver's - You press/release the l=Ibutton on the remote control key (vehicles with convenience key*), or • - -- c:=.:S 5l - - You press the I=! or {f) button (vehicles with convenience key*) in the luggage compartment lid, or - You push the handle in the luggage compartment lid, or - You press against the luggage compartment against the direction it is moving, or Fig. 31 Luggage co mpa rtment lid: @ clos ing butt on, @ lock button (vehicles with convenience key•) lid - When something blocks the luggage compart ment lid or makes it difficult for the lid to move. Opening the luggage compartment lid If you press the handle or one of the ~ or [@]but- • Press and hold the ~ button on the remote con tr ol key for at least one second . Or • Pull the l.ol button in the driver 's door briefly ~ page 33, fig . 29 . Or • Press the handle in the luggage compartment page 33, fig. 30 . lid c::> tons (vehicles with convenience key*) now, the luggage compartment lid will either open or close, depending on what angle it is at . Closing the luggage compartment lid • Pull the button l.ol in the driver's door until the luggage compartment lid is closed c::>,&.. Or • Press the la! button in the luggage compartment lid c::>fig. 31. The luggage compartment lid will go down automatically and close c::>,& . Or 34 _& WARNING - Read and follow all WARNINGS c::> .&.in Description on page 2 7. - After closing the luggage compartment lid, always pull up on it to make sure that it is properly closed. Otherwise it could open suddenly when the vehicle is moving. - To help prevent poisonous exhaust gas from being drawn into the vehicle, always keep the luggage compartment lid closed while IJlo, Op enin g an d cl os in g driving. Never transport objects larger than those which fit completely into the luggage area, because then the luggage compartment lid cannot be fully closed . - Never leave your vehicle unattended especially w ith the luggage compartment lid left open . A child could crawl into the car through the luggage compartment and pull the lid shut, becoming t rapped and unable to get out. To reduce the risk of personal injury, never let children play in or around your vehicle. Always keep the luggage compartment lid as well as the vehicle doors closed when not in use. - Never close the luggage compartment lid inattentively or without checking first. Although the clos ing force of the luggage compartment lid is limited, you can st ill seriously injure yourself or others. -Always ensure that no one is within range of the luggage compartment lid when it is moving, in part icular close to the hinges and the upper and lower edges - fi ngers or hands can be pinched . - Never try to interfere w ith the luggage compartment lid or help it when it is being opened or closed automatically. @ C) .... C0 ,.... "' Tips - The settings in the Infotainment system determi ne if the luggage compartment lid ca n be opened us ing the handle ~ page 32. - When the vehicle is locked, the luggage compartment lid can be unlocked separately by pressing the l<=>Ibut ton on the remote contro l key. The luggage compa rtment lid locks automatically when it is closed again. - You can close the luggage compartment lid us ing the remo t e control key (vehicles with convenience key*) up to a d ista nce of ap prox ima t ely 9 feet (3 m). - The luggage comp art me nt lid can be ope rated manually if the veh icle battery is low. It is necessary to use more force when doing th is . Move the lid slowly to reduce the amount of force needed. Opening the luggage compartment lid with foot motion activation (kicking movement ) Applies to: vehicles with convenience key and sensor-controlled luggage compartment lid Fig. 32 Rear of the vehicle: foot movement Requirements : you must be carrying your vehicle key with you . You must be standing at the center behind the luggage compartment lid . The dis tance to the rear of the veh icle must be at least 8 in (20 cm). The ignition must be sw itched off. Make sure you have f irm footing . "' Move your foot back and forth below t he bumper ~ fig. 32 . Do not touch the bumpe r. Once the syst em recogn izes the movement , the luggage compa rt ment lid will ope n. The luggage compartment lid will on ly open if you make the movement as described . This prevents the luggage compa rtment lid from open ing due to similar movements, s uch as when you walk betwee n the rea r of the vehicle and your garage door. General information In some situ at ions, the funct io n may be lim ited or tempora rily unavailable . This may happen if: - the luggage compartment lid was closed imme diately before . - you park close to a hedge and the branches move back and forth under the veh icle for a long per iod of t ime . -you clean your veh icle, for example with a pressure washer or in a ca r wash . - there is heavy ra in . - the bumper is very dirty, for example after dr iving on salt-covered roads. ..,. .... "' 0 0 :r <t 35 Opening and c lo s i n g - there is interference to the radio signal from the vehicle key, such as from cell phones or remote controls. Opening the luggage compartment lid from the inside in an emergency Emergency unlocking the luggage compartment lid In the event that the central locking system malfunctions , the luggage compartment lid can be opened at the lock cylinder. ~ N CX) 0 ± .,. "' Fig. 34 Inne r luggage compart m ent lid: leve r .,. Pull the lever downward¢ fig. 34 . AUD.a. (D Tips Never close t he luggage compartment ing the emergency handle. Fig. 33 Luggage compartment lid: mechanica l key in lock cylinder Child safety lid us- lock • Remove the integrated mechanical key <=> page 29 or use the separate mechanical key. • Insert the mechanical key in the lock cylinder as pictu red . .,.Turn the key approximate ly 45° t o the right <=> fig. 33. The luggage compartment lid opens. The key cannot be pulled out in the released pos ition . _& WARNING - After closing the luggage compar t me nt lid, ma ke sure t ha t it is lat ched. The lugg age compartment lid could otherwise open s uddenly while driving, even if the lock cylinder is closed. This would increase the risk of an acc ident. - Never drive with the luggage compartment lid ajar or open, because poisonous gases can enter the vehicle interior and create the risk of asphyxiation. Fig. 35 Sect ion of dr iver 's door: cont rols Fig . 36 Rear door: child safety lock Vehicles w ith [!] button .,.To activate/deactivate the inner door hand le and the power window switch for the respective rear door, press the left/right @ button in the ..,_ 36 Open in g and closing driver's door (;} =~fig. 35. The indicator light in the button turns on/blinks. .. To activate/deactivate the child safety lock on both sides, you must press the III buttons one after the other. Power window Controls The driver can control all power windows. CD N M 0 Vehicles with ~ button :::, CD .. To deactivate/activate the power window switch in the rear doors, press the ~ button in the driver's door @ q fig . 35. The indicator light in the button turns on/blinks . .. To also deactivate/activate the inner door handle, open the respective rear door and turn the key switch w ith the mechanical key in the d irect ion of the arrow or opposite the d irection of the arrow q fig. 36. The follow ing funct ions are also turned off when the child safety lock is activated : - The buttons for the sun shade* in the rear window . - The buttons for the power sun shades* in the side windows. - The button for the front passenger seat adjustment* (for vehicles with the III button when the child safety lock is activated for the rear door on the passenger's side). _&.WARNING Always take the veh icle key with you when leaving the vehicle, even for a sho rt pe riod of time. This applies pa rt icular ly when children remain in th e vehicle. Otherwise children cou ld start the engine or operate electrical equipment (such as power windows), which increases the risk of an accident. C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 m Fig. 37 Sect ion of driver's door: controls All power window switches are equipped with a two -stage function: Opening and closing the windows .,.To open or close the window completely, press the switch down or pull the switch up brief ly to the second level. The operat ion will stop if the sw itch is pressed/pulled again. .. To select a position in between opened and closed, press/pull the switch to the first level until the des ired window position is reached . Power window switches CDLeft front door @ Right front door ® Left rear door @ Right rear door WARNING -A - Always take the vehicle key with you when - leav ing the vehicle, even for a short period of time. This applies part icularly when children remain in the vehicle. Otherwise the children could start the engine or operate electrical equipment such as power windows, which increases the risk of injury. The power windows continue to function until the dr iver's door or front passenger's door has been opened. - Pay careful attention when closing the windows. Pinching could cause serious injuries . 0 :r <t 37 Opening and c lo s i n g - When locking the vehicle from outside, the vehicle must be unoccupied since the windows can no longer be opened in an emergency. (D Tips - Using switches @ and @ , the driver can also operate the power sun shades* in the side windows. - After turning the ignition off you can still open and close the windows for approximately 10 minutes . The power windows do not switch off until the driver's door or front passenger's door has been opened . Correcting power window malfunctions You can reactivate the one-touch up/down function if it malfunctions. • Pull the power window switch up until the window is comp letely raised. • Release the switch and pull it up again for at least one second. Sunroof Operation Applies to: vehicles with slid ing/tilting sunroof @ Tilting / sliding • To open the sunroof complete ly, slide the button back to just before the second level. • To close the sunroof complete ly, slide the button forward briefly to the second level ¢ .&_. • To select a partially open position, slide the button forward/back to the first level until the desired posit ion is reached. A wind deflector integrated into the sliding/tilting sunroof adapts automatically to the speed and sunroof position. This reduces wind noise to a minimum in all sunroof posit ions. You can still operate the sliding/tilting sunroof for about 10 minutes after the ignit ion is switched off. The switch is deactivated once the driver's or front passenger's door is opened. Sunshade The sun shade opens automatica lly when sliding the roof open. Vehicles with a glass panel sunroof : the sun shade can be opened and closed by hand when the sunroof is closed. Vehicles with a solar panel sunroof*: t he closed sunshade opens automatica lly when the sunroof opens. 11. WARNING Pay careful attention when closing the slid ing/tilting sunroof - otherwise serious injury could result! Always take the ignition key w ith you when leaving the vehicle. (D Fig. 38 Sect ion of head line r: sunroof button @ Tilting / sliding • To tilt the sunroof comp letely, press the button up briefly to the second level. • To close the sunroof comp letely, pull t he button down briefly to the second level ¢ .&_. • To select an intermediate position, press/pull the switch to the first level until the desired position is reached. 38 Note Always close your sliding/tilting sunroof when leaving yo ur vehicle. Rain can cause damage to the interior equipment of your vehicle, particular ly the electronic equipment. (D Tips - For information on the solar roof *, refer to ¢ page 72. - The sunroof w ill only open down to -20 °( (-4°F). - Open ing and closing Sliding/tilting sunroof emergency closing Applies to: vehicles with sliding/tilting sunroof @ Sliding the front segment of the roof If the sun roof detects an object in its path when it is clos ing, it will open ag ain au t omati cally. In this case, you can close the roof with the power emergency closing function. .. To open th e su nro of com plete ly, slide the button ~ tow ar d t he rear briefly to t he second level. .. To close the sun roof completely, slide the ~ button forward briefly to the second level .. Wit hin five seconds aft e r the su nroof opens automat ically, pull the swit ch unt il t he roof closes . .. To select a partially open pos ition, slide the~ button forwa rd/back t o the first level unti l t he desi red posit ion is reached . Panorama Tilting the rear segment of the roof glass roof Opening/closing the roof Applies to: vehicles with panorama glass roof Fig. 3 9 Section of the fro nt headlin e r: pa norama g lass roof button ¢ _&.. The rear segment of t he roof can be operated both from the cockpit and from the rear seat . .. To t ilt the sun roof complete ly, press the l-"'I button in the rear doo r briefly to the second level ¢ fig . 40 . .. To close the sunroof completely, pull the ~ button up briefly to the second level c:>,& . .. To set a position between opened and closed, press/pu ll the~ button up to the first level until the des ired posi ti on is reach ed . Or .. To operate t he roof fro m t he cockpit, press the !REARMODE!but to n ¢ fig . 39 . You can now open/close t he rear segment of the roof using the ~ button in t he headliner . The LED in t he front of the headliner turns on when the rear roof segment is t ilted . After the ignition is sw itche d off, you can still operate the panoramic sun roof for about 10 m inutes. The switch is deactivated once the dr iver's or front passenger's doo r is opened. A Fig. 40 Rear doo r: pa noram ic sunroo f button @ Tilting the front segment of the roof C) .... C0 .. To tilt the sunroof completely, press the~ button up br iefly to the second level. .. To close the sunroof comp lete ly, pull t he la.I bu tton down b rief ly to t he second level q ,& . .. To set a pos ition between opened and closed, press/pull the l-"'Ibu tto n up to the first level until the des ired position is reached . WARNING Be caref ul when closing the panoramic su nroof - oth erwise ser ious inj ury could resul t ! Switch off t he ignit ion when exit ing the veh icle . (D Note Always close the pano rama g lass roof when leav ing your vehicle . Ra in ca n cause damage to the inte rior equip ment of your ve hicle, particu larly t he electron ic eq uipme nt . "' ""'.... 0 0 :r <t 39 .,,. Opening @ and c lo s i n g Roof segments/sun shade emergency closing Tips - The panorama roof will on ly open down to -4°F (-20°). - To prevent both roof segments from colliding with one another, you do not need to Applies to: vehicles with pano rama glass roof If the roo f segment or sun shade detects an ob ject in its path when it is closing, it will open again automatically . In this case, you can then close it wit h the power emergency closing func tion. - tilt the rear roof segment if the front roof segment is already open. - close the front roof segment if the rear roof segment is already tilted. • Withi n five seconds after the roof segment or sun shade opens automat ically, pull the switch until it closes. Opening/closing the sun shade Applies to: veh icles with panorama glass roof Valet © Front sun shade parking function Applies to : vehicles with valet parking function • To open the sun shade completely, slide the ~ button backward to the second level ¢ page 39, fig. 39 . • To close the sun shade completely, slide the ~ button forward briefly to t he second level. ...l • To se lect a partially open position, slide the l:c button to the first level until the sun shade has reached the desired position. The valet parking function protects the luggage compartment from unauthorized access. © Rear sun shade • To open the sun shade comple t ely, press the li,.I button in the rear door briefly down to the second leve l 9 page 39, fig . 40 . • To close the sun shade completely, pull the ~ button up to the second level ¢ .&_. • To se lect a partially open position, press/pull the~ button to the first level until the desired pos ition is reached . Or • To ope rate the sun shade from the cockp it, press the IREAR MODEi button 9 page 39, fig. 39. You can now open/close t he rear su n shade using the I;] button in the headliner. _& WARNING Be careful when closing t he panoramic sun roof - otherwise serious injury could result! Switch off the ign ition when exiting the vehi cle. 40 - Fig. 4 1 Glove compartment: valet pa rking functio n button You can switch t he va let parking function on whe n someo ne else is parking your vehicle. When the function is switched on, the vehicle can be driven, locked and unlocked using the master key, but access to the luggage compartment is not permitted. • Remove the integrated mechanical key 9 page29. • Open the glove compartment. • Press the IVALET Ibutton to switch the valet parking function on . The LEDin the button turns on . • Lock the g love compartment with the mechanical key. • Only give the remote cont rol key to the se rvice personnel parking your car a nd keep t he removed mechanical key wit h you. .,. Open ing and closing The follow ing buttons are deactivated when the valet parking function is switched on : - l'-"'Ibut ton in t he dr iver's door - I""'Ibutton on t he remote cont rol key - Handle in the rear lid When the valet parking f unction is switched on, the message Valet parking activated appears in the instrument cluster display when you switch the ign ition on. Garage door (Homelink) (D Tips - For security reasons, we recommen d that you clear the programmed buttons befo re selling t he vehicle. - For additiona l information about Homelink, visit www.homelink.com. - For an explanat ion on conform ity wit h the FCCregulat ions in t he Unite d States and the Indust ry Canada regulat ions, see ¢ page 339. opener Programming buttons Applies to: vehicles with garage door opener (Home link) Description Applies to: vehicles with ga rage door opener (Homeli nk) Fig. 43 Headline r: controls Fig. 42 Garage door opener: examples of usage for differ ent systems W ith t he garage door opener (Homelin k), you can act ivate syst ems such as t he garage doors, security systems or house lights from inside your vehicle. Three butto ns are integr ated in t he headline r t hat can be programmed to up to t hree remote cont rols . To be able t o operate syst ems using the garage door opener, t he but t ons in t he headli ner mu st f irst be programme d. A WARNING W hen operating or programming t he garage door opener, make sure that no people or objects are in the area immedia t ely sur round ing the equipment. People can be injured or property can be damaged if str uck w hen closing. C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 You can prog ram both fixe d code and rolling code systems using this procedure . Programming / reprogramming buttons "'S wi t ch on the ign iti on. "' Press and hold the button in t he headliner t hat you would li ke to program for at least 10 seconds. Or "' Select: !CAR !function button> Car systems cont rol button > Vehicle settings > Garage door opener > Program garage door opener . "' Follow the instr uctions in t he I nfot ainment syst em. Deleting button programming The programmed buttons cannot be deleted individually. They must be deleted all at once. Reprogram the buttons if necessary. "' Select: the ICAR Ifunct ion button> Car systems cont rol button > Vehicle settings > Garage door opener > Clear program settings > Yes. 0 :r <t 41 Opening and closing Displaying the version / status / country code .,.Select: ICARI funct io n button> Car systems contro l bu t ton > Vehicle settings > Garage door opener > Version information . (D Tips The garage door opene r may nee d t o be synchronized with t he system motor after the programmin g. Follow the manufacture r's instructions for doing this. Operation Applies to: vehicles with ga rage doo r opener (Homeli nk) Requirements: the button in the headliner must page 41 and the vehicle must be programmed c::> be wit hin range of the system, such as the garage door . .,. Press t he button to open the ga rage door. The LED@c::> page 41, fig. 43 blinks or tur ns on . .,.Press the button again to open the garage doo r. 0) Tips When op e ning or closing the garage door, do no t press and hold the but ton longer ten seconds or the ga rage door open e r will switch t o prog ra mming mode. 42 Lights Lights Exterior :oo:- Side and Vision and V ision ma rker light s iD - Low beam hea dl ights Lighting ~ - All-weather lights Switching the headlights on and off l2!l- Rear fog lights*. When the rear fog lights are on, the symbol on the sw itch will illuminate . O* All-weather lights The front lights a re adjus t ed aut oma t ica lly so that you are less likely to see g lare from your ow n head lig hts, for example when d riving on a wet road. Automatic dynamic headlight range control* Fig. 44 I nstrument pane l: light switch with all-weather lights The headlights only wo rk when t he ignition is sw itche d on. While sta rt ing t he engine or when switching off the ignition, the headlights will go off and only the side marker lights will be on . If the sys t em is not operati ng properly, a warning symbol in t he dr iver informa ti on d ispl ay is displayed .::>page 24 . Light switch --r;..Turn the swit ch ~ fig. 44 t o the corresponding position . When the lights are switched on, t he symbol t urns on . :oo: 0 - The lights a re off or the daytime runni ng lights are on : - USA models: The daytime running lights will come on automatically when the ignition is on and the light sw itch c:>fig. 44 is in t he O posit ion or the AUTO position (only in day light condit ions). The Daytime running lights function can be turned on a nd off in t he MMI c:>page 45 , i=>.&,. - Canada models : The dayt ime runn ing lights will come on au toma t ically when t he ignition is on a nd the light swi t ch c:>fig. 44 is in the O po s ition, the :oo : pos ition or the AUTO position (only in daylig ht conditions) c::>&.. C) AUTO - Automat ic he ad lights sw itch on an d off .... de pend ing on br ight ness, for example in tw ilight, ,.... "' .... d uring rain or in tunne ls c:>&.. "' 0 C0 Your vehicle is equ ipped wit h a headlight ran ge contro l system so tha t the head lig hts do not blind oncoming t raffic if the vehicle load changes . The hea dlight range also adju sts automatically when brak ing and acce lerating . Light functions The following light funct ions are available de pending on veh icle equipment and o nly fu nction whe n the light switch is in t he AUTOposition. You can deactivate these functions in the MMI under Audi adaptive light c:>page 45 . Static cornering light* - the corne ring light switches on automatically when the steering whee l is turned at a certai n angle at speeds up to app roximately 44 mph (70 km/h) and when the turn s ignal is activated at speeds up to approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) . The area to t he side of t he ve hicle is illuminated better w hen turning. Dynamic curve light * - the curve light adapts itself to the curves in the road . Highway l ight function* - this function adapts the lighting for highway d riving based on vehicle speed . A - WARNING - - Automatic headlights are only int e nded to assist the driver. They do no t relieve the driver of his responsib ility to check the headligh t s and to turn them on manually accordi ng to t he cur rent light a nd vis ibility condi t ions . For example, fog cannot be 0 :r <t 43 Lights and Vision detected by the light sensors. So always switch on the headlights gD under these weather conditions and when driving in the dark . - Crashes can happen when you cannot see the road ahead and when you cannot be seen by other motorists . Always turn on the headlights so that you can see ahead and so that others can see your car from the back. - The rear fog lights should only be turned on in accordance with traffic regulation, as the lights are bright for following traffic. - Please observe legal regulations when using the lighting systems described . (D Tips - The light sensor* for automatic dynamic headlight range control* is located in the rear view mirror mount . You should therefore not apply any stickers to the windshield in this area in order to prevent malfunctions or failures . - In the event of a light sensor malfunction, the driver is notified in the instrument cluster display~ page 25. - You will hear a warning tone if you open the driver door when the exterior lights are switched on. - In cool or damp weather, the inside of the headlights, turn signals and tail lights can fog over due to the temperature difference between the inside and outside. They will clear shortly after switching them on. This does not affect the service life of the lighting . Turn signal and high beam lever The turn signal lever operates the turn signals, the high beams and the headlight flasher . N 0 .... .. 0 :i: m Fig. 45 Turn signal and high beam lever Turn signals¢ Q The turn signals activate when you move the lever into a turn signal position when the ignition is switched on. ©- right turn signal @ - left turn signal The turn signal blinks three times if you just tap the lever. High beams and headlight flasher ~D Move the lever to the corresponding position: @ - high beams on (vehicles with High beam assistant* ~ page 44) @)- high beams off or headlight flasher Iii indicator light in the instrument cluster The turns on. A WARNING High beams can cause glare for other drivers, which increases the risk of an accident . For this reason, only use the high beams or the headlight flasher when they will not create glare for other drivers . High beam assistant Applies to: vehicles with high beam assistant A camera on the rearview mirror mount can detect light sources from other road users. The high beams switch on or off automatically depending ll> 44 Lights on the position of vehicles driving ahead and oncoming vehicles, the vehicle speed and other environmental and traffic conditions. Activating high beam assistant Requirement: the light switch must be set to the AUTOposition and the high beam assistant must be switched on in the Infotainment system ¢ page 45 . .,.To activate the high beam assistant , tap t he indicator light aplever forward @ . The pears in the instrument cluster display and the high beam assistant is switched on/off autoindicator light also turns on if matically. The the high beams are switched on. II Ill Switching the high beams on/off manually If the high beams did not switch on/off automatically as expected, you may switch them on or off manually instead: .,.To switch the high beams on manually, lever forward @ . The indicator light on . .,.To switch the high beams off manually, lever back @ . The high beam assistant tivated. Ill tap the turns pu ll the is deac- Operating the headlight flasher .,.To operate the headlight flasher when the high beam assistant is activated and high beams are switched off, pu ll the lever back @ . The high beam assistant rema ins active. Messages in the instrument cluster display Headlight assist: System fault! Drive to an authorized Audi dea le r or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected. You can still switch the high beams on or off manually. A and Vision WARNING High beam assistant is only intended to assist the driver. The driver is st ill respons ible for controlling the headlights and switching them manua lly depending on light and visibi lity conditions. It may be necessary to operate them manually in situations s uch as: - In adverse weather conditions such as fog, heavy rain, blowing snow or spraying water. - On roads where oncoming traffic may be pa rtia lly obscured, such as expressways. - When there are road users that do not have sufficient lighting, such as bicyclers or vehicles with dirty tail lamps . - In tight curves and on steep hills. - In poorly lit areas. - With strong reflectors, such as signs. - If the area of the w indshield near the sensor is fogged over, dirty, icy or covered with a sticker . Adjusting the exterior lighting The functions ore adjusted in the Infotainment system . .,.Select: !CAR !function button > Car systems control button > Vehicle settings > Exterior lighting . Automatic headlights You can adjus t the following settings in the Automatic headlights menu: Headlights activation time - you can adjust if the headlights switch on Early, Medium or Late according to the sensitivity of the light sensor. Headlight assist* -you can switch the high beam ass istant* On and Off . Daytime running lights* Headlight assist: Unavailable No camera view The camera view is blocked, for example by a sticker or debris. o co ~ ,..._ ~ The sensor is located between the interior rearview mirror and the windshield. Do not place any stickers in this area on the windshield. USA models: the daytime running lights can be switched on/off. Select On or Off. Canada models: this function cannot be switched off. They activate automatically each time the igll> nition is switched on . 0 0 :c '<t 45 Light s and Vision Coming home , Leaving home Interior The coming home func t ion illuminates the area outside the vehicle when you turn the ignition off and open the driver 's door. To t urn the f unct ion on, s ele ct Lights when leaving car > On. lighting Front and rear interior lighting The leav ing home illuminates t he area out side the vehicle when you unlock the vehicle . To tu rn the function on, select Lights when unlocking car > On. The com ing home and le aving home f unctions only operate w hen it is dark and the light sw itch is in the AUTO position. Fig. 47 Front head liner: interio r light ing controls Emergency flashers Fig. 4 8 Rear headl iner: Readi ng light Fig. 46 Center conso le: eme rge ncy f las her butto n Press the corresponding button ¢ fig. 47: ~ - Int erio r light ing o n/off The emergency flashers ma kes ot her drivers aware of your vehicle in dangerous situ ations . [!I- Door cont act swit ch on/off . The inter ior ligh t ing is controlled automa t ica lly. • Press the &,. button to switch the eme rgency flashers on or off. You can indicate a lane change or a turn when the emergency flas hers are sw itched on by us ing the t urn sig nal lever. The emerge ncy flashers stop tempo ra rily. The emergency flashers also work when the ignition is turned off. ~ - Reading lights on/off Switch the rear reading lights on/off from the cockpit . ~ * - IREAR Switching the rear reading lights on/off from the cockp it: press the IREAR MODE ! button and then the corresponding button~ in the cockpit . MODE i* - Ambient lighting Applies to: vehicles with amb ient lighting You can select a color prof ile and brightness for the ambi ance lighting in var ious areas of the vehicle, called zones. 46 Lights Switching the ambient lighting on • Select in the MMI: !CAR!func t ion button > Car systems control button > Vehicle setting s > Interior lighting > On. Instrument and V ision lighting The brightness of the instrument and display lighting as well as the Head-up display * can be adjusted. Adjusting the brightness / turning off You can adjust the brigh t ness for the four zones Front top , Front footwell , Rear top and Rear footwell or for All areas at the same t ime. • In the Infota inment system , se lect: ICARlfunct io n button > Car system s con t rol button > Ve· hicle setting s > Interior lighting > Brightness. • Turn the knob to the desired ve hicle area a nd press the knob . The bar that appears indicates the se lected br ightness . • To increase or red uce the br ightness, turn the knob and press it. Selecting a color profile* You can se lect from t he Ivory, Polar and Ruby/ Polar color profi les . • Select in the MMI: !CARIfunc t ion button> Car systems cont rol button > Vehicle setting s> Interior lighting > Color profile. The ambient lighting turns on when this func t ion is t urned on the Infot ainmen t sys t em and t he low be a ms a re tu rned on whe n t he ign ition is switche d on. (D Tips The set t ings are a utomatically store d and assig ned to the remo t e con t ro l key th at is in use. Fig. 4 9 Ins t rume nt ill umin ation • Press the knob to release it . • Turn the knob toward" -" or" +" to reduce or increase the br ightness . • Press the knob again to return it to its or iginal position . @ Tips The instrument illum ination for the needles and dials turns on when the ign ition is turned o n and the lights are tu rned off . The illum ination for the gauges red uces automatically and even t ually turns off as brightness outs ide increa ses . This funct ion reminds the dr iver t o tur n t he low be a ms on at t he app ropriate time. Vision Adjusting the exterior mirrors C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 Fig. SO Driver's door : knob fo r the exter ior mir rors Turn the knob to the des ired position: 0 :r <t 47 Light s and Vision Q/P - Adjusting the left/right exter ior mirror. Move the knob in the desired direction. (@.- Heat ing the mirror glass depending on the outside temperature . 9 - Folding exterior mirrors* . In the Infotainment system, you can select if the mirrors fold in automatically when you lock the vehicle ¢page 32. Front passenger's exterior mirror tilt function* To help you see the curb when back ing into a parking space, the surface of the mirror tilts slightly. For this to happen, the knob must be in the position for the front passenger's outside mirror. Never fold power fold ing exterior mirrors by hand . Only fold them in and out using the power controls. (D Tips - If the power adjusting function malfunctions, the glass in both mirrors can be adjusted by pressing on the edge of it by hand. - The exterior mirror settings are stored with the memory function* ¢ page 59. Dimming the mirror 0 ~ 0 :i: a'i You can adjust the ti lted mi rror surface by turning the knob in the desired direction. When you move out of reverse and into another gear, the new mirror position is stored and assigned to the key you are us ing. The mirror goes back into its original position once you drive forward faster than 9 mph (15 km/h) or turn the ignition off . A WARNING Curved mirror surfaces (aspheric or convex *) enlarge the field of vision. However, they make objects in the mirror appear smaller and farther away. Your may estimate incorrectly when you use these mirrors to gauge your distance from the vehicles behind you when changing lanes, wh ich increases the risk of an accident. (D Note - If the mirror housing was moved by outs ide forces (such as an impact when maneuvering), you must use the power fold ing function to fold the mirror all the way out. The mirror housing must not be moved back into place by hand because this would impair the function of the m irror mechanism. - If you wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash, you must fold the exterior mirrors in to reduce the risk of damage to the mirrors. 48 Fig. 51 Automatic dimm ing rearview m ir ror .. To dim the interior rearview mirror and both exterior mirrors*, press the button @ . The LED@ turns on. The interior rearv iew mirror and exterior mirrors* dim automat ically when light shines on them, for example from headlights on a vehicle behind you. A WARNING Electrolyte fluid can leak out from broken mirror glass. This liqu id can irritate the skin, eyes and respiratory system. If there is contact with the fluid, flush immediately with plenty of water . Consult a physician if necessary. - Repeated or long-term exposure to e lectrolyte fluid can lead to irritation of the airways, especially in people with asthma or other respiratory conditions. Take deep breaths immediately after leaving the vehicle or, if this is not possible, open all of the doors and windows as wide as possible. - If electrolyte fluid enters the eyes, flush them thoroughly with a large amount of - Lights clean water for at least 15 minutes and then seek medical attention. - If electrolyte flu .id comes into contact with the skin, flush the affected area with clean water for at least 15 minutes and then clean with soap and water and seek medical attent ion. Clean affected cloth ing and shoes thoroughly before wear ing again. - If the fluid was swallowed and the person is conscious, flush the mouth with water for at least 15 minutes. Do not induce vomiting unless this is recommended by med ical professionals. Seek med ica l attent ion immed iately. (D and V is ion The mirror light switches on when the cover over the vanity mirror @ opens. Sunshade Applies to : vehicles with sun shade Fig. 53 Cockpit: button for sunshade Note The e lectrolyte fluid that leaks out of broken m irror glass corrodes plastic surfaces and the pa int. Clean t his liquid as quickly as possible, for examp le with a wet sponge . (l) Tips - If the light reaching the interior rearv iew mir ror is obstr ucted (for examp le by the sunshade*), the automatic d imm ing rear view mirror will not function correctly. - The aut oma t ic d imm ing mirrors do not dim when the interior lighting is turned on or the reverse gear is selected. Sun visors I 0 ,1 • "\ J Fig. 52 Front passenger's side: sun visor C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 The sun visors for the dr iver and front passenger can be re leased from their mounts and t urned toward the doors ¢ fig. 52 (D. They can also be moved back and forth lengthwise in this posit ion . Fig. 54 Rear door: buttons for sunshades Extending / retract ing the rear window * shade .,.To extend or retract the sun shade from the cockpit, press the ru button in the center console ¢ fig. 53 . .,.To extend or retract the sun shade from the rear of t he vehicle, press the r.iilbutton in the door ¢ fig . 54 . Extending the rear door sun shades* .,.Close the window in the rear door . .,.To extend the sun shade from the driver's seat, pull the left/right rear power window switch ~ in the driver's door . .,.To extend the sun shade from the rear of th e vehicle, pull the power window sw itch~ in the left/right rear door. 0 :r <t 49 Iii>- Light s and Vision Retracting the rear door sun shades* .. To ret ract the sun shade from the driver's seat, press t he left/right rear powe r window switc h ~ in the driver's door . .. To retract the sun shade from the rear of the vehicle, press the power window switch Q;;;\in the left/right rear door . .. Press t he button to fold the mirror open. The mirror lighting turns on automatically . .. To change the mir ror's angle, move it forward/ back with your hand. Windshield wipers Switching the windshield wipers on You can adjust the settings for the rear sun shade so the shade retracts automatically when you select the reverse gear. Select: CARfunction button > Car system s control button > Vehicle settings > Automatic rear blind > On. The settings are automatically sto red and assigned to the remote cont rol key. The sun shade is extended again as soon as the vehicle is t raveli ng fo rward at a speed great er t han 9 mph (15 km/h) if the ignition has not been swit ched off in t he meant ime . Fig. 5 6 Windsh ield wiper lever .&_WARNING Always pay caref ul attention when closing the sunshades. Pinching could cause serio us injuries. @ Move the w indshie ld w iper lever to the corresponding positi on: @ - wipers off @ - Rain sensor mode. The windshield wi pers Tips - Pressing the l~•~l button several t imes in a row can trigger the overload protection. The sun shade can only be extended/retracted again after a br ief waiting period. - The rear win dow sun shade on ly functions when the vehicle interior is warmer than 14°F (-10°(). Vanity mirror in the rear App lies to: veh icles with vanity mirrors in the rear switch on once the vehicle speed exceeds appro ximately 2 mph (4 km/h) and it is raining. The higher the rain sensor sensit ivity is set (switch @ to t he right), the earlier the windshield wipers react to moisture on the windsh ield. You can deactivate t he rain sensor mode in the I nfota inment system, which swit ches the intermitten t mode on. Select: !CARI function button> Car system s contro l but to n > Driver assist > Rain sensor > Off . In inte rmitten t mode, you can adjust the inte rval time using the switch @ . @ - slow w iping @ - fast w iping @ - single wipe If you hold the lever in this posit ion longer, the wipers switch from slow wiping to fast wiping. Fig. 55 Rear head liner: vanity m irro r 50 ® - clean the wi ndshield The w ipers w ipe one time after several seconds of driving to remove water droplets. You can switch this function off by moving the lever to posit ion ® within 10 seconds of the afterwipe . The afterwipe function is ..,_ Light s and Vis ion reactivated the next time you switch the ignition on. Cleaning the headlights. The headlight washer system operates only when the low beam headlights are switched on. If you move the lever to position @ , the headlights and the night vision assist camera* are cleaned at intervals. A - The washer fluid nozzles for the windshield washer system are heated at low temperat ures when the ign ition is on . - When stopping tempo rari ly, such as at a traffic light, the speed of the windshield w ipers automatically reduces by one level. Cleaning the wiper blades WARNING - The rain sensor is only intended to assist the driver. The driver may still be responsible for manually switching the wipers on based on visibility conditions . - The w indshield may not be treated with water-repelling windsh ield coating agents . Unfavorable conditions, such as wetness, darkness, and when the sun is low, can cause increased glare, which increases the risk of an accident. W iper blade chatter is also possible. - Properly f unction ing windsh ield wiper blades are required fo r a clear view and safe driving c:>page 51, Replacing the wiper blades. Clean the wiper blades when you see w iper streaks . Clean the wiper blades with a soft towel and glass cleane r. .. Place the windshie ld w iper arms in the service position c:>page 51. .. Fold the windshield w iper arms away from the w indshield . A WARNING Dirty windshie ld wiper blades can impa ir vision, wh ich increases the ris k of an accident . Replacing the wiper blades Theserviceposition is set in the Infotainment system . (D Note ~ ~ M - If there is frost, make sure t he windshie ld wiper blades are not fro zen to the windshield. Switching on the windshield wipers when the blades are frozen to the windshield can damage the wiper blades. - Prior to using a car wash, the windshield wiper system must be switched off (lever in position @). This prevents the wipers from switching on unintent ionally and causing damage to the w indshield w iper system . 0 ... :i: m Fig. 57 Removing winds hield wiper blades Wind shield wiper service position / blade replacement posit ion 0 co .... N ,..... .... N 0 0 :c - The windshield wipers switch off when the ignition is switched off. You can activate the windsh ield wipers after the ign it ion is switched back on by moving the winds hield wiper lever to any posit ion. - Worn or dirty windshield wiper blades result in streak ing. This can affect the rain sensor funct ion. Check you r windshield wiper blades regu larly. .. Switch the ignition off and move the windshield w iper lever to position @ briefly c::> page 50, fig. 56. The windshield wipers move into the service position . .. To br ing the wiper blades back into the original position, switch the ignition on and operate the w indshield w iper lever. You can also turn the service posit ion on or off in the Infotainment system: ..,_ '<t 51 Lights and Vision • Switch the windshield wipers off (position @ Digital compass ¢ page 50, fig. 56). • Select: the ICARI function button > Car systems control button > Servicing & checks > Wiper service position. > On. Switching the compass on and off Applies t o: vehicles wit h digita l com pass Removing the wiper blade • Fold the windshield wiper arm away from the windshield. • Press the locking knob @ c:>fig. 57 on the wiper blade . Hold the wiper blade firmly. • Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow . Installing the wiper blade • Insert the new wiper blade into the mount on the wiper arm @ until it clicks into place. • Place the wiper arm back on the windshield. • Turn the service position off. A WARNING For safety reasons, the windshield wiper blades should be replaced once or twice each year. (D Note - The windshield wiper blades must only be folded away when in the service position! Otherwise, you risk damaging the paint on the hood or the windshield wiper motor. - You should not move your vehicle or press the windshield wiper lever when the wiper arms are folded away from the windshield. The windshield wipers would move back into their original position and could damage the hood and windshield. - You can also use the service position, for example, if you want to protect the windshield from icing by using a cover. - You cannot activate the service position when the hood is open. 52 Fig. 58 Inter ior rearview mirror : digital compass act ivated • To turn the compass in the mirror on or off, press the button @ until the compass display in the mirror appears or disappears. The digital compass only works when the ignition is tur ned on. The directions are indicated with abbreviations: N (north), NE (northeast), E (east), SE (southeast), S (south), SW (southwest), W (west), NW (northwest). (D Tips To prevent inaccurate compass readings, do not bring any remote controls, electrical devices or metallic objects near the mirror. Lights Adjusting the magnetic zone App lies to: vehicles with digita l compass The magnetic zone must be adjusted correctly for the compass to read accurately . and V is ion - Always pay attention to the traffic and the area around your vehicle if you are reading the compass while dr iving . ® Fig. S9 Nort h Americ a: magn etic zone map • Press and hold the button @ i=>fig. 59 unt il the number of the selected magnetic zone appears in the rearv iew mirror. • Press the button @ repeatedly to select the correct magnetic field zone . The select io n mode t urns off after a few seconds. Calibrating the compass Applies to: vehicles with digita l compass You must recalibrate the compass if it does not display the correct direction. • Press and hold the button @ i=> page 52, fig. 58 unt il a C appears in the interior rearview mirror . • Drive in a circle at about 6 mph (10 km/h) unt il a d irection is disp layed in the rea rview mirror. _& WARNING C) .... C0 ,.... "' .... "' 0 ,___ - To reduce the risk to you rself and other drivers, calibrate the compass in an area where there is no traffic. 0 :r <t 53 S ea ts and s tor a ge Seats General A and storage information WARNING Refer to ¢ page 207, Drivingsafety for important information, tips, suggestions and warnings that you should read and follow for your own safety and the safety of you r passengers. Front seats Controls Seat forward/back adjustment, seat height, backrest and seat cushion angle. reason, children sho uld never be left unattended in the vehicle - they could be injured! - Only adjust the front seat with when the vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, this increases the risk of an accident - Exercise caution when adjust ing the seat height. Unsupervised or careless seat adjustment can pinch fingers or hands causing inj uries . - The front seat backrests must not be reclined too far back when driving, because this impa irs the effectiveness of the safety belts and airbag system, which increases the risk of injury. Multifunction button Applies to: vehicles wit h memory funct ion You can adjust the massage function, upper section of the backrest, lumbar support, side bolsters, upper thigh support and safety belt height using the multifun ction button. Fig. 60 Front seat: adjust ing the seat @ - Moving the seat forward/back: press the but ton forward/back . @ - Moving the seat up/down: press the button up/down. To adjust the front seat cushion, press the front button up/down. To adjust the rear seat cushion, press the rear button up/down . ® - Switching the massage function* on/off . Select the type of massage with the multifunction button c:>page 54. © - adjusting the backrest angle : press the button forward/back. © - Comfo rt head restraint* c:>page 58 @ - Multifunction button* c:>page 54. A WARNING - The power front sea t s can also be adjusted when the ign ition is switc hed off . For this 54 Fig. 61 Infota inment system : seat sett ings Operating .. If you tu rn the mult ifunct ion button @ c:>page 54, fig . 60 to the left or to the right, the poss ible seat settings @ are shown in the Infotainment system c:>fig. 61. .. To select a seat setting, turn the multifunction button @ in the corresponding direction until the desired seat setting is outlined in red . .. The arrows ® represent the possible adjust ments . To lower the lumbar support, for example, press the mult ifunct ion button @ downward. The corresponding arrow © lights up. The following seat settings @ are poss ible: ..,_ Seats Massage funct ion* - select the Wa ve, Pulse, Stretch, Lumbar or Shoulder massage type or off . You can adjust the intensity of each massage from 1 through 5. You can switch the selected massage on/off using the button @ c>page 54, fig. 60. and storag e --- Safety belt height adjustment * - adjust the safety belt up or down c>page 223 . Upper backrest * - angle the upper area of the Fig. 63 Cockpit: divided center armrest • backrest forward or back. Lumbar support - you can adjust the lumbar support up/down and t o be stronge r/weaker. Seat bolsters* -you can increase/decrease the lateral support in the seat using the side bo lsters at the seat surface and the backrest. Upper thigh support* - you can increase/decrease the upper th igh support. (0 Tips - The massage function* switches off automatically after approx imately 10 minutes. - In vehicles with the recl ining rear seat, only the seat belt he ight and thigh support can be adjusted on the front passenger seat using the multif unction button. - The air in the s ide bo lsters* is released as soon as the driver's door opens. This makes is possible to enter and exit the vehicle more comfortab ly. As soon as you sta rt d riving the ve hicle, t he s ide bo lsters fill. Opening the storage compartment .,. Press the button -arrow- and move the armrest upward. Adj usting the divided center arm rest * .,.To adjust the armrest forward and up, press the button -arrow- and pull the armrest into the desired posit ion at the same time . .,.To br ing the armrest into the rest ing position, press the button -arrow- and slide the armrest downwa rd . Rear seats Adjusting the rear seats Applies to : vehicles with power adjustable rear seats Center armrest Applies to vehicles with a front center armrest There is a storage compartment under the armrest. Fig. 64 Passenger side rear seat: seat adjustment buttons N I C) .... C0 ,.... "' .... "' 0 0 :r <t Fig. 65 Rear doo r: memory function buttons Fig. 62 Cockpit: center armrest 55 S e at s and s t o rage Adjust ing lumbar support .,.To a djust the curvature of the lumbar support, press the button @ to the left/right. .,. To adj ust the he ight of the lumbar support, press the button @ upward/downward. Adjusting th e head restraint angle .,.To adjust the head restraint so t hat it is more vertical/more ang led, press the bu tton @ forward/back. Adjusting th e seat position .,.To adjust the seat forward/back, press the button © fo rwa rd/back. .,.To move the seat up/down, press t he button © upward/downward . Adjusting th e massage function * .,.To adjust the "pulsating"/"wave" massage funct ion, press the button © to the left/r ight. The massage function is at it s strongest level when t hree LEDs in the butto n turn on. .,.To reduce the massage level, press the © button again . .,.To switc h the massage function off, press the button repeatedly until the LED turns off. Adju st ing th e reclining position .,.To adjust the reclining position, press and hold the button @ until the seat reaches its end position . .,.Applies to vehicles with reclining seat*: if you select the reclining position, the front passenger's seat moves forward and the backrest reclines. Depending on the last setting, the leg support may fold out at the same t ime . The front passenger 's seat can no longer be used in the reclining posit ion ¢ ..&,. You can adjust the leg suppo rt or fold t he display fo rwa rd in the reclining position. Selecting the standard seat position .,.To adjust the sta ndard seat pos it ion, press and hold the button © unt il the seat reaches its end posit ion . .,.Applies to vehicles with reclining seat*: if you select the standa rd sea t position, the fron t passenger's seat moves back into the norma l posi- 56 tion, the head restraint moves to the upright position and the leg support folds inward ¢ ..&,. Adjusting the display* .,.To t ilt the display fo rwa rd/bac k, press and hold the left/r ight button @) until the d isp lay reach es the des ired position . .,.Applies to vehicles with reclining seat*: to maintain a clear view of the road when the seat is in the reclining pos ition, press and hold the right button @) until the disp lay has folded forward. Make sure the driver has a clear view of the exter ior mirrors . If so, confirm the quest ion in the Infotainment system with Yes. If you answe r No or do not respond to the q uest ion, the disp lay will return to the up right pos ition. Adjusting the leg support (vehicles with reclining seat*) Requirement: the reclining position must be selected ¢ page 56. .,.To fold the leg support out/in, press and hold the left/r ight button @ until the leg support reaches the desired pos it ion. .,.To angle the leg suppo rt so that it is more uprigh t/mo re reclined or t o move it fo rward/back, adj usting t he front passenge r's sea t accord ingly . Adjusting the front passenger's seat .,. Make sure that the front passenger's seat adjus t ment is switc hed on in the Infotainment system ¢ page 58 . .,.To activate the front passenger's seat adjust ment, press the button ® · .,.To adjust the front passenger's seat forward/ back, press the button © forward/back. .,.To move the front passenger's seat up/down, press the button © upward/downward. .,.To adjust the front passenger's seat backrest so that is more upright/more recl ined, press the button @ forward/back . .,.App lies to ve hicles with reclin ing seat*: to adjust the reclin ing/standard sea t position, press and hold the button @ !© unt il the front pas senger's seat reaches its end position. .,. Seats A WARNING and storag e Massage function remote control Applies to: vehicles with reclining seat and massage function - The power seats can also be adjusted when the ignition is switched off. For this reason, children should never be left unattended in the vehicle - they could be injured! - Be careful when adj usting the seat. Unsupervised or careless seat adjustment can pinch fingers o r hands caus ing injur ies. - Applies to vehicles with reclining seat*: - Do not use the fron t passenger's seat for seating when it is in the reclining position . This increases the risk of serious injury or death. - Never adjust the reclining position when the front passenger 's seat is occupied. This increases the risk of injury. - Do not tilt the display if the driver's view of the right exterior mirror will be obstructed . - Make sure the area between the leg support and the front passenger 's seat backrest is clear before folding the leg support in so that you are not pinched. (D Tips - The massage function switches off auto matically after approx imately 10 minutes. - If you cannot adj ust the reclining seat * or the front passenger's seat from the rear, it is possible that: - t he front passenger's seat memory fu nct ion is swit ched off ~ page 59, o r - the child safety lock is switched on (the ~ button ~ page 37 or the right T button ~ page 37 is turned on in the dr iver's door), o r - the front passenger seat adjustment is switched off in the Infotainment system ~ page SB. Fig. 66 Remote cont rol: recli ning seat massage fun ctions The remote controls are located in the rear center console ¢ page 62, fig . 72 . The massage funct ion is only ava ilable when the ignition is switched on. .,.To open the remote control compartment, press the left button and fold the center armrest upward . .,.To adjust the massage type, press the appropr iate button @ · @ . The LED in the button turns on . .,.To adjust the speed/inte nsity, turn the thumbwheel @ I® . The LEDs indicate the speed/intensity. .. Press the selected massage type again to sw itch the massage function off. Massage types @ -Wave @ - Pulsating © - Stretch @ - Lumbar (D Tips - The massage function switches off auto matically after approximate ly 10 minutes . - If you activate a massage type aga in, t he last selected intensity and speed will be selected . C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 0 :r <t 57 Seats and storage Comfort settings Applies to: vehicles with comfort seats in the rear You con also apply several settings for the rear using the Infotainment system in the cockpit. • Select in the MMI: !CAR !function button> Car systems control button > Vehicle settings > Seats > Rear seats. Adjust to normal position - with this function, the outer rear seats and the front passenger's seat are moved to the factory setting. Easy seat entry - the Easy seat entry makes it possible to enter and exit the rear seats comfort ably. If the function is sw itched on, the rear seat automatically moves all t he way back when t he corresponding door is opened . Passenger'sseat adjustment* - if the function is switched on in the Infotainment system, the front passenger's seat can also be adjusted from the rear seat using the ¢ page 55, fig . 64 buttons . The front passenger's seat cannot be adjusted, if - the front passenger's seat memory function is switched off ¢ page 59 . - the ~ button tur ns on in the driver's door ¢ page 37. - The right[!] button turns on in vehicles with power child safety locks * ¢ page 37. Head restraints Adjusting the head restraints Fig. 68 Outer rea r seat: adjus tin g the head restra int Adjust the head restraints so the upper edge is as even as possible with t he top of you r head . If t ha t is not possible, try to adjust as close to this position as possible. Adjusting the front head restraints .,.To adjust the he ight of the front head restraints, pull/press the button © 9 page 54, fig. 60 up/down. .,.To adjust the side bolsters*, push the side bolsters int o the desired position ¢ fig. 67 . • Vehicles with reclining seat*: grab the head restraint at the sides with both hands and slide the head restraint up/down until it clicks into place . Adjusting the rear head restraints The center head restraint in the rear is not adjustable. When passengers ride in the outer rear seats, raise these head restraints up to the top position ¢ ,& . • To move the head restra int up, hold it at the sides with both hands and slide it upward until you feel it click into place . .,.To move the head restra int down, press the button (small arrow) ¢ fig. 68 and s lide the head restraint downward. 8,_ WARNING Fig. 67 Comfort head rest rai nt : adjust ing the side bolste rs 58 - Always read and ings ¢page 210 - Driving with the upright position lnJUry. follow the app licab le warn. head restraints not in the increases the risk of se rious ~ Seats @ and storag e moved forward or upward when the seat is adjusted. Tips To prevent the head restraints from running into the headline, they are automat ically Memory function Description Applies to: vehicles wit h memory funct ion Using the memo ry funct ion, you can q uickly and eas ily store a pe rsonal seat profile for the driver and front passenger as we ll as for the outer rear seats* and reca ll the settings. The memory function is controlled using the remote contro l key and the memory buttons in the driver's/front passenger's door and in the rear doors*. The driver's seat profi le is stored again and assigned to the remote contro l key each time the vehicle is locked . When you open the door, the seat prof ile is automat ically recalled. If two people use the vehicle, it is recommended that each person always uses the ir "own" remote con t rol key. Two seat profiles can be stored using the memory buttons in the d river's/front passenger 's door respectively, and one seat profile can be stored in each of the rear doors *. Once they a re stored, these seat profi les can be se lected at any time. The following sett ings a re stored : Remote control key Memory button Driver Driver Front passenger Outer Rear seats* Seat X X X X Head rest raint X X X Steering wheel * X X Safety belt* X X Both exterior mirrors* X X Remote control key Applies to: vehicles with memory func tion X Memory buttons Applies to : veh icles with memory function The function must be switched on so that the driver's seat profile will be assigned to the remote control key when locking the vehicle . .. Se lect : the ICAR Ifunction button > Car systems control button > Vehicle setting s> Driver's seat > Remote control key> On. (D C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 0 :r <t Tips If you do not wish to have the seat profile for another driver assigned to the remote control key, switch the memory function off in the Infotainment system or using t he IOFFIbutton ~page 59. Fig. 69 Driver 's door: memory func tion buttons 59 S ea ts and s tor a ge The memo ry buttons are located in the driver's door, front passenger's door and in the rear doors*. Switch ing the mem ory function on/ off • Press the IOFFIbutton to switch the memory funct ion on/off. The LED in t he button tu rns on when the memory function is off. Seat profiles are neither stored nor recalled. Storing a seat profi le • Press the ISE TI button. When the word SET ligh t s up, the memory is ready to store set tings . • Now press a memory button briefly . A tone confirms that the settings were stored . Accessing a seat profile Align with driver's seat • To transfer the settings from the dr iver's seat I to the front passenge r's seat , se lect: the !CAR function button > Car systems cont rol button > Vehicle settings > Seats > Passenger's seat > Al ign wi th dri ver's seat . • Press and hold the control knob until the adjusting process is comp lete. @ Tips The lumbar support and upper thigh support settings are not transferred when aligning the front passenger's seat with the driver's seat. 12 volt sockets Applies to: vehicles with sockets • If the drive r's door is open and the ignit ion is swit ched off, press the memory button . • If the driver's door is closed or the ignition is switched on, press and ho ld the memory button until the seat adjustment is comp lete. A WARNING - For safety reasons, the seat setting can only be recalled when the vehicle is stationary, otherw ise there is a risk of an accide nt . - If necessary, you can stop the recall process by pressing the IOFF! button or any memory button. Fig. 70 Side compart ment in lugg age compartment: 12 volt socket• Adjusting the front passenger's seat in the Infotainment system Applies to: vehicles with memory function The driver can move the front passenger's seat into various positions . Adjust ing the front passenger's seat from th e driver's seat • Select : the ICARI function button> Car system s contro l button > Veh icle sett ings > Seats > Passenger's seat > Adju st seat position . • You can now adjust the front passenger's seat using the driver's seat but t ons c=;,page 54, fig . 60. 60 Fig. 71 Example of a rear center console: 12 volt socket The 12-vol t sockets can be used for e lectr ica l accessories . The power consumption at the out let must not exceed 120 watts. There is an add itional 12 volt so cket in the center page 63, fig. 75 . ..,. console c=;, Seats A ,~ A WARNING The sockets and the electrical accessories connected to them only function when the ignition is switched on . Incorrect usage can lead to serious injuries or burns. To reduce the risk of injur ies, never leave children unattended in the vehicle with the vehicle key. 0 Note - Never connect any accessories that provide power (such as solar panels or battery charger for the vehicle battery) to the cigarette lighter. They can damage the vehicle electrical system. - To reduce the risk of damage to the sockets, only use plugs that fit correctly. 115 volt socket Applies to: vehicles with 115 volt socket The 115 volt socket can be used when the ign ition is switched on c::>,& . When you push the connector all the way into the socket, the child safe ty mechanism releases and current flows through the socket . Connectable devices Elect rical devices can be connected to the 115 volt socket in the vehicle. The device connected to the socket must not use more than 150 watts of power (300 watts peak power). Check the power usage of the connected device on the type label. LED on the socket - The socket is ready for use when the LEDis green. - There is a malfunction if the LEDis blinking red. The socket will switch off automatically due to overcurrent or overheating. The socket will switch on again automatically after a cooldown period. Any devices that are connected and switched on will activate again automatically c::>.&.. 0 co .... N ,..... .... N 0 0 :c and storage WARNING - - The sockets and the electrical accessories connected to them only function when the ignition is switched on. Incorrect usage can lead to serious injuries or burns. To reduce the risk of injuries, never leave children unattended in the vehicle with the vehicle key. - If devices or connectors that are heavy (for example a power supply unit) are attached directly to the socket, the holder can become damaged, which increases the risk of injury. - To reduce the risk of fatal injury, store all connected devices securely when driving so that they do not move around insid e the vehicle when braking or if involved a crash. - To reduce the risk of fatal injury, do not spill any fluids on the socket. Should any moisture enter the socket, make sure that it has dried out completely before using the socket again. - Devices connected to the vehicle behave differently than when they are connected to a regular power supply. Therefore, connected devices can become hot during operation, which can increase the risk of injury. - There is a risk of injury when using adapters and extension cords, because the child safety on the socket is switched off and the socket is powered with current. - To reduce the risk of fatal injury, do not insert any conductive objects, such as knitting needles, into the contacts on the socket. - To reduce the risk of injury, switch off any connected electrical devices if the socket has switched off due to overheating. 0 Note -Also read the operating manuals for the connected devices. - Do not connect any lamps that contain neon tubes. Due to technical reasons, this can cause malfunctions in the lamp. - Do not connect any 230 volt devices to the 115 volt socket . The device can be damaged. Check the permitted voltage of the device according to the type label. '<t 61 S ea ts and s tor a ge - Wit h some power supply units, such as for laptops, switching them on disables the integrated overcurrent shutdown . In this case, disconnect the powe r supply unit from the electrical equipment and reconnect after approximately 10 seconds. @ Folding table in the center console Applies t o: vehicles with fo lding table in the center console The folding table is stored in the front area of the center console. Tips - Devices that are not shie lded or dev ices near the rear window antenna can cause malfunctions in the radio, TV area or in the vehicle elect rical system. - The functions on some devices may be limited d ue to the low powe r output (wattage) . Fig. 73 Rea r cent e r console: op ening th e folding tab le Full-length console center Overview Applies to: vehicles with full-le ngth center console Fig. 74 Rear cent er console: foldi ng tab le inclined posit ion Opening .,.Pull the handle @ toward the rea r ¢ fig . 73. The fo lding tab le extends out partially by itself ¢ &, . Fig. 72 Rear: full-lengt h cente r console .,. Pull the folding table up unti l it locks into place @ -115 Volt socket ¢ page 61 ®· @ - Cup holder ¢ page 63 .,. Fold the table t op back and down @ . © - 12 Volt socket ¢ page 60 Storing ® - Folding table* ¢ page 62 © - center armrest and sto rage compartments .,.Release t he tabletop @ to fo ld it back . .,.You can now move the folding table vertically back into its original pos ition. : to open the deep compa rtment, press the right button and fo ld the ce nt er armrest upward. To open the compartment for the massage function remote control*¢ page 57 and for the telephone*, press the left button and fold the center armrest upward . 62 A WARNING - - Do not open the fo ld ing tab le while d riving. Opening the fo ld ing table while driving increases the risk of injury in the event of a coll ision or sudden braking . - To reduce the risk of pinching, open and close the folding table carefully and in a controlled manne r. Seats Storage (D and storag e Note Beverage containers in the cup holders should a lways have a lid. If not , beverages could spill and cause damage to vehicle equipment, such electron ics or seat covers. Cup holders Cooled glove compartment The cooled glove compartment only functions when the AIC system is swi tched on. Fig. 75 Center console : fro nt cup holders Fig. 77 Glove compart ment: switching cooling mode on/ off .. Turn the knob @ counter-clockwise to switch the cooling on . The symbols on the knob ind i· cate the correct posit ion. .. Turn the knob @ clockwise to switch the cool · ing off . Fig. 76 Sect ion of th e rear bench seat : cup holder in rear center conso le Front cup holders .. Tap on the cover to open the cup ho lde rs Q fig. 75 . Cup holder s in the rear center console .. Tap on the front strip to open the cup holders . .. Set your beverage in the ho lder . .. To close the cup holder , fold the cover back unt il it clicks into place. C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 0 :r _& WARNING Always leave the lid o n the glove compartment cover closed while dr iving to red uce the risk of injury . In vehicles with a full-length center console in the rear, the cup holder is located at @ 9 page 62, fig . 72. A The glove compartment cooling mode only funct ions when the veh icle A/C system is switched on . If the heating is switched on, switching the glove compartmen t cooling mode off is recommended . a) WARNING - - Do not put any hot beverages in t he cup holder while the vehicle is moving. Hot beverages could spill, wh ich can cause injury . - Do not use any breakable beverage containers (for example, made out of glass or po rcelain). You cou ld be injured by them in the event of an accident . Tips The glove compartment t he mechanical key. can be locked using Additional storage compartments You will find a range of storage compa rt ments and holders at different locations in the vehicle. - Compartments in the doors IJ,, <t 63 Seats and storage - Net in the front passenger footwell - Glasses holder in the headliner (near the rearview mirror) - Storage compartments under the center armrest - Compartments* on the backrests of the front seats - Garment hooks above the rear doors - Compartment behind the rear center armrest (on vehicles without a pass-through* or refrigerator*) - Cell phone holder* in the right rear door - Bag hooks* in the luggage compartment A WARNING - When driving, do not leave any hard objects on the rear window shelf or allow your pet to sit on the shelf. They could become a hazard for vehicle occupants in the event of sudden braking or a crash. - Any articles of clothing that you have hung up must not interfere with the driver's view. The coat hooks are designed only for lightweight clothing . Never hang any clothing with hard, pointed or heavy objects in the pockets on the coat hooks. During sudden braking or in an accident - especially if the airbag is deployed - these objects could injure any passengers inside the vehicle. - To reduce the risk of personal injury in an accident or sudden stop, always keep the glove compartment closed while driving. - Read and follow all WARNINGS ~ page 244, Important safety instructions on the side airbag system. - Hang clothes in such a way that they do not impair the driver's vision. - The coat hooks must only be used for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp edged objects in the pockets which may interfere with the side curtain airbag deployment and can cause personal injury in a crash . - Do not use coat hangers for hanging clothing on the coat hooks as this can interfere with proper deployment of the side curtain airbags in an accident. 64 - Do not hang heavy objects on the coat hooks, as they could cause personal injury in a sudden stop. (D Note Objects on the rear shelf that rub against the rear window can damage the rear window defogger wires . (D Tips - A vent slot is located between the shelf and the rear window. Do not block the vent with any items you may place on the rear window shelf . - Do not place bulky items on the rear window shelf as they could restrict or block the driver's vision in the rear view mirror. Roof rack Applies to : vehicles wit h roof rack Fig. 78 Attachment points for the roof rack If luggage or cargo is to be carried on the roof, you must observe the following: - Only a specially designed roof rack may be used on your vehicle. These roof racks are the basis for a complete roof rack system. Additional attachments/carrier systems are necessary to transport luggage and sports equipment. We recommend roof racks and attachments from the Audi Genuine Accessories program . - When installing the roof rack, make sure that it is mounted only at the designated points on the roof ~ fig . 78. - The permissible roof load for your vehicle is 220 lbs (100 kg) . The roof load is the total of the weight of the roof rack, the attachments and the cargo you are carrying . However, you ..,. Seats must a lso note the permitted load of the carri er system being used. For the permitted axle load and the permitted total vehicle weight, refer to¢ page 333. A and storag e Tie-downs and luggage compartment net The luggage compartment net* prevents smaller objects from sliding out of place. WARNING - Follow the installat ion instructions provided with the roof rack system. If you do not secure the roof rack system and objects on the roof correctly, they could come loose from t he vehicle a nd cau se an a cciden t . - Using a roof rack system increases t he risk of an accide nt, because it changes the dr iving chara cteristics by s hift ing t he center of grav ity and/or t he increasing the surface area exposed to wind. Adapt your driving and speed to the current conditions. Fig. 79 Luggage compartment: location of t he t ie-downs @) Note Make sure th at the open lugg age compar t ment lid an d t he t ilting/sliding sunroof* do no t come into contac t wit h objects on the roof . @) For the sake of the environment Your veh icle will use mo re fuel d ue to t he increased wind resistance . So remove t he roof rack after using it. Luggage Fig. 80 Luggage compa rtment: cargo net stretched out .,.To secure the luggage compartmen t net *, fold the tie-down retainer upward¢ fig. 79. .,.Attach the hooks for the luggage compartment net" into the tie -downs¢ fig. 80. compartment General information & WARNING Read and follow the important safety precautions in~ page 213, Storing cargo correctly. C) .... C0 ,-... "' .... "' 0 0 :r <t 65 S ea ts and s tor a ge Pass-through bag with ski Securing the ski bag Applies to: vehicles with pass-through and ski bag Preparing the pass-through Applies to: vehicles with pass-through and ski bag Long objects, such as skis, can be transported the bag. in Fig. 83 Luggage compartment: securing the bag* Fig. 81 Rear bench seat: removing the protective cover Fig. 8 4 Rear bench seat: securing the bag There are two straps with hooks @ on the sides of the bag* r=;, fig. 83 . There is also a securing strap @ c::>fig. 84 on the bag. Fig. 82 Rear center armrest: applying the protect ive cover • Fold down the rear center armrest and the cover behind it • To remove the protective cover, press the button<=>fig. 81 . • To protect the front area of the center armrest, position the cover as show n in the image <=>fig. 82 and press down on its suction cups. • Push the packed bag* through the opening from the luggage compa rtment. The zipper must face toward the rear. • Secure the bag r:::;,page 66. • To secure the bag in the luggage compartment, engage the hooks into the rear tie-downs r:::;, fig. 83 . • Tighten the strap on the bag to prevent the objects in the bag from slid ing around r:::;,fig. 84. .&_WARNING - The big is only intended for transpo rting skis and other light objects . To reduce the risk of serious injuries, never transport heavy or sharp obj ects in the bag. - After load ing, the bag m ust be secured w ith the st rap. - Make sure that all object s that you are transporting in the pass-through are secure. They could slide around and increase the risk of injury when braking or during an accident. 66 - ~ Seats (D Tips - Only fold the bag up if it is dry. - When transporting skis or snowboards, tighten the securing strap between the bindings. - Lay skis in the bag with the points facing forward and snowboards and ski pole points facing the rear. Refrigerator Introduction Applies to: vehicles with refrigerator Clean the refrigerator before the first use ~ table on page 308. You can only switch the refrigerator on, if: - the temperature in the luggage compartment is less than 131 ° F (55 °(). If the refrigerator is switched on , it will automatically switch off if the temperature in the luggage compartment exceeds 131 ° F (55 °() . If the temperature goes back below 131 ° F (55 °(), the refrigerator will automatically switch on again. - The charge level of the vehicle battery is suffi. cient. The refrigerator is automatically switched off if the electrical system voltage falls below the spec ified minimum value. This prevents the vehicle battery from discharging . The refrigerator automatically switches back on if th e electrical system voltage increases again, for example after starting the vehicle. and storage - The maximum load capacity for the freezer is 5.5 lbs (2 .5 kg). - Never overload the refrigerator. There is a risk of injury in the event of a collision or sudden braking. - The refrigerator cover must always be closed and locked while driving. The refrigerator contents could enter the vehicle interior during a collision or sudden braking maneuver, which increases the risk of injury. - Never store flammable fluids, gas containers and similar objects in the refrigerator due to the risk of an explosion . This also applies to goods and products that can emit volatile or flammable gases. -At temperatures of 32° F (0 °() and lower, frozen liquid inside glass containers can cause the containers to burst. (D Note - The ventilation openings for the refrigerator are at the rear panel trim panel in the luggage compartment and must not be covered. - If the refrigerator is not functioning correctly, turn it off to prevent any damage. Have it checked by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility . Operation Applies to: vehicles with refrigerator When the cooling function is working optimally, the cooling function reaches 43° F (+6 °C) and the free zing function reaches 21 ° F (-6 °C). The cooling temperature in the refrigerator also depends on the luggage compartment temperature. When the temperature in the luggage compartment is high, there may only be a limited cooling effect. .&, WARNING C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 To avoid any injury risks to the passengers caused by the refrigerator, the following safety precautions must be followed: Fig. 85 Rear center armres t - Depending on the equipment , the refrigerator may be located in the rear behind the center armrest or behind the sun shade. It refrigerates or freezes only when the ignition is switched on. ..,. 0 :r <t 67 Seats and storage Opening and closing the refrigerator .,.Pull the release lever CD<=? fig. 85 to open the refrigerator . .,.Push the cover back into its closed position to close the refrigerator . The cover is closed correctly if the release lever CDaudibly engages. Switching on/off .,.Press the button @ <=? fig. 85 to switch the cooling function on or off. The symbo l in the button lights up when the function is switched on . .,.Press the button @ to switch the freezer function on or off. The symbol in the button lights up when the function is switched on. (D Tips - To avoid a build-up of condensat ion, only open the refrigerator cover as briefly and quickly as possible. - Do not place any warm food or drinks in the refrigerator. 68 Warm Warm Deluxe climate and cold automatic control Description The climate con t rol system warms, coo ls and re moves humidity from the air in the vehicle inte rior. It is the most effective when the w indows and sunroof* are closed. If there is a bu ild-up of heat ins ide the veh icle, ven t ilat ion can he lp to speed up the cooling process . In all heating mode functions, except for defrost, the blower on ly switches to a higher speed once the eng ine coolant has reached a sufficient temperature. Pollutant filt er The po llutant filter removes pollutants such as d ust and pollen from the air. Key recognition The clima t e control settings are au tomatically st ored and assig ned t o th e remo t e contro l key that is in use. & WARNING Poor visibility can lead to accidents. - For safer d riving, keep all windows free of ice, snow and fo g. - Become familia r as quickly as possible wit h the correct use and function of the climate contro l system, especially with the defrosting and defogging function. - When the temperat ure is below freezing, only use the windsh ield washer system after and cold the windshield has been warmed by the climate control system. The washer fluid could freeze on the windshie ld and impair visib ility . (D Note - If you suspect that the climate contro l system is damaged, switch the system off to prevent further damage and have it checked by an authorized Audi dealer o r a uthorized Aud i Serv ice Facility. - Repa irs to the Audi climate control system require special technical know ledge and special tools . See an autho rized Aud i dea le r or authorized Audi Service Fac ility. @ For the sake of the environment Reducing the amount of fuel used also reduces the amount of pollu t an t s that enter the air . @ Tips - To prevent interference with the heat ing and coo ling output and to prevent the windows from fogging over , th e a ir intake in fro nt of th e windshie ld m ust be free of ice, snow or leave s. - Condensat ion from the coo ling system can dr ip a nd form a pudd le of water un der t he vehicle. Th is is normal and does not me a n t here is a lea k. - The e nergy ma nagemen t system may tem por ar ily swi tch off cert a in functions, such as the seat heating * or rear window defogger . These systems are ava ila ble again as soon as the energy supply has been restored. 0 co .... N ,..... .... N 0 0 :c '<t 69 Warm and cold Operation We recommend pressing the !AUTOI button and setting the temperature to 72 °F (22 °C). Fig. 8 6 Cockpit contr ols vehicle . Airflow from outside is blocked w hen the climate control system is switched off. IAICISwitching cooling mode on and off The air is not coo led and humid ity is not removed whe n coo ling mode is sw itched off . This can ca use fog on the windows. The coo ling mode swi t ches off automatically whe n t here a re cold outside t emperatures. Fig. 87 Rear contro ls: 4 -zone de luxe auto matic climate con tro l Press the bu t tons t o turn the func t ions on or off . The LEDin a button will light up when the func tion is sw itched on. Use the knob to adjust the temperature, the blower speed and the air distribution*. The driver and front passenger settings can be adjusted separate ly. Applies to: vehicles with 4-zone del uxe automatic climate cont rol You can adj ust t he rea r left and righ t sides using the rea r contro ls ¢ fig. 87 . IOFF!Switching the climate cont rol system I""'!Switching recirculation mode on and off In recirculat ion mode , the air inside the vehicle is circulated and filtered . This prevents the unfi lte red air ou t side the ve hicle from en t eri ng the vehicle interior. We recommend sw itching recircu lation mode on whe n driving through a t unnel or when sitting in traffic ¢ & . The !AU T O I button or I@ FRON T I but ton switches recircu lation mode off . IA UTO ISwitching automatic mode on Automat ic mode maintains a constant tempera ture inside the vehicle. Air temperature , a irflow and air distrib ution are controlled automatica lly. on/ off The IO FFI button switches the climate contro l system on or off . It also sw itches on whe n you press the knob . The !OFF I button in the rear only sw itches the A/C system on/off in the rear of t he 70 If press and hold the button longer, 72 °F (22 °() will be set . .,,. Warm Adjusting the temperature Temperatures between 60 °F (+16 °C) and 84 °F (+28 °C) can be set . Outside of this range, LO or HI will appear in the climate control system display. At both of these settings, the climate control system runs continuously at maximum cooling or heating power. There is no temperature regulation. ~ Adjusting the amount of air You can adjust the airf low manually to suit your needs. The blower should always run at a low set ting to prevent the windows from fogging and to ensure a continuous exchange of air inside the vehicle. To have the airf low regulated automat ically, press the IAUTO I button . ~ Adjusting the air distribution You can manually select the vents where the air will flow. To have the air distribution regu lated automatically, press the IAUTO ! button. [il /~*Adjusting seat heating/ventilation* Pressing the button switches the seat heating/ venti lation on at the highest setting (level 3). The LEDs indicate the temperature level. To reduce the temperature, press the button again. To switch the seat heating/venti lation off, press the button repeatedly until the LED turns off. After 10 minutes, the seat heating/ventilation automatically switches from level 3 to level 2. l<wFRONT I Switching the defroster on and off The windshield and side windows are defrosted or cleared of condensation as quickly as possible. The maximum amount of air flows mainly from the vents below the windshield. Recirculation mode switches off. The temperature should be set to approximately 72 °F (22 °(). The IAUTO Ibutton switches the defroster off . IQiilREARI Switching the rear window defogger on and off ~ .... ~ N 8 The rear window defogger only operates when the engine is running. It switches off automatically after 10 to 20 minutes, depending on the outside temperature. and cold To prevent the rear window defogger from switching off automatica lly, press and hold the llliilREAR ! button for more than three seconds. This is stored until the ignition is switched off. ISYNC ! Synchronization* When synchron izatio n is switched on, the settings fo r the driver's side are applied to the front passenger's side (except for seat heating/ventilat ion*). The rear is also synchronized in vehicles with the 4-zone deluxe automatic climate control system*. Synchronization switches off if the sett ings are adjusted on the front passenger's side or in the rear*. You can synchronize the sett ings in a row by pressing and holding a knob. For example, to apply the sett ings for the front passenger's side to the driver's side, press and hold the knob on the front passenger's side. Vents You can open or close the center and rear vents in the cockpit and the vents in the rear center console and door pillars using the ridged thumb wheels. The levers adjust the direction of the airflow from the vents. Residual heat You can act ivate the residual heat function when the ignition is switched off by pressing and holding the ~ button. The residual heat from the coolant is used to heat the vehicle interior . The residual heat function switches off automatically after about 30 minutes. _&.WARNING - You should not use t he recirculation mode for an extended period of t ime since no fresh air is drawn in. With the air-condition ing switched off, the windows can fog up, which increases the risk of an accident. - Individuals with reduced sensit ivity to pain or temperature could develop burns when using the seat heating funct ion. To reduce the risk of injury, these individua ls should not use seat heating . 0 :c '<t 71 Warm (D and cold Steering wheel heating Note Applies to: vehicles with steering wheel heating To avoid damage to the heat ing e lements in the seats, do not kneel o n the seats or place heavy loads o n a small a rea of t he seat. The steering wheel rim con be heated . Basic settings The climate control system basic settings ore accessed in the Infotainment system . .,. Select: the ICARI fun cti on but t o n > Car systems contro l button > AC. Rear seat settings* Fig. 88 Steerin g col umn : steeri ng w heel heati ng butto n Wh en th is func t ion is selec t ed, a ll set t ings for t he rea r can be adju st ed t hroug h the climat e co nt rol system in t he cockpit. The climat e contro l syst em set t ings cannot be adjus t ed in the rear seat at the same time. This fu nction switches off after a certa in period of time or when one of the d ia ls in the cockpit is pressed. Auto recirculation* The sensit ivity level of the aut oma t ic recirculation mode can be set at various levels from Off to Max. Whe n recirculation mode la> Iis switched on, the air rec irculat io n is contro lled automatically. If the windows fog up, press t he I@FRON T Ibutton . Footwell temperature You can adj ust the footwell temperature it is coo le r or warmer . so that Solar roof* Parking vent ilati o n is cont rolled a utoma tic a lly in t he Auto settin g . W hen the ignit io n is swit ched off, solar-powered park ing ventil at ion may switch on, as long as - there is sufficient sunlight, the outside temperature is not too low, the sunroof is closed or tilted and Auto (Infot ainment system) is set 72 .,. Pres s t he [i] butt on t o switch st ee ring wheel he atin g on/o ff. The mess ag e Steering wheel heating on/ Steering wheel heating off ap pears in the instrument cluster disp lay. The t empe rature is ma inta ined at a constant leve l when st ee ring wheel hea ti ng is switc hed on . The steer ing whee l hea t ing set t ings ar e stored aut om at ica lly and assig ned t o the rem ot e cont rol key th at is in use. D r iving Driving General lying parts such as spoilers and exhaust system parts do not bottom out and get damaged . information Breaking in A new vehicle must be broken in, and the breakin distance should be 1,000 mi les (1,500 km). Do not drive at speeds that w ill exceed 2/3 of the maximum permitted engine speed (RPM) for the first 600 miles (1,000 km) , and avoid full acceleration during this period . You may gradually start increasing the RPM and the speed between 600 miles (1,000 km) and 1,000 miles (1,500 km). During the first hours of use, the engine has a higher internal friction than later on when all moving parts have settled into place with each other. New tires co .... N - The water must not be any higher than the bottom of the vehicle body. - Do not drive faste r than walk ing speed. After driving through water or m ud, the effectiveness of the brakes may be reduced due to moisture on the brake rotors and brake pads. A few careful brake applications should dry off the brakes. (D Note - Vehicle components such as the engine, transmission, suspension or electrical system can be severely damaged by driving through water . - Always switch off the Start/Stop system when driving through water r::;,page78. {i) If your vehicle is running on new tires, dr ive particularly careful for the first 350 miles (500 kilometers) after fitting . 0 Note the following to reduce the risk of vehicle damage when driving through water, for example on flooded roads: .&_WARNING Do not drive at too low of an engine speed (rpm). Shift down if the engine stops running "smoothly" . Extremely high engine speeds are automati cally reduced . New tires tend to be slippery and must also be "broken-in". Be sure to remember this during the first 350 miles (500 kilometers). Brake gently . Avoid following closely behind other vehicles or other situations that might require sudden, hard brak ing. Driving through water on roads = How the vehicle is driven during the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km) also affects the engine quality. Drive at moderate engine speeds after the initial break-in period, part icularly when running a cold engine . This will reduce engine wear and improve the mileage . .&_WARNING This is especially true for vehicles with low-s lun g chassis (sports chassis)* and fully loaded vehicles . Tips - Determine the depth before driving through water. - - Do not stop the vehicle, drive in reverse or switch the engine off when driving through water. - Keep in mind that oncom ing vehicles may create waves that raise the water level and make it too deep for your vehicle to drive through safely. - Avoid dr iving through salt water, because this can cause corrosion . Avoid damaging the vehicle ,..... .... N 0 0 :c When you are driving on poor roads, or over curbs, steep ramps, etc., make certain that low- '<t 73 Dr iv ing Economical and environmentally-friendly driving The amount of fue l consumption, the environ mental impact and the wear to the engine, brak es and tir es d epends mostly on your driving style. With an anticipatory and economic driving style, fuel consumption can be reduced by approximately 10-15% . The following tips will help you conserve the environment and your money at the same time . Ant icipatory driving A vehicle uses the most fuel when acce lerating. When you drive with ant icipat ion , you do not need to brake as often and so you accelerate less . When possible, let your ve hicle coast w ith a gear engaged, for example , when you notice that the next traffic light is red. This produ ces a n eng ine braking effect, which helps to protect the brakes and tires and reduces the emissions and fuel consumption to zero (fuel shut-off during decelera tion). Shift effici ently An effective way to save f uel is to upshift earlie r. Staying in a gear too long uses fue l unnecessari ly. Press down on the accelerator pedal slowly and avoid "kick-down". Avoid full acceleration mediate ly after st arting the engine . Avoid high RPMs whi le doing this. Have maintenance performed regularly By having maintenance pe rformed regu la rly on you r vehicle, you can help to reduce fuel con sumption before you even sta rt to drive. The maintenance condition of your vehicle not on ly affects traffic safety and long-term value but al so impacts fuel consumption. A poorly mainta ined engine can lead to fuel consumption that is 10% higher than normal. Avoid short trip s The engine and exha ust cleaning system must reach their optima l operating temperature to effect ively reduce consumpt ion and emissions. A cold engine uses a d isproportionately high amount of fue l. The engine reaches operating temperat ure and cons umption no rmalizes on ly after approximate ly four kilometers. Check the tire pressure To save fue l, ma ke sure the t ires are always inflated to t he corre ct pressure ¢ page 291 . The fuel consumption can increase by 5% if the pressure is only 0 .5 bar too low. Due to the increased roll ing resistance, low tire pressures w ill also lead to greater tire wear and will affect driving behavior. You sho uld rare ly t ravel at the maximum vehicle speed. High speeds cause a disp roportiona t ely high increase in fuel consumption, emissions and traffic noise . Slower driving saves fuel. Drive with summer tires when possib le because th is can increase fue l economy by up to 10%. Reduce idling time Since eve ry po und of extra weight increases fuel consump t ion, it pays to remove any unnecessa ry weight . The Start-Stop system * helps to reduce the idling time automatically . In vehicles witho ut the StartSt op sys t em* , it is efficient to switch the eng ine off when stopped at ra ilroad cross ings a nd long red lights . Stopping t he engine for 30 -40 sec onds already saves more fuel than the amount of extra fuel needed to restart the eng ine . It t akes a very long t ime in idle to wa rm t he engine up to operating temperature . Wea r and emissions are especially high in the warm -up phase. Therefore, yo u should begin driving im- 74 Eliminate unnecessary we ight A roof rac k increases the w ind resis t an ce on the vehicle a nd shou ld be removed when it is not needed . You will save approximately 12% of you r fuel when at speeds from 62-75 mph (100-120 km/h) . Save energy The eng ine d rives t he genera t or , which gene rates e lectric ity; the fuel consumpt ion also increases with t he demand for e lect ricity . The refore, switch ..,_ D r ivi ng e lectrical equipment off when you no longer need it. Examples of equipment that use a lot of energy are a ir blowers at a high setting, the rear window defogger and seat heating*. CDNote Steering Adjusting the steering wheel position The steering column can be power adjusted up and down and forward and back. Do not leave engine idling unattended after starting . If warning lights should come on to ind icate improper ope ration, they wou ld go unheeded. Extended idling also produces heat, wh ich could result in overheat ing or other damage to the vehicle or other property . CDNote - Have your vehicle maintained properly and in accordance with the service recommendations in you r War ranty & Maintenance booklet. Lack of proper maintena nce as well as improper use of t he vehicle will imp a ir the funct ion of the emission contro l system and could lead to damage. - Do not alter or remove any component of the Emission Control System un less approved by the manufacturer . - Do no t a lt er or remove any devi ce, such as heat shie lds, switches, ignition wires, valves, which are designed to protect your vehicle's Emission Control System and other important veh icle components . @ Tips The consumption estimates as published by ENVIRONMENTALPROTECTIONAGENCY (EPA) and Transport Canada may not correspond to your actual consumption on the road, which will vary depending upon vehicle load and speed, road and weather condi t ions, t rip length, etc. C) .... C0 Fig. 89 Switch for steering col umn adjust ment Requirement: the driver's seat is set correct ly. "' To adjust the he ight, pr ess the sw itch up/down . The stee ring co lumn will continue movi ng as long as you are p ressing the switc h. "' To move the steering wheel forwa rd or back, press the switch forward/back. The steering col umn will continue mov ing as long as you are pressing the switch. The steering whee l can a lso be adjusted when the ignition is switched off . In veh icles with memory func t ion*, the steering co lumn set t ings are st ored t oget her w ith t he seat position. A WARNING - Improper use of stee ring wheel adjustment and improper seating posit ion can cause serious persona l injury. - Adju st the steering wheel column only when the vehicle is not moving to prevent loss of veh icle control. - Adjust the driver's seat or steer ing whee l so that the re is a m inimum of 10 in (25 cm) between yo ur chest and the steering wheel r::;,page 208, fig. 218 . If you cannot ma intain this minimum dist ance, the airbag system cannot pro tect you properly. "' ""'.... 0 0 :r <t 75 Driving - If physical limitations prevent you from sitting 10 in (25 cm) or more from the steering wheel, check with your authorized Audi dealer to see if adaptive equipment is available . - If the steering wheel is aligned with your face, the supplemental driver's airbag cannot prov ide as much protection in an accident. Always make sure that the steering wheel is aligned with your chest. -Always hold the steering wheel with your hands at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions to reduce the risk of personal injury if the driver's airbag deploys. - Never hold the steer ing wheel at the 12 o'clock position or with your hands inside the steering wheel rim or on the steering wheel hub . Holding the steering wheel the wrong way can cause serious injuries to the hands, arms and head if the driver's airbag deploys. Entry assistance Starting and stopping the engine Starting the engine The ! STAR T ENGINE STOPI button switches the ignition on and starts the engine . Fig. 90 Cente r conso l e: START ENGINE STOP but t on Switching the ignition on/off • To switch the ignit ion on or off, press the !START ENGINE STOPI button . Do not press the brake pedal while doing this. Starting the engine Easy seat entry makes it easier to enter and exit the vehicle by adjusting the steering column automatically. • Press the brake pedal¢ .&_. • Press the I START ENGINE STOP I button ¢ fig. 90 . The engine will start . • In the Infotainment system, select the !CAR I function button > Car systems control button > Vehicle settings> Seats> Driver's seat> Easy seat entry> On. If the engine does not start immediately, the starting procedure stops automatically after a short time . Repeat the starting process. Start/Stop system When easy seat entry is switched on, the steering column goes back up into the park position when the ignition is switched off. After entering the vehicle, the steering column returns to the stored position once the ignition is switched on . Read the information in ¢ page 78, Start/Stop system. A WARNING - To reduce the risk of poisoning, never allow the engine to run in confined spaces. (D Note Avoid high engine speed, full throttle, and heavy engine load if the engine has not reached operating temperature yet. You could damage the engine. 76 .,.. Driving @ Tips - Some noise after starting the engine is normal and is no cause for concern. - If you leave the vehicle with the ignition switched on, the ignition will switch off after a certain amount of time. Make sure that electrical equipment such as the exterior lights are switched off. Stopping the engine "'Bring the vehicle to a full stop. "'Select the P or N selector lever position. "'Press the ISTART ENGI N E STOPI button r::?v page 76, fig. 90. Steering lock The steering locks when you turn the engine off using the ISTART ENGINE STOPI button and open the driver's door. The locked steering helps prevent vehicle theft. Otherwise, there is the risk that the vehicle could roll unintentionally. @ Note If the engine has been under heavy load for an extended period of time, heat builds up in the engine compartment after the engine is switched off and there is a risk of damaging the engine. For this reason, let the engine run at idle for approximately two minutes before shutting it off. (D Tips After the engine has been switched off, the radiator fan can continue to run for up to 10 minutes - even with the ignition switched off . It can also switch on again after some time if the coolant temperature rises as the result of heat buildup or if the engine is already warm and the engine compartment is also heated by the sun's rays. Emergency off function Messages in the instrument cluster display If it is absolutely necessary, the engine can also be turned off while driving in the R, Dor S selector lever position at speeds below 6 mph (10 km/ h). To stop the engine, press and hold the ISTART ENGI N E STOPI button and also press the brake pedal. & 0 co .... N ,..._ .... N Turn off ignition before leaving car This message appears and a warning tone sounds if you open the driver's door when the ignition is switched on. Press brake pedal to start engine WARNING - Never turn off the engine before the vehicle has come to a complete stop. The full function of the brake booster and the power steering is not guaranteed. You must use more force to turn or brake. Because you cannot steer and brake as you usually would, this could lead to accidents and serious injuries . - Always take the key with you whenever you leave your vehicle. Otherwise, the engine could be started or electrical equipment such as the power windows could be operated. This can lead to serious injury. - For safety reasons, always park the vehicle with the selector lever in the P position . This message appears when you press the ISTART E NGIN E STOP ! button to start the engine and do not press the brake pedal while doing so . The engine can only be started when the brake pedal is pressed. = Key not in vehicle? This indicator light turns on and this message appears if the ignition key was removed from the vehicle when the engine was running. If the ignition key is no longer in the vehicle, you cannot switch on the ignition or start the engine once you stop it . You also cannot lock the vehicle from the outside. Shift to P, otherwise vehicle can roll away. Doors do not lock if lever is not in P. 0 0 :c '<t 77 Dr iv ing This driver message appears for safety reasons if the transmission has not be en shifted to the P position when you switch the ign ition off. Move the selector lever to the P posit ion. Otherwise the vehicle is not protected from rolling and it cannot be locked . II Key is not recognized. Hold back of key against marked area. See owner's manual If t he indicator light t urns on and this message appears, there is a malfunction ~ page 78. See owner's manual must appear and the dicator light must tu rn on . .,. Hold t he remote cont rol key vertically in the locat ion indicated t1>)~ fig. 91. .,.Press t he brake pedal. .,.Press the ISTART ENGINE STOP Ibutton . The eng ine will start. .,. Drive to an authori zed Audi dealer or author ized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfu nction corrected . (D Turn off ignition before leaving car This message appea rs if the dr iver 's door is opened while the ignition is switched on . Always sw itch off the ignition if you are leaving the vehicle. Shift to P and turn off ignition before leaving car, otherwi se vehicle can roll away II in- Tips You can view the message aga in by pressing the lSTART ENGI N E STOP I button . Start/Stop system Description Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system This message appears if the driver 's door is ope ned while the ignition is switched on and the transmission has not been shifted to the P position . Sh ift the t ransm iss ion into the P posit io n a nd turn off the ignition if you are leav ing the veh icle. Ot herwise t he vehi cle could rol l. Starting the engine when there is a malfunction It may not be possible to start the engine under certain circumstances, for example if the battery in the vehicle key is drained, if interference is affected the key or if there is a system malfunction. The St a rt/Stop sys t em can help increase fue l eco nomy and reduce CO2 emissions . In Sta rt /St op mode, the eng ine shuts off automa t ically when the vehicle is stopped, such as at a traffic light . The ignition rema ins switched on duri ng th is stop phase . The engine w ill restart automat ically when needed . The last Start/S t op system setting is restored when t he ignition is sw itched on . Basic requirements for Start / Stop mode - The d river's doo r must be closed . The driver 's seat belt much be fas t ened. The hood must be closed. The vehicle m ust have driven faster than 2.5 mph (4 km/h) since the last t ime it stopped. c::==== =~ ± N --------~ - A trailer m ust not be hitched to the vehicle . A Fig. 9 1 Cente r conso le/ remot e cont rol key: sta rt ing the eng ine if t here is a malfunct ion Requirement: the message Key is not recognized . Hold back of key against marked area. 78 WARNING - Never turn off the engine before the vehicle has come to a complete stop. The full func t ion of the bra ke booster and the power steer ing is not guaranteed. You must use mo re fo rce to tu rn o r bra ke. Because you canno t stee r a nd bra ke as yo u usually D r ivi ng would, this could lead to accidents and serious injur ies. - To reduce the risk of injuries, make s ure that the Start/Stop system is turned off when working in the eng ine compartment c:>page80. (D Note Always sw itch off the Start/Stop system when driving through water c:>page 80. Starting / stopping the engine Applies to: vehicles with Sta rt/Stop system You can de t ermine for yourse lf if t he engine will stop or not by red ucing or increasing the amount of force you use to press the brake pedal. For examp le, if you only lightly press on the brake pedal in stop-and-go traffic or when turning, the engine will not switch off when the vehicle is sta t io nary . As soon as you press the brake down harder, the engine w ill switch off. (0 Tips - Press the brake pedal during a Stop phase t o keep the vehicle from rolling. - The ignit ion w ill tur n off if you press the ! ST ART ENGINE STOPI button d uring a stop phase. General information Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system The standard Start/Stop mode con be canceled for various system-related reasons. Engine does not switch off Fig. 92 Instrument cluster: eng ine switched off (stop phase) ~ Slow the vehicle to a stop us ing the brake and keep pressing the brake pedal. The engine will switch off. The rt] indicator light appears in t he infor mat ion line in t he ins tr umen t cluster display. ~ When you take your foot off the brake peda l, t he engine restarts. The ind icator light turns off. Additional information The engine w ill swit ch off in the P, D, N and S positions as we ll as in manu a l mode. In the P pos ition, the engine will also remain off if you take your foot off the brake pedal. The engine starts again when you se lect another selector lever position and take your foot off the brake pedal. If you select the R pos ition dur ing a Stop phase, the eng ine will start agai n. C) .... Shift from D t o P quickly t o prevent t he engine C0 ,.... "' .... "' 0 from sta rt ing unintentionally whe n shifti ng through R. Befo re each stop phase, the system checks if certa in conditions have been met. If the r,J indicator light appears in the instrument cluster display, the eng ine will not be stopped, for examp le in t he following situat ions : - The engine has not reached the minim um required tempe rature for Start/Stop mode . - The interior temperature selected by the A/C system has not been reached. - The outside temperature is extremely high/low. -The winds hield is being defrosted c:>poge 71. - The pa rking syst em* is be switched on. - The vehicle battery cha rge level is too low. - The steering wheel is t ur ned at a sha rp angle or is moving. - After engaging the reve rse gear . - On sharp inclines. Engine automat ically restarts The standard Start/Stop mode will be canceled during a stop phase in the following sit uat ions . The engine restarts without any action by the driver . 0 :r <t 79 Dr iv ing - The interior temperature differs from the temperature se lected in the A/C system. - The windshield is being defrosted ~ page 71 . - The brake pedal is pressed seve ral t imes in a row. - The vehicle ba t te ry charge leve l is too low. - Power consumption is high . Manually switching the Start/ Stop system off / on Applies to : vehicles with Start/Stop syst em If you do not wish to use the system, you con switch it off manually. Ignition is switched off automaticall y To prevent the veh icle battery from drain ing, the ignit ion will switch off automatically under the following conditions: - The vehicle must have already been driven. The Start/Stop system has stopped the engine. The driver's door must be open . The driver's safety be lt mus t be unb uckled. The brake pedal must not be pressed . The vehicle must be stationary . Fig. 93 Cente r console: Start/Stop system butto n .,.To switch the Start/Stop-System off/on manually, press the l(A) ~Ibutton. The LEDin the button turns on when the system is switched off. In this case, the activated low beam is replaced by the parking light. The parking lights will sw itch off after app roximately 30 minutes or when you lock the vehicle . 0) If the Start/Stop system has not turned off the engine or if you have sw itched the Start/Stop system off manually, the ignition will not be automat ically switched off and the engine will conti nue to run ~ & . A WARNING To red uce the risk of poisoning, neve r allow t he engine t o run in confined spaces. (D Tips If you select the D, N or S selector lever position after shifting into reverse, the vehicle m ust be driven faste r than 6 mph (10 km/h) in orde r fo r the engine t o switch off again. - Tips If yo u switch the system off d uring a stop phase, the engine will start aga in automatically . Messages in the instrument cluster display Applies to : vehicles with Start/Stop syste m Start-stop system deactivated: Please restart engine manually This message appears when spec ific cond itions are not met during a stop phase. The St art/S t op system will not be a ble t o resta rt the eng ine. If the D or R se lector lever positions were engaged, P will be selected a utomat ically . The eng ine must be started with the I START ENGI N E STOPI button. Start -stop system: System fault! Currently unavailable There is a ma lfunction in the Start/Stop system. Drive the vehicle to an authorized Audi dealer or aut horized Service Facility as soon as possible to have the malfunction corrected . 80 Driving Electromechanical parking brake .. To prevent the parking brake from releasing automatically, pull and hold the(®) switch and press the accelerator peda l. The parking brake remains set and prevents the vehicle from rolling backward . .,.You can release the<®>switch again once you are sure that you are giving enough driving force to the wheels by press ing the accelerator pedal. Emergency braking function Fig. 94 Center console: park ing brake Your vehicle is equipped with an electromechani cal parking brake @ ~ fig. 94. The parking brake is designed to prevent the vehicle from rolling unintentionally and replaces the hand brake. Setting/manually releasing the parking brake .. Pull the<®>switch to set the parking brake. The LEDin the switch illuminates. The (USA models)/ . (Canada models) indicator light also turns on in the instrument cluster display. .. To release the parking brake manua lly, press the brake or accelerator pedal while the ignit ion is switched on and press the© switch at the same time . The LEDin the button and the indicator light in the display turn off. Releasing the parking brake automatically Requirement: the driver's door must be closed, the driver's safety belt must be latched and the parking brake must be set. .,.To start driving and release the parking brake automatically, press the accelerator peda l as usual. In addition to releasing the parking brake automat ically, other convenience and safety funct ions are available when you start driving~ page 82, Starting from a stop. Preventing the automatic parking brake release C) .... The vehicle could begin rolling unintentionally, "' ""'.... depending on the hill or if towing a trailer. 0 C0 You can use the emergency braking function in an emergency situation, or if the standard brake operation malfunctions or is disabled. .. Pull and hold the(®) switch. .. As soon as you release the <®> switch or accelerate, the braking stops. Pulling and holding the© switch while driving the vehicle activates the emergency braking function. The vehicle is braked at all four wheels by activating the hydraulic brake system. The braking effect is similar to heavy braking ~ _&. To reduce the risk of activating the emergency braking by mistake, a warning tone (buzzer) sounds when the© switch is pulled . Emergency braking stops as soon as the© switch is released or the accelerator pedal is pressed. Parking .. Press the brake pedal to stop the vehicle. .,.Pull the(®) switch to set the parking brake. .,.Select the P selector lever posit ion. .,.Turn the engine off ~ _&. .,.Turn the steering wheel when parking on inclines so that the wheels will roll into the curb if the vehicle starts moving. & WARNING - - Do not press the accelerator peda l inadvertently if a gear is selected when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running. Otherwise, the vehicle will start to move immediately and this could result in an accident. - Emergency braking sho uld only be used in an emergency, when the normal brake pedal has failed or the brake pedal is obstructed . 0 :r <t 81 ..,. Driving During emergency braking, your vehicle will brake similar to heavy braking. ESCand the associated components (ABS, ASR, EDL) cannot overcome the laws of physics. In corners and when road or weather conditions are bad, a full brake application can cause the vehicle to skid or the rear end to swerve, which increases the risk of an accident. - If the power supply fails, you cannot set the parking brake if it is released. In this case, park the vehicle on level ground and secure it by placing the selector lever in the P position. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance. - Always take the vehicle key with you when leaving your vehicle, even for a short period of time. This applies particularly when children remain in the vehicle . Otherwise children could start the engine, release the parking brake or operate electrical equipment such as power windows, which increases the risk of an accident. - No one should remain in the vehicle when it is locked - especially children. Locked doors make it more difficult for emergency workers to get into the vehicle, which puts lives at risk. (D Tips When stopping at a traffic signal or stopping in city traffic, you can set the parking brake manually. The vehicle does not have to be held with the brake pedal. The parking brake eliminates the tendency to creep when a selector lever position is engaged. As soon as you press the accelerator pedal, the parking brake releases automatically and your vehicle starts to move c>page 82. (D} Tips - Occasional noises when the parking brake is set and released are normal and are not a cause for concern. - The parking brake goes through a self-test cycle at regular intervals when the vehicle is stopped. Any noises associated with this are normal. 82 - If there is a power failure, the parking brake will not set if it is released, and it will not release if it is set ¢ &. . See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance . Starting from a stop Various convenience and safety functions may be available when the vehicle begins driving, depending on vehicle equipment . Starting on hills with the parking brake set Requirement: the dr iver 's door must be closed and the driver's safety belt must be fastened. .,.To start driving comfortably when on a hill, set the parking brake and begin driving as usual. The braking force of the parking brake does not release automatically until the wheels build up enough driving force. Starting on hills with hill hold assist Hill hold assist makes it easier to start on hills. Requirement: the driver's door must be closed and the engine must be running . .,.To activate hill hold assist, press and hold the brake pedal for several seconds. The vehicle must be in an uphill direction of travel. After releasing the brake pedal, the braking power is maintained for a brief moment c>&. to pre vent the vehicle from rolling back when starting. During this time, you can easily begin to move your vehicle. &_ WARNING Applies to: vehicles with hill hold assist - If you do not begin driving immediately or the engine stalls after releasing the brake pedal, your vehicle may begin to roll backward. Press the brake pedal or set the parking brake immediately . - The intelligen t technology of hill hold assist cannot overcome the limitations imposed by natural physical laws. The increased comfort offered by hill hold assist should not cause you to take safety risks . D r ivi ng - Hill hold assist cannot hold the veh icle in place on all hills (for example, if the ground is slippery or icy). - To reduce the risk of an accident, always make sure the vehicle is situated safely wh ile stat io nary. @ - This display appea rs brief ly if you change the sel e ctor leve r posit ion or if you pre ss the button pag e 83, fig . 96. The on the selector lever c::> current selector lever pos ition is shown with a white background. Selecting the selector lever position Automatic transmission Introduction The automat ic t ransmission is cont rolled e lectron ically. Power is transferred using a torque converter. The transm ission shifts up or down a utomat ica lly depending on w hich drive program is sele cted. When a moderate driving style is used , the transmission selects the most economical d riving mode. The t ransm iss ion upsh ifts at a lowe r RPM a nd downshifts at a highe r RPM to imp rove fuel effi ciency . The transm ission sw itches to a spo rty mode after a kick-down or when t he drive r uses a sporty driving style characterized by quick accelerator pedal movements, heavy acce leration , freq uent changes in speed and traveling at the maximum speed. If desired , the dr iver can also select t he gears page 86 . manually (tiptronic mode) c::> Indicator in the display Fig. 96 Selecto r lever -- p---- ----R--- --1 --- - N- -- --- - D/S - - Fig. 97 Pressing t he butto n on the se lector lever The current se lector lever position is disp layed on t he se lector lever c::>fig. 96 . .,.You may need to release the selector lever lock depending on wh ich selector lever pos ition is selected and which one yo u wou ld like to se lect c::> page 84, Selector lever lock . Fig. 9 5 Inst rument cluste r: selector lever position C) @ - The current sele ctor leve r position is d is- .... played continuously. In manua l mode, an Mis "' d isp layed in addi t ion to the gea r. ""'.... 0 C0 .,.To engage the ne ar est se lector lever posi t ion, move t he selector lever forw a rd/back until you fee l t he first pressure po int. The selector lever will return to its orig inal position . .,.To skip ove r one (or two) selector lever posi tions, move the selector lever past the first (and second) pressure po int into t he desired position . The selector lever will return to its or iginal position . For example, to move directly from the D selector lever position to P when stopping the vehicle, ll> 0 :r <t 83 Driving you can shift past the N and R selector lever positions. Selector lever lock The selector lever lock prevents you from selecting a position unintentionally, causing the vehicle to roll. When engaging some selector lever positions, you must press the button on the selector lever ¢ fig. 96 and/or press the brake pedal. You must press the brake pedal to engage a selector lever position when the engine is running and the vehicle is stationary. The arrows ~ fig. 97 indicate when you need to press the button on the selecto r lever. The selector lever does not lock if you shift from D to R within one second. This allows you to "rock" the vehicle to free it when it is stuck. P - Park This selector lever position prevents the vehicle from rolling . Only shift into park when the vehicle is stationary ~ &. . To engage the P selector lever position, press the button on the selector lever and shift into the P position. You can only shift out of park when the engine is running and you are pressing the brake pedal. To release the parking lock. press the button on the selector lever and select the desired position. P engages automatically when you switch the engine off while D, Sor R is engaged or in manual mode. If you switch the engine off when the N position is selected, the transmission remains in N for approximately 30 minutes and then Pis engaged. You must use the parking lock emergency release before towing the vehicle ~ page 88. R- Reverse The reverse gear is engaged in this position. Only select reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running at idle speed ~ ,&.. To engage the R selector lever position, press the button on the selector lever, press the brake pedal and move the selector lever into the R position. 84 The reverse lights turn on when you select the R selector lever position while the engine is running. N - Neutral (idle) The transmission is in idle in this position. To engage the N selector lever position, press the button on the selector lever and shift into the N position. If you switch the engine off when the N position is selected, the transmission remains in N for approximately 30 minutes and then Pis engaged . You cannot select the N position when the ignition is switched off. When driving through an automatic car wash, first select the N position and then turn the engine off ¢ page 306. For safety reasons, the vehicle cannot be locked when the transmission is in the N position. DIS - Driving forward When the transmission is in the D/S position, it can be operated either in the normal D mode or in the S sport mode . Move the selector lever back to engage the S sport mode. You can only select the S selector lever position when Dis engaged. To select the D selector lever position again when S is engaged, move the selector lever back ~ &. . To shift from N to D when traveling at speeds below 1 mph (2 km/h), press the brake pedal and shift into the D position ~ &. . In the normal mode D, the transmission automatically selects the suitable gear ratio . It depends on engine load , vehicle speed and driving style. Select the sport mode S for sporty driving. The vehicle makes full use of the engine's power. Shifting may become noticeable when accelerating. The S selector lever position engages automatically when you select dynamic mode in drive select . _&,WARNING - The vehicle can roll even if the ignition is switched off. - D r iv ing - To reduce the risk of an accident, never select the R or P posit ions while driving. - Power is sti ll transmitted to the wheels when the engine is running at idle. To prevent the veh icle from "creeping", you must keep your foot on the brake in all se lector lever positions (except P and N) when the engine is ru nning. Do not inadvertent ly press the acce le rat or pedal when the vehicle is sta t ionary. Otherwise t he vehicle will start to move immedi ately, even if the parking bra ke is set . This could result in a crash. - Before opening the hood, se lect the P selector lever pos ition and se t the parking bra ke. This reduces the risk of an accident. Always read and fo llow the applicable warnings ¢ page 2 71, Working in the engine compartment. - Never leave your vehicle with the engine running wh ile in gear. If you must leave your vehicle when the engine is running, set the parking brake and move the selector lever to the P position . If you accidentally se lect N wh ile driving, take your foot off the acce lerator pedal and wa it for the engine to s low down to idle before select ing Dor S. Driving tips Starting the engine .. The selector lever must be in the P or the N posit io n. Starting from a stop 0 co .... N ,..... .... N 0 0 .. Press and hold the brake pedal. .. Start the engine¢ page 76. .. Press the button o n the selector lever and se lect the D, Sor R selector lever position ¢ page 83 . .. Wait a moment unt il the transm ission shifts. You will notice a sl ight movement when the gear engages. .. Release the brake pedal and press the acce lerator pedal ¢ ,&. . Stopping temporarily .. Press the bra ke pedal to stop the veh icle, for examp le at a t raffic light . Do not press the accelerator pedal when doing this . .. To prevent the vehicle from rolling when you start driving, set the parking brake when stopping on steep inclines¢ ,&. . .. The parking brake will release automat ically and the vehicle will start moving once you press the acce lerato r pedal. Stopping / parking If the selector lever is not in the P position when you open the driver's door, the vehicle could roll. The message Transmi ssion: selector lever in drive position! appears. .. Press and hold the brake peda l ¢ ,&. . .. Set the park ing brake. .. To engage the P selector lever position, press the button on the selector lever and shift into t he P position ¢ page 83 . Under certain conditions , such as driving in the mountains or when towing a trailer, it may be helpful to switch to manual mode temporar ily and shift manually to adapt to the driv ing cond itions¢ page 86. On hills, activate the park ing brake first and then shift into the P position ¢ page 81 . This prevents too much stress from being placed on the locking mecha nism . _& WARNING - The vehicle can roll even if the ignit ion is switched off . - Do not press t he a ccele rat or pedal when changing the se lector lever position while the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running . This could result in a crash . - To reduce the risk of an accident, neve r se lect the R o r P positions while driving. - Power is still transmitted to the wheels when the engine is running at idle. To prevent the vehicle from "creeping", you must keep your foot on the brake in all selector lever positions (except P and N) when the engine is running. - :c '<t 85 Dr iv ing - Do not inadvertent ly press the acce lerator pedal when the vehicle is stationary. Otherwise the vehicle will start to move immediately, eve n if the parking brake is set. This cou ld resu lt in a crash . (D Manual shifting The shi~ paddles allow the driver to shift the gears manually . I .. :i: m Tips For safety reasons, the parking brake is released automatically only when the dr iver's safety belt is engaged in the buckle . Hill descent control The hill descent control system assists the driver when driving down hills . Hill descent contro l activates when the transmission is in the Dor S pos ition and you press the brake pedal. The transmiss ion automatically selects a gear that is suitable for the hill. Hill descent control tries to mainta in the speed achieved at the time of braking, within phys ical and technical limit ations. If may sti ll be necessary to adj ust the speed with the brake pedal. Hill descent contro l switches off o nce the hill leve ls out or you press the accelerator peda l. When operating the cruise contro l system i::>page 92, hill descent control is also activated when the speed is set. A WARNING Hill descent control cannot overcome phys ica l lim itations, so it may not be able to maintain a constant speed under al l condit ions. Always be ready to apply the brakes . Fig. 9 8 Steer ing whee l: shift ing man ually ..,To shift to a higher or lowe r gear t emporari ly, tap the 0 or 0 shift padd le i::>fig . 98 . ..,To switch manua l mode on , press the ~ button. Mand the gear that is currently engaged @ appear in the instrument cluster display i::>page83, fig. 95. ..,To shift up one gear, tap the right shift paddle G) c::> fig . 98. ..,To shift down one gear, t ap the left shift paddle Q. ..,To switch manua l mode off, press t he ~ but ton again, or ..,Move the se lector lever back and re lease it. When you accelerate or reduce the speed, t he transmission aut omatically shifts into the correct gear shortly before reaching the RPM limit. If yo u select a lower gear than the one currently shown in the disp lay, the automatic transmission will only shift down once there is no dang .er of exceeding the maximum RPM. The eng ine braking effect increases when you downshift when going downh ill. Kick-down Kick-down enables maximum acceleration. When you press the accelerator pedal down beyond the res istance point, the automatic transmission downshifts into a lower gear and the engine ut ilizes its full power, depending on vehicle speed and engine RPM. It shifts up into the next .,,_ 86 D r iving higher gear once the maximum specified engine RPM is reached. A Overboost Applies to: S8 plus The maximum engine torque is tempo rarily increased in overboost . Overboost is activated when nearing full throttle in the S position and when th e engine is at operat ing temperat ure. WARNING - Please note th at t he wheel s could spin on slick or sli ppery roads when overboost is act ive. Transmission malfunction Transmission: selector lever in drive! If t he select or lever is not in t he P posit ion when you open t he dr iver's door, t he vehicle could roll. Select t he P selector lever posit ion. rm Transmission : Please press brake pedal and select gear again Press the brake pedal and select t he desired selecto r lever posit ion again. You can t hen continue driving. rm Transm ission overheat ing : Please dr ive conservatively The transm ission temperature has increased significantly due to the sporty driving manne r. Drive in a less sporty manner until the temperature returns to the normal range and the ind icator light switches of . rm Transmission malfunction: You can continue driving 0 co .... N ,..._ .... N 0 0 :c tinue driving in D until engine is off There is a syste m malfu ncti on in t he t ransmission. The tran sm ission is swi t ching to emergency mode . If you tu rn the engine off , you w ill not be able to select any othe r selector lever positions after starting the engine again. Drive to an aut hori zed Audi dealer or authori zed Audi Service Facility immed iate ly to have the ma lfunction corrected . WARNING Please note that the wheels could spin on slick or slippery roads when kick-down is active. A rm Ii) Transmission malfunct ion: You can con- There is a system malfunct ion in the t ransmission. You may continue dr iving. Drive to your author ized Audi dealer or author ized Audi Service Facility soon to have the ma lfu nction corrected. rmTransmission malfunction: You can continue driving with limited functionality There is a system malfunction in t he transmis sion. The transmission is switc hing to emergency mode. This mode only shifts into certain gears or will no longer shift at all. The eng ine may sta l l. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immed iate ly to have the malfu nction corrected. rm ffl Transmission malfunction: No reverse gear. You can continue driv ing There is a system malfunction in the transmis sion. The transmission is switc hing to emergency mode. This mode only shifts into certain gears or will no longer shift at all. The eng ine may sta ll. You cannot engage the reverse gear. Drive to an autho rized Audi dealer or aut horized Audi Service Facility immed iate ly t o have t he ma lfunction correct ed. [O] Vehicle may roll! Cannot shift to P. Please apply parking brake - The parking lock was released using the emergency release¢ page 88. Or - The parking loc k can no longer be engaged. Drive to an aut hori zed Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili ty immediately to have the ma lfu nction corrected . rm Transmission malfunction: Stop vehicle and shift to park. Do not continue dr iving. Select t he P selector lever posit ion and contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility fo r assistance. '<t 87 Dr iv ing .,.Install the cover . Parking lock emergency release The parking lock must be released using the emergency release before towing the vehicle. When the parking lock emergen cy release is indi cator light and t he N selec to r used, the lever posit io n turn on in the instr ument cluster . The message Vehicle may roll! Cannot shift to P. Please apply parking brake a lso appears . l'i1 ~ N M 0 ± ... a, A ® Fig. 99 Driver's side footwell: releas ing the park ing lock using the emergency release Fig. 100 Driver's s ide footwell: resett ing the parking lock The emergency release is located under the floor mat on the d river's side . You operate the eme rgency release from the drive r's seat. Releasing the parking lock using the emergency release .,.To prevent t he vehicle from rolling unintentionally, set the par king brake<®>q page 81 or press the brake peda l. .,.The re are two s lits o n t he cove r. Pos ition the screw dr iver from t he vehicle tool kit in one of the slits on t he cover and pry the cover off . .,.Pull the band @ in the direction of the arrow unt il the release lever locks in place q fig. 99 . .,. Fold the upper section of the release lever down into the recess. Resetting the parking lock .,. Press same to its locks 88 the button @ and the re lease lever at t he t ime. You can now push the lever back inorig inal position. Make s ure the lever in place qfig. 100. WARNING - If you release the parking lock us ing the emergency release, secure yo ur vehicle with the park ing brake or the brake peda l if the parking brake is not wo rking. The veh icle can roll away if it is not secured and cause a cras h. Tr ai ler mod e Trailer mode Driving with Trailer brakes a trailer General information If your t rai ler is equ ipped with a braking system, check to be sure that it conforms t o a ll regu lations. Your Audi was designed primarily for passenger transportation . The t rai ler hydra ulic bra ke sys tem must not be directly connected to the vehicle's hydra ulic brake system. If you plan to tow a trailer, please remember that the add itional load will affect durability, economy and performance . Safety chains Tra iler towing not only places more stress on the vehicle, it a lso calls for more concentration from the driver. For this reason, always follow the operating and driving instr uctions provided and use common sense. Always use safety chains between your vehicle and the tra iler . Trailer lights Trailer lights must meet all regulations. Be sure to check w ith your Audi dealer for correct wir ing, switches and relays . Mirrors (D Note If you are going to tow a trailer, you must activate the tra iler operation mode <=> page 89, Operating instructions. Technical requirements Trailer hitch Use a weight-carrying hitch conforming to the gross tra iler weight. The hitch must be suitab le for your vehicle and tra iler and must be mounted securely on t he vehicle's chassis at a technically sound location . Use on ly a trailer hitch with a removable ba ll mount . Always chec k w ith the t railer hitch manufac tu rer to make sure that you are using the correct hitch . If you are unable to see the traffic behind you using the regular outside mirrors, then you must install extended mirrors . It is important that you always have clear vision to the rear . A ,~ WARNING - Afte r remov ing the tra ile r hitch, do not sto re it in you r vehicle. In case of sudden brak ing, t he hitch could fly fo rward and inju re you or your passengers. Operating instruction s Do not use a bumper hitch . The hitch must be installed in such a way that it does not interfere with the impact -absorbing bumper system . No mod ifications should be made to the vehicle exhaust and brake systems . From t ime to t ime, check that al l hitch mo unt ing bol t s rem ai n securely fastened. C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 When you are not towing a trailer, remove the tra iler hit ch ba ll mount . This preven t s the hitch from causing damage shou ld your vehicle be struck from beh ind C?_&.. Fig. 10 1 MMI displ ay: towing m ode on Maximum tra iler weight A trailer for your vehicle is lim ited to a typical class 1 or class 2 trailer. 0 :r <t 89 Trailer mode Trailer load distribution Be sure the load in the trailer is held securely in place to prevent it from shifting forward, back ward or sideways . Never allow a passenger to ride in a trailer ¢ .&. in Driving instructions on page 91 . Engine cooling system Towing a trailer makes the eng ine work harder . It is important that the cooling system's performance is up to the additional load . Make su re that the cooling system has eno ugh fluid. When tow ing a tra iler, inflate the tires of your veh icle to the tir e pressure listed under "Full load " on the label ¢ page 293 . Inflate trailer tires to trailer and t ire manufacturers' specifications. Lights Check to make sure both vehicle and trailer lights are working properly . Safety chains Be sure trailer safety chains are properly connected from the trailer to the hitch on the vehicle. Leave enough slack in the chains to permit turning corners . When you install safety cha ins, make sure they w ill not drag on the road when you are driving. The chains should cross under the trailer tongue to prevent it from dropping in case of separation from the hitch . Adjusting the Audi drive select Make sure the vehicle is on a level surface before hitching up the trailer and before adjust ing the tongue weight. The vehicle must be in auto or comfort driving mode and not ra ised 110, o:,;, 0 . Make sure that the vehicle is lowered. In Infofunction button> Lower tainment, select: ICARI control button . 90 ([) Note - Changes in temperature or load can affect the height of the vehicle. - Always select auto or comfort mode. Otherwise, the tongue load specified for your vehicle will no longer be app licab le . Driving instructions Driving with a trailer always requires extra care and consideration. Tire pressure o:,;,page If you must drive under poor road conditions, you can raise the vehicle after coupling the trailer or after adjust ing the tongue we ight ¢ page 112. Weight distribution Towing a loaded tr ailer with an empty car results in a high ly unstable distrib ut ion of we ight . If this cannot be avoided, drive at very low speeds only to avoid t he risk of losing steering contro l. A "balanced " rig is easier to operate and control. This means that the tow vehicle should be loaded to the extent possible and permissib le, wh ile keeping the trailer as light as possible under the circumstances. Whenever possible, transfer some cargo to the luggage compartment of the tow veh icle while observing tongue load requirements and vehicle loading considerations. Speed The higher the speed, the more difficult it becomes for the driver to control the rig . Do not drive at the maximum permissible speed. Reduce your speed even more if load, weather or wind cond it ions are unfavorable - particularly when go ing downh ill. Reduce vehicle speed immediately if the trailer shows the slightest sign of sway ing. Do not try to stop the swaying by accelerating. Observe speed limits. In some areas, speeds for vehicles towing trailers are lower than for regular vehicles. Always apply brakes early . When driving downhill, shift into a lower gear to use the engine braking effect to slow the vehicle. Use of the brakes alone can cause them to overheat and fail. ..,. Trailer Air suspension* room to stop . To compensate for the trailer, you will need a larger than normal turning radius . When driv ing with a trailer, activate the trailer mode of the air suspension. Switch the air sus pension trailer mode on when you are towing a trailer. This will limit the regulation by the air suspension while driving. Select in the MMI: ICARI function button > (Car)* systemscontrol button > Vehicle settings > Air susp.: towing > When passing, remember that you cannot accelerate as fast as you normally wo uld because of the added load. Make sure you have enough room to pass. After passing, allow plenty of room for your trailer before changing lanes again . Avoid jerky starts, sharp turns or rapid lane changes. On. Coolant temperature The coolant temperature gauge ¢ page 9 must be observed carefully . The coolant temperature can increase if you drive on long inclines in a low gear at high engine speeds. Reduce your speed immed iately if the LEDs in the top part of the display turn on . For more information about indicator lights, refer to . ¢ page 20. A WARNING mode - notes Important to know Your veh icle handles differently when tow ing a tra iler because of the additional weight and d ifferent weight distr ibut ion. Safety, performance and economy will greatly depend on how carefully yo u load you r t railer and operate your rig . Before you actually tow your trailer, practice turning, stopp ing and back ing up in a n area away from traffic. Keep practicing until you have become completely fami liar with the way your vehicle-trailer comb inat io n behaves and responds. 0 co .... N ,..._ .... N 0 0 :c '<t (D Tips - Do not tow a trailer during the break-in pe riod of your veh icle. - If you tow a trailer, your Audi may requ ire more frequent maintenance due to the extra load ¢ page 336. Parking on a slope Anyone not properly restrained in a moving vehicle is at a much greater risk in an accide nt. Never let anyone ride in you r car who is not properly weari ng the restraints p rovided by Audi. Trailer mode Backing up is d ifficult and requires pract ice. Backing up with a trailer gene rally requires steering action oppos ite to tha t when backing up your ve hicle w ithout a trailer . Maintain a greater d istance between your vehicle and the one in front of you . You w ill need more Do not park on a slope with a trailer. If it cannot be avoided, do so only after doing the following: When parking: " Apply the foot brake . " Have someone place chocks under both the vehicle and the trailer wheels. "W ith chocks in place, slowly release the brakes until the wheel chocks absorb the load. " Tur n the whee ls towards the curb. " App ly the parking brake . " Select the P selector lever position. When restarting after parking: " App ly the foot brake. " Start the engine . "S elect the D selector lever position . " Release the parking brake and slowly pull out and away from the wheel chocks. " Stop and have someone retrieve the wheel chocks. (D Tips If you move the selector lever of the automatic transmission to P before applying the parking brake and before blocking the wheels, you may have to use more force later to move the lever out of the P posit ion. 91 A ss is t Assist Speed Cruise warning system The speed warning system helps you to stay under a specified maximum speed. The speed warning system warns you if you are exceeding the maximum speed that you have set. A warning tone will sound as soon as your speed exceeds the stored value slightly. I. The . (USA models) (Canada models) indi cator light and a message appear in the instrument cluster display at the same time. The . / • indicator light and the message turn off if the speed falls back below the stored maximum speed. control system Switching on The cruise control system makes it possible to drive at a constant speed starting at 20 mph (30 km/h) . g 0 M 0 ± ~ f ®l0 Fig. 102 Operat ing lever: cruise control system Setting a threshold is recommended if you would like to be reminded when you reach a certain maximum speed. Situations where you may want to do so include driving in a country with a general speed limit or if the re is a specified maximum speed for winter tires. .,.To switch the cruise control on, pull the lever into position (D ¢ fig . 102. .,.Drive at the speed to be maintained. .,.To store the speed, press the button @ . Setting the warning t hreshold The stored speed and the (USA models) I &I (Canada models) ind icator light are displayed in the instrument cluster. The warning threshold is set in the Infotainment system . .,.Select : !CAR Ifunction button > Car systems control button > Driver assist > Speed war ning. (D Tips Regardless of the speed wa rning system, you should always monitor yo ur speed using the speedometer and make sure you are following the legal speed limit. [t!jl!)~i~ This information is also shown briefly in the Head-up display* . The speed is mainta ined by modifying engine power or through an active brake interven t ion. _& WARNING -Always pay atten t ion to the traffic around you when the cruise contro l system is in operat ion. You are always respons ible for your speed and the distance between your vehicle and other vehicles. - For safety reasons, cruise control should not be used in the city, in stop-and-go traff ic, on w inding roads and when road conditions are poor (such as ice, fog, gravel, heavy rain and hydroplaning), because this increases the risk of an accident. - Switch t he cruise control off temporarily when dr iving in turning lanes, highway exits or in construction zones. 92 ... Assist - Please note that unconsciously "resting" your foot on the accelerator pedal prevents the cruise control from braking. This is because pressing the accelerator pedal overrides the cruise control system . - If a brake system malfunction such as overheating occurs when the cruise control system is switched on, the braking function in the system may be switched off. The rest of the cruise control system functions remain active as long as the (tj;(IM@ (USA models) / (Canada models) indicator light is on . ii @ Tips The brake lights turn on when the brakes are applied automat ically . Changing the speed .. To increase or decrease the speed in increments, tap the lever toward 0 10 q page 92, fig . 102. .. To increase or decrease the speed quickly, hold the lever in the 0 10 direction until the desired speed is displayed. You can a lso press the accelerator pedal down to increase your speed, for example if you want to pass someone. The speed you set earlier will resume as soon as you release the accelerator pedal. However, if you exceed your saved speed by 5 mph (10 km/h) for longer than 6 minutes, the cru ise control system turns off temporarily . .. To store the speed displayed, release the lever. This function makes it possible, for example , to save the speed you want before driving on the highway. Once on the highway , activate the cruise control by pulling the lever toward @ . Switching off Temporary deactivation .. Press the brake pedal, or .. Press the lever into position @ (not clicked into place) 9 page 92, fig. 102, or .. Drive for longer than S minutes faster than 5 mph (10 km/h) above the stored speed . Switching off completely .. Press the lever into position @ (clicked into place), or .. Switch the ignition off . The speed you stored will be maintained if the cruise contro l has been switched off temporarily . To resume the stored speed, release the brake pedal and pull the lever into posit ion (D. Switching the ignition off will erase the stored speed. A - WARNING - You should only resume the stored speed if it is not too high for existing traffic conditions. Otherw ise you can increase the risk of an accident . 1'11 )~i@ (USA models) (Canada modThe green ltj;(i els) indicator light in the speedometer turns off and the stored speed is maintained. Preselecting a speed You can pre-select your desired speed when the vehicle is stationary. 0 co .... N ,..... .... N 0 0 :c .. Switch on the ignition . .. Pull the lever into position (D q page 92, fig. 102. .. To increase or decrease the speed, push the lever toward 0 10 . '<t 93 Assist Audi adaptive control cruise Description Which functions can be controlled? When you switch adaptive cru ise control on, you can set the current speed as the "contro l speed" ¢ page 96, Switching on/off. Applies to: vehicles with Audi adapt ive cruise control When dr iving, you can stop cruise control ¢ page 98 or change the speed ¢ page 97 at any time. You can also set the distance to the object moving ahead and se t the driving mode of the adaptive cru ise control¢ page 98. General information Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control Fig. 103 Detection range The adaptive cruise control system is a combination of speed and distance regulation. It assists the dr iver by both regulating the speed and maintaining a distance to the vehicle driving ahead, within the limits of the system . If the system detects and object ahead, adaptive cruise control can brake and acce lerate your vehicle. This makes driving more comfortable both on long stretches of highway and in stop-and-go traffic . What can adaptive cruise control do? The adaptive cruise control system uses video, radar and ultrasound . Objects driving ahead can be recognized up to 650 feet (200 m) away. On open roads with no traffic, it functions like a cruise control system . The stored speed is maintained. When approaching an object ahead, the adaptive cruise control system automatically brakes to match that object's speed and then maintains the stored distance . As soon as the system does not detect an object ahead, adaptive cruise control accelerates up to the stored speed . In stop-and -go traffic, adaptive cruise control can brake until the vehicle is stat ionary and then be· gin driving again under certain conditions ¢ page 97. Audi braking guard can warn you about an impending collision and initiate braking maneuvers ¢ page 99. 94 Fig. 10 4 Front of the vehicle: sensors and video came ra The areas that contain the radar and ultrasonic sensors and the video camera ¢ fig . 104 must not be covered by st ickers, deposits or other objects because they can interfere with the function of the adaptive cruise control system and braking guard . For information on clean ing, refer to ¢ page 306. The same applies for any modifications made in the front area. The function of the adaptive cruise control system and braking guard is limited under some conditions. - Objects can only be detected when they are with in the sensor range ¢page 94, fig. 103. - The system has a limited ability to detect objects that are a sho rt distance ahead, off to the side of your vehicle or moving into your lane. - Objects that are difficult to detect such as motorcycles, vehicles with high ground clearance or an overhanging load are detected late or not detected at all. - When driving through curves ¢ page 95 . ll> A ss ist - With stationary objects A ~ page 96 . WARNING Always pay attention to traffic when adapt ive cruise control is switched on and braking guard is active . As the dr iver, you are still responsible for starting and for maintaining speed and d istance to other objects. Braking guard is used to assist you . The driver must always take action to avoid a collision . The driver is always responsib le for brak ing at the correct time . - For safety reasons, do not use adapt ive cruise co ntro l when driv ing on roads with many curves, when the road su rface is in poor condit ion and/or in bad weather (such as ice, fog, grave l, heavy rain and hydrop la ning). Using the system under these condit ions increases the risk of an accident. - Switch adaptive cruise contro l off temporarily when driving in turning lanes, on expressway exits or in construction zones. This prevents the vehicle from accelerating to the stored speed when in these situations . - The adapt ive cru ise control system will not brake by itself if you put your foot on the accelerator pedal. Doing so can overr ide the speed and distance regulation . - When approaching stat ionary objects such as stopped traffic, adapt ive cru ise control will not respo nd and braking gua rd will have limited func t ion. - The adapt ive cru ise control system and bra king g uard do not react to people, animals, objects crossing the road or oncom ing objects. - The function of the radar sensors can be affec t ed by reflec tive objects such as guard rai ls, the ent rance to a tunnel, heavy rain or ice. & C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 offe r dist ract you from the need to be alert to traffic cond itions and the need to remain in full control of your vehicle at all times, - Always remember that the adaptive cruise control and braking guard have limits - they will not slow the vehicle down or maintain the set distance when you dr ive towa rds an obstacle or something on or near the road that is not moving, s uch as vehicles stopped in a t raff ic jam, a stalled or disab led vehicle. If reg istered by the radar sensors, vehicles or obsta cles t hat are not moving ca n trigger a collision wa rning and if confirmed by the video came ra, an acute collision wa rning . - Never fo llow a vehicle so closely that you cannot stop your vehicle safely . The adaptive cruise contro l cannot slow or brake the veh icle safely when you follow another vehicle too closely. Always remember that the automatic braking function cannot bring the veh icle to a sudde n or emergency stop u nder these conditions . - To prevent unintended operat ion , always sw itch ACCoff when it is not being used . (D Note The sensors can be d isplaced by impacts or damage to the bumper, wheel housing and underbody. That could affect the adaptive cruise contro l system and braking gua rd . Have an aut horized Audi dealer or autho rized Audi Service Facility check the ir funct ion. In curves Applies to: vehicles wit h Audi adapt ive cru ise control WARNING - Improper use of adaptive cruise control can cause collisions, other accidents and serious persona l injury. - Never let the comfort and convenience that adaptive cruise cont rol and braking guard I Fig. 105 Example: dri ving into a curve 0 :r <t 95 A ss is t When driving into a curve ¢ fig. 105 and out of a curve, the adaptive cruise control may react to an object in the neighbor ing lane and apply the brakes. You can prevent that by pressing the accelerator pedal brief ly. Stationary objects Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise contro l Fig. 108 Instrument cluste r: adapt ive crui se control You can set any speed between 20 mph (30 km/ h) a nd 95 mph (150 km/h). Ind icator lights and messages in the instrument cluster display inform you about the current situat ion and setting . Fig. 106 Example: object changin g lanes and stat ionary An additional indicator appears in the Head-up display* . object Switching adapti ve cruise contr ol on The adaptive cruise contro l system only reacts to objects that are mov ing or that the system has a lready detected as movi ng. For examp le, it can react when a vehicle that has a lready been de tected @ turns or changes lanes, but adaptive cru ise control does not react to a stat ionary vehi cle @ . Switching on/ off Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control .,.Pull the lever toward you into position (D ¢ fig. 107 . ACC: standby appears in the display . Saving the speed and activating regulation .,.To save the current speed, press the ISETI ¢ fig . 107 button. The sto red speed is shown in the speedomete r in the LEDline @ and appears briefly in the information line @ ¢ fig. 108 . .,.To act ivate the regulation while stationary, also press the brake pedal. Switching adaptiv e cruise contr ol off .,.Push the lever away from you into position @ until it clicks into place . The message ACC: off appears . @ Indicator lights II-adap ti ve cruise control Fig. 10 7 Opera tin g lever: switching on and off is switched on. No objects are detected ahead . The stored speed is maintained. • - An object ahead was de t ected . The adaptive cruise contro l syst em regu lates the speed and distance to the object ahead and accelerates/ brakes automatically . 96 IJ> A ss ist tij - adaptive cruise control is switched on. An object ahead was detected. Your vehicle remains stopped and will not start dr iving automat ically. • - The automatic braking is not enough to maintain a sufficient distance to an object ahead. You must intervene c:>page 99, Driver intervention request . © Instrument matically switched on when the adaptive cruise control is switched on . Changing the speed Applies to : vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control co N 0 cluster display No vehicle - No object ahead was detected. W hite vehicle - An object ahead was detected . Red vehicle - Request for driver intervention c:>page 99. Both arrows on the scale © indicate the distance to the object ahead. No arrow appears when the vehicle is on an open road and there is no object ahead. If an object is detected ahead, the arrow moves on the scale. :i: ~ m f •0 If adaptive cruise control is not shown in the instrument cluster display, you can call it up using the mu ltifunction stee ring wheel buttons <=:> page 12. Based on the graphics in the d isplay, you can determine if the system is ma inta ining a distance to the object ahead and what that distance is. 0 Fig. 109 Operat ing lever : changing the speed .. To increase or reduce the speed in increments, t ap the lever up or down . .. To increase or decrease the speed quick ly, hold the lever up or down until the red LED@ reaches the des ired speed c:>page 96, fig. 108. After each change, the new stored speed appears briefly in the information line @ c:>page 96, fig. 108. Driving in stop-and-go traffic Applies to: veh icles with Audi adaptive cruise control The green zone on the scale indicates the store distance. For information on changing the distance, refer to c:>page 98. If the distance selected is exceeded or not reached, the arrow moves into the red zone on the scale. A WARNING ~= -:--If you press the ISE TIbutton when driving at speeds be low 20 mph (30 km/h), the vehicle accelerates automatica lly up to 20 mph (30 km/h), which is the m inimum speed that can be set . (D Tips - If you switch the ignition or the adapt ive C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 cruise contro l system off, the set speed is erased for safety reasons. - The elect ronic stab ilization cont rol (ESC) and the a nti -slip-reg ulation (ASR) a re au t o- The adaptive cru ise control system also assists you in stop-and-go traffic . If an object ahead stops, your vehicle will brake and stay at a stop, within t he limits of the system. .. To resume driv ing with adaptive cruise control, tap the accelerator pedal or .,. Pull the lever toward you into pos ition @ c:>page 98, fig . 110 . a) Tips If an obstacle is detected when your vehicle starts moving, the dr iver intervent ion request appears c:>page 99. Your vehicle will drive more slowly when starting. This may a lso happen in some situ at io ns when the re is no apparent obstacle . 0 :r <t 97 Assist Interrupting cruise control Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise contro l Fig. 110 Selector lever Requirement: adaptive cruise control mus t be switched on . Overriding cruise control • To accelerate manually , pull the lever toward you into position @ and hold it there . The message ACC:override appears . Or • press t he accelera t or pedal. • To resume cru ise control , release the lever or take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Canceling cruise control while driving • Move the lever into position @ . The message ACC:standby appears . Or • press the brake pedal. • To resume the stored speed, move the lever into posit ion @ . Canceling cruise control when stopped • Push the lever away from you into position @ . The message ACC: standby appears. • To resume cruise control, press the brake pedal and pull the lever toward you into position @ . .&, WARNING It is dangerous to activate cruise control and resume the stored speed when the current road, traffic or weather conditions do not pe rmit this . This increases the risk of an accident. Setting the distance Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control Fig. 111 Opera ting lever: se tt ing th e distan ce • Tap the switch to display t he current set distance ¢ fig . 111 . • To increase or reduce the distance in increments, tap the switch again to the right or left . The distance between the two veh icles will change in the instrument cluster display . When approaching an object ahead, the adaptive cruise contro l system brakes to match that speed and then adjusts to the set distance . If the object ahead accelerates, adaptive cruise control will also accelerate up to the stored speed . The higher the speed, the greater the distance ¢ ,&..The Distance 3 sett ing is recommended . That is equal to the general recommendation of "half the speed shown on the speedometer". The distances provided are spec ified values . Depending on the driving situation and the way the object ahead is dr iving, the actual distance may be more or less than these target distances . The var ious symbo ls for the time increments appears briefly in the information line @ ¢ page 96 , fig . 108 when you change the settings . Distance 1: th is setting corresponds to a distance of 92 ft (28 m) when traveling at 62 mph (100 km/h), fo r example (time between : 1 second) . c::::,_c::::,___ Distance 2: this setting cor responds to a distance of 118 ft (36 m) when t raveling at 62 mph (100 km/h) , for example (time between: c::::,__ c::::,__ 1.3 seconds) . 98 "" A ss ist ~ -- -~ - Dist ance 3: this setting corresponds to a distance of 164 ft (SO m) when traveling at 62 mph (100 km/h), for examp le (time between : 1.8 seconds) . Driver intervention request Applies to : vehicles wit h Aud i adapt ive cruise control ~ -- --~ Dist ance 4: This setting corresponds to a distance of 210 ft (64 m) when traveling at 62 mph (100 km/h), (time distance of 2.3 seconds). A WARNING Following other vehicles too closely increases the risk of coll isions and ser ious personal injury. - Setting short distances to the traffic ahead reduces the t ime and distance available to br ing your vehicle to a safe stop and makes it even mo re necessary to pay close attent ion to traffic. - Always obey applicable traffic laws, use good j udgment, and select a safe following distance for the traffic, road and weather condit ions . @ Tips - Distance 3 is set automatically each time you switch the ignition on. - Your settings are automatically stored and assigned to the remote control key being used. Fig. 1 12 Instrume nt cluster : request fo r driver interven tio n In certain situa t ions, the system will request you to take action: - if the braking from the adap t ive cruise contro l system is not enough to ma intain eno ugh dist ance to the object ahead. The da nger is indicated by the . indicator light r:!>fig. 112. An audio signal will a lso sound . - Press the brake pedal to slow your vehicle down. Audi braking guard Appl ies to: vehicles wit h Audi adapt ive cruise control Selecting the driving mode Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control .,.Select the des ired driving mode in dr ive se lect c>page 110 . @ Tips Fig. 1 13 Instrument cluster : approach warning Your se ttings a re au t oma t ically st ored and assigned to the remote control key being used. The braking guard uses radar sensors and a video camera. It also functions within the limits of the system when adaptive cru ise control is switched off . Wh at can the braking guard do? C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 0 :r When detected in time, the system can assess dangerous situations where an object ahead brakes suddenly or if your own vehicle is traveling .,.. <t 99 A ss is t at a high speed and approaching an object t hat is moving more slowly. The braking guard does not react if it cannot detect the situation. The sys t em advises you of various dangerous sit uations : - The distan ce warning occurs if you drive too closely to t he object ahead for a long period of time . If the object ahead brakes strongly, you would not be able to avoid a collis ion . The . indicator light appears as an indication for this. - The app roach wa rning occurs when an object ahead is traveling more slow ly or brakes strongly . When this warning occurs, it may on ly be possib le to avoid a collision by swerv ing or braking strong ly. The danger is indicated by the • ind icator light c>fig. 113. An audio signal will also sound. If you do not react early enough or at a ll to a dangerous situation, the braking guard supports you with a brak ing intervention. The approach warning indicators and the message Braking guard : engaged also appear . - If a collision is imminent, the system will first provide an acut e wa rning by braking sharply. - If you do not react to the acute warning, the braking guard can increase the braking force within the limits of the system. This reduces the vehicle speed in the event of a collision. - The system can init iate comp lete deceleration sho rtly before a collision ll . Full decele ration at high speeds occurs only in vehicles with adaptive cru ise cont rol and s ide assist (pre sense pl us). - If the braking guard determines that you are not brak ing strongly enough when there is an impending collision, it can increase the bra king force . - The pre se nse functions also engage when page 216. the re is an impend ing collision c:> Which functions can be controll ed? You can switch the braking guard and the dis tance/approach warn ing on or off in the lnfotain- l ) Market -spe cific 100 ment system c:> page 101, Settings in the Infotainment system. A WARNING Lack of attent ion can cause collisions, other accidents and ser ious personal inju ries. The braking guard is an assist system and cannot prevent a collision by itself . The driver must a lways inte rvene . The driver is always responsib le for braking at the correct t ime . - Always pay close attention to traffic, even when the braking guard is sw itched on. Be ready to intervene and be ready to take comp lete contro l whenever ne cessa ry. Always keep the safe and legal dist a nce bet ween your vehi cle and veh icles up ahead . - Brak ing g uard works w it hin limits and will not respond outside the system limits, for examp le when approaching a stopped vehi cle or stationary obstacle (en d of a traffic jam or vehicle that has broken down in traffic). - Always remember that the radar sensor for the brak ing g uard works only within def ined detection and range limits that may prevent the prope r detection of other vehicles. - The radar sensor 's function and range can be reduced by rain, snow and heavy spray. Moving vehicles up ahead may not be promptly detected or may not be detected at al l. - Reflective surfaces including crash barr iers or tunnel entrances may impair the function of the radar sensor. (D Tips - You can cancel the braking with increas ing force t hat is initiated by the system by bra king yourself, by acce le rat ing not iceably or by swerving. - Keep in mind t hat braking gua rd can brake unexpectedly. Always secure any cargo or objects tha t you are transpo rting to redu ce t he risk of damage or injury. Assist Settings in the Infotainment system App lies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise contro l .,.Select: t he ICAR Ifu nction bu tton > Car systems co ntro l bu t ton > Driver assist > Audi braking guard . System - Switch the bra king g ua rd On/ Off . W hen you swit ch the ignit ion on, the message Braking guard: Off appears if t he sys t em is switched off . Early warning - The distance and approac h warnings in t he display can be sw itched On/ Off . @ Tips - Your settings are automatically stored and ass igned to the remote cont rol key bei ng used. - If you restric t or sw itch off the ESC, the braking gua rd also sw itches itself off ¢ page 12 7. - Switch braking guard off when you a re loading t he ve hicle on t o a vehicle carrier, t rain, shi p or other type of transportation. This ca n preven t undesired wa rnings from t he bra king guard system. The system cannot gua rantee that it will detect objects correctly and is sw itched off . The sensors have been moved or are faulty. The pre sense funct ions may a lso be affected . Drive to an aut hori zed Audi dea ler or authorized Audi Service Facility immed iate ly to have the malfunction cor rected . ACC: Currently unavailable. No sensor vision ACC and Audi braking guard: Currently unavailable. No sensor vision Th is mess age appears if t he senso r view is ob str ucte d, for examp le by leaves, snow , heavy spray or dirt. Clean the sensors ¢ page 94, fig. 104. ACC: Currently unavailabl e. Gradient too steep The road exceeds the maximum poss ible angle fo r safe adaptive cruise cont rol operat io n. Adapt ive cruise control is sw itched off. ACC: only available in D, Sor M Se lect the D, Sor M selector leve r pos ition. ACC: Currentlyunavailable.Parkingbrakeap• plied Messages Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control Braking guard: Off This message appea rs if the sys t em is switc hed off t hrough the Infota inme nt system . Otherwise , if the system is t ur ned off, the informa t ion ap pears every time shortly after the start of t he tr ip. The message a lso a ppears if the system is not avai la ble d ue to a ma lfunction or if t he ESC is switched off ~ page 127. If this is the case, the system w ill not prov ide warnings about a possi ble collision. Braking guard : engaged This message appea rs if a sha rp bra ke press ure was a pplied due to an acute wa rn ing. 0 .... N ACC: unavailable .... 0 ACC and Audi braking guard: Unavailable co ,..._ N The ad a pt ive cruise cont rol system sw itches off automa ti cally if the parking brake is se t . ACC: Currently unavailable . Stability control ( ESC) input . This message appears if the Electronic Stab ilizat ion Control (ESC) is taking action to stab ilize the vehicle . In t his case, adaptive cruise control switches off automatically . ACC off: manual control! This message appears when adaptive cruise control cannot set the parking brake. Press the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling. • •• Th ree white dot s appear if a setting canno t be selecte d wit h t he oper ati ng leve r. For exam ple, this happens if ada pt ive cruise con t rol can not sta rt driving a utomat ically in stop -and -go t raff ic be cause the dr iver has not fastene d their safety belt . ..,. 0 :c '<t 101 A ss is t Door open The adaptive cruise contro l system cannot switch on when a door is open. Stat ionary object ahead This message appears if you would like to switch adapt ive cruise control on and there is a stationary object or obstacle directly ahead of your vehicle . Audi active Lane assist (Lane departure assist) Description Appl ies to: vehicles with Audi active lane assist Active lane assist detects lane marker lines within the limits of the system using a camera in the windshie ld. If you are approaching a detected lane marker line and it appears likely t hat you will leave the lane, the system will warn you with correct ive steering . You can override t his steer ing at any time. If you pass over a line, the steering wheel will vibrate lightly . In order for this warning vibration to occur, it must first be switched on in the Infotainment system. Act ive lane assist is ready for operation when the lane marker line is detected on at least one side of the vehicle. The system is designed for driving on expressways and highways and therefore only activates at speeds above approximately 40 mph (65 km/ h). App lies to veh icles with side assist If you activate a turn signa l when active lane assist is ready and it classifies a lane change as critical because of veh icles traveling alongside you or approaching you, there will be noticeable corrective steering shortly before you leave the lane. This will attempt to keep your vehicle in the lane. App lies to veh icles witho ut side ass ist The system will not warn you before crossing a lane marker line if you have activated the turn signal. In this case, it assumes that you are changing lanes intent ionally. 102 Applies to: vehicles with adap t ive cruise contro l The corrective steering is targeted based on the driving situation. In addition to the lane marker li nes, the system can also take into account other obj ects such as guard rails. If they are detected in close prox imity to the vehicle, active lane assist helps prevent the vehicle from dr iving too close to them . There is also passing assistance. The system does not provide any corrective steering if it detects that you are passing anothe r vehicle. .&_WARNING - The system warns t he drive r that t he vehicle is leaving the lane using correct ive steering. The drive r is always responsible for keeping the vehicle within the lane. - The system can assist t he dr iver in keeping the vehicle in the lane, but it does not drive by itself. Always keep your hands on the steer ing whee l. - Corrective steering may not occur in certain situations, such as during heavy braking. - There may be cases where the camera does not recognize all lane marker lines . Corrective stee ring can only take place on the side of the vehicle where lane marker lines are detected. - Other road structures or objects could possibly be identified unintent ionally as lane marker lines. As a result, corrective steering may be unexpected or may not occur. - The camera view can be restricted, for example by vehicles driving ahead or by rain, snow, heavy spray or lig ht shining into the camera. This can resul t in active lane assist not det ecting the lane marker lines or detect ing them incorrectly . - Under certain cond it ions such as ruts in the road, a banked roadway or crosswin ds, t he corrective st eering alone may not be enough to keep the vehicle in the m iddle of the lane. - For safety reasons, act ive lane assist must not be used when there are poor road and/ or weather conditions such as slippery roads, fog, gravel, heavy rain, snow and the potential for hydrop laning. Using active lane assist under these cond it ions may increase the risk of a crash. Assist Switching on / off Applies to: vehicles with Audi active lane assist (D Tips Make sure the camera's field of view ¢ fig. 115 is not obstructed by stickers or anything else. For information on clean ing, refer to ¢ page 306. Image in the instrument cluster display Applies to: vehicles with Audi act ive la ne ass ist Fig. 114 Turn signal lever: button for active lane ass ist Fig. 116 Instrument cluster: act ive lane ass ist is switc hed on and providing warn ings Fig. 115 Windsh ield: camera window fo r active lane ass ist ...Press the button to switch the system on and off ¢ fig. 114 . The. or . indicator light in the instrument cluster turns on or off . Indicator lights • Ready: the indicator light turns on when the system is ready for use. The system can now be operated . ., Not ready: the indicator light turns on if the system is switched on but is inoperab le. This may be due to the following reasons: - There is no lane marker line. - The relevan t lane marker lines are not detected (for example, mark ings in a construction zone or because they are obstructed by snow, dirt, water or lighting). - The vehicle speed is below the activation speed of approx imately 40 mph (65 km/h) . - The lane is too narrow or too wide. - The curve is too narrow. C) ~ - The driver's hands are not on the stee ring "' ,.... wheel. Fig. 117 Instrument cluste r: act ive lane ass ist is switched on but not ready to provide warn ings You can call up the active lane assist display using the buttons in the mu ltifunction steering wheel ¢page 12 . White line(s) Active lane assist is activated and ready to provide warn ings. Red line(s) (left or right) Active lane assist warns you before leaving a lane ¢ fig. 116. In addition, the steeri ng wheel vibrates lightly . Gray line(s) Active lane assist is activated, but not ready to give warning ¢ fig. 117. ...... "' 0 0 :r <t 103 ... A ss is t Messag es in the instrument cluster display If the active lane ass ist switches off automatica lly, the indicator light in the display turns off and one of the following messages appears: Audi active lane assist: Currently unavailabl e. No camera view @ Tips Your settings are automatically stored and assigned to the remote contro l key being used. Audi side assist Description This message appears if the camera is unable to detect the lines. This could happen if: - The camera field of view 9 page 103, fig. 115 is dirty or cove red in ice. Clean this area on the windshield . - The camera field of view is fogged over . Wait unt il the fog has cleared before sw itch ing the active lane assist on again . - The system has been unable to detect the lanes for an extended period of time d ue to road conditions. Switch active lane assist back on when the lines are mo re visible . Applies to: vehicles with Aud i side ass ist Fig. 118 Senso r detect ion ra nge Audi active lane assist: Currently unavailable There is a temporary active lane assist ma lfunction . Try sw itching the act ive lane assist on aga in later. Audi active lane assist: System fault! Drive to an a utho rized Aud i dea le r or a uthorized Audi Serv ice Facility immediately to have t he malfunction corrected. Audi active lane assist: Please take over steering This message appea rs if you are not steering by yourself . If th is is the case, active lane assist does no t swi tc h off, but it is "not ready" to provide a warn ing . The system ca n he lp you keep the veh icle in the lane. However, you ar e responsib le for d riving the vehicle and must steer it yo ursel f. Setting the vibration warning Applies to: vehicles with Audi active lane assist .,.Select : the ICARI function button > Car systems contro l button > Driver assist > Audi active lane assist. Vibration warning You can switch t he additional vibration wa rni ng in t he steering wheel o n or off. 104 Fig. 119 Disp lay on the exterio r mirr or Side assist helps you monitor your blind spot and traffic behind your vehicle. W ithin the limits of the system, it warns you abo ut vehicles that are coming closer or th at a re t raveling wit h you within senso r range @ 9 fig. 118: if a lane change is classified as crit ical, the disp lay @ in the exte rior mirror 9 fig. 119 turns on . The disp lay in the left exte rior mirror prov ides ass ista nce when making a lane change to t he left, whi le the display in the righ t exterior m irror pro vides assistance w hen making a lane change to the right. Information stage As long as you do not act ivat e t he t urn signal, side ass ist informs you abou t vehi cles t ha t a re detected a nd classified as crit ical. The di splay in the mirror turns on, but is dim. "" A ss ist N N The display remains dim in the information stage so that your view toward the front is not distur bed . Warning stage If the d isplay in a m irror blinks br igh t ly when yo u activate a turn signal, side assist is warning you about detected vehicles that it has classified as cr itical. If this happens, check traffic by g lancing in the exterior mirrors and over your shoulder .& in General information on page 106. c::> Ap plies to vehicles with active lane assist The display in the mirror can a lso blink if you have not activated a turn signa l: if you are approaching a detected lane marker line and it ap pears you will be leaving the lane, side assist will warn you about detected vehicles that it has classified as critical. @ Tips - You can adjust the brightness of the display in the exte rior m irror @ c::> page 107. - Please refer to the instructions for towing a trailer located in c::>page105. General information Appl ies to: vehicles with Audi side assist ® ® ~ .. :i: co f1ID AUDI Fig. 1 21 Rear of the vehicle: posit ion of the sensors Side assist funct ions at speeds above approximately 19 mph (30 km/h) . @ Vehicles that are approaching In certain cases, a vehicle will be classified as critica l for a lane change even if it is still some what far away . The faster a vehicle approaches, the sooner the display in the exterior m irror will tu rn on. @ Vehicles traveling with you Vehicles traveling with you are indicated in the exter ior mirror if they are classified as cr itical for a lane change . All vehicles detected by side assist are ind icated by the t ime they ente r you r "blind spot", at the lates t . © Vehicles you are passing If you s low ly pass a veh icle that s ide ass ist has detected (the difference in speed between the vehicle and you r vehicle is less than 9 mph (15 km/h)), the display in the exte rior m irror turns on as soon as t he veh icle enters your blind spot . The display w ill not t urn on if you quickly pass a vehicle that side ass ist has de t ected (the difference in speed is greater than 9 mph (15 km/ h)). Functional limitat ions © C) .... The radar sensors are designed to detect the left and right adjacent lanes when the road lanes are t he normal width. In some situations, the display in the exterior m irror may turn on even though t he re is no veh icle located in t he area tha t is critical for a lane change . For exa mple : C0 "' ""'.... 0 0 :r - If the lanes are na rrow or if your are drivi ng on the edge of you r lane. If th is is the case, the ..,. Fig. 120 Driving situations <t 105 A ss is t system may have detected a vehicle in another lane that is not adjacent to your current lane. - If you are driving through a curve. Side assist may react to a vehicle that is one lane over from th e adjacent lane . - If side assist reacts to other objects (such as high or displaced guard rails). - In poor weather condit ions. The side assist functions are limited. - In poor weather conditions, such as heavy rain, snow or fog . - In very wide lanes, in tight curves or when there are slopes in the roadway, vehicles in the neighboring lanes may not be detected because they are outside of the sensor range . (D The sensors can be displaced by impacts or damage to the bumper, wheel housing and underbody. This can impair the system. Have an authorized Audi dealer or author ized Audi Service Facility check their f unct ion. Do not cover the radar sensors <=> fig. 121 with stickers, deposits, bicycle wheels or othe r objects, because they wi ll impair the function. Do not use side assist when towing a trailer. For information on cleaning, see <=> page 306. A WARNING -Always pay attention to traffic and to the area around your vehicle. Side assist cannot replace a driver's attention. The driver alone is always responsible for lane changes and similar driving maneuvers . - In some situat ions, the system may not func t ion or its funct ion may be limited . For example : - if vehicles are approaching or being left behind very quickly. The display may not turn on in t ime . - I n poor weather conditions such as heavy rain, snow or heavy mist . - On very wide lanes, in tight curves, or if there is a rise in the road surface. Vehicles in the adjacent lane may not be detected because they are outs ide of the sensor range. - Audi side assist cannot detect all vehicles under all condit ions, which can increase the risk of accidents. - Please note that side assist only displays approaching vehicles or vehicles in your blind spot if your vehicle is traveling at least 19 mph (30 km/h) . - In certain situations, the system may not work or its function may be limited. For examp le: - The display may not turn on at t he rig ht time if veh ides are approaching or passing very quickly. 106 Note - @ Tips - If the w indow glass in the dr iver's door or front passenger's door has been tinted, the display in t he exterior mirror may be incorrect . - For an explanat ion on confo rm ity w ith the FCCregulations in the United States and the Indust ry Canada regulatio ns, see ~page 339. Switching on/off Applies to: vehicles wi t h Aud i side assist Fig . 122 Dri ver's door: side assist but t on .,.Press t he button to switch the system on and off <=> .& in General information on page 106 . The LED in the button tur ns on when side assist is swit ched on. Assist Setting the display brightness Appl ies to: vehicles with Audi side assist The display brightness can be adjusted in the Infotainment system. .. Select : the ICAR Ifunction button > Car systems contro l button > Driver assist > Audi side assist. The display brightness adj usts automat ically to the br ightness of the surroundings, both in the information and in the warning stage . In very dark or very bright sur roundings, the automatic adju stment will set t he d isp lay t o the m inimum or maxim um level. In such cases, you may not ice no change when adjus ti ng the brightness, or the change may only be not iceable once the surroundings change . Adju st t he bright ness t o a level where the d isp lay in t he inform at ion stage will no t d is rup t your view ahead. If you change t he bright ness, the display in t he ext erior mirror will brief ly show t he brightness level in the information stage . The brightness of the warning stage is linked to the brightness in the informat ion stage and is adjusted along w ith the information stage. (D Tips - Side assist is not active wh ile you are ma king the adju stment. - Your settings are automatically store d and ass igned to the remote control key being used. Messages Appl ies to: vehicles with Audi side assist If s ide ass ist switches off by itself, the LEDin the button turns off and a message will appear in the instr ument cluster d is play: Audi side assist: currently unavailable Side a ssist ca nnot be sw itched on at t his time because there is a ma lfunction (for example, the battery charge leve l may be too low). Audi side assist: System fault! The system canno t gua rantee that it will detect vehicle s cor rectl y and it has switc hed off. The senso rs have been moved or are fau lty. Have t he system checked by an au t horized Audi dealer or autho rized Audi Serv ice Facility soon. Audi side assist: Unavailable when towing Side ass ist swit ches off automatically when a factory -inst al led t ra ile r hitch is con necte d t o the electrical connec t or on the t rai ler . There is no guarantee the system will switch off when using a retrofitted trailer hitch. Do not use side assist when towing a trai ler. Night vision assist with pedestrian and wild animal detection Description Appli es to : vehicles wit h night vision assist The night vision assist can detect, highlight and, if necessary, warn about pedestrians and large wild animals. Night vision assist w ith pedestrian and w ild a nimal detection assists you at nig ht by using an infrared camera to monitor the a rea in front of your vehicle, within the limits of the system. It can d isplay objects up to a distance of approxi mately 1000 feet (300 m) . The thermal image de t ected by t he camera is show n in the inst rument cluster d isplay. Warm areas appear lighter and co ld areas ap pear dar ker. Audi side assist: Currently unavailable . No sensor vision 0 co .... N ,..... The rada r senso rs' vision is affected . Do not cover the area in front of the senso rs with bike wheels , sticke rs, dirt or othe r objects . Clean t he a rea in fr on t of t he senso rs, if necess ar y c>page 105, .... fig. 12 1 . N 0 0 :c '<t 107 A ss is t Highlighting detected pedestrians and wild animals Pedestrian and wild animal warning Applies to : vehicles wit h night vision assis t Applies to: ve hicles with night vision ass ist Fig. 125 Instrument clus te r: @ pedest rian warning, @ Fig. 123 Instrument cluster: yellow highl ighted pedes trians wild anim al warn ing Fig. 126 Instr um ent clus ter: @ pedestria n warning/ @ Fig. 124 Instrument cluster: symbol when the infrared image is not visible W ith in the limits of the system, the night vision assist can detect pedestria ns and wild an imals that are between approximately 32 ft (10 m) and 295 ft (90 m) in front of the vehicle and within the detection zone . Within the limits of the system q poge 109, a pedestrian or wild an imal detected when the low beams are switched on is highlighted in yellow q fig. 123. Animal recognition is not active with in highly developed areas. The system only detects large wild animals such as deer. @ Tips If another display such as navigation replaces the night vision assist image, the~,, symbol appears in a tab q fig . 124 . You can access night vision ass ist using the mult ifunct ion steer ing whee l buttons q page 11. 108 wild animal warning, when the night vision ass ist image is not selected in the instru ment cluster display Image in the instrument cluster/ Head-up display* If there are pedestrians or w ild an imals in an area in front of your vehicle that is classified as crit ical, the system will direct your attention to th is: - Pedestrians or wild anima ls are highlighted in red and the corresponding symbo l . or . turns on ~ fig. 125 . - There is also an audible signal. The area classified as critical is based on the veh icle speed and the steeri ng wheel angle . Pedestrian and wild animal warning enco urages you to pay more attention. If the night vision assist image is rep laced by anothe r d isplay (such as the on-board compute r), the red . or . indicator light ~ fig. 126 will appear if there is a pedestrian or wild anima l warning. Assist If the Head-up display* is switched on and the night vision assist content is activated,. or. will appear in the Head-up display". Marking light* To direct the driver's attention to a pedestrian, the headlights can flash on the pedestrian three times in a row when there is a pedestrian warn ing. This occurs at speeds above approximately 35 mph (60 km/h) if you are outside of illum inated areas and no detected vehicles are shown. The high beam assistant* controls the marking light* c::> page 44, High beam assistant . The marking light is not used for wild animals. General information Applies to : vehicles with night vision assist Fig. 127 Front of the vehicle: night vision assist camera The following situations may affect the function of the night vision assist system: - Poor visibility such as snow, rain, fog or heavy spray - Dirty lens on the night vision assist camera Make sure the night vision assist camera c::>fig.127 is not covered by stickers, deposits or any other obstructions because that can affect the camera function . For information on clean ing , refer to c::>page 306 . C) .... C0 ,.... "' .... "' 0 temperatures above approximately 77 °F (25 °C) and during daylight. If the night vision assist image is selected in the instrument cluster display, symbol appears at the top on the then the right side. II A - WARNING Pay attention to traffic and the area around your vehicle when night vision assist is switched on. The driver is always responsible for assessing the traffic situation. - Night vision assist can only warn about people and wild animals located within the visual range of the infrared camera. The visual range corresponds to the image in the instrument cluster display. - Night vision assist may not detect people or wild animals and mark them if - they are not in an upright position, for examp le if they are sitting or lying down and/or - the silhouette in the display appears incomplete or interrupted, for example because the person is partially covered by a vehicle or an animal by tall grass. This could increase the risk of an accident. - Never try to swerve around animals if doing so will endanger you or other road users, because this increases the risk of an accident. (l'} Tips - Even though the system evaluates the shape and heat given off by all detected objects, there are limits to the system . There may be false warnings. - For technical reasons , the image pauses in split second intervals. The pedestrian and wild anima l recogn it ion depends on the temperature difference between the person/wild an ima l and the background . Peo ple/wild animals may not be detected if the difference is too small. The pedestrian/wild animal marking and the marking light* deactivate at 0 :r <t 109 - A ss ist Switching on/ off Applies to: vehicles with night vision assist er or authori zed Audi Service Facility for assistance . Night vision assist : Currently unavailable The system cannot guarantee correct funct ion at th is time and is switched off . Night vision assist: Only available at night with lights turned on Night vision assist only works whe n it is dark outside and the headlights are on. Fig. 128 Area around th e l ight switch : night vision assist butto n Requirement: switch the ignition on and turn the light switch to the AUTO position. • Press the [g button 9 fig. 128 . The heat image from the nig ht vision camera appears in the inst rume nt cluster display. • Press the (g button again to switch the night vision assist off . If cond it ions are bright enough, night vision assist can be switched on withou t moving the light switch to the AUTO position. Pedestrian and wild animal highlighting and warnings are only active when it is dark outs ide and the headlights are switched on . Adjusting the contrast Applies to: vehicles with night vision assist • Select : the ICARI function button > Car systems contro l button > Driver assist > Night vision assist contrast. When the night vision assist is switched on and the image is visible in the instrument cluster display, you can adjust the contrast in the image from Min to Max. Messages Applies to: vehicles with night vision assist Night vision assist: Pedestri an marking currently unavailab le The pedestrian and wi ld animal marki ng was swit ched off by the system . Audi drive settings) select (drive Introduction Drive select makes it possib le to exper ience diff erent types of vehicle settings in one veh icle . The dr iver can select Comfort , Auto and Dynamic modes in the Infotainment system to switch between, for example, a sporty and a comfortab le driv ing mode . You can adjust the vehicle settings to your personal preferences in the Ind ividual mode . This makes it possible to comb ine sett ings such as a sporty engine setting with light steer ing. Description The following systems, among ot her things, are influenced by dr ive select: Eng ine and tr ansmis sion Depending on the mode, th e engine and transmission respond more quickly or in a more balanced manner to accelerator pedal movements. In the sporty dynamic mode, the transm ission shifts at higher speed ranges. Night vision assist: System fau lt Air suspen sion The system cannot guarantee correct function and is switched off . See an author ized Audi deal- 110 The adaptive air suspension/adapt ive air suspension sport* is an electronically controlled air suspension and damping system . The adjustment .., Assist depends on the driving mode selected, steering movements, the driver's braking and acceleration, and as the road surface, vehicle speed and load. A sporty setting is generally used in vehicles with adaptive air suspension sport*. The vehicle ground clearance depends on the mode selected and the speed. When you are in the auto or dynamic mode, the highway setting is activated when you drive above 75 mph (120 km/ h) for more than 30 seconds. The ground clearance is increased automatically if the speed drops below 44 mph (70 km/h) for more than 120 seconds. Steering The power steering adapts. Indirect steering that moves easily as in comfort mode is especially suited to long drives on a highway. The dynamic mode provides sporty, direct steering . Applies to: vehicles with dynamic steering The steering ratio changes based on vehicle speed in order to maintain optimum steering ef fort for the driver at all times . This sets the steering to be less sensitive at higher speeds in order to provide improved vehicle control. At reduced speeds, steering is more direct in order to keep the steering effort as minimal as possible when the driver is maneuvering the vehicle. At low and average speeds, dynamic steering* additionally provides more responsive steering performance. Sport differential* As a component of the all wheel drive system (quattro) ~ page 130, the sport differential distributes the driving power to the rear axle depending on the situation. The distribution of power varies from balanced (comfort) to sporty (dynamic) depending on the selected mode. The goal is a high level of agility and ability to accelerate on curves. The vehicle is very responsive to steering . Adaptive cruise control* The behavior when accelerating can be adjusted from comfortable to sporty, depending on the drive select mode. Adaptive cruise control also responds to the driving behavior of the vehicle ahead in a more conservative or sporty manner. Engine sound* The engine sound adapts to the current mode and can be subtle to sporty. (D Note - Make sure there is enough clearance above and below the vehicle when parking. The height of the vehicle can change once it is parked due to temperature fluctuations, changes to the load conditions and changes to the driving modes, which can affect clearance. - When transporting the vehicle on a car carrier, train, ship or by other means, only tie the vehicle down at the running surface of the tires, which is the outer circumference. Securingthe vehicleat the axle components, suspension struts or towing eyes is not permitted because the pressure in the air suspension struts can change during transport. The vehicle may not be secured sufficiently if this happens. @ Tips - In some models, the maximum vehicle speed can only be reached in the auto and dynamic modes. - The S selector lever position automatically engages if the dynamic mode is selected. - In vehicles that have dynamic steering*, operating noise is heard when starting or stopping the engine. This does not indicate a problem. Cornering light* 0 co .... N ,..... .... N 0 The cornering light adapts the high beams to the direction of the curve depending on the speed. The pivoting action and the lighting also adapt to the mode . 0 :c '<t 111 A ss ist mits, after changing modes, briefly take your foot off the accelerator pedal so that the recently se lected mode is also activated for the engine. Selecting the driving mode Comfort - prov ides a comfort-or iented vehicle setup and is suited fo r long drives on highways. Auto - provides an overa ll comfortab le yet dynam ic dr iving feel and is suited for everyday use. Dynamic - gives the dr iver a sporty driving feel and is suited to a sporty driving style . In dividual - ¢ page 112 . Fig. 129 Infotainme nt system: drive select • To se lect the mode, select the following in the funct ion button> Comfort , Infotainment : ICARI Auto, Dynamic or Ind ividual. _& WARNING - Pay attention to traff ic when ope rating the d rive select to reduce the risk of an accident . You can change the driving mode when the vehicle is stat ionary or wh ile driving. If traffic perAdjusting the individual mode You can adjust the vehicle settings to your personal preferences . • Se lect : the ICARI function button > Set individ· ual control button . Once you select the menu, you will automatically drive in the Individual mode . The equipment in your vehicle will determine which sett ings you can adjust. The fo llowing table gives an overview of the characteristics . Comfort Auto Dynamic Engine/ t ransmission balanced balanced sporty Air suspension comfo rtable balanced sporty Steering comfortable balanced sporty Dynamic steering* comfo rtable/ indirect ba la need/d irect sporty/direct Sport differ ential * balanced agile sporty Adaptive cruise contr ol* comfo rtable balanced sporty Engine sound* subt le subtle/sportyal sporty al Sub tle in the sele ctor lever position D and sporty in S. (D Tips Your Indi vidual mode settings are automatically stored and assig ned to the remote control key be ing used . 112 Raising/lowering the vehicle Raising the vehicle .. Select the fo llowing in the Info t ainment sysIfunction button> Raise contro l tem: the ICAR button . .. Wait for the arrows in the display to stop blinking and the vehicle to reach it s final position . ..,. Assist Lowering the vehicl e "'To lower the vehicle, select the following in the Infotainment system: the !CAR Ifunction button > Lower control button. "' Wait for the arrows in the display to stop blinking and the vehicle to lower completely. (D Note - Remember that your vehicle is not suitable for driving offroad even when it is raised. There is not enough ground clearance. - If the vehicle is raised, it will lower automatically when driving 62 mph (100 km/h) or faster. Messages Air suspension: Vehicle is too high . Controlling level. .. Air suspension: Vehicle is too low. Controll ing level. .. The driver message switches off when the level control process is complete. 0 co .... N ,..... .... N 0 0 :c '<t 113 Parking systems Parking systems General information Applies to: vehicles with parking system plus/rearview camera/peripheral camera Depending on your vehicle's equipment , various parking aids will help you when parking and maneuvering. The parking system plus assists you when parking by audibly and visually indicating objects detected in front of and behind the vehicle ¢ page 115. The rearview camera shows the area behind the vehicle in the Infotainment system display. This display assists you when you are cross or parallel parking ¢ page 116. The parking system plus functions are also available ¢ page 115. The peripheral cameras give various views to help you when parking or maneuvering ¢ page 119. The parking system plus functions are also available ¢ page 115. & WARNING - Always look for traffic and check the area around your vehicle by looking at it directly as well. The parking system cannot replace the driver's attention. The driver is always responsible when entering or leaving a parking space and during similar maneuvers . - Please note that some surfaces , such as clothing, are not detected by the system . - Sensors and cameras have blind spots in which people and objects cannot be detected . Be especially cautious of small children and animals . - The sensors can be displaced by impacts or damage to the radiator gr ille, bumper, wheel housing and the underbody . The parking system may be impaired as a result. Have an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility check their function . - Make sure the sensors are not obstructed by stickers, deposits or other materials. If they are, the sensor function could be impaired. For additional information on cleaning, see c:> page 306. 114 (D Note - Some objects are not detected or displayed by the system under certain circumstances: - Objects such as barrier chains, trailer draw bars, vertical poles or fences - Objects above the sensors such as wall extensions - Objects with certain surfaces or structures such as chain link fences or powder snow - If you continue driving closer to a low object, it may disappear from the sensor range. Note that you will no longer be warned about th is obstacle. (D Tips - The system may provide a warning even though there are no obstacles in the coverage area in some situations, such as: - certain road surfaces or when there is tall grass. - external ultrasonic sources such as from cleaning vehicles . - in heavy rain, snow, or thick vehicle exhaust. - We recommend that you practice parking in a traffic -free location or parking lot to become familiar with the system . When doing this, there should be good light and weather conditions. - You can change the volume and pitch of the signals as well as the display ¢ page 124. - Please refer to the instructions for towing a trailer located in ¢ page 124. - What appears in the infotainment display is somewhat time-delayed. - The sensors must be kept clean and free of snow and ice for park aid to operate . Parking Parking system plus syst ems Switching on/off Applies to: vehicles with park ing system plus Description App lies to: vehicles with parking system plus Parking system plus provides audio and visual signals when parking . Fig. 1 31 Center console: parking aid butto n Switching on Fig. 130 Display fi eld Sensors are located in the front and rear bumpe rs. If these detect an obstacle , audible and visual signa ls warn you. Make sure the sensors are not covered by stickers, depos its or any other obstructions as it may impair the sensor function. For information on cleaning, refer to¢ page 306. The display field begins approximate ly at: ® 4 ft (1.20 m) ® 3 ft (0.90 m) © ® 5.2 ft (1.60 m) 3 ft (0.90 m) The closer you get to the obstacle, the sho rter the interval between t he audible s ignals. A continuous tone so unds when the obstacle is less than approximately 1 foot (0.30 meters) away . Do not cont inue driving forwa rd or in reverse ¢ &. in General information on page 114, ¢ (D in General information on page 114! If the d istance to an obs t acle remains constant, the vol ume of the distance wa rning gradually d rops afte r about four seconds (th is does not apply in the continuous tone range) . .. Shift into reverse, or .. Press t he PwAbutton in the center conso le ¢ fig. 131. A short confirmation tone sounds and the LEDin the button turns on. Switching off .. Drive faster than 6 mph (10 km/h), or .. Press the PwAbutton, or .. Switch the ignit ion off. Visual display The segments in front of and behind the veh icle help you to determine the distance between you and an obstacle . The red lines mark the expected direction of travel according to the steering angle. A white segment indicates an identified obstacle that is outside of the vehicle 's path. Red segments show identified obstacles that are in your vehicle's path . As your vehicle comes closer to the obstacle, the segments move close r to the veh icle . The collision area has been reached when the next to last segment is displayed. Obstacles in the collisio n area, including those ou t side of the vehicle's pa t h, a re shown in red. Do not cont inue driving forward or in reverse ¢ &. in General information on page 114 , ¢ (D in General information on page 114! C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 0 :r <t 115 Parking sy stem s Rearview camera Introduction Applies to: vehicles with rearview camera rym AUl:J ,. ,I Fig. 135 Luggage compa rtmen t lid : locatio n of t he rear - view camera Fig. 132 Illustration : Cross parking The rearview camera is located above the rear license plate bracket. Make sure that the lens for the rearview camera ¢ fig. 135 is not covered by deposits or any other obstructions because this can impair the function of the parking system . For information on cleaning, refer to ¢ page 306. The rearview camera coverage area corresponds to (j) ¢ fig . 134 . Only this area is shown in the In fota inment display . Objects that are outside of th is area @ are not displayed. Fig. 133 Illustration : pa rallel parking The rearview camera gives you two views: you can use Cross parking to park in a parking space or a ga rage, for example ¢ fig . 132 . You can use parallel parking if you would like to park on t he s ide of the road ¢ fig. 133. General information Applies to: vehicles with rearview camera Fig. 134 Area covered @ and area not covered @ by the rearv iew cam era . 116 A WARNING - Always read and follow the app licab le warnings ¢ &. in General information on page 114 . - If the position and the installa t ion angle of the rearview camera was changed, fo r example after a collision, do not con t inue to use the system for safety reasons . Have it checked by an authorized Audi dea ler or authorized Audi Service Facility. - Only use the rearv iew camera to ass ist you if it shows a good, clear picture . For example , the image may be affected by the sun shining into the lens, dirt on the lens, or if there is a malfunction . - Use the rearv iew camera on ly if the luggage compartment lid is completely closed . Make sure a ny objects you may have mo unted on the luggage compa rtment lid do not block the rear view camera. - The camera lens enlarges and distorts the fie ld of vision . The object appears bot h a ltered and inac cur ate o n t he screen. Parking - In certain situations, people or objects in the display appear closer or farther away: - For objects that do not touch the ground, such as the bumper of a parked vehicle, a trailer hitch or the rear of a truck. Do not use the orientation lines in this case. - If driven from a level surface onto an incline, or a downward slope. - If driven toward protruding objects. - If the vehicle is carrying too much load in the rear. - The accuracy of the orientation lines and blue su rfaces decreases when the vehicle is raised/lowered ¢ page 110. (D systems "'Sw itch the ignition off. @ Tips - The visual display in the left part of the display should help you detect the critical vehicle areas. - You can change the volume and pitch of the signals as well as the display ¢ page 124. Perpendicular parking Applies to: vehicles with rearview camera This view may be used when parking in a garage or in a parking space . Note - Always read and follow the applicable warnings c:> © in General information on page 114 . - The orange-colored orientation lines in the Infotainment display show the vehicle path based on the steering wheel angle . The front of the vehicle swings out more than the rear of the vehicle. Maintain plenty of distance so that an exterior mirror or a corner of the vehicle does not collide with any obstacles. Fig. 136 Infota inment system: a iming at a park ing space Switching on/off Applies to: vehicles with rearv 1ew camera Switching on "'Shif t into reverse, or "' Press the p,,,Abutton in the center console c:> page 115, fig. 131. A short conf irm at ion tone sounds and the LEDin the button turns on. Switching between the rearview camera and optical display "' Press t he Graphic contro l button ® c:, page 117, fig . 136 to see the optical display . "' Press the Rear view control button to see the . . rearv,ew camera image . C) .... Switching off 0 "' Press the P'"Abutton, or C0 "' ""'.... "'Dr ive faster than 6 mph (10 km/h), or 0 :r Fig. 137 Infotainment system: a ligning the vehicle "'Turn the Infotainment system on and shift into reverse gear. "' The orange orientation lines (D show the direction of travel of the vehicle. Turn the steering wheel until the orange orientation lines appear in the parking space c:> fig. 136. Use the markings @ to help you estimate the distance to an obstacle. Each marking represents approximately 3 ft (1 m). The blue area represents an extension of the vehicle's outline by approximately 16 ft (S meters) to the rear. <t 117 Parking sy stem s • While driving in reverse gear, adjust the steering whee l angle to fit the parking space using the orange orientation lines for assistance & in General information on page 116, c>(D in General information on page 117. @ reprec> sents the rear bumper . At the very latest, stop the veh icle when t he red orientation line @ borders an object . Parallel parking App lies to: vehicles with rearview ca mera This view may be used when parallel parking along the side of a street. to this vehicle should be approximate ly 3 ft . (1 m). • Turn the Infotainment system on and shift into reverse gear. The parking system is turned on and the Cross parking view is disp layed. • Press the contro l butto n on the Infotainment unit © ~ fig. 138 . The Parallel parking view is disp layed. • Backup and alig n your veh icle so the blue a rea @ bo rders on the rear end of t he vehicle be& in hind you or on the park ing space line c:::> General information on page 116, c:::> (D in General information on page 117. The blue area represents an extension of the veh icle's outline by approximately 16 ft (5 meters) to the rear. The long side of the blue area should be on the curb. The ent ire blue area must fit into the parking space. • With the vehicle stopped, t urn the steering wheel to the right as far as it will go. • Back into the pa rking space unt il t he blue curve <=:> fig. 139 touches the curb c:::> & in General information on page 116, <=:>CD in General information on page 117 . Stop the vehicle. Fig. 138 Infotainment: blue surfaces a ligned in t he par k- ing space • With the vehicle stopped, turn the steering wheel to the left as far as it will go. • Continue to back into the parking space until the vehicle is parked paralle l to the curb c>& in General information on page 116, c>(D in General information on page 117 . @ represents the rear bumper. At the very latest, stop the vehicle whe n the red or ientat ion line @ borders an object . Keep an eye on the front of your vehicle whi le doing this. Parking next to obstacles Fig. 139 Infotainment: contact of the blue curved line with t he curb Parking on the right is described here. It is identical whe n pa rking on the left. If there is an obstacle next to the parking space (such as a wall), refer to Informat ion for parking page 118 . next to obstacles c:::> • Activate the turn s ignal. • Pos ition your vehicle next to a parked veh icle in front of the desired parki ng space. The distance 118 If there is an obstacle (s uch as a wall) next to t he parking sp ace, posi ti on the veh icle so t here is more sp ace on that side. Position the long side of the blue surface so that there is s uff icient space from the obstacle. The surface must not be touching . You will a lso need to start turning the steering wheel earlier. The blue curve c>fig. 139 must not touch the obstacle, but rather there should be enough distance . Parking @ Tips The left or rig ht orientation lines and surfaces will be displayed, depending on the turn signal being used. A WARNING -- Always read and follow the applicab le warn- Peripheral cameras Introduction Appl ies to: vehicles with per ipheral came ras With this equipmen t, the parking system plus* c::!;> page 115 is supplemented with various periph e ral cameras. The fo ur cameras g ive you the fo llowing views : a rea around the vehicle, front corner view and rear corne r view, view in front of the vehicle and behind the vehicle . General information - - - Appl ies to: vehicles with pe ripheral ca me ras - ings¢ &. in General information on page 114 . If the position or the installat io n angle of a camera was changed, for example afte r a coll is ion, do not cont inue to use the system for safety reasons. Have it checked by a n authori zed Audi dealer or authorized Aud i Serv ice Facility. Keep in mind that the image in the display is incor rect if the exterio r mirror housing ha s been manually adjus ted. Use the Rear mode and the corner view (rear) mode only when t he luggage compartment lid is comp letely closed. Other wise the image in the disp lay w ill be distorted . The vehicle surround ings are shown using the camera images . The vehicle image is shown by the system. Objects and obstacles above the camera are not disp layed. Camera lenses enlarge and distort the field of vision. The objects appear both a ltered and inaccurate on the screen. (D Fig. 14 0 Location of perip he ra l cameras The fo ur per ipheral cameras are located in t he rad iator grille, in the luggage compa rtment lid and on both exterior mirro rs ¢ fig . 140 . Make sure that the lenses are not covered by deposits or any other obstructions as this may impa ir the system. For information on cleaning, refer to ¢page 306. In the Top view mode, black corners are shown in the vehicle silhouette. Objects in these areas are outside of the camera's fie ld of view and are not detected. ~ ..., ~ N 8 The accuracy of the orientation lines and the blue surfaces is reduced if the adapt ive air suspension/sport* is faulty, if the vehicle is lifted or if the Dy namic mode is activated ¢ page 110 . syst ems Note - Always read and fo llow the applicab le wa rnings ¢ (Din General information on page 114. - The Infotainment display shows the direction in which the rear of the ve hicle is traveling based on the steering whee l ang le. The front of the veh icle swings out more than the rear of the vehicle . Maintain plenty of dist ance so t hat a n exte rior m irror or a corner of t he vehicle does not coll ide with any obsta cles. ¢j) Tips If t he 8/cr;J'J/c:s symbo l appears in the d isplay and the respective d isp lay area is grayed out, then the powe r exter io r mir rors we re fo lded in or one of t he doors/l ugg age com partment lid was opened . 0 :r <t 119 Parking systems Switching on or off Peripheral Applies to: vehicles with per ipheral cameras Applies to : vehicles wit h per ipheral cameras Fig. 141 Center console: Pw.!. button Fig. 143 Infota inment system: periphera l mode This view is ideal for maneuvering. The vehicle surroundings are shown using the camera images. The vehicle image is shown by the system. Selecting peripheral .. Select the @ symbo l with the contro l knob and press the control knob . Fig. 142 Infotainment system: select the mode Switching on .. Shift into reverse , or .. Press the P"'Abutton in the center console c> fig. 141. A short confirmation tone sounds and the LEDin the button turns on. Selecting the mode .. Turn the cont rol knob to the symbol for the desired mode @ through ® ¢ fig . 142 and press the control knob. Switching off .. Drive faster t han 6 mph (10 km/h), or .. Press the P#~ button, or .. Switch the ign ition off. 1 You may select from the following modes: @ - Top view c>page 120 ® - Corner view (front) © -Front¢ c>page 121 page 121 @ -Rea r c>page121 ® - Corner view (rear)¢ page 121 120 Switching between optical view and camera image .. Press the Graphic © contro l button to see the optical display . .. To display the camera image, press the Camera control button . Parking Corner view (front)/corner view (rear) Applies to: vehicles with peripheral cameras Fig. 144 Infotainment system: corner view (front) systems Front Applies to: vehicles with peripheral cameras Fig. 146 Infot ainme nt system: fro nt mode This view assists you for example, in using the full maneuvering range in front of the vehicle. The area in front of the vehicle is displayed. The vehicle surround ings are shown in the left area of the display . You can switch between the optical display and camera image qpage 120 . Fig. 145 Infotainment system: corner view (rear) This view can assist you for examp le, when you are exiting from an area w ith poor visibility. The area at the front and rear sides of the vehicles is displayed . .. Select the © symbol with the control knob. The orange-colored orientat ion lines denote the projected direction of travel. Stop the vehicle when the red orientation line* borders an objec t q _&.in General information on page 119. Rear Applies to: vehicles with peripheral cameras .. To show the side view toward the front, select the symbol ® ~ fig. 144 w ith the contro l knob and press the control knob . .. To show the side view toward the rear, select the symbol ® q fig. 145 with the control knob and press the control knob . Fig. 147 Infot ainme nt system: rea r mo de C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 0 This view assists you for example, in using the full maneuvering range behind the vehicle. The area behind t he vehicle is displayed. The vehicle sur roundings are shown in the left area of the display. You can switch between the optical display and camera image qp age 120. .. Select the symbol @ with the contro l knob . :r <t 121 Ill>- Parking sy stem s You can choose between three different views in this mode. .,.To cross park, parallel park or position the vehi cle in front of a tra iler*, press the control button ® on the contro l pane l repeatedly unt il the symbol for the des ired mode is selected . the orange or ientation lines for assistance q in General information on page 119, q (D in General information on page 119. @ represents the rear bumper. You should stop reversing at the latest when the red orientation line @ borders an object <=> .&. in General informa tion on page 116. A Perpendicular parking Applies to: vehicles with perip hera l cameras This view may be used when parking in a garage or in a parking space. Parallel parking Applies to: vehicles wit h peripheral cameras This view may be used when parallel parking along the side of a street. Fig. 14 8 Infotainment system: aiming at a parking space Fig. 15 0 Infota inment: blue surfaces aligned in the parking space Fig. 149 Infotainment system: aligning the vehicle Requ irements: cross parki ng must be selected q page 121 . .,.The orange orientation lines (D show the d irection of travel of the vehicle . Turn the steering wheel until the orange orientation lines appear in the pa rking space ¢ fig. 148 . Use the ma rkings @ to he lp you estimate the distance to an obstacle . Each marking represents approxima t ely 3 ft (1 m). The blue area represents an extension of the vehicle's outline by approxi mately 16 ft (S meters) to the rear. .,.While driving in reverse gear, adjust the steering wheel angle to f it the parking space using 122 Fig. 151 Infota inm ent: contact of the blue curved line with the cu rb Parking on the right is descr ibed here . It is identica l when parking on the left. If there is an obstacle next to the parking space (such as a wall), refer to Information fo r parking next to obstacles q page 118 . .,.Activate the turn signal. .,. Posit ion your veh icle next to a parked vehicle in front of the des ired park ing space . The distance to this vehicle should be approximate ly 3 ft. (1 m). ..,. Parking .. Turn the Infotainment system on and shift into reverse gear. The parking system is turned on and the Cross parking view is displayed. .. Press the control button on the Infotainment unit @ ¢ page 118, fig. 138. The Parallel parking view is displayed . .. Back up and align your vehicle so the blue area @ borders on the rear end of the vehicle behind you or on the parking space line ¢ .,&. in syst ems Trailer mode Applies to : vehicles wit h peripheral cameras and tra iler hitch This view assists you in positioning the vehicle in front of a trailer. General information on page 119, ¢ (Din General information on page 119 . The blue area rep resents an extension of the vehicle's outline by approximately 16 ft (5 meters) to the rear . The long s ide of the blue area should be on the curb. The entire blue area must f it into the parking space . .. With the vehicle stopped, turn the steering wheel to the right as far as it will go . .. Back into the parking space until the blue curve ¢ fig . 151 touches the curb ¢ .,&. in General information on page 119, ¢ (Din General information on page 119. Stop the vehicle . .. With the vehicle stopped, turn the steering whee l to the left as far as it will go. .. Continue to back into the parking space until the vehicle is parked parallel to the curb¢ /A in General information on page 119, ¢ (Din General information on page 119 . @ represents the rear bumper . At the very latest, stop the vehicle when the red o rientation line @ bo rders an object . Keep an eye on the front of you r vehicle while doing this. Fig. 15 2 Infotainment system: rear mo de Requirement: the trailer mode m ust be selected ¢page 121, Rear . .,. Now yo u can posit ion your ve hicle in front of the t railer ¢ .,&.in General information on page 119, ¢ (Din General information on page 119. The orange orient ation line indicates the expected path toward the trailer hitch. Use the blue lines to help you est imate the distance to the trailer hitch. Setting the mode Applies to : vehicles wit h peripheral cameras .,.Select: !CAR !function button> Car systems control button > Driver assist > Parking aid > Change to front / rear > Auto or Manual. Parking next to obstacles If there is an obstacle (such as a wall) next to the parking space, pos ition the vehicle so t here is mo re space on that side. Position the long side of the blue area so that there is s ufficient space from the obje ct. The area must not be on t he ob stacle . You will also need to start tu rning the steering whee l earlier. The blue curve ¢ page 118, fig. 139 must not touch the obstacle, but rather there should be enough distance. @ C) ~ "' ~ 8 0 Auto - This view behind the vehicle (Rear mode) is d isplayed automat ically when you shift into reverse. Th is view in front of the vehicle (Front mode) is d isplayed automat ically when you shift int o the forward gea rs. Manu al - When you switch the system on, the view beh ind the ve hicle (Rear mode) is always displayed and it does not switch to the Front mode when a forward gear is se lected . Tips The left or right orientation lines and surfaces will be displayed, depending on the turn signa l being used. :r <t 123 Parking systems Adjusting the display and the warning tones Applies to: vehicles with parking system plus/rearview camera/per ipheral came ra The display and warning tones can be adjusted in the Infotainment. ~ Select: the ICARI function button > Car systems control button > Driver assist > Parking aid. Display On* - An optical display is shown for the parking system plus, a rearview camera image is shown for the rearview camera*. Off - When the parking system is switched off, only audib le signals are given. Front volume - volume for the front area Rear volume - volume for the rear area Front frequency - frequency for the front area Rear frequency - frequency for the rear area Entertainment volume - when the parking system is turned on, the volume of the audio/video source is lowered. {!) briefly Tips - The warning tones can also be adjusted directly by the visual disp lay or the picture from the camera. Simply press the Settings contro l button . - Changed settings are act ivated when the parking system is switched on aga in. - The settings for volume and frequency are automat ically saved and assigned to the remote control key bei ng used. Error messages Applies to: vehicles with parking system plus/rearview camera/peripheral came ra There is an error in the system if the LED in the P,YA button is blinking and you hear a continuous alarm for a few seconds after switching on the 124 Parking system plus* If a sensor is faulty, the~ symbol will appear in front of/behind the vehicle in the Infotainment display. If a rear sensor is faulty, on ly obstacles that are in areas @ and @ are displayed c>page 115, fig . 130. If a front sensor is faulty, only obstacles that are in areas © and @ are dis played. There is a lso a system malfunction if all segments around the vehicle are red or if no segments are disp layed. Peripheral cameras* Signal tones The new ly selected level is demonstrated by the sound generator. parking sys t em or when the pa rking system is already activated . If the error is not corrected before you switch off the ignition, the LEDin the PwA button will blink the next time you switch on the parking system by shifting into reverse. There is a system malfunc t ion if the ~ · symbol appears and the corresponding display area is shown in blue . The camera is not working in this area. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi ServiceFacility immediately to havethe malfunction corrected . Trailer hitch Applies to: vehicles with parking system plus/rearv iew camera/peripheral cameras and t ra iler hitc h For vehicles using the trailer socket, the parking system rear sensors are not activated when you shift into reverse gear or when you press the P11.A button . This results in the following restrictions . Parking system plus* There is no distance warning for the rear. The front sensors remain activated. The visual display switches to trailer mode. Rearview camera* /Peripheral cameras* There is no distance warning for the rear. The front senso rs remain activated . The visua l display switches to trailer mode . The rearview camera image will not show the orientation lines and the Illblue surfaces . Parking @ systems Tips Trailer hitches t hat are not installed at t he factory may cause the parking system to malfunction or they may restrict its function. 0 co .... N ,..... .... N 0 0 :c '<t 125 Inte l ligent Technology Intelligent Technology Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC) In extreme cases, EDL a utomat ically switches off to keep the brake on the braked whee l from overheating. The veh icle is still working correct ly. EDL will switc h on again automatically when conditions have returned to normal. Description Steering recommendat ion The ESC increases driving safety . It reduces the risk of s lipping and improves driving stabi lity. ESC detects critical situations such as when the veh icle is oversteer ing and understeering or the wheels are spinning. The vehicle is stabilized by apply ing the brakes or reducing eng ine torque . When ESC engages, t he Ji]ind icator light blinks in the inst rument cluste r. The fo llow ing systems are integrated in the ESC: Anti -lock braking system (ABS) ABS prevents the whee ls from locking when braking . The vehicle can sti ll be steered even d uring hard brak ing. Apply steady press ure to the brake pedal. Do not pump the pedal. A puls ing in the brake pedal indicates that the system is acting to stabilize the vehicle. Brake assist system The brake assist system can dec rease braking distance. It increases brak ing power when the driver presses the brake pedal quick ly in emergency situations . You must press and hold the brake pedal until the dangerous situat io n is over . In veh icles w ith adapt ive cruise control*, t he bra ke assis t system is more sensitive if the di stance detected to the veh icle dr iving ahead is too small. On ve hicles w ith act ivated and fu ncti o ning night vision assist*, the brake assist system can respond more sensit ively if there is a warning . Anti-slip regulation (ASR) ASR red uces eng ine power when the d rive wheels begin spinning an d ad ap t s t he force to t he road conditions. This makes it easier to sta rt, acceler ate and dr ive up hills. Electronic differential lock (EDL) EDLapplies the brakes to a wheel that sta rts sp inning and t ransfe rs t he d rive powe r to t he ot her d riving w heels. This funct ion is not availa ble at higher speeds . 126 The ESC he lps to stabili ze t he vehicle by changing the steering torque. In veh icles with dyna m ic st eer ing*, ESC a lso helps to sta bilize the st eer ing in cr it ica l situa tions. Selective wheel torque control Se lective wheel to rque cont rol is used when d riving on curves. The fro nt wheel on the ins ide of the curve or bo t h whee ls on the inside of the curve are braked selectively as needed. This allows more pre cise d riving in cu rves. The applicab le system may no t ac t ivate when dr iving in we t o r snowy condi t ions . Automatic post-collision braking system The "automat ic post-coll ision braking system" can help to reduce the risk of sl iding and of additiona l co llisions after an acc iden t . If the a irbag contro l modu le detects a collision above a cer tai n vehicle speed, the ve hicle is br aked by the ESC. The veh icle does not brake automatically if: - the drive r presses the acce lerator pedal, or - the bra king force generate d by the pressed brake pedal is greater than the braking force that would be initiated by the system, or - the ESC, the bra ke system or the vehicle electrical system are not functioning. A WARNING - The ESC and its integ rated systems can not overcome the lim its imposed by natura l p hys ica l laws. Th is is es pec ially impor t an t on s lippery or wet roads. If the system s beg in act ing t o st abilize yo ur vehicle, you should immedi ately al te r your speed to match t he road and t raffi c conditions. Do not let t he increased safety provi ded tempt Intellig you into taking risks. This could increase your risk of a collision. e nt Technology even when these control systems are insta lled and this can affect driving stability and increase the risk of a collision. - Please note the risk of a collision increases when driving fast, especially through curves and on slippery or wet roads, and when driving too close to objects ahead. The ESCand its integrated systems cannot always prevent collisions - there is still a risk of accidents! - Press the accelerator pedal carefully whe n accelerating on even, slippery surfaces such as ice and snow. The drive wheels can spin @ Tips - The ABS and ASR only function correct ly when all four wheels have a simi lar wear condition. Different tire sizes can lead to a reduction in engine power. - You may hear noises when the systems described are working. Switching on and off ESCturns on automatically when you start the engine . The following examples are unusua l situations where it may make sense to switch sport mode on in order to allow the wheels to spin: - Rocking the vehicle to free it when it is stuck - Driving in deep snow or on loose ground - Driving with snow chains Fig. 1 53 Center console wit h ESCOFF button ESC levels Sport mode on Sport mode off Behavior The ESCand ASR stabilization functions are lim ited ¢ .&.. The full stabilization function of the ESC and ASR is available again. Operation Press the [!I button. Press the [!I button again. II t urns on. II turns off . Indicator lights Messages A 0 co .... N ,..... .... N 0 Stabilization control (ESC): Off. Warning! Stabilizat ion control (ESC): On Reduced stability WARNING Only switch sport mode on when yo ur driv ing abilities and the traffic situation permit, because t here is a risk of sliding . - The stabilization func t ion is limited when sport mode is switched on. The driving w heels could spin and the vehicle cou ld swerve, especially on slick or slip pery road surf aces. (D Tips Sport mode cannot be switched on if the cruise control system* or adaptive cruise contro l* is switched on . 0 :c '<t 127 Inte l ligent Technology Brakes New brake pads New brake pads do not achieve the ir f ull braking effect during the firs t 250 mi (400 km) . They must be "broken in" first . The break-in period can be considerably longe r for vehicles with ceram ic brake rotors* . However, you can compensate for the slightly reduced braking force by pressing firm ly on the brake pedal. Avoid heavy braking during the break-in period . Wear Brake pad wear depends largely on the way the vehicle is driven and on operat ing cond itions. This is especially true if you are driving frequently in the city and on curves or with a sporty driving style . Due to its surface, t he ceramic brake rotor * absorbs moisture in certain situations. Therefore, there will tempora rily be less brak ing fo rce than whe n the brakes are dry. You can compensate for th is by pressing the brake pedal harder. Corrosion Leaving the vehicle parked f or long periods of time , low mileage and avoiding heavy braking can contrib ute to corros ion on the brake roto rs and to dirty brake pads. If you usually avoid heavy braking or if there is corrosion present, occasional heavy brak ing at high speeds is recommended to clean the brake rotors and pads c>,& . Brake system malfunction Noises may occur when braking depend ing on the speed, braking force and outs ide cond itions such as temperature and humidity. if you not ice th at the brake pedal t ravel has suddenly increased, then a brake circuit in the dualcircuit brake system may have malfunctioned. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immed iate ly to have the problem corrected . On the way t here, drive w ith Noisesmay becomemore apparent at lower reducedspeed and keep in mind that you wilt speeds due to the nature of the materia ls in the ceramic brake rotors*. need a longe r distance to stop and you will need to press t he brake pedal harder. Effect of water and road salt Low brake fluid level I n cert ain situations, for example aft er driving through water, in heavy rain, afte r overnig ht condensation or after washing your car, the braking effect can be reduced by moisture or ice on the brake rotors and brake pads. The brakes must be "dr ied" first w ith a few caref ul brake applications . When the brake fluid level is low, malfunctions in the brake system may occur . The brake fl uid level is elect ronically moni t ored. Operating noise At higher speeds and with the windshie ld wipers turned on, the brake pads press against the brake rotors for a short amount of time. This action, which is not felt by the driver, happens at regular intervals and ensures a better react ion time for the brakes in wet weather. The braking effect can also be reduced if you are driving on salted roads and you do not apply the brakes fo r long periods of t ime. The layer of salt on th e brake roto rs and pads must be wo rn off fi rst when t he brakes are applied. 128 Brake booster The brake booster amp lifies the pressure you apply to the brake pedal. It only wor ks when the engine is running. A WARNING - - Only apply the brakes for the purpose of cleani ng the brake syst em w hen road and t raffic cond itions permit. You must not endanger ot her road users. This increases th e risk of an accident . - Never let t he vehicle roll while t he engi ne is stop ped because this increases the risk of an accident . ..,. Intellig - New brake pads do not achieve their fu ll brak ing effect during the first 250 mi (400 km). They must be "broken in" first. However, you can compensate for the slightly reduced braking force by pressing firmly on the brake pedal. Avoid heavy braking dur ing the break-in per iod. - Certa in weather and operat ing cond it ions such as dr iving t hrough water, driving in heavy ra in or driving after washing your vehicle can impair the effectiveness of the bra kes . In the winter, ice may build up on the brake pads, rotors and drums . Check these components by braking carefu lly. Applying the brakes carefu lly several times dr ies the brakes and removes ice build-up. - The efficiency of the brakes can also be impaired by driving for long st retches on roads covered with salt without using the brakes. You can remove sa lt deposits from the bra ke rotors and pads by caref ully applyi ng the brakes severa l t imes . - If the front spoiler is damaged or you install another spoiler, ma ke sure the front wheel bra kes are vent ilated prope rly. Ot herwise, the brake system could overheat, wh ich reduces the ir effectiveness. - Failure of a brake circuit impai rs braking perfo rmance, which increases bra king distance . Avoid driving t he vehicle and have it towed it to the nearest author ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. - If the bra ke booster is not wor king, you will have to press m uch harder on the bra ke peda l to compensate for the lack of the booster. (D 0 co .... N ,..._ .... 0 N 0 Note - Never let t he brakes "rub" by pressing the pedal light ly when braking is not actually necessary. This causes the brakes to overheat and increases braking distance and causes wear. - Before driving downh ill a long distance on a steep hill, decrease your speed and select a lower gear. This makes use of the engine braking effect and relieves the brakes . If e nt Technology you need to bra ke addit iona lly, bra ke in interva ls and not continuous ly. (D Tips - If the brake boos ter is not wor king, you must press the brake peda l with much more force than normal. - If you retrof it your vehicle with a front spo iler, wheel covers or simi lar items, make su re that the air f low to the front wheels is not inter rupted. Otherwise the brake system can become too hot. Electromechanical steering., dynamic steering The electromechanical steering supports the driver's steering movements. Power st eer ing adapts electronically based on the vehicle speed . Indicator lights and messages • Do not drive vehicle: Steering defective If this indicator light turns on and stays on and t his message appears, the power steering may have failed. Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible. Do not cont inue driving. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for ass ista nce. l;rjSteering: System fault You can continue driving If the indicator light turns on and the message appears, the steering wheel may be more difficult to move or more sensitive than usual. The steering wheel may also be at an angle when driving stra ight . Drive slowly to an authorized Audi dea ler or authori zed Audi Service Facility to have the malfunct ion corrected . 'T-ij Dynamic steering: Initializing If t he indicato r ligh t is blinking and t his mess age appe ar s, dynamic steering* is being initialized. .,. :c '<t 129 Inte l ligent Technology The stee ring wheel will be easy to move after starting the engine . Re-initialization might be necessary if the steering whee l was moved hard t o the left and right wh ile the vehicle was not mov ing. The display turns off if the initialization was successful. (D For vehicles wit h a ll wheel d rive, o nly wheels with the same rolling circ umfe rence sho uld be used . Avoid using tires with different tread depths c> page 290, New tires or wheels . Offroad vehicle? Tips - If the . or 1;:rij ind icator light only stays on for a short time, you may continue driving. - The dynamic steering stability systems c> page 126 are not available in the event of a system ma lfunction. - For additional informat ion on dynamic steering, refer to c>page 110. All wheel drive (quattro) In all wheel drive, all four wheels are powered . General information In a ll wheel drive, the driving power is divided between a ll four wheels . This happens automatical ly depending on your driving behavior as well as t he current road cond itions. Also see c>page 126, Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC). With the sport differential*, power distribution to the rear whee ls is variable and can be adju sted using t he dr ive select c>page 110. The all wheel drive concept is designed for high eng ine power. Your ve hicle is exceptionally powerful and has excellent driving characterist ics both under norma l dr iving condit ions and on snow a nd ice. Always read an d fo llow safety precautions c>.&.. Winter tires By us ing all w heel d rive, your vehicle has good forward mot ion w ith standa rd t ires in winter cond itions . However, in winter we recommend us ing wint er or all season t ires on all fo ur wheels, be cause this will improve the braking effect . Snow chains If there are snow chai n laws, snow chains must a lso be used on vehicles with all w heel d rive c>page 298, Snow chains . 130 Replacing tires Your Audi is not an off road vehicle - there is not enough ground clearance. For th is reason, avoid difficult terrain . A WARNING - Also, in vehicles with all wheel drive, adapt your driving sty le to the current road and traffic conditions. Do not let the increased safety provided tempt you into taking risks, because this increases the risk of an acc ident. - The braking ab ility of your vehicle is limited to the traction of the wheels . In this way, it is not different from a two wheel d rive vehicle. Do not be tempted to accelerate to a high speed when the road is s lippery, be cause th is increases the risk of an accident. - Note that on wet st reets, the front wheels can "hydroplane " if driv ing at speed s tha t are too high. Unlike front wheel drive vehicles, t he engine does not rev higher sud de nly when the vehicle begins hydroplan ing. For this reason, adapt your speed to the road conditions to reduce the risk of an accident. Energy management The starting ability is optimized The energy management system manages the electrical energy distribution and optimizes the availability of electrical energy for starting the engine. When a vehicle with a conventiona l energy system is no t d riven for a long t ime, the veh icle batte ry is drained by equ ipment (fo r example, the immob ilizer). In certa in circ umstances, there could may not be enough energy t o start the en gine. Intellig Your vehicle is equipped with an inte lligent ene rgy management system for distributing electricity. This s ignif icantly improves the starting abi lity and increases the vehicle battery life. The energy management system Is made up of batt ery diagnosis, idling current management , and dynamic energy management. Battery diagnosis The batte ry diagnosis det ermines the vehicle bat tery charge level. The sensors determ ine the bat tery voltage, the battery current, and the battery temperature. The current charge level and the performance of the vehicle battery are determined based on th is. Idling current manag ement The idling current management decreases the energy used while parked . With the engine switched off, it manages the energy distribution to the different electrical components. Data from the battery diagnosis is taken into account for this . Depending on the vehicle battery charge level, electrical equipment is switched off one item after the other to prevent the vehicle battery from draining and to maintain the starting ability . Dynam ic energy manag ement While driving, dynamic energy management distr ibutes the appropriate amount of energy to the electrical equipment. It controls the battery charge level so that the amount of energy is not greater than the amount being generated in order to ma inta in an optimal veh icle battery charge level. (D Tips - Energy management cannot overcome the laws of physics . Note that the charge level and length of the vehicle battery life are limited . - When the start ing ability is endangered, the (•) indicator light turns on 9 page 21. 0 co .... N ,..... .... N 0 e nt Technology What you should know Maintaining the starting ability is the highest priority . A lot of stress is placed on the veh icle battery when driving short distances, during city driving, and at cold times of the year . A lot of energy is used but little is generated. It is also critical whe n the eng ine is not runni ng but elect rical equipmen t is switched on . In this case, energy is used but none is generated. In situat ions like th is, energy management will active ly regulate the distrib ution of energy. Long period s without use If you do not drive your vehicle for severa l days or weeks, electrical equ ipment is gradually scaled back or switched off. This reduces energy use and ensures the vehicle will be ab le to start after long per iods of time. Some conven ience functions, such as interio r light ing or power seat adjustment, may not be availa ble under certain circumstances . These conven ience functions will be available again once you switch the ignition on and start the engine. With the engine switched off The veh icle bat te ry will dr ain if you use Infot ainment functions such as listening to the radio while the engine is switched off. If t he sta rting ability is impaired by t he energy use, the following message will appear in the Infotainment system display: Please start the engine, otherwise the system will turn off shortly. This message indicates that the system will switch off automatically after 3 minutes . If you would like to continue using the funct ions, you must start the engine. With the engine running Although electr ical energy is generated while driving, the vehicle battery can drai n. This can happen if litt le energy is generated but much is used , and the charge level of the vehicle battery is not optimal. 0 :c '<t 131 .,. Intelligent Technology To restore the balance of energy, components that require large amounts of energy are temporarily scaled back or switched off. Heating systems in particular require a great deal of energy . If you notice, for example, that the seat heating" or rear window defogger is not working, then it has been temporarily reduced or switched off . These systems are available again as soon as the energy supply has been restored. In addition, you may notice that the idle speed has slightly increased. That is normal and no cause for concern . By increasing the idling speed, the additional requ ired energy will be generated and the vehicle battery will be charged. Notice about data recorded by the Event Data Recorder and vehicle control modules Event Data Recorder This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations , such as an airbag deployment o r hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle 's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as : - How various systems in your vehicle were operating; - Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened; - How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, - How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help prov ide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs ; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e .g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en- 132 forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equ ipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed . In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other part ies, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. Some state laws restrict the retrieval or downloading of data stored by EDRs installed in a vehicle for the express purpose of retrieving data after an accident or crash event without the own er 's consent . Audi will not access the EDR and/or simi lar data or give it to others - unless the vehicle owner (or lessee if the vehi cle has been leased) agrees; or - upon the official request by the police; or - upon the order of a court of law or a government agency; or - for the defense of a lawsuit through the jud icial discovery process. - Audi may also use the data for research about veh icle operation and safety performance or provide the data to a third party for research purposes without identifying the specific vehicle or information about the identity of its own er or lessee and only after the recorded vehicle data has been accessed. Vehicle control modules Your vehicle is also equipped with a number of electronic control modules for various vehicle systems, such as engine management, emission control, airbags, and safety belts. These electronic control modules record data during normal vehicle operation that may be needed by trained technicians for diagnostic and repair purposes. The recording capability of these modules is limited to data (no sound is recorded) . Only a small amount of data is actually recorded over a very limited period of time, or stored when a system fault is detected by a contro l module . Some of the data stored may relate to .,._ Intellig e nt Technology vehicle speed, di rect ion, or braking, as well as restraint system use and performance in the event of a crash. Stored data can also only be read and downloaded with special equipment that is direct ly connected to the veh icle. Your veh icle may be equipped with Audi connect. Your use of certain Audi connect features requires w ireless services that are provided by a third party wire less telecommunications provider. For deta ils regard ing how information obta ined th rough Audi connect is coll ected, processed, t ransmitted, used, and shared, please see your cont ract wi t h the w ireless te lecommunications provider and the "About Aud i connect" tab in your vehicle's MMI: ! ME N UI button> Aud i connect > About Audi connect. 0 co .... N ,..... .... N 0 0 :c '<t 133 Multi Multi Med ia Interface Media Interface Switching and off Traffic safety information Audi recommends performing certain Infotainment system functions, such as entering a destination, only when the vehicle is stationary . Always be prepared to stop operat ing the Infotainment system in the interest of your safety and the safety of other road users. _& WARNING Only use the Infotainment system when traffic cond itions permit and always in a way that allows you to maintain complete control over your vehicle. Introduction The Multi Media Interface, or MMI for short , combines various systems for communication , navigation and entertainment in your Audi. You can operate the MMI using the MMI control panel, the multifunction steering wheel or the voice recognition system*. the MMI on The MMI switches on and off automatically with the ignition. It can also be switched on or off manually . - Switching on manually : press the On/Off knob @ briefly c;, page 134, fig. 154. Or: press the !MENU! button or one of the buttons to directly open the menus @ ,=;,page 135, fig. 155. When the system is switched on, the last menu that was selected is displayed and the last aud io source that was selected begins play ing . - Switching off manually: press and hold th e On/Off knob @ c;, page 134, fig. 154 until the MMI switches off. If the MMI has been switched off manually, it does not switch on again automatically the next time the ignition is sw itched on . The MMI can still be operated for approximately ten minutes after switching the ignition off. If you do not press any buttons or the control knob on the MMI control panel with in this t ime, the MMI switches off automatically. (D Tips - The MMI sw itches off automatically if the engine is not running and the vehicle battery is low. - There may be delays when extending or retracting the display. Adjusting Fig. 154 MMIcontrol panel with MMl touch control pad MMI control panel overview (D MMI touch control pad . . . . . . . . . 136 @ Buttons for open ing menus directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 @ On/Off knob ................. 134 @ Arrow buttons ................ 135 ............... 135 @ Control knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 (J) IBACK!bu tt on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 ® 134 Control buttons the volume The volume of an audio source or a system message (for example, from the voice recognition system) can be adjusted directly while the sound is ploying using the On/Off knob. - Increasing or decreasing the volume: turn the On/Off knob @ ¢ page 134, fig. 154 to the right or left . - Muting or pausing: press the On/Off knob @ c;, page 134, fig. 154 briefly . Or: turn the On/ Off knob to the left . ..,. Multi - Unmuting or resuming: press the On/Off knob @ c:>page 134, fig. 154 briefly . Or: turn the On/Off knob to the right. @ Tips Volumes that are too high or too low are automatically adju sted to a set level when the MMI is switched on . Infotainment display The Infotainment display switches on automatically when the MMI folds out . The MMI folds in automatically when it is switched off. Adjusting the Infotainment display brightness: see c:>page 206. (D Tips - If th e vehicle has a cell phone prep*, the Infotainment system display will automatically extend whenever there is an incoming phone cal l. - Use the arrow buttons to switch stations, for example, when listening to the radio, after the disp lay has retracted in. Media Interface Selecting and confirming a function .,.@ Selecting a fun ction : turn the control knob to the desired funct ion . .,.@ Confirming a selection: press the control knob . Accessing functions in a corner of the display .,. Press the control butto n © ~ fig. 155 in the corresponding corner of the display . For example, the upper right control button corresponds to the upper right corner of the display. Opening the main menu .,. Press the !M E NU I button @ c:>page 134, fig. 154 The MMI menus (s uch as Radio) are disp layed . Opening a menu directly .,. Press the respective button @ ¢ page 134, fig . 154 for the desired menu (such as l RADIO I o r! M E DI A I). Returning to functions at higher levels .,. Press t he ! BACKI button (J) c:>page 134, fig . 154 . Additional functions : MMI operation Selecting the previous/next function (for example, a radio station/track) : briefly press the On/ Off knob @ c:>page 134, fig. 154 toward the left l<l<Ior rig ht l>t>I . Fast forwarding/rewinding (for example songs): press and ho ld the On/Off knob @ c:>page 134, fig. 154 toward the left l<l<Ior right l>t>I. ( '--C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 0 :r Fig. 155 Opera ting <t 135 Multi MMI Med ia Interface touch Searching for a contact in the phone book Applies to: vehicles with MMI touch cont rol pad Requireme nt: The directory must be open The MMI touch allows you to enter data on the MMI touch control pod using handwriting recogni tion. c:>poge 150 . - Jumping to a specific initial letter in the list : writ e the des ired lette r using your finger on t he MMI touch cont rol pad. - Narrowing the search result s: draw additional lette rs on the MMI touch contro l pad wit h your finger. - Ending the input/selecting directly from the selection list : t ap t he MMI touch control pad briefly. Or : press t he control knob . Moving the map Fig. 156 Ent erin g a naviga tion dest inat ion Requirement: a map must be displayed c:>page 170. - Moving the crosshairs on the map: press the cont rol knob . The crossha irs are shown on the map . To move the crosshairs, move your finger in the desired direction on the MMI touch cont rol pad . Or : place your finger on the respe ct ive edge of t he MMI tou ch control pad. Adjusting the sound focus Fig. 15 7 Saving a rad io st at ion Requireme nt: the balance/fader function must be se lected c:>page 204 . - Moving the crosshairs for sound focus: move Entering number s, letters , and symbol s Requirement: it must be possib le to enter text or numbers. - Write lette rs, numbers or characters on t he MMI touch contro l pad with your finger. Characters that are recog nized are shown in the Infotainment display © c:>fig. 156 and may be confirmed with a prompt . - Selecting a different symbol : turn the control knob to the left/right @ c:>fig. 156 and press the control knob. The se lected symbol appear s in the input field @ c:>fig . 156 . - Entering spaces: move your finger across the MMItouch control pad from left to right. - Delet ing characters: move your finger across the MMItouc h control pad from right to left. - Ending the input/ selecting directly from the selection list : tap the MMItouch control pad briefly. Or: press the control knob . 136 your finger in the desired direct ion on the MMI to uch control pad. Saving /s electing a rad io st ation Requirement: the Radio menu must be open c:>page 177. - Storing the radio station currently set: hold your finger on a number (1 to 6) on the MMI to uch control panel unti l you hear a signal tone. The rad io stat ion will be stored on theselected number in the list. - Select ing a stored radio station : tap a number (1 to 6) on the MMI touch control pad briefly. The preset buttons (1-6) appear in the Infota inment disp lay © c:>fig . 157 . - Moving a stored radio station : move your finger on the MMItouch contro l pad to the left/ right unti l t he preset buttons (1-6) appear in ..,. the Infota inment display (D. Multi Browsing / selecting album covers Requirement: the Media menu must be open and a so urce must be selected <:}page 189 . - Browsing through album covers: move you r finger across the MMI touch control pad from left to right . Or: place your finger on the respective arrow edge of the MMI touch control pad . - Selecting an album cover: tap the MMI touch contro l pad briefly. Media Interface - Selecting a menu item : move your finger up/ down or left/right on the MMI touch control pad . Or: place your finger on the respective arrow edge of the MMI touch control pad. - Confirming a selection: tap the MMI touch control pad briefly. (D Tips The volume of the prompts for the MMI touch page 205. ca n be adjusted separately c::> Using the DVD main menu Requirement : a DVDmust be playing <:}page 181. Letter/number speller Fig. 158 Speller - Entering characters: turn t he control knob wit h C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 the selection arrow @ <>fig. 158 to the desired character. Your selection is shown enlarged in the input ring @ . Press the contro l knob to confirm the character. Your input is displayed in the input fie ld @ . When you have entered all the characters, select and confirm OK@ . - Deleting characters: turn the control knob with the selection arrow to + @ and press the control knob . To delete all characters in the input field, press and hold the control knob on + unt il all characters in the input field are deleted. - Entering special characters: press the 0-9 control button (i) I::} fig. 158 and enter the desired special character (for examp le, a hyphen or period) using the number speller. - Input assistance: in some cases, such as in the Navigation* menu, the selection of lett e rs may be limited to avai lable entries. This means th at you can only select letters if they appear in that position in a possible word . Overview of symbols in the speller The symbo ls in the letter/number plained in the fo llow ing table: speller are ex1111> 0 :r <t 137 Multi Med ia Interface Symbol / Description CD @ Explanation Se lection arrow The selected character is highlighted with a white background and appears large in the input ring . Input ring The character selected with the se lection arrow is displayed large . ® .......... Adds a space in the input f ield . @ ~~ The cursor moves forward or back in the input fie ld. ® OK ® + 0 0-9/A-Z ® ® Deletes the character to the left of the cursor . Switches from letter to numbe r input or from number to lette r input . AAA Displays language -specific special characters . List A list of suggestions @ + Delete @) Number of entries @ List with suggestions @ Input field 0 Cursor Menus The input is confirmed. is displayed. Deletes the character to the left of the cursor . The number of list entries that was found is displayed . For example, when entering a destinat ion, major cities are listed first and then additional cities in alphabetical order. The current input is displayed. The current editing position is marked. and symbols Fig. 159 Menus and sym bols Symbol/Description CD Title line @ Selected text ® •T 138 Explanation Selected menu (such as Telephone) Se lected function Additional functions for selection ... Multi Symbol / Description Media Interfac e Explanat ion @ TMC ® Importing process* Import or update the contacts in the directory or the call lists ® Cell phone signal strength bars* Cell phone netw or k signal streng t h fo r a connected cell phone Reception of TMC traffic reports Signal streng t h f or the ac t ive da t a connection, or PIN : enter t he PIN (SIM) PUK: enter the PUK SIM : insert the Aud i SIM card 0 Data connect ion signa l strength bars * ® Arrow Submenu w ith add it iona l functions that are accessed by pressing the contro l knob ® Mute The audio source is muted ¢ page 134 @ @ Import ing process Bluetooth @ 2G/3G* @ Select ion list Impor t ing audio/video files to the Jukebox ¢ page 182 Bluetoot h dev ice connected Netwo rk coverage for the active data connection 2G : GSM network 3G : UMTS network Settings for the se lected function that are accessed by press ing the contro l knob 0 co .... N ,..... .... N 0 0 :c '<t 139 Voice • • • • • • • • • • • • • recognition system l ELEPHONE NAVIGATION INFO RADIO MEDIA HELP HELPVOICERECOGNlTION HELPTELEPHONE HELPNAVIGATION HELP MAP HELPINFO HELPRADIO HELPMEDIA • CALL(XY) • ENTERNUMBER • REDIAL • NAVIGATE TO (XY) • DIRECTORY • ENTERADDRESS • ONLINEDESTINATIONS • ONLINEDESTINATION (XV) • CANCEL ROUTEGUIDANCE • MAP • LINE1·6 • NEXT/PREVlOUSPAGE liEttEPHONE • ENTERNUMBER • DIAL • REPEAT • CORRECTION • DELETENUMBER • REDIAL • CALL (XV) (BUSINESS/PRIVATE/ LANDLINE/ CELL) • RECEIVED CALLS • DIALEDNUMBERS • MISSEDCALLS • FINDCONTACT • STORECONTACT • READCONTACT • CALLVOICEMAIL • ENTERADDRESS • ENTERCOUNTRY • ENTERZIP CODE/ CITY • ENTERSTREET • ENTERHOUSENUMBER • ENTERDOWNTOWN • START/CANCEL ROUTEGUIDANCE TO (XV) • NAVIGATE • LASTDESTINATIONS • FAVORITES • HOMEADDRESS • SHORT/FAST/ ECONOMY ROUTE • DYNAMIC ROUTEON / OFF • ROUTEUST • VOICEGUIDANCEON/ OFF • ROUTEINFOON/ OFF • SCALE(XY)MILES / YARDS • ONLINEDESTINATIONS • ONLINEDESTINATION (XV) • ENTERPOINTOF INTEREST • NEXTGASSTATION • NEXTDIESELFUELSTATION • NEXTPARKINGLOT • NEXTRESTAURANT • NEXTACCOMMODATION • NEXTHOSPITAL • NEXTAUDIDEALER • NEXTPOLICESTATION • NEXTATM • NEXTCOFFEESHOP • DESTINATION MAP/ OVERVIEW MAP • 20 / 30 MAP • DAY/ NICHTMAP I r-.1 F.O • READTRAFFICREPORTS RADIO MEDIA • SETSTATION • STATION(XV) • SETFREQUE NCY • SETBAND • FM/ AM/ SIRIUS • STATIONLIST • READSTATIONLIST • PRESETS • READPRESETS • UPDATESTATIO N LIST • SELECTMEDIUM • NEXT/ PREVIOUSMEDIUM • NEXT/PREVIOUSCO/ DVD • CD/ DVD1·6 • CD/ DVDCHANCER • SD CARDl / SDCARO2 • JUKEBOX • AUDIMUSICINTERFACE • BLUETOOTH • CENRE(XV)/ ALBUM(XV)/ ARTIST(XV)/ TRACK (XV)I VIDEO(XV) • SELECT CENRE/ALBUM/ ARTIST/TRACK/VIDEO • NEXT/PREVIOUS TRACK Fig. 16 0 Command overview 140 Voice Voice recognition system Operating Appl ies to: vehicles with voice recog nitio n system You con operate many Infotainment functions conveniently by speaking . Requirement: the ignition and the MMI must be switched on ~ page 134 , the re must be no phone call in progress and the parking system m ust not be active . ~ Switching on: briefly press the ~ button @ ~ page 11, fig. 7 on the m ultif unction steering whee l* and say the desired command after the Beep. ~ Switching off : press and ho ld the l2;Jbutton . Or: press any button on the MMI control panel. ~ Canceling: press the 1 0,Ibutton and say a new command. Or: say the command Cancel. Input assistance The system gu ides you through the input with visua l and audio feedback . - Visual input assistance: after t urning on voice recognition, a d isplay with a select ion of possible commands appears in the Infotainment display . The command d isplay can be turned on or off in the ma in menu using the Setup MMI cont rol button. - Audio input assistance : to have the possible commands read, turn the voice recognition system o n and say Help. For the system to underst a nd you: Speak clearly and distinct ly at a normal volume. Speak louder when driving faster. Emphasize the words in the commands even ly and do not leave long pauses . Do not speak a command when the voice recognition system is mak ing an anno uncement. 0 co .... N ,..... .... N 0 0 :c Close the doors, the windows a nd the sunroof* to reduce background noise . Make su re that passengers are not speaking when you are giving a voice command. recognition system Do not d irect the air vents toward the hands free microphone, which is on the roof headliner near the front inte rior lights . Only use the system from t he dr iver's seat because the hands free microphone is directed to ward that seat . Additional settings Additional settings, such as individual speech training based on your voice, the Command display or the prompt volume , can be adjusted in the main men u using the Setup MMI control but ton ~ page 205. A - WARNING - Direct your full attention to dr iving. As the driver, you have complete responsibility for safety in traff ic. Only use the functions in such a way that you a lways maintain complete control over your vehicle in all traffic situa t ions. - Do not use the voice recognition system in emergencies beca use your voice may change in stressfu l situations. It may ta ke longer to dia l t he numbe r or the sys t em may not be a ble t o dia l it at all. Dial the emergency number manually. @ Tips - The d ialog pauses w hen the re is a n incoming phone call and will con t inue if yo u ignore t he cal l. The d ia log ends if you a nswer the call. - You can select a n item in t he list using either t he voice recogn it io n sys t em or the cont rol knob. Command information overview Applies to: vehicles with voice recogn it ion system The following overv iews describe the commands that can be used to operate the MMI using the voice recognit ion system . Alternative commands are separated by a "I", for example, say: Telephone I (or) Navigation I (or) Radio. .,.. '<t 141 Voice recognition system Sequences of comman d s used to perform an action are identified with a" >", for examp le say: Enter destination > (then) Ente r country . es . For examp le, for business address, you can also say business, work , office or job . The major ity shown are main comm a nds. This system also recognizes synonyms in certain cas - Global commands Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system You can al ways use t he global commands, gardless of the men u selec t ed. re- Function Say: Ope ning a menu Telephone* I Dire ctory * I Navigation * I Map * I Radio I Media Info Having the possible commands read a loud Help I Help voice recognition I Help Telephon e* I Help Navig ation * I Help Map* I Help Radio I Help Media I Help Info Telephone functions* Call (XV) , for example Call John Smith Ente r numbe r I Redial I Directory Navigation funct ions* Navigate to (XY), for examp le Navigate t o John Smith Enter address I Cancel route guidance Selecting an entry from a list Line (XV) Scro lling thro ugh a list Next page I Previous page I I I I Map Switching the voice recogn ition sys- Cancel tern off Telephone App lies to: vehicles with voice recognition system and telep hone Req uirement: a cell phone must be connected to the MMI Q page 146 and the Telephone menu m ust be open Q page 147. Function Say: Call contact from directory Call (XV) , fo r example Call John Smith Selecting a specific contact number Call (XV) business I private I land line I cell , for example, Call John Smith private Selecting a phone number w ith a n address card open Call I Call business I Call private Show contact informat ion Directory I Find contact > the desired contact when prompted, such as John Smith Personalizing a contact with a name tag Find contact > the desired contact when prompted, such as John Smith > Name contact > the personal name tag, such as Uncle I Call landl ine I Call business mobile John Dialing a phone number Enter number > After being prompted, say the telephone number in groups of individual numbers, fo r example. 888 555 1212 > Dial 142 Voice Function Say: Correcting the phone number that was entered Delete number Displaying call lists Dialed numbers Calling the last number dialed Redial Listen ing to messages Call voice mail (D recognition system I Correction I Received calls I Missed calls - Name tags can only be stored using the voice recogni t ion system. - Name tags can only be deleted using the MMI control panel. Tips - You can assign up to SO additional name tags for address cards. Navigation App lies to: vehicles with voice recognition system and navigation system Requirement: the Navigation menu must be open ~ page 165 . You can say the following commands to enter a dest inat ion: Function Say: Open nav igat ion list Last destinations Selecting the home address Home address Ent ering a destination Enter address > the name of the city, the street and the house I Favorites number, for examp le "Los Ange les, Main Street ." Individual commands for entering a Country I City I Street destination Downtown I Street in vicinity I House number I Making a correction wh ile entering a Correction destination 0 co .... N ,..... .... N 0 0 :c Navigating to a contact Navigate to (XV), for example Navigate to John Smith Navigating to a specific address for a contact Navigate to (XV) business address I private address, such as Naviigate to John Smith business address Sta rt ing route guidance with an address card open Navigate address Start ing route guidance after enter ing a destination Start route guidance Canceling current route gu idance Cancel route guidance The following points of inte res t can be entered directly as a dest ination Next Audi Dealer I Next ATM I Next gas station I Next diesel fuel station I Next parking lot I Next restaurant I Next accommodation I Next hospital I Next police station I Next coffee shop Changing the search area for point of interest entry Point of interest > the desired search area when prompted> I Navigate to private address I Navigate to business Top categories I Immediate vicinity I Along the route I In vicinity of destination I In vicinity of stopover I In new city I Nationwide Entering a destination in the select - Point of interest > Audi Service I Train station I Airport I Hotel ed search area I Hospital I Parking I Rest area I Restaurant I Gas station with guidance from the system '<t 143 Voice recognition system Function Say: Entering a point of interest directly in the selected search area Point of interest > point of interest and search area, such as "Search gas station in immediate vicinity" Selecting an online destination in the imm edia t e vicinit y directly Online destination (XV), such as " Online destination "Five star hotel"" Online search in the immediate vicinity/vicin it y of the destination Online destinations > In immediate vicinity I In vicinity of destination > the desired online destination, such as "Five star hotel" > Line (XV) I Show on map > Start route guidance Online search in a new city Online destinations > In new city I the desired city> the desired online destination, such as "Five star hotel" Line (XV) I Show on map > Start route guidance You can say the following commands for more settings in Navigation: Function Say: General map options Map I Day map Map type 2D Map orientation Map orientation north I Map orientation in direction of travel Map orientation automatic Changing the map view Zoom in I Zoom out Automatic map zoom Automatic zoom Chang ing the map scale Scale (XV) meters/kilometers/yards/miles Showing the route list Route list Switching voice guidance on or off dur ing active route guidance Voice guidance on I Voice guidance off Auto rerout ing (traff ic) Auto rerouting traffic on I Auto rerouting traffic off Route criteria Fast route (D I Night I 3D I Destination Tips - Destinations may have to be spell ed when entered, depending on the country w here I Mixed Function Say: Accessing TMC traff ic info rmat ion Read traffic reports ¢ page 177. 144 zoom off I Short route you are located and wh ich menu language you have selected. - Refer to the notes in the chapter About Audi connect ¢page 162. Requirement: the Info menu must be open. Requirement: the Radio menu must be open map I Overview map route Appl ies to : vehicles with voice recognitio n system Applies to : vehicles with voice recognitio n system I Route info off I Automatic Info Radio map I Voice recognition system Function Say: Selecting the frequency band Set band I FM I AM I Sirius* Selecti ng a stat ion from the station list Station (XV) I Station list > Line (XV) Selecting a stat ion from the presets list Presets > Channel (XV) I Line (XV) Setting the frequency Set frequency > the desired frequency Additional commands Read station li st I Read presets I Next/ previous station I Update station list a) •> Applies to the medium wave/ long wave band Media Appl ies to: vehicles wit h voice recognitio n system Requirement: the Media menu must be open ~page 189. Function Say: Selecti ng a so urce directly Jukebox I CD I SD card 1/ 2 I Audi music int erface* I Bluetoot h DVD I Wi-Fi I Next / previous medium I Selecting an aud io/video* f ile in the Video (XV) I Art ist (XV) I Album (XV) I Song (XV) I Genres (XV) Jukebox Navigating between a udio and video * files within a source Next / Previous track Navigating w ith in a folder structure/list Folder up I Line (XV) 0 co .... N ,..._ .... N 0 0 :c '<t 145 Tele p hone Telephone (D Introduction Always follow the information found in c:>0 in Wi-Fi hotspot on page 160. Applies to: vehicles with telephone To make phone calls in your vehicle using the f\1/11[,connect your cell phone to the /11/11[ via 8/uetooth. @ With this connection, you use the handsfree system and operate telephone functions through the MMI. Phone calls are transmitted through the antenna on your cell phone. WARNING Tips The Bluetooth connection range is limited to inside the vehicle. It can also be affected by local cond itions and interference with other devices. Handsf ree A Note Setup Connecting a cell phone using Bluetooth Applies to: vehicles with telephone . - Medical experts warn that cell phones can interfere with the function of pacemakers . Always mainta in a m inimum d istance of 20 cent imeters between the cell phone antenna and the pacemaker. - Do not carry the cell phone in a pocket directly over the pacemaker when the phone is switched on. - Switch the cell phone off immediately if you suspect it may be interfering with the pacemaker. - Do not use the voice recognition system c:>page 141 in emergencies because your voice may change in stressful situations. It may take longer to dial the number or the system may not be able to dial it at al l. Dial the emergency numbe r manually. - Switch your cell phone off in areas where there is a risk of an exp losion . These locations are not always clea rly mar ked. This may include gas stations, fuel and chemical storage facilit ies or t ranspo rt ve hicles, or locations where fue l vapors (such as propane or gaso line vapor in vehicles or bui ldings), chemicals or large quantities of dust particles (such as flour, sawd ust or metal) may be present in the air. This also applies to a ll other locations where you would normally turn your vehicle engine off . - The demands of traffic requ ire your full attent ion. Read and follow the guidelines provided in c:>page 134 . 146 Fig. 16 1 Searching for cell phones Fig. 162 Disp laying t he PfN fo r e nteri ng in the cell phone Requirements The vehicle must be stationary and the ignition must be sw itched on . The Bluetooth funct io n and visib ility of the MMI c:>page 155 a nd cell phone must be sw itched on . The MMI and the cell phone to be paired must not be actively connected to any other Bluetooth devices. IIJ,, Teleph Connecting a ce ll phone • Select the ITEL Ibutton > Search for new cell phone ¢ fig . 161 . The avai lab le Bluetooth devices are shown in the Infotainment system display. Or : search for the MMI using the Bluetooth device search on your cell phone. • Select and confirm the desired cell phone from the list of displayed Bluetooth devices. .. Select and confirm Handsfree. The MMI generates a PIN for the connection setup ¢ fig . 161 . • Se lect and confirm Yes. • Ente r t he PIN for connecting on your cell phone. Or : if the PIN is already d isp layed on your cell phone, confirm it in the cell phone and in the MMI. The time a llowed for entering the PIN is limited to approximately 30 seconds . Pay at t en t ion to any additional system prompts displayed on your cell phone, for example if the system should connect automatically in the future . Depending on the cell phone, you may have to conf irm download ing the directory separately. o ne - Authoriz ing the MMI connection in your cell phone will speed up the a utomatic connection . - Several cell phones can be paired to the MMI, but only one cell phone can be actively connected. - A Bluetooth device that is already paired with the MMI will be d isconnected if another device is paired . - When leaving the veh icle, the Bluetooth connect ion to the cell phone will automatically disconnect . - You can obtain more information from your cell phone service provider or from your cell phone user gu ide. For informat ion on us ing the te lephone , visit www .audiusa.com/ bluetooth or contact your authorized Audi dea ler or authorized Audi Se rvice Facility . Opening the telephone Applies to: vehicles wit h te lepho ne After connec t ing successfull y After connecting successfully, the signal strength symbo l ® ¢ page 138, fig. 159 and the Bluetooth symbo l @ appear in the status line of the Infotainment disp lay. In addition, the cell phone contacts are automatically loaded in the MMI directory. This process can take several minutes, depend ing on the number of contacts. If all of the memory capacity is fi lled, you will be asked to replace the contacts from one cell phone when connect ing another cell phone. With the opt ion Restricted use of telephone, only contacts in the cell phone and the local MMI memory are available ¢ page 150. 0 Note Always follow the informat ion found in ¢ (Din Wi-Fi hotspot on page 160. (D C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 0 :r <t Tips - You only have to pair your dev ice one t ime. Bluetooth dev ices that a re already pa ired a utomat ically connect to the MMI whe n t hey are within range and t he ignit ion is switc hed on. Fig. 163 Telephone functions Requirement: a ce ll phone must be connected to the MMI ¢page 146 . .. Select the ITELIbutton. The last act ive te lephone menu is s hown in the !but ton in Infotainment display . Press the ITEL the Telephone menu again to access the telephone functions . The following t elephone functions are available ¢ fig. 163: @ @ @ @ List of received calls .. .. ...... . List of missed ca lls .. . . . ...... . List of d ialed numbers . . . .. . .. . Directory . ... . . . . . . . .... ... .. . 148 148 148 150 ..,_ 147 Telephone ® Enter number ... ............. . 148 @ Assigning a voicemail number or calling voicemail . ... . ...... Dialing number ... Using the speller Applies to: vehicles with telephone 155 a telephone From the directory Applies to: vehicles with telephone You can select a phone number directly from the directory c>page 150. Fig. 165 Entering phone numbers using the number spell· er From a list App lies to: vehicles with telephone Fig. 166 Enter ing phone numbers using the letter speller Fig. 164 Dialing a phone number from a list .,.Select: the Requirement: a phone number must be stored in the call lists. .. Select the ITEL Ibutton. Received calls/ Missed calls/ Dialed numbers - Dialing a phone number : se lect and confirm the desired phone number from the call list. Select and confirm Call. Dial control button - Dialing a phone number: select and confirm the desired phone number from the Dialed numbers list. Select and confirm Call. ITELIbutton > Enter number. - Entering a phone number as a sequence of numbers : enter the number using the number speller~ fig. 165. - Entering a phone number using a sequence of letters : press the A·Z contro l button . Enter a sequence of letters using the letter speller, for example AUDISERVICE c>fig. 166. - Dialing a phone number : select and confirm OK. Or: press the Dial control button. The active audio source is muted when making a call. - Deleting individual characters: select and con firm + . - Deleting all characters entered at once: turn the speller to + and press and hold the control knob. Tone sequences (DTMF) can be entered directly into the speller during a phone call. 148 Telephone Storing a phone number Storing a new phone number Applies to: vehicles with tele pho ne You can store a new phone number as a contact in the directory ¢page 153 . Storing from the call lists Applies to: vehicles with telephone You can store a phone number from the call lists in the directory. • Ignoring an incoming call: press the Ignore control button. • Ending a call or canceling dialing : press the End call control button. Accepting another call : If there is an incoming call during a call, you can select Answer to put the existing phone call on hold and answer the incoming call. If you select Ignore , the incom ing call will be ignored. Caller information : the name, phone number or Unknown appears in the Infotainment display and driver information system, depending on if the caller has been stored in the directory and if the phone number has been transm itted . @ Tips - The aud io/video source is muted during an incoming or outgoing call. - If you have switched the Infotainment display off, it will switch on aga in automatically when an incoming call is received . Fig. 167 Stor ing a phone numbe r in the directory Requirement: a phone number must be stored in the call lists. During a phone call Applies to: vehicles with telep ho ne • Select: the ITKlbutton > Dialed numbers , Missed calls or Received calls> Telephone number> Save . - Storing a phone number as a new address card: select and confirm New contact. Enter a Name . Enter additional data, if necessary. Select and confirm Store contact. - Assigning a phone number to an existing address card: select and confirm a contact in the list. Se lect and confirm Store contact. @ Tips +49841123456 - The contacts are only stored in the MMI directory . - You can edit the directory¢ page 153 . Accepting/ending 0 Fig. 168 Swap ca ll 01 :00 ~ D a call Applies to: vehicles with telephone .... C0 ~ N 8 0 • Accepting an incoming call: press the Answer contro l button . Fig. 169 Join conference :r <t 149 Telephone Requirement: the re must be a call in progress. .,.Select the Option s control button. - Making an additional call : select Additional call > Directory or a call list> an entry in the list. Addit ional functions include: Mute : if you se lect and confirm this function, the other person on the phone cannot hea r you. You can hear the other person . Hold/ Resume : you can put an active phone call on hold and resume it. On hold and the d uration of the phone call is shown in the Infota inment d isplay . Swap call : you can a lternate between two phone calls at t he same time . One of the calls w ill be on hold. End call ends the active phone call. A phone call that is on hold stays on hold and can be resumed us ing the Options control button and Resume . Join conference : a party on hold and up to five active parties (depending on the network) ca n be added to a confe rence cal l. To make an add itiona l call , put all pa rt icipants in the curren t confe rence call on hold using Hold . Press the Options control but ton. Select and co nfirm Additional call a nd se lect a phone number from t he Call list or t he Directory , or select Enter number. To add this party to the conference call, select Join conference . With Resume , a ll part icipants are taken off hold . Show conference participants shows a ll partic ipants. call functions Requirement: a ce ll phone must be connected to page 146 . the MMI c!;> .,.Sele ct: !TELi button > Enter number > Enter emergency call number (for example, 911) > OK. .. Setting an automatic emergency call* : select the ITEL Ibutton> Sett ings control button> Telephone settings > Auto. emerg. call. A WARNING - - Because yo ur phone works with rad io signa ls, a con nection cannot be guaranteed un de r a ll circumsta nces. Do not rely o n only your p ho ne w hen it com es to essenti a l co m m unicat io n (such as a m edi cal emer gen cy). - Always follow t he inst ructi o ns give n by t he em ergen cy pe rsonne l dur ing a n e m erg ency call and on ly end t he call w hen they instruc t you to do so. (D Tips Emergen cy nu mbe rs a re not t he same everywhe re. Find o ut wh ich emergency n um ber is use d in your cur ren t locat ion . Opening the directory Applies to: vehicles with telephone After connecting the cell phone, the contacts in it are automatically imported into the MMI. Tips - To be notified of an incoming call d uring a phone ca ll, t he Call waiting funct ion in your cell phone must be switched on when us ing the ha ndsfree profile (Handsfree ). - The display of an incoming phone call in the Infotainment system d isp lay may still be vis ible for a few seconds de pending on t he ce ll phone in use . If you use t he Replace or 150 Emergency Applies to: vehicles with telephone - Accepting an incom ing call when there is an active call and a call on hold : select Answer . The act ive call is repla ced with the incoming call. (D Ignore f unctions in the MMI w hile the dis play is still visib le, the active phone call may end . Fig. 1 70 Contactlist Telephone ~ Select: the ITEL !button > Directory. - Selecting a contact : se lect and confir m a con- t act from the direc t ory. The address card is displayed. Contacts a re d isplayed in alphabetical order and can be so rted according to fi rst or last name ¢ page 156 and are ident ified with a symbol to tell the location where t hey are st ored ¢ fig. 17 0: (D Private MMI directory: these contacts a re only visible whe n t he cell phone is co nn ected. You can pair up to four different cell phones with the MMI and ma nage up to fo ur private directories. on the supported cell phones, visit www .audiusa.com/bluetooth or contact an authorized Audi d ealer or authorized Aud i Service Facility. - The contacts from the cell phone may not be t ransfe rred in a lphabetical order. If there are too many entries, contacts with different first letters may be miss ing in the MMI. - The public contacts in the local MMI memory are a lways vis ible and can be accessed by ot her users. Searching Applies to : vehicles wit h te lepho ne ~ Select: the @ Public MMI directory : these contacts are visible to all users and can be used by all users regar dless of the cell phone t hat is connec t ed . No cell phone connected: each new contact will be stored in the public d irectory ¢ page 153. Cell phone connected: to store a contact in the public directory so that all users can access it, the contact must be marked as a Public contact ¢page 152. @ Cell phone: t hese contacts are stored in the cell phone and are only vis ible when the cor respond ing cell phone is connected. If all of the memory capacity is filled, you will be asked to replace the contacts from one cell phone when connect ing another cell phone. With the opt ion Restricted use of telephone , only contacts in the cell phone and the local MMI memory (pu blic) are ava ilable . for a contact ITEL Ibutton> Directory. - Select an d confirm Find contact . Enter the name. Or : se lect and conf irm the contact using the List. Both the first and last names are sea rched. (D Tips - You ca n scroll thro ugh long list s qui ckly by tu rni ng the cont rol knob quickly. - You can go dire ctly to t he first lett er of the cont act you are sear ching for by en t ering t he first letter on the MMI tou ch control pad * us ing your finger¢ pa ge 136 . Enterin g add itiona l lette rs narrows down the list of found contacts . The directory can be opened through the Tele· phone* menu as well as th rough the Navigation * menu . {!) 0 co .... N ,..._ .... N 0 Tips - Check for a possible request to synchron ize on your cell phone. Requests to synchronize the directo ry must be confirmed so that you r ce ll phone contacts can be loaded into t he MMI. - The contact display in the MMI depe nds on the cell phone used. For more informa t ion 0 :c '<t 151 Telephone Using contacts Applies to: vehicles with telep hone Create copy for editing/Edit contact A copy of the contact is stored in the private local MMI memory. You can change the information in the input fields ¢ page 153 using the speller. Storing a contact in the public directory Fig. 171 Calling a contac t You can mark a cont act as a Public contact ~The contact is then stored in the local MMI mem ory (public) @ ¢ fig . 172 and is available to all MMI users . If a contact is not ma rked as a Public contact , it is stored in the local MMI memory (private) (D and is only vis ible when the cell phone, in which the contact is saved, is connected. Delete contact Only the contacts in the MMI memory (private/ public) can be deleted. {!) Fig. 172 Selec t ing a des t ina tion .,.Select : the ITEL)button > Directory > a contact from the directory . - Call: se lect and confirm the desired telephone number . Or : select the desired phone number and press the Call control button. - Navigate : select and confirm the desired destination (D ¢ fig . 172. Or: select the desired destination and press the Navigate control button. To start navigation, select and confirm Start route guidance. If no destination is set, you can set a ma iling address @ as a destination by selecting and confirming the desired address when an address card is op en. Read contact The MMI automatically creates a name tag for each entry in the directory that can be read by the MMI. 152 Tips - Contacts edited in the MMI d irectory cannot be automatically updated in the connected cell phone. Audi re commends ed it ing cell phone contacts directly in the cell phone . - Only the contacts in the MMI memory (private/p ub lic) can be edited or deleted . - To delete a ll shared or private contacts at one time, se lect the Delete public contacts or Delete private contacts option in the directory settings ¢ page 156. Teleph Importing contacts and exporting Applies to: vehicles with telep hone Contacts in vCard format(. vcf) can be imported into the directory or exported . (D o ne Tips - The imported contacts are stored in the local memory of the directory. - A maximum of 100 contacts can be imported. You can check the memory capacity for the directory at any time c:>page 154. - Never save important data on SO cards or USB storage devices. Audi is not responsible for damaged or lost files and media. - Refer to the notes in the chapter About Audi connect c:>page 162. Storing a new contact Applies to: vehicles with telephone Fig. 173 Import ing the phone book manually Requirement: an SD card must be in the SD card page 181 or a USB storage device must reader c=;, be connected to the Audi music inte rface c:> page 185 . .. Select: the lffilJ button > Directory > Memory contro l button. - Importing contacts from a sto rage device:: select and confirm Import contacts > SD card 1 , SD card 2 or USB stora ge device > desired contacts > I mport . - Exporti ng contact s t o a stor age device: select and confirm Export conta ct s> SD card or USB storag e device > desired contacts > Export . - Selecting all contact s at once for import or export : select and confi rm Import contact s/ Export conta ct s > SD card or USB st orage device > All control but t on > Import / Export . - Importing the phone book manually : select and confirm Import phone book . The symbol © c:>fig . 173 appea rs in the status line in the Infotainment display as long as the contacts are being imported from the cell phone. C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 To make it easier t o find a con t act, you can filter the contacts according to their sto rage location (Vehi cle, Telep hone or All ) using the Memor y used function. Fig. 1 74 Stor ing a new contact .,.Select: t he ITELIbut t on> Directory > New cont act . Last name/First name Ente r the last name and first name using the speller . Telephone numbers You can store up to five telephone numbers in an address card. You can also ass ign a Type (Business or Private ) as we ll as a Category (Land line , Cell or Fax) for each phone nu mbe r. You can also use Default phone numb er to set a frequently used phone numbe r as the defa ult number. That number is then disp layed firs t in the open address card . You can import a phone number from the call lists (s uch as Dialed number s) int o t he address card using the New number funct ion and the List contro l button . Ill> 0 :r <t 153 Telephone Navigation destination (business)/ Navigat ion destination (private) Name Applies to: vehicles with telephone Two navigation destinations, Private/ Business, can be assigned to each contact. You can access the stored navigation destinations in the Navigation menu using the Route guidance control button ¢ page 169. A stored private/business mailing address is automatically downloaded into the Address input field for each nav igation destination. You can store these easily as navigation destinations us ing Create entry in directory. You can find the next rest stop, gas station, Aud i dealer or hospital under the Top categories menu item. The Point of interest menu item contains addit io nal submenus that you can use to create nav igation destinations . For more info rmat ion about the submenus, refe r to ¢ page 167. Mailing address (business)/Mailing (private) address You can specify a business and private address in an add ress card. With the Delete mailing address function, you can delete the business or private address . Structured addresses from a cell phone that have info rmation regard ing country, ZIP code, city and street name can be impo rt ed directly int o the directory . (D Tips - The public contacts in the local MMI memory are always visible and can be accessed by other use rs. - The new contact w ill be stored in the memory in the directory that is currently being used. - The import ing of new addresses depends on the cell phone. - Up to 100 contacts can be stored in memory in a private or public directory. - Contacts edited in the MMI directory cannot be automatically updated in the connected cell phone. Audi recommends editing cell phone contacts di rect ly in the cell phone. 154 tags The MMI automatically creates a name tag for each contact in the directory. You can also assign up to SO personal name tags for contacts using the voice recognition system . .,. Select: the ITELI button > Directory > Settings control button. - Playing personal name tags : select and con firm Read name tags > contact from the list . - Deleting name tags : se lect and confirm Delete name tags > Delete individually / Delete all entries > Yes. (D Tips - You can only assign and store pe rsonal name tags using the voice recognition system. - You can only delete personal name tags you have recorded . Memory capacity Applies to: vehicles with telephone .,. Select: the ITELI button> Directory > Memory control button > Memory capacity. The Memory capacity fo r each directory and for the enti re memory is disp layed . You can manage up to 5,000 contacts with the directory. You can load up to 2,000 contacts from your cell phone into each private directory . In addition to this , you can store up to 100 private contacts and up to 100 public contacts into the MMI memory. Additional settings Telephone settings Applies to: vehicles with telephone .,. Select: the ton . ITELI button > Settings cont ro l but- Telephone Call options Automati c redial : whe n t he func t ion is swit ched On, a phone number will be au t oma t ically re - d ialed up to five times if it is busy. Automatic red ia l can be canceled with End call . The function is only active when the network gives a busy signa l. Auto answer : when the func t ion is switche d On, incom ing ca lls are automatically a brief t ime. answered afte r Three-way conference (GSM) - On: yo u can answe r an incoming call while anothe r call is in progress by selecti ng Answer. The fi rst call is pu t on hold. Using the Hold opti o n, you can al so pu t a n act ive ca ll on hold and sta rt an other call or a con ference ca ll. - Off : yo u can repla ce a call wit h an incom ing call by se lecting Replace. You can ignore an incom ing ca ll using t he Ignore op t ion . You ca nnot put an active ca ll on ho ld or sta rt a new ca ll. Bluetooth audio player : the Bluetooth audio player func t ion mu st be switched On t o be ab le t o selec t t he Bluetooth audio player as the sou rce in t he Media m en u . Sw itch t he Bluetooth audio player funct io n Off if you are no t usi ng it to preven t mal funct ions in t he Telephone or Media men us. Find Bluetooth devices: t he system sea rches for and lists Bluetooth d evices t hat are with in range . Bonded Bluetooth devices: t he Bluetoot h d evices or ed ited in t he Number inpu t fie ld using t he spe ller. W hen a voicemail nu m ber is stored, t he voicema il ca n be acces se d wit h the ® sym bol in the speller. The Delete number func t ion d eletes the stored voicemail number. co nn ecte d t o the MMI are list ed. The cur ren tly conn ecte d Blue t ooth device is lab eled wit h the Bluetoot h symbo l. To dele t e con necte d Blu etooth d evices individually, se lect the device and delete it with the Delete Bluetooth device funct ion. To disconnect or connect pa ired cell phones individ ually, select the Bluetoot h dev ice and change the profi le using the Connect funct ion wh ile t he vehicle is stat io na ry. Use Disconnect to disco nnect t he paired Bluetoot h dev ice. Invert call lists : t he phone number s in t he call Known Bluetooth devices: up to 50 known dev i- list s ar e sorted accor di ng to t he time the call too k place . When th e funct io n is switc hed On, the so rting orde r is reverse d. ces can be listed. These Bluetooth dev ices may no longer be in ra nge when searc hing to connect. Telephone settings Volume settings 1): fo r the Ring tone volume / Callvolume , re fer t o~ p age 20 5. Voice mail : the voicemai l number can be en t ere d Bluetooth Bluetooth : the MMI Bluetoot h funct ion can be sw itched On or Off . The Bluetoo t h symbol @ ~ .... for about five minu t es when t he vehicle is sta t iona ry and the ignition is switched on. The visibility sw itches off after that. Howeve r, it is still poss ible to estab lish a Bluetooth connection with ce ll phones or devices that have already been paired when the visibility is switched off . The visibility of t he MMI automatically swi t ches Off wh en aud io fi les are be ing played using a conne ct ed Bluetooth aud io player t o avo id pro blems du ring pla yback. Bluetooth name : the Bluetooth name of the MMI (for example, "AUDI MMI 2613") is shown and can be cha nged. Delete Bluetooth devices: all connected Blue- ~page 138, fig. 159 appe ar s in the Infot a inmen t di splay when th e fu nct ion is switc hed on. tooth d evices can be deleted by confirming with Visible : t he visibili ty of t he MMI in cell phones o r in Bluetoo t h audio players can be switc hed On o r Off . When Auto is selec t ed, the MMI w ill re ma in Wi-Fi settings Yes. See~ page 160. visib le for cell phones or a Bluetoo t h a udio player N ,..._ .... N 0 0 ~ 1) Depends on the conn ected cell phone. 155 Telephone Connection s Sort order See ~page 161. You can so rt t he cont acts in you r d irec t ory alphabe t ically acco rding to Last name/ First name . ([) Note Always follow the info rmation found in Wi-Fi hotspot on page 160. (D ~CDin Tips - Several ce ll phones can be paired to the MMI, but only one cell phone can be act ively con nected. - To delete all connected Bluetooth devices, the Bluetooth f unction can be reset to t he fa ctory settings~ page 206. Display public contacts You can show or hide the public contacts . With Yes, all the contacts in the local MMI memory (p ublic) a re s hown, and with No, t hey a re hidde n. Delete private contacts / Delete public contacts You can delete a ll pr ivate contacts in t he local memo ry using t he Delete private conta ct s func tion. You ca n de lete the public con t acts in the loca l memory using the Delete public contacts funct io n. Directory settings Applies to: vehicles with telephone ~ Se lect: the ITEL !bu tton > Directory > Settings contro l button . Troubleshooting Applies to: vehicles with telephone Problem Solution Connecting t he cell phone to the Check if the Bluetooth visibility o n the cell phone and MMI is sw itched on. For some ce ll phones, the vis ibility turns off automat ically after a short period. Or: restart your cell phone. For more information on this, refe r to the user g uide for your cell phone. MMI failed. After pairing, not all contact s/ no contact s are loaded in the MMI. Avoid using special characters in names . Avoid using contact groups. Certai n telephone functions a re grayed out or not availab le. The te lephone fun ct ions depend o n the cell phone servi ce provider a nd the cell p ho ne you are using. You can ob t ain more info rma tion from your cell phone se rvice provide r, in your cell phone use r guide or in the dat abase for mobi le devices at www.aud iusa.com / bluetooth. 156 Audi Audi c o nn e ct - A data connection must be configured for Audi connect services ¢ page 161. connect Introduction Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Using the SIM card reader With Audi connect services, on line information is transmitted and integrated direct ly in the vehicle. Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect A mob ile end device can be used to access the Internet through a Wi- Fi hotspot, either when the vehicle is stationary or from the rear seat when the vehicle is in motion. A separate SI M card prov ided by Audi connect is used to access Audi connect services. A WARNING - - To reduce the risk of an accident, on ly use Audi connect services when road and traffic condit ions perm it. Read and follow the guidelines provided in ¢ page 134. - Use the Audi connect services w ith a Wi-Fi hotspot only in the rear seat when the veh icle is in mot ion or only when the vehicle is stationary to reduce the risk of an accident. (D Fig. 1 7S Insertin g the Audi SIM card, actual size of the Note Audi connect is designed for use only with the prov ided Audi SIM card. Audi AG is not liable for the consequences of using other SIM cards. @ Tips Read and follow the notes about Audi connect before start ing it ¢page 162 . Setup Requirements for Audi connect An I nternet connection is req uired to use Audi connect. The following requ irements must be met to establish a connection: - You must be in an area t hat is covered by your provider . 0 co .... N ,..._ .... N - Your Audi SI M card must be inserted in the MM I SI M card reader ¢ page 157 . Audi SIM card Requirem ents The veh icle must be stationary and the ign ition must be switched on. Inserting t he Audi SIM card .,.Slide the Audi SIM card into the card reader slot w ith the label fac ing up (contact surface facing down) <::;> fig . 175 . The angled corner of the Audi SIM card must be at the left front corner. Then push the Audi SI M card into the slot until it clicks into place. .,.To connect t o the Inte rnet automa ti cally in the future, select and then confirm Yes. .,.To establish a data connection for Audi connect, confirm the message that appears wit h Yes. Afte r connecting successfully After connect ing successfully , the signa l st rength is indicated in the In f otainment display status ..,. 0 0 :c '<t 157 Aud i connect line with one or two symbols, depending on the connection type @ / (J) ~ page 138 , fig . 159 . You can now use Aud i connec t . "' Se lect : the IMENU I button> Audi connect. "' Confirm the p rompt ask ing to connect to t he Interne t with Yes. yo u need to adjust the configura ti on ~ page 161. Operating the browser Applies to: vehicles wit h Audi connect Removing the Audi SIM card "' Press on the Audi SIM card briefly. The card is released from the slot . Remove the Aud i SIM ca rd . A WARNING The ca rd reade r mus t a lways be closed while dr iving for safety reasons. (D Note - Audi connect is des igned for use on ly w ith th e prov ided Audi SIM card . Audi AG is not lia ble for the consequences of usi ng other SIM ca rds . - If a SIM card of a different size is inserte d in the SIM card read e r inst ead of an Aud i SIM car d, do not under any circums t a nces remove th is card yourse lf due to the risk of damag ing the SIM ca rd rea der. Contact yo ur a uthorized Audi dea ler or authorized Audi Service Facility. @ Fig. 1 76 Disp lay of Audi con nec t serv ices Tips To use your ce ll phone, yo u can co nnect your it thro ugh the Handsfree Bluetooth prof ile ~ page 146. - Audi does not provide support for other SIM ca rds . -A udi recommends us ing o nly the provided Audi SIM card . - You can spec ify when the MMI con nects to the Internet ~ page 161. The Internet connection disconnects automatically once the requested Audi connect service no longer req uires any data packets. - The data connection for Audi connect services is preconfig ured at the factory. You can change t he data connection at any t ime if Fig. 1 7 7 Disp lay of addit ional info rm atio n about att rac· tions or points of in terest The browser can be used in various ways. - Display of Audi connect services ~ page 159 - Display of addi t ional informatio n about attractions or points of inte rest The following func t ions a re available w ith in t he brow se r ~ fig . 17 6 : (D Open ing the home page @ Open ing or clos ing t he s ide menu @ Zooming in on browser content (50-200%) @ Stopping the page from loading ® Refreshing the curre nt browser content @ Open ing the main menu (J) Closin g the browser @ Open ing the Destination details menu ® Prev ious point of interest or at tract ion @ Next point of interest or attraction 158 Audi You can return to the previous page using the IBACK ! button. A WARNING To reduce the risk of an accident, only use Audi connect services when road and traffic conditions permit. connect Parking information Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Information on parking locat ions and fees in the selected search area . Fuel prices Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect (D Tips Some functions are only available when the vehicle is stationary. Info rmation on gas stations with the lowest fuel prices for your vehicle in the selected search area . Weather Overview of Audi connect services Basic functions Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect .,.Select : the IMENU ! button > Audi connect > the desired Audi connect service. .,.Select and confirm a category, such as Sports. .,.Select and confirm an event to display the details. Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Information on attractions and travel tips in the selected search area. .,.Select and confirm an attraction to display the details. .... Applies to : vehicles with Audi connect Setting the search area Travel information N ,..... City events Information on events in various categories in the desired search area . the area around your current location is displayed . - In vicinity of destination or stopover: if you have entered a navigat ion destination, you can display the desired information for the area around the destination. - In new city: you can ente r any city for which you wou ld like to receive the desired information using the MMItouch or the speller ¢ page 137. co Information on current weather conditions as well as weather forecasts for the selected search area (for example, at the Destination). Depending on the se lected Audi connect service, you may need to set a search area first: - Immediate vicinity: the desired information for 0 Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Messages Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect View the most current headlines in the MMI. .,.Select and confirm a headline. Audi connect services in navigation Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect The following Audi connect services are currently available: - Navigation with the online map service and online Street View ¢page 171 - Point of interest search (POI) with voice oper· ation (for example restaurants): plan route guidance using the MMIcontrol panel and the voice recognition system ¢ page 143 and destination setup in your MMIusing your myAudi .,.. account ¢ page 167. .... N 0 0 :c '<t 159 Audi conn e ct - Destination setup in your MMI using your myAudi Account ¢ page 167 or online map view ¢ page 171. - Netwo rk ID (SSID ) : name of the Wi-Fi net - - Traffic information (Sirius): rece ive informa - - Password : depending on the encryp t ion type, a tion about accidents, road construction and other incidents ¢ page 175 passwo rd may be generated in the MMI that is used to encrypt the wireless connection. The password can be changed . Be sure to se lect a secure password. For the WEP encrypt ion type, the password must be exactly 13 characters. For the WPA or the WPA2 encrypt ion types, the password must be at least 8 (maximum of 63) characters . - Apply sett ings: the modified settings are applied to the MMI. You must then update the changes in your mob ile w ireless device . Audi connect services on the phone Applies t o: vehicles with Audi connect The fo llow ing Audi connect services are currently ava ilable : - Storing contacts on your computer using your myAudi Account and loading the contacts into the MMI directory ¢ page 153 Wi-Fi hotspot Appl ies t o: vehicles with Audi connect You can use the MMI as a Wi-Fi hotspot to connect up to eight wireless devices to the Internet. While driving, restricted use of non-secured, light, small wireless devices is only possible from the rear of the vehicle. .,.Select: the (fa) button > Setting s control button > W i- Fi setting s. The follow ing settings can be modified in the WiFi setting s menu: Wi-Fi acti ve The MMI Wi-Fi hotspot is deactivated at the factory. Your Wi-Fi hotspot must be activated and visible to establish a connection between your vehicle and your wireless device. - Off : the MMI Wi-Fi hotspot is deactivated. An Internet connection is not possib le. - Visible: the MMI Wi-Fi hotspot is active and can be used to connect to the Internet. - In visible : the MMI Wi-Fi hotspot is active but not visible to other devices. A connection cannot be established with a new w ireless device. The Wi-Fi connection between your vehicle and your wireless device (laptop, cell phone) is en crypted . To establish a connection, you must enter the following settings when setting up your wire less device. You can change them if necessary. 16 0 work . - Encryption type: WEP, WPA or WPA2 A WARNING - As the d river, do not allow usage of the WiFi hotspot t o distract you from driv ing , as this could increase the risk of an accide nt. - It is o nly safe t o use laptops and similar mobile devices when the veh icle is stationary because, like a ll loose objects, they cou ld be thrown around t he inside of the vehicle in a crash and cause serious injuries . Store these types of devices securely while driving. - Do not use any wire less devices on the front seats within range of the airbags while dr iving. Also read the warnings in the chapter ¢page 207. (D Note - Under some conditions, certain mobile devices and ope rating systems may automatically sw itch from your vehicle's Wi-Fi hotspot to the device's mobile data connection. In that event, standard text and data usage rates would apply while the device's mobile data connection is in use. Please refer to doc umentation provided by your mobile device's manufacture and your data car rier for details, related te rms and pr ivacy sta t ement . - You ar e responsib le for all precautions ta ken for data pro t ect ion, anti-virus protection and protection against loss of data on mo bile devices that are used to access the Internet through the Wi-Fi hotspot. ..,. Audi @ Connection setup Tips - In vehicles without Audi connect*, the use of the Wi-Fi hotspot is only possible for the Wi-Fi audio player*. A data connection to the Internet cannot be established. - A separate, paid mobile subscription may be needed to use the Wi-Fi hotspot. You can obtain more information from your cell phone service provider . - Depending on your cell phone plan, receiving data packages through the Wi-Fi hotspot may result in additional charges, particularly when in another country. The use of a flat rate data plan is highly recommended. You can obtain more information from your cell pho ne service provider. Configuring connection connect a data - On request : a data connection is only established when confirmed. - Without request : a data connection is automatically established to use Audi connect se rvices . - Never : a data connection is not established . Audi connect services cannot be accessed . When a data connection is established, the symbol for an active data connection (D appears in the status line in the Infotainment system disfig. 178. play <=> An active data connect ion can be ended manually by selecting Never under Connection setup. Data roaming Data roaming is switched off at the fa ctory. To use a data connection outs ide of the country, Data roaming must be switched on~ - Applies to : vehicles with Audi connect To use Audi connect services through a phone in the vehicle, a data connection must be configured . Connection settings Your vehicle is configured at the factory . The configuration should not be changed. If you have quest ions, contact Audi connect Support at 877-505-AUDI (2834). Audi connect is designed for use on ly with the provided Audi SIM card . - APN: the access point depends on the cell Fig. 178 Configu ri ng th e data connection .,.Select : the [fa] button > Settings control but ton > Data connection. Using the Data connection menu, you can set when an Internet connection should be made. The Internet connection disconn ects automatically once the requested Audi connect service no longer requires any data packets . C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 The following options can be selected: phone service provider and is assigned automat ically. - User name : the user name for your on line profile is assigned by the cell phone service provid er . - Password: the password for your on line profile is ass igned by the cell phone service provider . - Authentication: depending on your cell phone service provider, authentication (verifying identity) may be necessary . If this is the case, select Secure. If not, se lect Normal. The changed settings are saved once you leave the Connection settings menu using the I BACK button . I SIM PIN entry The PIN for the Audi SIM card that is currently in use can be entered . ..,. 0 :r <t 161 Audi conn e ct Data usage info The numbe r of data packets that are sent and received through the MMI is displayed . You can reset the data usage information to zero using the Reset data usage option . Start automatic configuration An online profile is set up and configu red automat ically. The connection settings that you changed manua lly are reset to the defau lt settings. Online status overview An on line status overview with information abo ut your data connect io n (such as the cell phone service provider) is shown in the Infotainment disp lay. Switching the data connection module off The data connection module is sw itched off. An Int ernet connect ion is no longe r poss ible. Network sett ings Under Login, select Auto to log into a network automatically or select Manual to select from a list of networks w ith in range. The available networks in the area can be selected in the Network selection list. This function is on ly availab le when Manual Login is set. ing . Also read the warnings in the chapter ¢page 207 . (D Note You are responsible for all precaut ions t aken for data protection, anti-virus protection and protection against loss of data on mobi le de vices that are used to access the Internet through the Wi-Fi hotspot. (D Tips - When using Online map view, you are prompted again to allow roam ing before connect ing to a foreign mob ile network. - The speed of the data connection may vary depending on the veh icle location, the coverage area of your cell phone service provider and if the recommended provider is used or not . - A data connection cannot be established if incorrect data is ente red in the Connection settings . - The Wi-Fi hotspot recept ion quality depends on the sig nal st rengt h and the availabi lity of the mobile network. You can obtain more information from your cell phone se rvice prov ider. About Audi connect Serial number (IMEi) The se rial number for the MMI that is installed is d isplayed . A WARNING - As the driver, do not allow usage of the WiFi hotspot to dist ract you from d riving, as t his could increase the risk of an accident. - It is only safe to use tab lets and s imilar mobile devi ces when t he vehicle is stat ionary because, like all loose objects, they could be thrown aro und the ins ide of the vehicle when involved in an accident and can cause serious injuries. Store these types of devices sec urely whi le driving. - Do not use any w ireless devices on the front seats w ith in range of the a irbags while d riv- 162 Audi connect services App li es to: vehicles wi th Audi connect (D Tips - You can only use services supported by Audi connect if you have the optional MMI Navigation pl us equ ipme nt and Audi connect. - Audi connect is designed for use only with the provided Audi SIM card . Rece iving data packets from t he Internet w ill quickly increase t he volume of data used. For more information, contac t Audi connect custome r support at 877 -SOS-AUDI (2834). - The Audi connec t se rvices are availab le in the USA. Audi connect serv ices are currently not avai lable in Canada or in Mexico. ..,. Audi - Availability, scope, providers, screen display and costs of services may vary depending on the country, model, model year, end device and rates. Additional information can be found under www.audiusa.com/audiconnect. - An initial registration/activation on the myAudi platform at my.audiusa.com is necessary to use individual services . You can contact an authorized Audi dealer or Audi connect Support at 877-505-AUDI (2834) to receive information on options for expanding your usage and any costs that may result. - It is only possible to use Audi connect services with a valid Audi SIM card. - To ensure all of the Audi connect features work correctly , Audi recommends setting up a data service and Wi-Fi package with your cell phone service provider. Your cell phone service provider can be authorized by law, through a judicial order or other lawful instructions, to disclose the position of your vehicle. Additional information on your cell phone service provider's privacy policies can be found in their Terms of Use . - The availability of Audi connect services, such as weather information, depends on the cell phone service provider . - You can specify when the MMI establishes an online connection ¢ page 161 . The Internet connection ends automatically when the Audi connect service in use no longer requires any data packets. - The Audi connect services are a Wi-Fi/Internet-based system. If the system does not function correctly even though all of the requirements are met, please try again later or contact Audi connect Support at 877-505-AUDI (2834). - For detailed information on Audi connect and the Terms of Use, visit www.audiusa.com/audiconnect. 0 co .... N ,..._ .... N connect Privacy protection Appli es to : vehicles wi th Audi connect {I) Tips - Your privacy is important to us . - AUDI AG collects, processes, shares and transmits your personal information in accordance with legal regulations in order to ensure proper function and availability of the individual Audi connect services. You can view the complete, current and valid Audi connect data protection policy in your MMI. The my Audi website is available for to you to activate additional Audi connect services and to transfer data with your vehicle, among other services. A one-time registration is required to establish a connection to your vehicle. For this purpose, AUDI AG collects, processes, transmits and uses your required personal information as required for you to use the services provided by AUDI AG. Your information is not distributed to third parties. Using your cell phone with the help of your myAudi platform, you can transfer information for Audi connect services functions to your vehicle and allow specific information to be transmitted from your vehicle . - By activating special information services that are part of your Audi connect portfolio, you can use these functions directly in your vehicle by entering data to confirm your identity (to use social networks, for example). To do this, the identification information you provided is forwarded with the request to the respective service provider . Then you can access your personal content using a secure connection. This content is displayed in the vehicle for your use. Your personal content is not stored within Audi AG. The necessary connection information is processed and used for providing services and the proper function of the services in accordance with applicable legal guidelines. - By providing Audi connect services , Audi of America is authorized to collect, process, transmit and transfer information about 0 0 :c '<t 163 Audi connect you and your vehicle. You can obtain addi tiona l information about this in your MMI under: !MENU ! button> Audi connect > About Audi connect. - Information on our data protection measures in conjunction with the mobile Audi connect application can be found in the application's privacy policy . For additional information about the my.audiusa.com website or other applications, websites or onli ne services connected to Audi, visit www .audiusa.com/privacy . Troubleshooting App lies to: vehicles with Audi connect Problem Solution Wi -Fi hotspot : problems establish- Delete all existing W i-Fi connections on your mob ile device and ing a Wi-Fi connection restart it . 164 Na v igat ion Navigation Opening (D navigation Applies to: veh icles with navigation system The navigation system directs you to your destination, around traffic incidents and on alternative routes, if desired. Tips - Snow and obstructions on the GPS antenna or interference caused by trees and large buildings can impair satellite reception and affect the system's ability to determine the vehicle position. Several deactivated or malfunctioning satell ites can also interrupt GPS recept ion and affect the system's ability to determine the vehicle position. - Because street names somet imes change, the names stored in the MMI may in rare cases d iffer from the actual street name. - Contact your authorized Audi dealer for information on updating the navigation data. - The navigation system can be opened in Demo mode for s imulations or p lanning purposes 9 page 174. Fig. 179 Examp le: online map view • Select: INAVI button. After se lecting Navigation, the last menu that was open is displayed. Entering a destination Entering an address Applies to : vehicles wit h navig ation syste m - Switching between t he map and th e destinat ion entry: press the !NAV !button aga in. ,& WARNING - The demands of traffic require your full attent ion. Read and fo llow the guidelines provided in ~ page 134. - Obey all traffic laws whe n driving. - The route calcu lated by the navigation system is a recommendat ion for reaching your des t ination. Obey traffic lights, stopping restrictions, one -way streets, lane change restrictions, etc . (D C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 Note - If the driv ing directions conflict with traffic laws, obey the traff ic laws. - To reduce the risk of an ac cident, adjust the volume of t he navigation system so that signals from outside the vehicle, such as po lice and fire sirens, can be heard easily at all times. Fig. 1 80 Entering a dest ina tio n city • Select: !NAV !button> Route guida nce control button > Address. - Changing the count ry : select and conf irm Count ry. Enter a country. - Entering a destin ation using the City/Zi p: select and confirm Cit y/Zi p. Enter a city or a ZIP code using the speller. Select and confirm a city from the list . Select and confirm additional details about the destinat ion, such as Add str eet , Set as stopover, Set point of interest in city9 page 167 or Set distr ict . Start route guidance . 0 :r <t 165 Navigation - Entering a destination using a street: select and confirm Street. Select and confirm a city from the list. Enter a street . To enter a street regardless of the city, turn the control knob to In all cities and press the contro l knob . Se lect and confirm additional deta ils about the desti nation such as House number or Intersection . Start route guidance . Setting a destination from the map Applies to : vehicles wit h navigat ion system A location on the mop con be used as a destination or be entered in the directory. Assistance when entering an address: when enter ing an address, locations that have been en tered in the past are provided as suggestions in the input field . By pressing the List control button , you can accept the suggested location as a destination. Additional cities that match your entry are listed below. The number of locations found is also listed @ ¢ fig. 180. Fig. 181 Select ing a des tin at ion on th e map When the desired city is shown in the speller input field or the list below, you can press and hold the control knob to switch to the city list . Destination on the map You can se lect a new dest inat ion from the map by moving the crosshairs horizontally, vert ically or diagonally using the MMI touch 9 page 136 ¢ page 166. Fig. 182 Sett ing a ma p locatio n as the destinat ion Coordinates Display of the geocoord inates where the cross hairs are located (latitude and longitude). Storing in the directory Individual destinations can be stored direct ly in the directory after they are entered. Two navigation destinations, Private/ Business, can be assigned to each contact. - Opening the map : press the INAVI button (several times if necessary) . - Adjusting the scale (to move the crosshairs more quickly) : turn the control knob to the left/right. - Switching the side menu on: press the control knob . - Sliding the crosshairs: slide the crosshairs horizontally, vertically or diagonally to the desired destination using the MMI touch ¢ page 136 . - Selecting a destination : press the control knob . Select and confirm the symbol © ¢ fig. 181 in the side menu . Select and confirm Start route guidance. Additional information in the crosshairs location : if you select an item on the map with the crosshairs, available information is disp layed (such as the address or t raffic information) . 166 Na v igat ion @ Tips - If a destination is not present in the navigation data, you can move the crossha irs to the location of the des ired city and set the geocoordinates as a destination or add a contact to the directory. - If you stop moving the crosshairs for a moment, additional informat ion about the area highlighted by the cross hairs will be displayed (such as the city or street name, if available). Enter point of interest App lies to: ve hicles with navigation system .,.Select : INAVI button> Route guidan ce con t rol button > Points of int erest . - Changing th e search area: se lect Search area. Select and confirm a search a rea in the list. - Searching for a point of interest name in the selected search area: select Find entry . Enter the name of the point of inte rest . - Searching fo r a point of interest in a specific category: select and confi rm a catego ry, such as Airport . The fo llowing search catego ries are avai lable : Top categories: this function helps you find pop- ular locat ions such as the nearest parking lot. The po ints of interest are sorted in ascending orde r according t o the distance from the vehicle . Searching for an entry in the current country: the name of the country is entered in the speller. The po int of interest does not depend on the vehicle posit ion and the destination . This func t ion is useful fo r search ing for po ints of inte rest that you know about in a new country. Along the route : points of int erest along the route can only be se lected during active route guidance . The point of inte rest is located direct ly along the calcu lated route or in the vicinity of it. In new city: the name of the city is entered in the speller. Points of interest can be selected from various categories. This function is useful for searching for points of interest in a city independent from the destination. Nationwide : you can either search for the point of interest by name or se lect it from various cate gories. The point of interest is independent from the vehicle position and destinat ion. For example, you can navigate to an airport in the current country using this function . @ Tips - The po ints of interest in Top categories and Immediate vicinity are displayed according t o stra ight-line distance (open arrow) from your current locat ion. The actua l distance from your cur rent locatio n t o the po int of interest is upda ted a utomat ically (solid arrow) . - The re may be entr ies in t he list t hat cannot be displaye d comp letely due to t heir length. If you select these entries with the contro l knob, a pop -up window containing detailed information about the selected list e ntry will open. Online destinations Applies to : vehicles with navigat ion syste m a nd Audi connect You can search for points of interest on the Internet. Immediate vicinity : points of inte rest ca n be selected from d ifferent categor ies. The po ints of interest are list ed sta rting from the immediate vicinity of the veh icle up to a radius of approxi mately 125 miles (200 km). C) Vicinity of destination /s topover : the points of .... inte rest ed ca n be selec t ed from vario us catego"' ries, fo r example you can sea rch for a hote l at the ""'.... 0 C0 0 :r desti nat ion. Fig. 183 Addit ional information about on line destinat ions <t 167 Iii' Navigation Requirement: the requirements for Audi connect services must be met ¢page 157. .,.Select : INAVIbutton> Route guidance control button > Online destinations . - Search at location or vicinity of destination/ stopover 1>:select and confirm Search in immediate vicinity or Search at dest./stopover. En- ter a sea rch term, such as restaurant, and confirm the input with OK. Select and confirm a point of interest > Start route guidance. - Search in new cityl}: select and confirm In new city > Find city. Enter the name of the city and confirm the input with OK. Enter a search term, such as restaurant, and confirm the input with OK. Select and confirm a point of interest> Start route guidance. - Finding destinations from myAudi account2>: select and confirm Find destinations from myAudi account. Enter the myAudi PIN for your myAudi account, if necessary. The contacts stored in the myAudi account are displayed. You only need to enter the myAudi PIN one time . You will receive the myAudi PIN in your myAudi account once you have assigned a vehicle to the account. Select and confirm a contact. Select and confirm a private or business navigation destination > Start route guidance. You can display additional information about online destinations in the Destination details menu ¢fig . 183. @ Provider at time of prin tin g. 2> Requirement : you must have a myAudi account set up at my.audiu sa.com. You must have a vehicle stored in your myAudi account and you must have a destinat ion sto red. 168 address as the Appli es t o : vehicles wi th navigati on syst em Favorites make it easier to enter a destination that you use often. Requirement: a favorite or home address must be stored ¢ page 172. .,.Select: !NAV!button > Route guidance control button > Favorites. "' Select and confirm a favorite or the home address. Start route gu idance. You can store up to ten individual destinat ions and your Home address as favorites ¢ page 172. (j) Tips - You can disp lay, find, ed it and delete your stored favorites and home address on the map ¢page 172. - Favorites are disp layed on the map at a scale up to 1.5 miles (2.5 km). Loadingthe last destination Appli es to: vehicles wit h navigat ion system Your previous destinations are stored automatically and can be loaded directly as destinations. .,.Select: !NAV!button > Route guidance contro l button > Last destinations . "' Select and confirm a previous dest ination from the list. Start route guidance . Tips - For additional information on the myAudi account, visit www.audi.com/myAudi. - Refer to the notes in the chapter About Audi connect r:!>page 162. 1> Setting a favorite/home destination (D Tips The list of last destinations can be deleted ¢page 174. Na v igat ion Setting the home address as the destination App lies to: vehicles with navigat ion system Start route guidance to the home address you set simply and quickly. Requ irement : a home address must be stored Entering a stopover/route plan App lies to : vehicles wit h navigat ion syste m You can enter up to nine stopovers directly in the route plan or using the destination input options . Route r=;, page 172 . "' Selec t: INAVI button> Route guidance control button > Home address. "' Sta rt route guidance . NV-593 W/E ~:~::~~ 'NA AVE LAS VEGAS . NV -- ~: EXCALIBUR. 2 mi .. 7 : 10 ,~ LAS VEGAS. N _ _ _ LUXOR RESORT AND CASINO Transferring a destination from the directory Applies to: vehicles with navigation system You can navigate directly to destinations in the directory. 4 mi .. 7 :15 - ... Dcst1nat 1on ,,:ol B,...._ DI\: _:::'.J 0- :: • Settings '*',.dl TMC Fig. 184 Route pla n Requireme nt: a dest inati on must be en t ered Requirement: the directory must contain contacts wit h privat e/bus iness addresses stored as desti nations. ¢page 165. button> Route guidance control "' Se lect : INAVI button > Directory . "' Select and confirm a contact . If a contact conta ins two navigation destinations (private and business), se lect and confirm one destination . Sta rt route guidance. - Entering a destination as a stopover: selec t Entering a destination using geo coordinates Applies to: vehicles with navigation system "' Select : INAVI button > Route guid ance control button > Address > Coordinates. "' Select and confirm the Latitude and Longitude . Start route guidance. "' Select: !NAV !button > Route control button . and confirm the symbol for entering a stopover @ ¢ fig . 184 . Ent er a dest inat ion r=;, page 165 . Select and confirm Add to route plan . Start route guida nce. - Changing the route plan : press the Route control button . Se lect and confirm the destination or st opove r and t hen Change, Move, Delete o r Drive to this destination now . - Save route plan : press t he Route cont rol but t on. Selec t and confi rm Route memory and t hen Save route plan . Enter a name. - Load route plan / Deleting : press t he Route cont rol button . Se lect and confirm Route memory a nd then Load route plan/ Delete route plan . The following information appea rs in the rout e plan side menu ¢ fig. 184 : (D @ @ @ C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 Vehicle location Symbol fo r ente ring a stopove r Entered stopove r Dest inat ion To delete all st opovers from your route plan , ente r t he individual dest ination and start the route page 165 . guidance r=;, 0 :r <t 169 Navigation Starting/canceling guidance route Operating the map Appl ies to: vehicles with navigation system App lies to: vehicles with navigat ion system You can a lso cancel route guidance by enter ing a new dest ination c>page 165 . - Start ing route guidance when entering a new destination : se lect the I NAVI button > Route guidance control button > Enter a destination > Start route guidan ce. - Restarti ng/ canceling last route guidance: select the I NAVI button> Route guidance control button > Start / Cancel. Fig. 185 Online map wit h crosshairs switc hed off The fo llowing additional funct ions are ava ilable when enter ing a new destination: Alternative route s: three route suggest ions are calculated for the destination that is current ly entered. The side menu shows information about the alternative routes, such as distance to the destination and the calculated arrival t ime. Alternative routes can only be calc ulated for individual destinations . Fi g. 18 6 Standard map wit h the crosshair s switched on Set point of int erest in city: a llows you to search for attractions and public places around the specified location, such as hospita ls, movie theaters, recreation areas, etc. The points of interest can be selected d irectly as a destinat ion. Set district : the navigation system calculates the - Opening the map : press the INAVI button (several times if necessary) . - Switching the crosshairs on: press the contro l knob in the map view. - Switching the crosshairs off: press the IBACKI button . route to the center of the city or district that is entered. When the crosshairs are switched off: Display destination on map : the dest inat ion en- (D Direct ion: the map is disp layed e ithe r with an tered is disp layed on the map. orientation to t he North or to the Driving direction <=> page 17 3 . @ Scale: turn the control knob to the left or right to decrease or increase the scale . @ Dista nce t o the des t ination or stopover @ Calculated arriva l t ime at the destination or stopover ® ® 0 1l Only app lies to vehicles witho ut camera-based speed limit dis play. 170 Speed display 1) Altitude disp lay Vehicle location Navigation @ Display of selected map information ® Display of an upcoming maneuver When the crosshairs are switched on: @ Information regarding the location of the crosshairs: If you select a city on the map using the crosshairs, any information available is displayed, such as address, phone number or traffic information. @ Map content, such as traff ic information, favorites or points of interest @ Display of the geocoordinates where the crosshairs are located (latitude and longitude) @ Moving along the route : This function can be used while route guidance is active. Turn the control knob to the left or right to move the map along the current route . @ Destination details menu: Display of availa ble details about the location of the crosshairs, such as address. The location of the crossha irs can be used as a stopover, stored in the directory or called ¢ page 165. @ Repeat the last navigation message If you select the map orientation (!) and press the control knob when the side menu is switched on and the 20 map view is se lected ~ page 173, the display switches from Dir. of travel to North and vice versa. This setting is saved. Online map view Appl ies to: vehicles with naviga t ion syst em and Audi connect You can display the map with satellite images using the online map view. Fig. 188 Map view w ith on line Street View Requirement: the requirements for Aud i connect services must be met ~page 157 . ., Select the INAVI button> Settings control button > Map view . ., Select and confirm the provider for the on line map view . The online map view is based on data packets received from the Internet in the form of satellite images, which are then combined with the roadways from the Standard map view. The re are two gigabytes of memory space on the MMI ha rd drive that can be used to temporari ly store the map or navigation data that was received. This is roughly the amount required for the map/navigation data from a 2,500 miles (4,000 km) route. As long as the satellite images loaded for route guidance are stored on the hard drive, you can use them without having an active data connection. Online Street View* You can explore many places in the world through the eyes of a pedestrian using on line Street View. Online Street View is available when the symbol (!) ¢ fig. 187 is displayed in the side menu. To activate the Online Street View, turn the control knob to a scale of less than 30 m. The following functions are available: - Exploring an area step-by-step : tap the MMI touch control pad when the symbol is disp layed C) @ ¢ fig.188. .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 ... Fig. 187 Online m ap view 0 :r <t 171 Na v ig a t ion - Zoomi ng in or out on the current view in fou r stages: turn the contro l knob to the left or to the right @ . - Turning the view to the left / right or tilt ing up/ down: move your finger over the MMItouch contro l pad in the desired direction. @ Tips - Change: se lect and confirm a favorite or the home address . Select and confirm Re-assign home address/ favorite . - Showing on the map: select and confirm a favorite/home add ress. Select and confirm Display destination on map . - Refer to the notes in the chapter About Audi connect ¢ page 162. - Stored data for the on line map view can be deleted with Factory setting s ¢ page 206 . - The online map view is an Audi connect service and is updated regu larly when the function is opened . The process may take several seconds. - When the on line map display is switched on with the 30 map type, the Infotainment display automatically switches to the 20 map type when driving through tunnels. - Content, scope and providers of available Internet-based services may vary. - For safety reasons, the online Street View funct ions can only be usedwhen the vehicle is stationary. Additional - Call: select and confirm a favorite or the home address. Select and confirm Call. settings Storing a favorite or home address App lies to: vehicles with navigation system - Delete : se lect and confirm a favorite or the home address . Select and confirm Delete home address/ favorite . Storing a destination in the directory Appli es to: vehicles wit h navigat ion system and telepho ne Two addresses (private/business) can be assigned as destinations for each contact in the directory. "' Select: !NAV !button > Route guida nce contro l button > enter a destination > Store in directory. - Storing a destinati on as a new addre ss card: select New contact. Enter a name . Enter additional data, if necessary . Select and confirm Store contact . - Assigning a destination to an existing address card: select and confirm an address card. Select and confirm Store contact . If you already have an address card for a destination, the old destination will be overwritten. Favorites ore stored automatically as a contact in the directory. Display as f avorite : to be able to access a desti- "' Select : INAVI button> Route guidance control button > Favorite s. nation quickly, the destination can be displayed in the list of favorites when the function is switched on~ ¢ page 169 . - Storing a favorite : select Create favorite . Se- lect and confirm a favorite with the displayed funct ions. - Storing a home addre ss: select Home address. Select and confirm a home address with the displayed functions . A home address can be stored for each cell phone or SIM card that is paired with the MMI as well as for the public MMIdirectory . It is only visible when the respective directory is active. Additional functions include: 172 Stored destinations are ident ified on the map by a blue or red push pin (business/private navigation destination). General settings Applies to: vehicles wit h navigat ion system "' Select : !NAV !button > Sett ings control button . Several criteria are used to calculate route guidance. ... Na vi gation Route crit e ria Orientation Auto rerouting (traff ic): when auto rerouting is On, the route is automatically adjusted based on TMC traffic information. If the MMI does not calculate a detour even though you have se lected dynamic route On and a traffic jam was reported on the ca lculated route, then t he detour the system calculated would take more time than the time spent wa it ing in the traff ic jam . North 1l : the map orienta t ion is facing north. Alternati ve route s: when the fun ction is On, up to three suggested routes and their criteria appear in the Infotainment d isplay in the side menu . After chang ing to map view, the new route that was calculated according to your cr iteria is highlighted. You can select t he poss ible routing in the alte rnative routes by turning and press ing the cont rol knob . Route option s: you can se lect a Short , Fast or Mixed route . Highway / Toll road/ Ferry: select the Minimize option you do not want the navigation system to include highways, toll roads o r ferries when cal- culating a ro ute. Time restricted roads: us ing the Minim ize function will exclude t ime restricted roads, such as pedestrian zones, from the route ca lculation . When Auto is selected , the MMI decides if the time rest ricted roads shou ld be included when calculat ing the ro ute guidance based on t he en tr ies stored in the navigation data . Seasonal closing : using the Minimize function will exclude seasona l closings, su ch as mountai n passes, from the route calcu lation . When Auto is se lected, the MMI decides if the seasonal re stricted roads should be included when calc ulating the route guidance based on th e entries stor ed in the navigation data . Map colors Day/ Night : the map is displayed with a light/ dark background. ~ .... Dir. of travel : the map orientat ion is in the direct ion of t ravel. At a sca le of 62 mi les (100 km) , the map is or iented to t he no rth for eas ier orientation. Auto : at a scale up to 3 miles (5 km), the map orientation is in the direction of travel. At a scale greate r than 3 miles (5 km), the map is oriented to the no rth. Map type Destination : the desti nation is marked with a checke red flag . The map indicates the destinat ion and is oriented to the north. 2D: the current veh icle position is displayed. The map or ientation corresponds to the sett ing in the Map orientation menu ~ page 173. 3D : when th is function is switched on, the current vehicle pos ition is displayed in a three-dimensional terrain map and the map or ientat ion is set automat ica lly to the Dir. of travel. At a sca le of 100 km and la rger, the map is oriented to the no rth. At a sca le between 30 - 100 meters, the d isplay will show three-d imens iona l city models and landmarks will be shown at a scale of 30 - 200 meters. Overview: the entire route from the veh icle locat ion to the destina t ion is disp layed on the map. The map scale depends on the length of the route. The map is oriented to the north. Map disp lay Online map view 9 page 171 Map content Map contents such as traffic information, favorites or restaurants can be displayed (~) o r hid den . The functions in the Map content menu depend on the map d isplay that is selected . Auto : when t he lights switch on, the map co lors sw itch from day to night . N ,..._ .... N 0 0 ~ l) Only possible in th e 2D map view 173 IJl, Na v ig a t ion Route info When the function is switched On, the three upcoming turns and the calcu lated distance and ar rival time are shown in the Infotainment display during route guidance @ ¢ page 170, fig. 185 . The cu rrent st reet traveled, upcoming maneuvers, traffic information or points of interest on the current route are a lso displayed. Navigation prompts can be g iven by pressing the Ill button. Voice guidance on during call Navigation prompts can be switched on~ during a phone call. or off Delete recent destinations The next turn is d isp layed at the bottom of the table. The destinations you have entered last are automatically sto red. They can be deleted ind ividually or a ll at once . Autom atic zoom Present at ion mode On: the map scale is adapted automatically The Demo mode helps you to effectively plan and display a route by showing map contents or route criter ia . You ca n Set starting location when you would like to calculate a route start ing from a location other than t he vehicle position. Start Demo mode to sim ulate t he route g uidance . depending on the type of road being traveled on (expressway, highway, other roads) so that you always have an optima l overv iew of the road a head. When there are upcom ing mane uvers, t he scale is automatically reduced to provide a better detai led view. (D Inters ection : when route gu idance is active, the map tempora rily zooms in to a detailed scale when there are upcoming mane uvers so that you can see the route better. Off: the map scale you have chosen is kept instead. Tips The route simulation in presentation mode is deact ivated while driving fo r safety reasons. ' Route settings Applies to: vehicles with navigat ion system .,.Select: !NAV !button> Route cont rol button. Gas station message Route list When th is function is sw itched On, a message appears when the fue l gauge goes below the reserve mar king. Confirm ing this message displays a list of gas stations in the area. When a gas station is selected, route guidance from the current vehicle position is calcu lated . Speed limit display* 1> The max imum speed limits for expressways, highways and ma in streets can be swit ched On-/ Off if they are stored in the navigation data . The route list is vis ible only when route guidance is active and contai ns info rmation regard ing the route, the names of the streets and the length of the route sect io ns. On longer route sec ti o ns, ad dit ional info rmation may be disp layed such as possib le interchanges when driving on exp ressways. Avoid route from here Voice guidance Determin ing th e length of the route to be avoided : turn t he contro l knob to t he left or right. The voice guidance prompts can be Complete or Compact . When Off is selected, no voice gu idance is given. When route guidance is active and the Standard ¢ page 170 map view is switched on, the calculated route is avo ided fo r the d ista nce you have l) Only app lies to vehicles without camera -based speed limit dis play . 174 ... Na vi gation specified, if possib le . The navigation system calculates an a lternative route . Reception of traffic information is indicated by the TMC symbol in the status line: The route to be avoided t hat you have ente red appl ies on ly to the current rou t e and must be set again, if needed. TMCsymbol Meaning Disp layed TMC stations are avai lable and dynam ic navigation is switched On ¢ page 173. Is g rayed out TMC stat io ns are not availa ble a nd dynam ic navigation is sw itched On. Not disp layed Auto rerouti ng is switched Off . The areas you have se lected to avoid will appea r with red and wh ite shad ing on the map. {D) Tips If the MMI does not calcu late an alte rnative route, that means the re is no ne ava ilable. Accessing information - Opening a detailed view of traffic informat ion: select a nd confirm the traffic information from t he list . traffic Auto rerouting (traffic) App lies to: vehicles with navigation system and Sirius (satel li te radio) By receiving traffic information from the TMC or satellite - depending on ava ilability - the MMI calculates an optim ized route and the possib le t ime saved for the current route guidance . You can decide yourse lf which route you would like to use. Traffic information (TMC) Applies to : vehicles with navigat ion system and Sirius (sat el lite radio) Tfv1Ctraffic reports can be shown in the Infotain ment display using Sirius* (satellite radio). Info @ D EASTBOUND Audi connect 59 mi _ I · ~ Slow traffic @ NORTHBOUND 59 mi (~ Road works fJ!: ~ SOUTHBOUND 59 mi · - Opening the next tr affic information : se lect and confirm Display next report . - Showing the selected traffic information on th e map: select and confirm Show on map . The shaded line shows t he stree t and the length of the t raff ic jam . - Displaying the next tr affic information on the map : press the control knob aga in . - Having traffic information read out: press the Read control button . Traffic information display © Colored warn ing symbols: traffic incidents on your route a re shown in the upper sect ion of the list and are sorted according to d istance. Warning symbols with~ dents. : avoided traffic inci- @ Grayed out warning symbols: t raffi c inc iden t s that are not on your route. They are sorted according to road type (expressway, highway, other road), country and name. (~ Road works Read Settings I_ TMC_ t• "'" Fig. 189 Accessing TMC traff ic info rma t ion ~ Se lect: IIN FO I button . 0 co .... N ,..... .... N 0 0 The last act ive Info menu is shown in the Infotainment display . To open t he list with TMC tra ffic information¢ fig. 189, press the !IN FO I but ton again in t he Info menu. (D Tips - Critica l t raff ic information, s uch as warn ings about wrong-way drivers, is automatically disp layed. To hide the traffic info rmation, press the IBACK I button or the control knob. - TMC traffic reports are not available in Canada. For more informat ion, please contact Sirius Canada. :c '<t 175 Na v ig a t ion - Traffic reports are shown in the driver information system disp lay and can be selected by turning the left thumbwheel. Other Ente rtainm ent volume Turn the On/Off knob t o the right or left to the adjust the volume during traffic reports . settings ~ Se lect : IIN FO l button> Setting s control button. Traffic report Traffic info rmation that refers to a n active dest ination is given as a spoken announcement when the func t ion is sw itched On. Troubleshooting Applies to : vehicles with navigat ion system Problem Solution Favorites that were a lready stared are no longer displayed . The favorites in the public MMI directory are visib le for a ll users in the vehicle. If a cell phone is connected, both the favor ites from the private d irectory and the favorites stored as public are displayed. If you wa nt t o make a favorite ava ilable for all users, it must be stored in the public MMI directory . A favorite in the private direc tory must be marked as a Public contact if you want it to be ava ilab le for all use rs . 176 Radio Radio Accessing the radio The radio supports the FM, AM and Sirius * (sate llite radio) bands. By means of an HD Radio receiver, you also receive radio stations on the FM and AM band in digital format. Fig. 190 FM stat ion list (HD radio) SIRIUS • 006 ( 007 ___ i. 60s Hits 70s Hits - ,I Linking Linking 008 80s Hits Linking ~ 009 ThePulse Linking 010 Bridge Linking 011 Radio 1 Linking • _: Fig. 191 Siri us stat ion list ~ Se lect: the IRADIO I button. Aft e r se lect ing t he radi o, th e last me nu t hat was ope n is displ ayed . C0 .--1 "' ""' 0 .--1 0 :r - Selecting the frequency band: press the Band control button. Select and conf irm the desired band. Or : press the IRADIOI button repeated ly until the desired frequency band appears in the title line c:;,fig. 190. - Updating the station list : select and conf irm Update stat ion list . The station lists in the FM and Sirius* bands are updated automatically. If the last stat ion t hat was play ing is no longer ava ilab le afte r the stat ion list is updated, stat ion 184 is played automatically. If there is a loss of radio signal (Sirius*), the following system informat ion may display in the station list: LINKING: the tuner is current ly not receiving a satellite s ignal @ c:;,fig. 191 t•JG ,,111 C) cannot be received are marked wit h a symbol @ c:;,fig. 190 . - Quick storing from the stat ion list : select and confirm a station from the station list. Press an d hold the control knob u nti l Store station name here appears in the presets list. Select and confirm the desired presets locat ion. - Selecting a stored station: press the Presets control button . Select and conf irm a stat ion from the presets list. - Showing the station list : pres s t he IRADI O I butt on agai n. The receiva ble stat ion s are show n on a rad io st ati on list ¢ fig. 19 0 and can be selecte d direct ly. - Selecting a station : s ele ct and confir m a station from t he st at ion list. FM/ AM stations th at can be received by digital radio are marked with the HD symbol (!) c:;,fig . 190 . If reception quality declines, the radio automatica lly switches to t he a nalog FM/AM station. Digita l FM HD radio stations may conta in mult iple addit ional stat ions *. The available additiona l stations* are listed un der t he radio station . When you leave the reception a rea, additiona l stations* that ANTENNA: the antenna is not ready. For addi t iona l information, contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. The system information turns off when the radio stations are rece ived again. (D Tips - HD Rad io reception is not availab le in Canada. - Cont act the Sirius * prov ider if you wo uld like to rece ive satellite programming. - That stat io ns in th e AM station list are st ill displayed after you leave the reception area. There is no longer any reception . - Buildings, tunnels, bridges, open areas, oth er veh icles or objects on the veh icle roof can affect reception. - Sate llite rad io is not availab le in Alaska and Hawaii. <t 177 Radio Radio functions @ Information window Various informa t ion ab out t he se lected st at ion (such as the sta t ion name, ensemble or program type) is displaye d, depending on availability. (J) Presets The prese t s list can co nta in up t o 50 sta t ions fro m all fre qu en cy bands. Fig. 192 Radio mai n f unct ions .. Select: the IRADIO I button> Functions cont rol button. The fo llow ing funct io ns can be selected, depending on the band th at is se lected: (!) Store station / Store channel The se lected stat ion is stored in the next empty position in the presets list c:, page 178 . Select a nd confi rm t he desired prese t s loca ti o n. @ Seek down/Seek up (FM , AM) - Storing stations: select the Presets control bu tt on > Store station name. The selected station is sto red in t he next emp ty pos ition in t he presets list. Sele ct and confir m t he d es ired p rese t s locati o n . - Selecting a stored station : press the Presets cont rol butt on. Selec t a nd con firm a st atio n from t he prese t s list. Or: press the arrow keys on the MMI cont rol panel (l<l<l / [>[>I). - Moving stored stations: press t he Presets con t rol butt on. Se lect and confirm the st at ion from the station list and then Move station name. Se lect and conf irm the desired presets location. Other settings The prev ious I~ or next ~I receivable station is selected. Or : press the arrow keys on the MMI control pane l l<l<l / t>t>I. .. Select: the IRADIO Ibutton > Settings control button. Previous channel / Next channel (Sirius*) The following se tt ings can be sele cte d d epend ing o n the band that is selected (FM, AM, Sirius*) : The prev ious I~ or next ~I channel is selecte d. Or : press the arrow keys on the MMI control pane l l<l<l / t>t>I. HD Radio* (FM/AM) You can swit ch HD Radio reception o n or off. @ Tuning HD station information* (FM/AM) The fr equ en cy bars are disp layed . Sele ct a nd con firm t he desired frequen cy. Requirement: HD radio recept ion must be switched on . Tuning (Sirius*) When the funct ion is switched on, various information abo ut the t itle t hat is current ly playing (such as artist or album) is displayed, depending o n ava ilab ility. Select a nd confirm the des ired channel from the Sirius frequency ban d *. @ Scan Station names (FM) All stations are played for several seconds each. ® Information (FM)/Info (Sirius*) The radio text (such as station name, artist o r ti tle) is show n in the Infotai nment display, depending on availability. 178 - Scrolling: scro lling text t ransm itted by the FM stat ions is shown in the Infotainment system disp lay. - Fixed: scrolling text transmitted by the FM stations is not shown in the Infota inment system .,,. Radio display. Only the current section of the scroll ing text displayed. - Off: scrolling text transmitted by the FM sta tions is not shown in the Infotainment display. Scro lling text from HD stations is shown in the Infotainment display. Channel info (Sirius*) If track info rmat ion is available for the cur rent title (such as artist or album), it will be displayed in a pop-up window if this function is activated. Station sorting (Sirius*) - Channel number : the stations are sorted in ascending order accor ding to their station number. - Channel name : th e stations are listed in alphabetical order. - Category and channel number : the stations are sorted accord ing to their category and t hen according to their channel numb e r. - Category and channel name : the stations are so rt ed according to their category and t hen according to their station name . Category filter (Sirius*) The stations shown in the station list can be filtered by your personal pre ferences and by program type . The program categories that you can select depend on what is offered by your provider. Select the Deactivate category filter option to deact ivate all filter opt ions and disp lay all available stations in the satell ite stat ion list. Receiver serial number (Sirius*) The electronic seria l number (ESN) is d isp layed. The number is required when logging in to Sirius*. Deleting presets Requirement: a station must be stored in the presets list ¢ page 178 . Stored stations can be deleted Individually or All at once . Troubleshooting Problem Solution A station with poor reception is no longer disp layed in the station list once you switch to a different stat ion. Store the station ahead of time and then select it from the presets list later (z) ¢ page 178, fig. 192. 0 co .... N ,..... .... N 0 0 :c '<t 179 Media dri v e s and conn e ctions Media drives connections and Introduction There are various media drives and connections ava ilable in the MMI. For example, you can play aud io/video* files through the Jukebox, or you can connect a portable device to the Audi music interface* a nd ope rate it through the MMI. Notes General information Media and format restrictions : the MMI (including the SD card reader and the USB storage device connect ion*) was tested w ith a var iety of products and media on the market . However , there may be cases where ind ividual devices or media and audio/video* files may not be recognized, may play on ly w ith restrict ions or may no t play at a ll. The MMI media dr ives do not suppo rt Windows Media Audio 9 Voice, Windows Media Audio 9 Loss less and Windows Media 9 Profess ional formats . Digital Right s Managem ent : please note that the audio/v ideo* files are subjec t to copyright protection . The med ia drives do not play files that are protected by ORM and that are ident ified with the symbo l ~ Data security : Never store important data on the memory cards, the Jukebox, CDs/DVDs or portable aud io devices . Audi is not responsib le for damaged or lost files and med ia. Loading t imes: the more files/folders/playlists that a re on a storage medium, the longer it will take to load the audio/v ideo* fi les . Audi recommends using storage media that on ly conta in aud io/video files*. To decrease t he t ime it takes to load audio/video fi les*, create subfo lders (for example, for the artist or album). The loading time will also increase when importing files. Additional information : when playing, aud io files are automatically displayed with any addi180 tiona l information that is stored (such as the artist, track and album cover) . If this information is not avai lab le on the storage medium, the MMI will check Gracenote . However, in some cases, the addit ional information may not be d isplayed . Restri cted functionalit y: if functionality is restricted, reset the Media setting s to the factory default settings c>page 206. Reset the Jukebox to the factory defau lt settings if functiona lity is restricted c>page 206. For information abo ut the propert ies of supported med ia and file formats, see c>page 186 . (D Note Always fo llow the information found in c>(D in Wi-Fi hotspot on page 160. CD/DVD operation CD/ DVD and format restriction s: the functionality of individua l storage media may be limited due to the variety of blank CDs/DVDs available and the various capacities. Audio CDsor video DVDs with copy protection, CDs/DVDs that do not conform to the standard and mult isess ion CDs may have limited playback or may not play at all. Audi recommends finaliz ing the recording process whe n creat ing mult isess io n CDs. Mult isess ion is not supported for DVDs. Handling CDs/ DVDs and th e DVD drive: To en sure good, high-quality sound reproduction and to prevent damage to the dr ive or disc reading errors, always store CDs/DVDs in a protective s leeve and do not expose them to direct sunlight. Do not use: - Damaged, dirty or sc ratched CDs/DVDs Single CDs/DVDs (3 inch/8 cm diameter) CD/DVDs that are not round CDs/DVDs w ith labels Protective rings - Clean ing CDs Thermal protection switch : CD/DVD playback may be tempora rily unavailable if outside tem peratures a re extremely hot or co ld. A thermal Media protection switch is installed to protect the CD/ DVDand the laser . Laser devices: laser devices are divided into safe- and connections driving because of vibrations. Individua l pieces could then become stuck in the drive and impa ir the functionality. ty classes 1 to 4 in accordance with DIN IEC 76 (CO) 6/VD E 0837. The various types of audio equipment install ed conform to safety class 1. The laser uses so little power or is s hielded so there is no danger when it is used correctly . (D Device cover: do not remove the cover from the DVD drive device . The device does not contain any parts that the owner can repair . drives Tips Always keep the SD card in a suitable case to protect it from dirt, dust particles and other damage. The DVD drive is located behind the cover inside the center console. SD card reader The SD card readers are located behind the cover in the cen ter console. Fig. 194 DVD drive - Loading a CD/DVD: slide the CD/DVD straight Fig. 193 I nsert ing the SD card into the DVDs lot @ w ith the label fac ing up r=o fig. 194 . - Ejecting a CD/DVD : press the button (D. - Inserting the SD card : slide the SD card into the card reader s lot (D w ith t he label fac ing up (contact sur faces facing down) r=>fig. 193. The angled corner of the SD card must point toward the right front. Then push th e SD card into the s lot until it clicks into place. - Removing the SD card: press briefly on the SD card . The card is re leased. The SD card reader is started and operated page 189. through the MMI r=> A WARNING The card reader must a lways be closed while driving for safety reasons . CDNote C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 0 Only use one-piece SD cards. If adapter cards (SD cards with more than one piece) are used, the card could fa ll out of the adapter when The CD/DVD is pulled in again automatically if it is not removed from the DVDslot w ith in approximately ten seconds after ejecting it. The DVDdrive is started and operated through page 189 . the MMI r=> CDNote - Never force a CD/DVD into the drive. The CD/DVD is pulled in automatically . - Do not insert CDs/DVDs with labels into t he drive. Labels can come loose from the CD/ DVDand damage the drive. (D Tips The CD/DVD playback is not ensured with audio files that have a high data rate . :r <t 181 Media dri v e s and conn e ctions DVD changer - Ejecting all CDs: press and ho ld the button Applies to: vehicles with DVD changer The DVD changer is located in the glove compartment. CD longer . - Canceling the load ing process: press the ! LOAD I button @ again d uring the loading process. Six CDs/DVDs can be loaded into the DVDchang er. For information on the properties of support ed file fo rmats, refer to ¢ page 187 . The DVDchanger is sta rted and oper ated throug h the MMI ¢ page 189 . (1} Tips @ Fig. 195 DVD changer - Loading a CD/ DVD : press the I LOADI button @ ¢ fig. 195. The DVD change r is not ready to load if the LED in the DVD slot is red . The LEDs in the DVD slot @ blink green when the DVD changer is ready to load . Slide the CD/DVD straight into the DVD slot @ with the labe l facing up. The CD/DVD is automat ica lly loaded in the next empty position in the DVD changer . The corresponding button © lights up . - Loading mul t iple CDs/ DVDs at the same t ime : press and hold the I LOAD I button @ longer than two seconds . Wait until the green LEDs in the DVD slot @ start to blink . Slide the CDs/ DVDs one after the othe r straight into the slot @ wit h the label facing up. The CDs/DVDs are automat ica lly loaded in the nex t empty positions in the DVD changer . - Loading a CD/ DVD to a specific position : press the I LOAD I button @ . The next empty pos it ion © blinks. The occupied positions light up and do not blink . Press the button for the desired position and remove the CD/DVD if necessary . Slide the CD/DVD you would like to load straight into the DVD slot @ with the labe l facing up . - Ejecting the current CD/ DVD : press the button CDbriefly two times. The CD/DVD is pu lled back into the DVD changer automatically if it is not removed from the DVD slot w ith in 30 seconds of ejecting it . - Ejecting any CD/ DVD : press the button CD and then press a blink ing button @ . 182 - Follow the instructions fo r handling CDs/ DVDs. - Whe n playi ng MP3 f iles w ith a variable bit rate, t he re may be a disc repancy between t he play time d isplayed and real t ime. Jukebox Audio/video files from a CD/DVD-ROM, a USB storage device or an SD card can be copied to the Jukebox. ... Select the IMEDIAi button> Source con tr ol button > Jukebox. Adding fil es to the Jukebox - Select ing files / fold ers: select the Import control button > desired source > individual files or folders. Press the All contro l butto n to se lec t All files o r fo lde rs. Or : se lec t and confirm a folder and press and hold the contro l knob. - St arting the importing process: press t he Start import con t rol button . The stat us of the import process is shown in the Infotainment disp lay and in the status line with the symbo l @ ¢ page 138 , fig . 159. - Hid ing the importing process: se lect and confirm Continue importing in the background . The importing process is hidden. - Canceling the impo rt ing process: select and confirm Cancel import. Or: remov e the source that is being imported. Files already copied rema in. Ill>- Media Clearing the Jukebox Bluetooth Requirement: the Jukebox must contain audio/ video files. Applies to : vehicles with Blue t oot h int erface - Selecting fil es/ fo lders: se lect the Settings cont rol button > Delete jukebo x > individual files or folders. Press t he All control button to select all files or folders. Or : select and confirm a folder and press and hold the control knob . All files in the folder are se lected for de leting . - Deleting files and folder s: select the Start deleting control button > Yes. The status of the deleting process is shown in the Infotainment display. Jukebox playback stops during the delet ing process and starts again automatically once the deletion is complete . Showing m emory capacity Select: Setting s control button > Jukebox memory. The used/free Jukebox memory as well as the number of stored tracks appear in the Infotainment display. The Jukebox is started and operated through the MMI¢ page 189. @ Note Do not import audio/video files when the engine is t urned off because this will drain the vehicle battery. @ 0 co .... N ,..... .... N 0 0 :c dr iv e s and conn e ctions Tips - Tracks from audio CDs cannot be imported to the Jukebox for legal reasons. - Files already imported are recognized and will be grayed out when setting up a new import. - It is not possible to play audio/v ideo files in t he DVDdrive while importing them. - The Jukebox does not provide an export function due to lega l reasons . - Files or t racks without stored information are listed as Unknown. Audi recommends adding addit iona l information (such as 103 tags) to aud io files. - Reset the Jukebox to the facto ry defau lt settings when selling your vehicle¢ page 206. audio player You can play music wirelessly from your cell phone through the MMI using the Bluetooth audio player. Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary. The Bluetooth function on the portab le aud io player and the MMIAudio player must be switched on ¢ page 155. .,.Select the IMEDIAi button > Source control button > Bluetooth audio player> Find new Bluetooth audio player . The available Bluetooth audio players are displayed . .,.Select and confirm the des ired Bluetooth audio player from the list . .,.Select and confirm Audio player . The MMIgenerates a PIN for t he connection. .,.Select and confirm Yes. .,.Enter the PIN for connecting on your cell phone . Or: if the PIN is already displayed on your cell phone, confirm it in the cell phone and in the MMI.The t ime allowed for enter ing the PIN is limited to approximate ly 30 seconds. The media are started and operated through the portable device or the MMI, depending on the device being used ¢ page 189. @ Tips - Be sure to pay attention to any possible connection prompts on your Bluetooth audio player. - You only have to pair your device one time . Bluetooth devices that are already paired are automatically connected to the MMIas soon as they are in range. - Several Bluetooth audio players can be connected to the MMI, but only one portab le device can be active. - Bluetooth A2DP and AVRCP(1.0/1.3) are supported. - The supported media fu nctions depend on the Bluetooth aud io player being used. - For more informat ion on the suppo rted devices, visit www .audi.com / bluetooth or contact your authorized Audi dea ler or authorized Audi Service Facility. '<t 183 Media dri v e s and conn e ctions Wi-Fi audio player Applies to: vehicles with Wi- Fi audio player Wireless media players (such as smartphones) can be connected via Wi-Fi hotspots and controlled with the MMI. You can access the media center on your media player using an UPnP server opp or an UPnPIDLNA server integrated in the media player . Requirements: the Wi-Fi function for the media player and the MMI must be act ivated. A network connection must be established ¢ page 161 . An UPnP serve r mus t be installed on your W i-Fi med ia playe r. - Connecting th eWi-Fi audio player: select the IMEDIAi button> Source cont rol button> Wi-Fi aud io player(?)'=>page 189, fig . 198. A message will appear in the Infotai nment display saying there is no W i-Fi audio player connec t ed to the system . The access data for the Wi- Fi hotspot is disp layed . - Se lect t he same settings on the w ireless med ia player that are used for the Wi-Fi hotspot . - Starting the Wi •Fi audio player : start an UPnP server app or a llow media sharing on yo ur de vice . The first song in the med ia center on your Wi-Fi a udio player begins playing . - Operating the Wi-Fi audio player : the media player is operated through the MMI ¢ page 189. A WARNING - As the driver, do not allow usage of the WiFi hotspot to distract you from driving, as this could increase the risk of an accident. - It is only safe to use laptops and similar mobile devices when the vehicle is stat ionary because, like all loose objects, they could be th row n aro und the ins ide of the vehicle in a crash and cause se rious inj uries. Store these types of devices se cu rely whi le dr iving. - Do not use any w ireless devices on th e front seats w ithi n range of t he a irbags while d riving. Also read the warn ings in the chap t er ¢page 207 . 184 (D Note Always fo llow the information found in¢ (!) in Wi-Fi hotspot on page 160. @ Tips - Read and follow the notes about Aud i con nect before sta rting it¢ page 162. - The Wi- Fi connec t ion is reconf igure d when inserting or removin g the Audi SI M card in t he SIM card reader . There may be a tempo ra ry interr upt ion in audio playback, depending on the media player. - In ve hicles w ithout Audi connect*, the use of the Wi-Fi hotspot is on ly possible fo r the Wi-Fi audio player*. A data co nnect ion to t he Internet cannot be established . - Depending on the w ireless media player, network or media access may need to be approved on t he device or a program may need to be sta rted . - Check fo r any connection requests on your wi reless media player . - To avoid interrupt io ns during playback, deact ivate the powe r sav ing funct ion on the wi reless media player or connec t it to a charger. - The loading times for the audio data depend on the media player used and t he numbe r of files that it contains . - A max imum of 2,000 ent ries per directory are d isp layed in the Infota inment disp lay. - For more informat ion on Wi-Fi audio players and supported dev ices, visit www .audiusa.com or cont act an a ut horized Audi de a ler or author ized Audi Service Facility. Media Audi music interface drives and connections some cases, it may not be possible t o access the audio files on your cell phone. Introduction Applies to: vehicles with Audi m usic interface You can connect a portable device (such as an MP3 player) to the Audi music interface using a special adapter cable* and operate the device through the MMI. Setup Applies to : vehicles with Audi music int erface The Audi music interfa ce is located inside the center armrest. .,-.,. Fig. 19 7 Connecti ng t he po rtab le dev ice Fig. 196 Adapter cables ® iPod adapter cable* /iPod adapter cable plus* ® 3.5-mm stereo jack adapter cable* © Mini USB adapte r cable* @ Micro USB adapter cable* © USB adapter cable* ® AV adapter cable* @ Adapter cable for App le devices w ith Lightning connector* You can purchase the adapter cable from an author ized Audi or at specialty stores. (D Note - Handl e the adapter cable carefully . Do not all ow it to be pinched. - Extremely high or low temperatures that can occur inside vehicles can damage portable devices or affect their performance . Never leave a portable audio device in the vehicle in ext remely high or low temperatures . (D Tips C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 0 :r Be sure to pay attent ion to any messages on your cell phone when connect ing it w it h the USB / Mini USB/ Micro USBadapte r cable. In Requireme nt: The center armrest is fo lded open . - Connecting the adapter cable: connect the adapte r cable* @ ¢ fig. 197 to the port on the Aud i music interface (D and then connect it to the portable audio device ® (such as an iPod) . - Disconnecting the adapter cable from the Audi music interface : disconnect the connector from t he Audi music interface wh ile pressing th e release t ab @ . - Disconnecting the iPod adapter cable (plus)* from the iPod: disconnect the iPod connect or from the iPod while pressing t he release tabs @. The media are started and operated through the port able device or the MMI, depending on the device being used ¢ page 189. Q) Note Remove t he connector fro m the Aud i mu sic interface carefully so it is not damaged. @ Tips - Do not use USB extension cables or adapt ers. They may impa ir the fu nctionality . - Functionality is not guaranteed for portable devices that do not meet the USB 2.0 specification . - USB hubs are not suppo rted. <t 185 Media dri v e s and conn e ctions - Other iPod versions such as the iPod shuffle cannot be connected to the iPod adapter cable (plus)* . Connect these devices using the optional 3.5 mm stereo jack adapter cable*. - iPod/ iPhone malfunctions also affect the operation of the MMI. Reset your iPod/ iPhone if this happens. - For impo rtant information on operating your iPod/ iPhone, refer to the user guide fo r the device. Audi recommends updating the iPod/ iPhone software to the latest version. - For video playback, you can also connect your iPod using the AV adapter cable*. You also need an Apple AV cable to do this. For more information on the App le AV cable, refer to your iPod user guide . - The Apple Lightning connector does not support video playback. Supported media - For more information about the Aud i music interface and supported devices, visit www .audi.com / bluetooth or contact an authorized Audi dealer . and file formats Overview The DVD drive, the Jukebox, the SD card reader and the USB storage device* connection support the following audio/v ideo file properties: Audio files Supported media Video files SD cards: with a capacity up to 32 GB DVD drive : audio CDs (up to 80 minutes); CD-ROMs with a capacity up to 700 MB; DVD±R/RW; standard video DVDs and audio DVDs that are compatible with DVD video Audi music interface : portable devices (such as iPods, USBstorage devices*) File system SD/SDHC/ MMC memory cards USB storage device* : FAT or FAT32 file system, maximum 4 partitions DVD drive : Joliet (sing le session and multisess ion CDs; single session DVDs only); UDF Metadata Album, track, artist, year, genre and commentar ies for MP3-/ WMA-/M4A files Embedded album covers up to 800x800 px. (GIF, JPEG,PNG) Format MPEG-1/-2 Windows MPEG 2/4 Layer-3 Media Audio 8 and 9 MPEG 1/2 ISOMPEG4; DivX 3, 4 and S; Xvid ISOMPEG4 H. 264 (MPEG4 AVC) W indows Media Video 9 File extension .m p3 .mpg; .mpeg .av1 .mp4; .m4v; .mov .wmv; .asf Play lists 186 .wma; .asf .m4a; .m4b; .aac .M3U; .PLS; .WPL Media Audio files Character is· t ics dr iv e s and conn e ctions Video files up to maximum 320 kbit/s and 48 kHz sampling frequencies up to maximum 2,000 kbit/s and 720 X 576 px. at max,mum 25fps DVD dr ive: max. 5,000 files per directory and max. 1,000 files per playlist Number of Jukebox: max. 3,000 files can be imported files USB storag e device* and SD ca,rds: max. 5,000 files per directory and max .1,000 files per playlist DVD changer The DVD changer supports the fo ll owing file formats: Audio files Support ed medi a Audio CDs (up to 80 minutes); CD ROMs with a capacity up to 700 MB; DVD±R/RW; Standard video DVDs and audio DVDs that are compatible with DVD video Jol iet (single session and mrult isession CDs; single session DVDs only); UDF File system Metadata Video file s Al bum, track, artist, year, genre and commentaries for MP3-/WMA-/M4A f iles WMA tags up to 30 characters Bitra t es 32 to 320 kbits/s and variable bitrate and variable bits in samp li ng freq uencies from 8 to 48 kHz Stand ard ISO 9660 Level 1 and 2 Format MPEG-1/- Windows MPEG 2/4 2 Layer-3 Media Audio 8 and 9 ISO-MPEG4 DivX 3, 4 and 5 File extension .mp3 .asf .avi; .divx Playlists .M3U; .PLS .wma; .asf .mp4; .m4 a Characteri stics up to maxim um 320 kbit /s and 48 kHz sampling frequencies Number of up to maxim um 2,000 kbit/s and 720 x 576 px. maximum 4,000 f iles per med ium and max imum 1,000 files per directory file s 0 co .... N ,..... .... N 0 0 :c '<t 187 Media dri v e s and conn e ctions Troubleshooting Problem Solution Audi music inte rface/ Bluetooth audio player: the portab le aud io device/Bluetooth aud io player is not supported. Refer to the information on the Audi music interface ¢ page 185/ Bluetooth audio player* ¢ page 183. You can learn about supported dev ices in the Audi database for mobile devices at www .audi.com/ b luetooth . Audi music interface : When start- Adjust the volume of the portable device to approximate ly 70 pering the playback through the 3 .5 cent of the maximum output (Input level) ¢ page 190 . mm stereo jack adapter cable*/AV adapter cab le*, the volume is too high. Audi music inte rface: the portable device is not recognized as a source. For many ce ll phones or med ia players, playba ck is not possible when the battery leve l is too low (less than 5% of its capacity). The portable device will on ly be recognized as a so urce in the MMI after connecting if the battery charge is sufficient . Audi music interfac e: malfunct ions du ring audio playback through an iPod/ iPhone. The Audio player function is switched On. Switch th is function Off when yo u are not using the Bluetooth aud io player*. Audi music int erface: there is static when connecting or disconnect ing t he 3 .5 mm stereo jack*/ AV adapter cable* or when con- The Audi music interface source is already selected when connecting or disconnecting . Either mute the portable device or sw itch to a nother audio source (such as the rad io ¢ page 177) before connecting or disconnecting the po rtable devi ce. nect ing or disconnect ing the portable device to the 3 .5 mm stereo jack */AVadapter cable *. Bluetooth audio player: audio playback inte rference . Only one interface should be act ively used at a time to ensure problem-free playback . Jukebox: songs on the imported playlist are grayed out. When importing p laylists, a ll of the files themselves ported. Wi -Fi audio player*: the audio/ video playback is inter rupted. To avoid int erruptions d ur ing aud io/video playback, deactivate the power saving function o n the Wi-Fi med ia player* or connec t it to a charger. Wi-Fi hotspot *: your Wi-Fi device is d isconnected from the W i-Fi hotspot . Make sure the network optim izat io n functions are sw itched off in the Wi-Fi settings or in the network settings for your W i-Fi dev ice. For add it ional info rmation refer to the user guide for your Wi-Fi dev ice. 188 must be im- Playing Playing media Accessing media You can start and operat e various media drives through the fv1fv1Icontrol panel. media (D Jukebox ¢ page 182 @ SD card reader ¢page 181 @ DVDdrive c!:> page 181 © ® DVDchanger* c!:> page 182 Audi music interface* (for example, an iPod, USB or an external audio/video input*) c!:> page 185 ® Bluetooth audio player* c!:> page 183 (!) Wi-Fi audio player* ¢ (!) Fig. 198 Possible aud io/video sources Fig. 199 Possible aud io/v ideo sources Requirement: a media drive must contain audio/ video files. ~ Select : IM EDIAi button . page 184 Tips - For safety reasons, the video image is only displayed when the vehicle is stationa ry. Only the sound from the video plays while driving. - Video playback through an iPod/iPhone does not continue after stopping and starting the vehicle . - You can scroll through long lists of folders or tracks quickly by turning the control knob quickly . The scrolling speed depends on the number of folders or tracks. - When synchronizing a portable device with "Cloud" services, playlists may display incorrectly in the MMI. Use the media center in the device. - Some DVDs do not allow selections to be made during playback, for example selecting an audio track , subtitles or a track or chapter. The source overview or the last file that was playing is displayed after selecting Media. C) ~ ~ ...... 0 ~ - Selecting a source: press the Source control button . Select and confirm a source from the list . - Playing audio/video files : select and confirm a folder, song or chapte r. The content of the folder is displayed or a track or chapter is played . - Moving one level up in the folder structure : press the IBACK Ibutton. Or: select and confirm Folder up. - Moving to the highest level in the folder structure: press the IMEDIAi button . Possible sources are: <t 189 Playing Media media functions ho ld the arrow keys on the MMI control panel (l<l<lI t>t>I). @ Pause The mute symbo l @ c::> page 138, fig. 159 appears in t he status line in t he Infota inment display . To res ume playb ack, se lect and co nfirm II (pause) again. Or: press the On/Off knob briefly. @ Track info Stored info rmation (such as art ist, alb um, t rack or genre) is displayed w ith t he current t rack . Fig. 2 0 0 Jukebox main funct ions @ DVD main menu Requirement: A video DVDmust be play ing and the ve hicle m ust be stopped . Se lect and confirm a menu item. Or: use the DVD main menu with the MMI touch control panel*. 0 Full screen Requirement: a video m ust be playing while the vehicle is stat iona ry. Fig. 2 0 1 DVD mai n f unct ions ,..Se lect: the IMEDIAi bu tt on> Functions contro l button. The fo llow ing funct ions can be selected in t he d isp lay, depending on wh ich so urce is se lected: (D Album browser All available album covers are displayed. Select and confi rm an album cover from the overv iew. Or: select a nd confirm the Album browser in t he upper level of t he Jukebox. The fi rst t rack in the selec t ed album is played. @ Previous/ next track or chapter The prev ious I~ or next ...,, track or chapter plays. If you select I~ and confirm within the first ten seconds of playback, the prev ious t rack will play. If you press it after app roximate ly ten seconds, the cur ren t track w ill begin playi ng aga in from the beginning. Or: press t he arrow keys on t he MMI control panel (l<J<J / t>t>I). @ Fast forward / rewind Press and hold t he contro l knob to rew ind ~ o r fast forward .,...,..an audio/video file. Or: p ress and 190 The video image enla rges t o fill the e nt ire Info ta inme nt display. Press t he IBACKI but to n or any contro l but ton to sw itch t he full screen d isp lay off. @ Information window Various informa t ion about the current t rack (s uch as the embed ded a lbum cove r*), t he playing t ime and remaini ng playing time may be displayed, depe nding on ava ilability . (D Tips Fo r o ptim um use of t he album brow ser, only impor t audio/v ideo files w it h embedde d al bu m covers up to 8OOx8OO px into the Juke box. Other settings Requireme nt: a source m ust be selecte d. ,..Sele ct: the IM EDIAi button> Settings cont rol bu tt on. The following sett ings can be selected, depend· ing on the act ive source and the storage med ium: .,.. Play ing media Sound settings Picture format For additional info rmation, see ¢ page 204. Requirement: Repeat options Picture format: the picture format can be adjusted automat ica lly with Auto . The picture w idth varies depending on the film format. The formats 4:3 , 5:4 and 16:9 can also be selected. When the function is switched on~' track or folder repeats. the current Random playback also depends on the repeat options settings . Shuffle Requirement: an audio/video file must be playing and repeat options must be set ¢ page 191. - Repeat options Off: all of the files in the active source play in random order. This function is only avai lable for the Jukebox and the CD changer *. - Folder repeat option: the tracks in the current folder are played in random order. - Track repeat option : the song currently being played will be repeated. Track display Requirement: an audio file must be playing. - File name: the name of the file is displayed without the file extension . - Track name : the name of the current track or the track that was just played is displayed . Display track info Requirement: an audio file must be playing. Various info rmati on for t he current track (such as album, artist, song) is disp layed depending on avai lability . Audio track Requirement: A DVD must be playing . The audio track (language and audio format) can be adjusted manually . The language and aud io format depend on the video DVD. Subtitles Requirement: 0 !:! ~ N ...... 0 0 :c A DVD must be play ing. Subtitles can be selected manually fo r playback. The languages available depend on the DVD. A video file/DVD must be playing . Zoom : the image is e nlar ged to fill the entire Infotainment display. Original : the film is shown in the stored picture format . Cinemascope: the image is displayed in the 2.35:1 format. Screen settings Requirement: a portable audio device must be connected using the iPod adapter cable plus */AV adapter cab le* ¢ page 185. Select IMEDIA i button> Source control button> Audi music interface (for examp le iPod) > Settings control button. - Brightness: reduce or increase the brightness . - Contrast: reduce or increase the cont rast . - Color: reduce or increase the color intensity . - Tint: adjusting the co lor tones (with AV standard NTSC) . - AV standard : you can select the PAL or NTSC standards on the MMI for an externally connected audio device . The same standard must be selected on the device . Input level Requirement: a portable audio device must be connected with a 3.5 mm stereo jack adapter cable*/AV adapter cable*/iPod adapter cable (plus)* ¢ page 185 . The volume of the portable device is adapted to the MMI. Audi recommends adjusting the volume of the portable device to 70 percent of the maximum output . Wi-Fi active See ¢ page 160. Wi-Fi settings See ¢ page 160. '<t 191 P l aying med ia Parent a l control Requirement: a video DVDmust be p laying and the password must be entered (the password set at the factory is "1234 "). Playback of video DVDs can be rest rict ed us ing pa rental control. Select and confirm the content rating (such as Level 5) . Eight diffe rent Content rating s can be set fo r parenta l control. For example, if you select Level S* for the parental contro l level, all DVDs from level 1-5 can be played. Video DVDs with a higher level will not play. All restr ictions are canceled when the function is sw itched Off . You can change the current password using the Change password function. (D Tips - Not all video DVDs have parental control. - The Repeat option s and Random playback functions switch off automatically when the source changes in the Media menu. - Password entry will be locked for approximately one m inute if you enter the incorrect password three times in a row. Only your authorized Audi dea ler can reset the parental contro l password . - The Track displ ay function is not available for the Jukebox or a connected iPod <=:> page 191. - The DVDdrive only supports the DTS (Digital Theater Systems) audio format. 192 Rear Seat Rear Seat Entertainment RSE components overview Appl ies to : vehicles with Rear Seat Ente rtainment The Rear Seat Entertainment, abbreviated RSE, combines different entertainment systems . The RSE control panel is located in the rear center console . A - WARNING (D Tips Entertainment - Driving requires your complete and undivided attention. As the drive r, you have com plete responsib ility for safety in traff ic. Only use the Rear Seat Entertainment system when t raff ic conditions permit and always in a way tha t a llows you to maintain comp lete control over your vehicle . For examp le, do not reach behind you when driving to operate the Rear Seat Entertainment system . -Adj ust the volume of the audio system so that signals from outside the vehicle, suc h as police and fire sirens, can be heard easi ly at all times. Note that this chapte r on ly describes RSE components . For deta iled information about operating indiv idual RSE funct ions, refer to the descriptions in the corresponding chapter (for example the Radio functions ¢ page 177). Switching and off the RSE on Applies to : vehicles wit h Rear Seat Enterta inme nt Fig. 202 RSE compo nents Operating the RSE corresponds to the operational concept for the MMI control pan el. You use the RSE control unit for both RSE displays. The RSE components are located centra lly in the rear of t he vehicle 9 fig. 202 . You can also access the MMI DVD changer* . CDDVDchanger* C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 @ Left/right RSE d isp lay ® © ® Audi music interface RSE control unit RSE media drives The standard RSE sys t em is equipped with two d isp lays, t wo sets of wire less headphones, a DVD drive, two SD card readers as well as an Audi mu sic interface that can be used to connect portable audio/video devices . The RSE also has a Jukebox (20 GB memory capacity) available. Fig. 203 RSE cont rol un it .,. Swit ching the RSE on : press the left/right On/ Off knob CD ¢ fig . 203 briefly . Or : press one of the buttons to open a menu direct ly @ . "" Swit ching the RSE off : press and hold the left/ righ t On/Off knob until the RSE turns off. 0 :r <t 193 IJ,, Re ar Seat Ente r tainm e nt The last selected menu is disp layed when it is switched on. When the ignit ion is swit ched off, a message ind icating that the RSE is in standby mode appears in the left or right RSE display. The RSE switches off automatically if you do not press the left or right On/Off knob while the system is in standby mode. (D - If you cannot sw itch the RSE on again, check the parenta l control settings in the MMI r=:> page 196. Adjusting the volume Applies to: vehicles with Rear Seat Entertainment Tips - The RSE switches off automatica lly if the engine is not running and the vehicle battery is low. .,.Increasing or decreasing the volume: turn the On/Off knob to the right or left . .,.Muting : press the On/Off knob brief ly. .,.Unmuting: press the On/Off knob briefly or turn the On/Off knob to the right . (D Tips Volume that is too high or too low is automatically adjusted to a preset level when the RSE is sw itched on. Symbols Applies to: vehicles with Rear Seat Entertainment Fig. 204 RSE display symbo ls Symbol/ Description [t] © @ Headphones ® Speaker @ Importing process ® ® Time Parental contro l (J) L/R (D Explanation Active med ia source Aud io outp ut t hroug h headphones that a re wireless or connected by a cable Aud io output throug h the vehicle's aud io system Import ing a udio/v ideo fi les to the Jukebox Set time Parental control is switched on r=:> page 196 Display for RSE when RSE cont rol panel is act ive Tips A headphone or speaker symbol that is crossed out @ / @ r=;,fig. 204 indicates that the active aud io/video sou rce is m ut ed. 194 r=:> page 182 Rear Seat Audio output Adjusting Applies to: vehicles with Rear Seat Entertainment Fig. 20 5 Adjustin g the aud io outp ut • Select : the ¢ fig . 205. IM E NU ! button > Audi o outp ut @ The Audio outp ut for the vehicle sound syst em can be switched on for either the left or right RSE display . The Audio output for the other RSE display then plays through the wire less or wired headphones . The active aud io source is indicated by a corre spond ing symbol in the display @ / @ ¢ page 194, fig . 204 . - Switching off Aud io output in the rear : press t he I RADIO I/IM EDIA I button on the MMI control panel. Or: deactivate the Audio output function ¢ page 196 . If you change the stat ion or track on the MMI control panel, the aud io outp ut in the rear will also be switched off . the Entertainment sound Applies to: vehicles with Rear Seat Entertainment Fig. 206 Sound set t ings (headphones connected by cabl e) • Sele ct: the IMENU Ibut t on > Tone . Different sound sett ings can be adj usted depending on the selected Audio output source (headphones o r vehicle sound system) . DSP [BOSE] * / DSP [Bang & Olufsen]* See¢ page 204 . Bass I Treble / Balance/ Fader (sound focus) 1> You can adjust the Bass, Treble and Balance/ Fader settings by t urn ing the control knob. The Bass and Treble sett ings on ly app ly to the respective active aud io so urce . This allows you to adjust the sou nd settings for each audio source sepa rately . @ Tips Sound sett ings cannot be adjusted for wireless headphones that are connected to the system. C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 0 :r <t 1l The sound sett i ngs can only be adjusted for audio outp ut thro ugh t he vehicle sound syste m. 195 Rear Seat Entertainment Restarting (reset) the RSE Parental control Applies to: vehicles with Rear Seat Entertainment App lies to: vehicles with Rear Seat Ente rtainment Selected RSE functions can be restricted or deactivated in the MMI. ...Select: IMEN u I f unction button > Setup MMI control button > Rear Seat Entertainment. System When the function is switched On, the RSE is enabled for use. When the function is switched Off , the RSE is switched off and the RSE control panel is locked. Fig. 207 Button combination to restart the system Vehicle speakers ... Press and hold the control knob (D, the upper right control button @ and the righ t! MENUI button ® c:::>fig. 207 at the same time for a brief moment and then release the buttons . Audio output through the vehicle speakers in the rear can be se t to Vehicle speakers or Headphones only. Operation @ Tips The MMI and RSE use some components at the same time. Because of this, Audi recommends restarting both systems. Display settings Applies to: vehicles with Rear Seat Enterta inment ...Se lect: I MENU I button > Display control button. Turning off the display The display switches off. You can set whether all of the RSE functions (All) or the Volume only can be adjusted through the RSE. Navigation destinations* You can Apply the navigation destination automatically for active route guidance in the MMI or Confirm the navigation dest ination before transferring to the MMI. Other settings Applies to: vehicles with Rear Seat Enterta inment The active aud io/video source does not pause when yo u switch the RSE display off . You can still change the stat ion or track for the se lected audio/video source us ing the arrow buttons. .,.Select: the IMENU Ibutton> Setup RSE control button. Switching display on You can reset the following functions to the factory default sett ings: Factory default settings Press any button on the MMI control panel. - Sound settings Display brightness - Radio You can adjust the display brightness by turning the control knob . - Media settings -Jukebox - Navigation settings* You can select the desired functions individually or all at once with the option Select all entries. Select and confirm Yes. 196 .,,. Rear Seat Entertainment If you reset the Jukebox to factory sett ings, all of the music/video files are deleted and the Media setting s are reset . Resetting t he func ti ons to the fac t ory defau lt settings does not affect the MMI. System update The RSE software can be updated by DVD, USB or SD ca rd using the system update feature. Fig. 20 9 Labeling th e wireless head ph ones Contact an author ized Audi dealer or author ized Audi Service Facility for additional information about the System updat e. Data encryption You can protect the list of destinations with a personal password. If the unit is replaced, you can only transfer your pe rsonal data to the new RSE un it using your passwo rd . If you do not assign a personal passwo rd, "MMI3G" is stored in the RSE automatically as t he password. Version inform ation Information on the software version of the RSE and the navigat ion database is displayed . Headphones Wireless headphones Applies to: vehicles with Rear Seat Ente rtainment The wireless headphones mus t be paired with the RSE one time and labeled. Fig. 208 Switching wireless he adphones on/ off Pairing wir eless headphones Requirement: the protective film on the batte ry compartment must be removed ~ page 198, fig. 210 and the wireless headphones mus t be swit ched off . - Preparing the headphones fo r the pairing process: press and hold the On/Off button © @ ¢ fig . 208 on t he right earp iece (R) for at leas t 5 seconds until the LED @ sta rts b linking and then blinks quickly. - Pairing th e headphones: select the ! M E NUI button > Set up RSE > Headphones> Find wireless headphones > OK > desired headphones from the list Repeat t his procedure on the second set of wireless headphones . You can determine the connection status of the wireless headphones based on the rate at which the light is blinking : Blinking speed Connection statu s Blinking qu ickly The wireless headphones are ready for the pai ring process (they can be pai red) Blinking Estab lishing a connection with the RSE (when the w ireless headphones a re switched on) Blinking slow - The connection to the RSE has Ly been established (the wireless headphones are already pa ired) C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 0 :r <t 197 Rear Seat Entertainment Labeling the wireless headphones - Attach the supplied label CD or @ c::> fig. 209 on the inside of the left/right wire less headphones. Labeling the w ireless headphones: CDWireless headphones label (paired with the left RSE display) @ Wireless headphones labe l (paired with the right RSE display) Switching wireless headphones on/off - Switching on: to switch the wire less headphones on, press the On/Off button <!) 9 fig. 208 on the right earp iece (R) for approximately 3 secondsand release it once the LED @ starts blinking . The light @ will blink s lowly once the connection to the wireless headphones has been established. CD - Switching off : to switch the wireless headphones off, press and hold the On/Off button<!) CDuntil the LED@ turns off. The wireless headphones switch off automatically about five minutes after the RSE switches off. @ Tips - If the wire less headphones were already paired, the connection to the headphones will be reestablished after switch ing the RSE on if the headphones are sw itched on. - The RSE only supports wireless headphones from your authorized Audi dealer. - Audio/video output through the wire less headphones stops during the pa iring process. - The pairing process must be done separately for the left and right w ireless headphones. The wireless headphones are assigned to the left or right RSE display depend ing on the side of the RSE control unit where you started the pairing process . The pairing between the w ireless headphones and th e left /r ight RSE display is ide ntifi ed with a label. - Volume that is too high or too low is automatically adjusted to a preset leve l when the wireless headphones are connected. Charging and changing the battery Applies to : vehicles with Rear Seat Entertainment Disconnect wireless headphones If the light on the wireless headphones turns red , the batteries are low and need to be charged or replaced . You can delete the pairing between the wireless headphones and t he RSE if you need to switch out the headphones o r change the pairing . - Select: IM ENU Ibutton> Setup RSE control button > Headphones > Delete wireless headphones. A WARNING - For safety reasons, as t he driver, only use the headphones when the vehicle is stationary to reduce the risk of a crash . - When driving, store the headphones securely so that they do not move a round in the vehicle interior when braking or in a crash. - Maintain a moderate volume leve l when listening to audio playback through the headphones. Cont inuous exposure to extreme volume levels may result in loss of he aring. 198 - Fig. 210 Connec t ion for the charg ing cable/battery com- partm ent - Charging the battery : connect the charging cac::> fig . 210 on the botble to the connection tom side of the left earpiece (L). Then connect the charging ca ble to the cigarette lighter */12 Volt socket* in the rear ce nter console. Or: charge the battery for the wireless headphones .,. CD R e ar S ea t Ent e rtainm with the mini USB adapter cable through the Audi music interface ¢ page 185. - Changing th e batt eries: turn the cover @ ¢ fig. 210 on the left earpiece (L) to the left/ right and change the batteries as labeled in the battery compartment. Then attach the cover back on to the left earpiece (L). You can identify the charge status of the battery ¢ table on page 199 based on the blinking speed of the LED in the charging cable connection © ¢ fig. 210 . Blinking frequency Charge status Blinking The batteries are charging. Remains on The batteries are charged. Blinking quickly An error occurred while charging . ..&,WARNING - Do not use damaged rechargeable batteries. Th is increases the risk of an explos ion. - The headphones can become warm when the batteries a re charg ing and increase the risk of injury. - Do not cha rge standard batteries with the charg ing cable. This increases the risk of an exp losion . - Be careful when using the cigarette lighter. Inattentive or unsupervised use of the cigaret t e lighter can cause burns. - The cigarette lighter/sockets and any electrical accessories connected to them function only when the ignition is switched on . Using the cigarette lighter/sockets or electrical accessories incorrectly can lead to serious injur ies or cause a fire. To reduce the risk of injuries, never leave children unattended in the vehicle with the vehicle key. (D 0 co .... N ,..... .... N 0 0 :c Note - Do not charge the batteries in the wireless headphones when the engine is not running. This w ill dra in the vehicle battery. e nt mum capacity of 550 mAh in AAAsize that are suitable for quick charging. ~ For the sake of the environment Batter ies contain polluting substances. They must be disposed of using methods that wi ll not harm the environment. Do not dispose of them in househo ld trash . (D Tips The charging time for the included rechargea ble batteries is approximate ly three to four hours and may increase by approximately 25 percent if the batteries are in use while charging . Headphones connected by cable Applies to: vehicles wit h Rear Seat Enterta inm ent The headphone connections ore located on the RS£ control uni t. Fig. 211 Conn ecting w ired headphones "'I nsert t he headphone connecto r into the left or right jack © ¢ fig. 211 on the RSE control panel. The unit is equ ipped w ith 3.5 mm stereo jacks . The w ireless headphones sw itch off automatically about five minutes after the cable headphones are connected . (D Tips Volume that is too high or too low is automatically adj usted to a preset level when the wired headphones are connected . - For wireless headphones, only use batteries that are approved for that type of device, for example NiMH batteries with a min i- '<t 199 Rear Seat Entertainment @ iPod Media drives/ connections Overview Applies to: vehicles with Rear Seat Ent ertainment The RSE media drives are Located above the pass-through behind a blind. Slide the blind upward to open the RSE media drives . The RSE media dr ives a nd the Audi mus ic interface a re sta rt ed and oper ated t hrough the RSE. The desig n and properties of t he RSE media drives are the same as the MMI d rives. You can find detailed information on c>page 180. {!) Tips - The DVD changer * is loca t ed in t he ve hicle glove compartment . For more information on the DVD changer *, refer to c>page 181. - You can only access t he DVD changer * in t he MMI t hrough the RSE. The other MMI med ia dr ives a re not avai lab le from the rear of the vehicle. C Fig. 2 12 RSEmedia drives Navigation Opening navigation Applies to: vehicles wit h Rear Seat Entertai nment and navigation system Fig. 213 Audi music interface RSE media drive overview c>fig. 212 : @ Eject button .. Select: the IMENU Ibutton > Navigat ion . @ DVD slot © SD card reader The RSE Audi music interface c>fig. 213 is located in the storage compartment under the center armrest ® c>page 193 , fig. 202. You can con nect a portable audio dev ice (such as an iPod or USB storage dev ice) t o the Audi music interface using a special adapter cable*. CDInterface on Audi music interface @ Jack for connecting to t he Audi music int e rface ® Adapter cable* (such as iPod adapter cab le*) @ iPod jack on the iPod adap t er cable* 200 Fig. 214 Navigat ion main funct ions (RSE) After selecting Navigation, the last men u that was open is disp layed. - Displaying navigation fun ction s: press t he Route guidance control button. The following func t ions a re availab le for plann ing a desti nation: CDEnte r po int of interest @ Loa d las t destin ation ® Enter a destination using an address @) Open t he map/use a destination from the map Rear ® Searching for a destination online l) The rout e is calculated based on various route criteria. To set the criteria, you must first plan a destination and th en display the route in the RSE display using the Display route function. When you transfer a planned destination to the MMI using the Send destination to the driver func tion, the criteria are transferred automat ically. A planned destination is shown in the RSEdisplay in white and active route guidance is marked in blue. Displaying a route Accessing traffic information Applies to: vehicles with Rear Seat Entertainment and naviga· tion system .. Select: the IMENU Ibutton > Info. - Opening a detailed view of traffic information : select and confirm the traffic information from the list. - Opening the next traffic report : select and confirm Show next report . To display active route guidance on the map, select the Destination control button > Exit route Accessing Audi connect services To start route guidance for a planned route, the destination must be transferred to the MMI. If the Destinations are set to Confirm in the Setup MMI menu q page 196, the destination must be confirmed before transferring to the MMI. (i) .... weather information, must be confirmed in the MMI. (D Send destination to the driver co Entertainment The planned destination and the distance to the destination/arrival time are displayed on the map. The route is calculated based on the current vehicle location and can be updated. display. 0 Seat Tips - The display of navigation functions is synchronized to both RSEdisplays. - Refer to the notes in the chapter About Audi connect q page 162. - The content, scope and providers of offered Audi connect services may vary. - The navigation functions match those in the MMI to a large extent. For more information, refer to q page 165. - The functions for the online Street View 9page 159 can also be used in the RSE while driving. - If On request is selected for the data connection in the Data connection menu qpage 161, receiving data packets, such as N ,..... Tips For more information on accessing traffic in· formation, refer to 9 page 175. Applies to: vehicles with Rear Seat Entertainment, navigation system and Audi connect Requirement: the requirements for Audi connect services must be met 9page 157. .. Select: the IMENU Ibutton > Audi connect > the desired Audi connect service . - For example, display weather information : select and confirm Weather. Select and confirm the desired search area: In immediate vicinity/ In vicinity of destination or stopover or In new city. Enter a location and confirm the input with OK. (D Tips - Refer to the notes in the chapter About Audi connect q page 162. - Additional information about accessing Audi connect services can be found under 9page 157. Entertainment systems Listening to the radio Applies to: vehicles with Rear Seat Enterta inment .. Select: the IRADIO Ibutton. .... N 0 0 :c '<t l ) Applies to vehicles with Audi connect 201 Rear Seat Entertainment The radio functions match those in the MMI. For more information on the Radio menu, refer to c::> page 177. You can store a separate presets list in the RSE that may contain up to SO stations from all fre quency bands. You can a lso display the station name for the selected radio stat ion or change the station sorting separately in both RSE disp lays. Playing media App lies to: vehicles with Rea r Seat Ente rtainment .,. Select : IMEDIAi button . The media functions match those in the MMI to a large extent. For more information on the Media menu, refer to c::> page 189. Possible sources are: (D Ju kebox @ SD card reader ® DVD dr ive @ DVD changer* ® Aud i music interface (such as iPod, USB or external audio/video input) Different functions are available depending on the active source and the medium inserted. (D Tips - The Album browser function is not available in the RSE. - The copy and delete process cannot be started simultaneous ly when accessing the Jukebox from both systems at the same time. Video playback information Playback combinations App lies t o: vehicles with Rea r Seat Ente rtainment When se lecting the same video source, both sound and picture w ill play through both RSE displays. 202 If different video sou rces are started on both RSE displays, only certain picture/sound playback combinations are poss ible and they depend on the selected video sources. Complete output format (sound and video image) on both RSE displays Se lect a video DVDas the first video source in the DVD drive and then the following source: - DVD changer* - Aud i music interface with AV adapter cable*/ iPod adapter cab le plus* Playing only sound on the second RSE display There is only sound output fo r the second video source if you: - Start a video DVD in the DVDdrive as the first source and sele ct a video file from the Jukebox or the SD card as the second source . - Sta rt a video fi le from the Ju ke box as the first source, and select a video file from the SD card or from the Aud i music interface using an AV adapter cable*/USBadap ter cable"/iPod adapt er cable plus * as the second sou rce and viceversa . - Start a video DVD/video file in the DVD chang er * as the first source, and select a video file from the Jukebox, SD card or from the Audi music interface using an AV adapter cable*/USB adapter cable*/iPod adapter cable plus* as the second source. No picture/sound playback on the second RSE display If a video file from the Jukebox, from an SD card or from the Audi music interface w ith the USB adapter cable* is already play ing o n one RSE display, playback of a video DVD in the DVD dr ive on the other RSE display is not possible. Rear Seat Entertainment Troubleshooting Applies to: vehicles with Rear Seat Ente rtainment Problem Solution RSE control panel : the RSE will Check the parenta l control settings ¢ page 196 in the MMI. not turn on. Wirele ss headphone s: the connec- t ion st atu s for the w ireless headphones is inco rrec t ¢ table on page 197 . Wirele ss headphone s: t he left/ right w ire less headp hone s were swit ched. Wirele ss headphones : no func- Switch the wireless he adphones off and ba ck on . When sw itching them on, make sure to press and ho ld t he On/Off bu tt on <!>(D ¢ page 197, fig . 2 08 on the right earpiece (R) for approximate ly 3 seconds and then re lease the button as soon as the light @ beg ins blinking ¢ page 197, fig. 208. You can dete rm ine t he pa iring between t he wire less headphones a nd the left/ right RSE disp lay using the lab el on the ins ide of the left/right w ireless headpho nes ¢ page 197, fig. 209. Make sure you are only connecting the wireless headphones that a re allocat ed to that RSE display. ti on. Chec k if the wire less headphones were paired initia lly to the RSE ¢ page 197. Or: t he batteries must be cha rge d or repla ced¢ page 198. Wi reless headphones : a connec- Switch the wireless headphones off and back on. t io n could not be made. 0 co .... N ,..... .... N 0 0 :c '<t 203 System settings System settings Setting date the time Time format and You can set the clock time manually or using the CPS. If you select 24h , the clock will display, for examp le, 13:00. If you select AM/PM , the clock will display, for example, 1:00 PM. Date format If you select DD.MM , the date will display, fo r example, 31.12 . If you sele ct MM/DD , the date will display, for example, 12/31. Adjusting the sound The sound distribution and volume of the MMI can be adjusted individually. The settings depend on vehicle equipment . Fig. 215 Sett ing a time zone .,.Select : the IMENU I button > the upper left Time control button (D <=> fig . 215. Time source GPS 'ti:the Time and Date are set by GPS based on the Time zone that was se lected manually. Always remember to set the new Time zone in the MMI when the vehicle enters a different t ime zone. Fig. 216 Sound settings Manual : you can set the Time and Date manually using the respective function . Press the control knob. Set the Time or the Date manually by turning and pressing the control knob. Automatic daylight saving time* When daylight sav ing time is sw itched On, the time is moved forward or back automatically by one hour when daylight sav ing time begins or ends. Man. daylight sav. time When this function is switched On, an hour is added to the set Time. Time zone When selecting t he appropriate time zone, a sampling of countr ies in this zone will be list ed . 204 Fig. 217 Adjusti ng the balance/fader .,.Select: !T ONEI button. (D GALA*/ DSP* / DSP [BOSE]*/ DSP [Bang & Olufsen]* - GALA (Speed-dependent volume increase)*: select and confirm Active/ Inactive for the adjustment of playback volume t o the level of noise inside the vehicle. - Sound focus (adjusting the sound distribution) *: select and confirm All (symmetrical System sound di str ibut ion)/ Driver (sound dist ribution aimed toward th e driver) or All/ Front/ Rear. - Sound focus* (adjusting the sound distribution ): select and conf ir m All (symmet rical sou nd distribution)/ Movie (optima l sound dist ribution fo r playing a movie)/ Front/ Rear. MMI touch volume *: t he volum e of the MM I touch prompts can be adjust ed by t urning th e cont rol knob. - Volume balancing*: the dynam ic road noise compensation can be adju sted by t urning the contro l knob . Other I @ Bass/ ® Balance/Fader © Treble Adjusting volume the system Voice guidance volume/ Entertainment volume : volume of navigation prompts du ring act ive route gui dance. Music vol ume dur ing navigation promp t s means t hat the vol ume of audio playback is t em porar ily lowered w hen t he park ing syst em or voice guidance is act ive. Voice guidance: refer to 0 0 :c settings .,.Select: t he I M ENU I but t on > Setup MMI contr ol butt on. Language The language can be changed fo r the Info tain me nt display, t he driver info rmation syst em display, voice guida nce* and t he voice recogn ition system* . Measurement units The following measurement units can be set in t he Infotainment display and driver info rmat ion system. - Speed (mph or km/ h) - Distance (miles or kil omete rs) Navigation* control button ...... Systems control button (sound focus) .,.Select : th e IMENU Jbutto n > Tone. N tu rnin g the cont rol knob. The Call volume can only be adj usted during a cal l. English, French and Spanish are available. - Adjusting the sound distribution using the MMI touch : move you r finger on the MMI touch contro l panel in the desir ed di rect ion. N ,..._ Ring tone volume / Call volume : you can adjust t he select ed ring tone vol ume or cal l volume by Voice recognition volume. : you can adjust the volume of t he announcemen t s by tu rning th e contro l kno b. You can adj ust the Subwoofer *, Bass and Treble settings by turning the cont rol knob. The changed settings only apply fo r the aud io source that is active at the t ime . This allows you to adjust t he sound sett ings for each aud io source separat ely . !:! Telephone* control button - Surround level* : you can adjust t he volu me of t he sur round effect by tu rning the contro l kno b. - AudioPilot (dynamic road noise compensation)* : select and confirm Active/ Inactive. When the f unct ion is act ive, the volu me is auto matically adju sted depending on t he level of noise inside the vehicle. @ Subwoofer* 0 settings q p ag e 174 . Voice guidance on during call: see c>page 174 . - Temperature (°Fo r 0 ( ) - Fuel consumption (L/100k m, mpg (US), m pg (UK) or km/l) - Volume (l ite rs, gall ons (UK) or gallons (US)) Voice recognition Applies to : vehicles wit h voice recog nit ion system Command display: the di splay of possible commands during voice input can be switched On or Off . Short dialogue : prompts in a shorte r fo rmat can be switched On or Off . Input signal: t he beep inp ut sig nal during a dia.,. log can be switched On or Off. '<t 205 System settings Voice recognition volume : you can adjust the vol ume of the announcements by t ur ning the control knob. Individual speech training (only when th e vehicle is st at ionary): you can adapt the voice recognition system to your voice or pro nunciat ion in order to im prove the system's ability to recognize your speech. Individua l train ing is comprised of 40 speech entries that consist of commands and sequences of numbers . You can delete t he program med voice tra ining using Reset speech training . For more info rmation about the System update , visit www .audiusa.com/bluetooth or contact an aut horized Aud i dealer or authorized Aud i Service Facility. Data encryption You can prote ct your personal dat a, such as contac t s in the dire ctory, destina t ions in navigation* and name tags with a persona l password. If the unit is rep laced, you can on ly t ransfe r your personal data to t he new MMI unit using your password . The default password " MMI3G" is valid unti l you assign a perso nal password. Delete all name tags : all of the name tags that you have stored (spoke n names) are deleted . Version information Display brightness Info rmation on the software version of the MM I and t he navigation database * is displayed. You can adjust the Infotainment display br ight ness by t urning the contro l knob . Factory settings You can reset t he f ollowi ng func t ion s to t he fact ory defa ult settin gs: - Sound settings - Radio - Media settings - Jukebox - Directory* - Telephone* - Bluetooth * - Navigation settings* - Navigation and online memory * - Voice recognition system You can select the desired functions individua lly or all at once with the Select all entries option. Select and confirm Restore factory default settings . If you reset the Jukebox to facto ry setti ngs, all of the music/video files are deleted and the Media settings are reset. System update The MMI softwa re, such as t he navigation dat a*, can be updated by DVD, USB or SD card using t he system update feature . 206 Driving Driving safety The following is a list of just a few of the safety features in your Audi: Basics Safe driving habits Please remember - safety first! This chapter contains important information, tips, instructions and warnings that you need to read and observe for your own safety, the safety of your passengers and others . We have summarized here what you need to know about safety belts, airbags, child restraints as well as child safety. Your safety is for us priority number 1. Always observe the information and warnings in this section - for your own safety as well as that of your passengers. The information in this section app lies to all model versions of your vehicle. Some of the features descr ibed in this sections may be standard equipment on some models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized Audi dealer. A - The safety features are part of the occupant restraint system and work together to help reduce the risk of injury in a wide variety of accident situations. ~ 0 ~ - head restraints for each seating position, - adjustable steering column. These individual safety features, can work together as a system to help protect you and your passengers in a w ide range of acc idents . These features cannot work as a system if they are not always correctly adjusted and correctly used. WARNING Safety equipment ~ ,..._ - sophisticated safety belts for dr iver and all passenger seat ing pos itions, - safety belt pretensioners, - safety belt force limiters for the front seats, - safety belt height adjustment systems for the front seats, - front airbags, - knee airbags for the front seats - side airbags in the front seats and outer rear seats, - side curtain airbags, - special LATCHanchorages for child restraints, Safety is everybody's responsibility! - Always make sure that you follow the instructions and heed the WARNINGS in this Manual. It is in your interest and in the interest of your passengers . - Always keep the complete Owner's Literature in your Audi when you lend or sell your vehicle so that this important information will always be available to the driver and passengers. - Always keep the Owner's literature handy so that you can find it easily if you have questions. ~ safety Your safety and the safety of your passengers should not be left to chance. Advances in technology have made a var iety of features available to help reduce the risk of injury in an accident. Important things to do before driving Safety is everybody 's job! Vehicle and occupant safety always depends on the informed and careful driver. For your safety and the safety of your passengers, before driving always: .,. Make sure that all lights and signals are operating correctly . .,. Make sure that the tire pressure is correct. .,. Make sure that all windows are clean and afford good visibility to the outside . .,. Secure all luggage and other items carefully c:c.> page 65, c:c.> page 63 . .,. Make sure that nothing can interfere with the pedals. .,.Adjust front seat, head restraint and mirrors correctly for your height. .,. Instruct passengers to adjust the head restraints according to their height. .,. Make sure to use the right child restraint correctly to protect children ¢ page 248, Child safety. ..,. '<t 207 Driving safety • Sit properly in your seat and make sure that your passengers do the same c:>page 54, Seats and storage. • Fasten your safety belt and wear it properly . Also instruct your passengers to fasten their safety belts properly c:>page 218 . Correct seating passenger positions Proper seating position for the driver The proper driver seating position is important for safe, relaxed driving. What impairs driving safety? Safe driving is directly related to the condition of the vehicle, the driver as well as the driver's ability to concentrate on the road without being dis tracted . The driver is responsible for the safety of the vehicle and all of its occupants. If your ability to drive is impaired, safety risks for everybody in the vehicle increase and you also become a hazard to . Therefore : everyone else on the road c:>Li'). • Do not let yourself be distracted by passengers or by using a cellular telephone . • NEVERdrive when your driving ability is impaired (by medications, alcohol, drugs, etc.). • Observe all traffic laws, rules of the road and speed limits and plain common sense. • ALWAYSadjust your speed to road, traffic and weather conditions. • Take frequent breaks on long trips. Do not drive for more than two hours at a stretch. • Do NOT drive when you are tired, under pressure or when you are stressed. A WARNING Impaired driving safety increases the risk of ser ious personal injury and death whenever a vehicle is being used. 208 Fig. 218 Correct seating posit ion For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident, we recommend that you adjust the driver's seat to the following position: • Adjust the driver's seat so that you can easily push the pedals all the way to the floor while keeping your knee(s) slightly bent c:>.&_. • Adjust the angle of the seatback so that it is in an upright position so that your back comes in full contact with it when you drive. • Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a d istance of at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the fig. 218. steering wheel and your breast bone r::!) If not possible, see your authorized Audi dealership about adaptive equipment. • Adjust the steering wheel so that the steering wheel and airbag cover points at your chest and not at your face. • Grasp the top of the steering wheel with your elbow(s) slightly bent. • Adjust the head restraint so the upper edge is as even as possible with the top of your head . If that is not possible, try to adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to this position as possible. • Fasten and wear safety belts correctly c:>poge221. • Always keep both feet in the footwell so that you are in control of the vehicle at all t imes . Driving For detailed information on how to adjust the driver's seat, see ¢ page 54. A 0 co .... N ,..... .... N WARNING Drivers who are unbelted, out of position or too close to the airbag can be seriously injured by an airbag as it unfolds. To help reduce the risk of serious personal injury: - Always adjust the driver's seat and the steering wheel so that there are at least 10 inches (25 cm) between your breastbone and the steering wheel. - Always adjust the driver's seat and the steering wheel so that there are at least 4 inches (10 cm) between the knees and the lower part of the instrument panel. - Always hold the steering wheel on the outside of the steering wheel rim with your hands at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions to help reduce the risk of personal injury if the driver's airbag inflates. - Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position or with your hands at other positions inside the steering wheel rim or on the steering wheel hub. Holding the steering wheel the wrong way can cause serious injuries to the hands, arms and head if the driver's airbag inflates. - Pointing the steering wheel toward your face decreases the ability of the supplemental driver's airbag to protect you in a collision. - Always sit in an upright position and never lean against or place any part of your body too close to the area where the airbags are located. - Before driving, always adjust the front seats and head restraints properly and make sure that all passengers are properly restrained. - Never adjust the seats while the vehicle is moving . Your seat may move unexpectedly and you could lose control of the vehicle. - Never drive with the backrest reclined or tilted far back! The farther the backrests are tilted back, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the safety belt and improper seating position. safety - Children must always ride in child seats ¢ page 248. Special precautions apply when installing a child seat on the front passenger seat ¢ page 226. Proper seating position for the front passenger The proper front passenger seating position is important for safe, relaxed driving . For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident, we recommend that you adjust the seat for the front passenger to the following position : ...Adjust the angle of the seatback so that it is in an upright position and your back comes in full contact with it whenever the vehicle is moving. ...Adjust the head restraint so the upper edge is as even as possible with the top of your head. If that is not possible, try to adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to this position as possible ¢ page 210. ... Keep both feet flat on the floor in front of the front passenger seat. ... Fasten and wear safety belts correctly ¢page 221 . For detailed information on how to adjust the front passenger's seat, see ¢ page 54. A - WARNING Front seat passengers who are unbelted, out of position or too close to the airbag can be seriously injured or killed by the airbag as it unfolds . To help reduce the risk of serious personal injury: - Passengers must always sit in an upright position and never lean against or place any part of their body too close to the area where the airbags are located. - Passengers who are unbelted, out of position or too close to the airbag can be seri ously injured by an airbag as it unfolds with great force in the blink of an eye . 0 0 :c '<t 209 .., Driving safety - Always make sure that there are at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the front passenger 's breastbone and the instrument panel. - Always make sure that there are at least 4 inches (10 cm) between the front passenger's knees and the lower part of the instru ment panel. - Each passenger must always sit on a seat of their own and properly fasten and wear the safety belt belonging to that seat . - Before driving, always adjust the front passenger seat and head restraint properly . - Always keep your feet on the floor in front of the seat. Never rest them on the seat, instrument panel, out of the window, etc . The airbag system and safety be lt will not be able to protect you properly and can even increase the risk of injury in a crash. - Never dr ive with the backrest reclined or ti lted far back! The farther the backrests are ti lted back, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the safety belt and improper seating position. - Children must always ride in child seats ¢ page 248. Special precautions apply when installing a child seat on the front passenger seat ¢ page 226. .,.Keep both feet flat in the footwell in front of the rear seat. .,. Fasten and wear safety belts properly q page 221 . .,. Make sure tha t children are always properly restrained in a child restraint that is appropriate for their size and age q page 248 . A WARNING Passengers who are imprope rly seated on the rear seat can be seriously injured in a crash. - Each passenger must always sit on a seat of their own and properly fasten and wear the safety belt belonging to that seat. - Safety belts only offer maximum protection when the safety be lts are properly positioned on the body and secure ly latched . By not sitting upright, a rear seat passenger increases the risk of personal injury from improperly positioned safety belts! -Always adju st the head restraint properly so that it can give maximum protection. Proper adjustment of head restraints Correctly adjusted head restraints are an important part of your vehicle's occupant restraint system and can help to reduce the risk of injuries in accident situations . Proper seating positions for passengers in rear seats Rear sea t passengers must sit upright with both feet on the floor consisten t with their physical size and be properly restrained whenever the vehicle is in use. To reduce the risk of injury caused by an incorrect seating position in the event of a sudden braking maneuver or an accident, your passengers on the rear bench seat must always observe the following: .,. For adjustable head restraints: Adjust the head restraint so the upper edge is as even as possi ble with the top of your head . If that is not possible, try to adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to this position as possible ~ page 210. 210 Fig. 219 Head rest raint : viewed from t he front The head restraints must be correctly adjusted to achieve the best protection . .,. For adjustable head restraints: adjust the head restraint so the upper edge is as even as possible with the top of your head . If that is not possible, try to adjust the head restraint so that it .,._ Driving is as close to this position as possible. Examples of improper seating positions ¢ fig. 219 . The occupant restraint system can only reduce the risk of injury if vehicle occupants are properly seated. Adjusting head restraints ¢page 58 . Crash - active head restraints In the event of a rear -end collision, it is possible that the crash-active head restraints on the driver's seat and front passenger's seat 1> are triggered. On head restraints that have been triggered, the padding protrudes forwards by several centimeters. Drive the vehicle to your authorized Audi dealer without delay and have the function of the active head restraints restored. _& WARNING safety - Driving without head restraints or with head restraints that are not properly adjusted increases the risk of serious or fatal neck injury dramatically. To help reduce the risk of injury: - Always drive with the head restraints in place and properly adjusted . - Every person in the vehicle must have a properly adjusted head restraint. - Always make sure each person in the vehicle properly adjusts their head restraint. Adjust the head restraint so the upper edge is as even as possible with the top of your head. If that is not possib le, try to adjust the head restra int so that it is as close to this position as possible. - Never attempt to adjust head restraint wh ile driving. If you have dr iven off and must adjust the dr iver head rest for any reason, first stop the vehicle safely before attempting to adjust the head restra int . - Children must a lways be properly restrained in a child restraint that is appropriate for their age and size¢ page 248. Improper seating positions can cause serious injury or death . Safety belts can only work when they are properly positioned on the body . Improper seat ing positions reduce the effectiveness of safety belts and will even increase the risk of injury and death by moving the safety belt to critical areas of the body. Improper seating positions also increase the risk of serious injury and death when an airbag deploys and strikes an occupant who is not in the proper seating position. A driver is responsible for the safety of all vehicle occupants and especially for children . Therefore: .,. Never allow anyone to assume an incorrect seating position when the vehicle is being used ¢ .,&. The following bulletins list only some sample positions that will increase the risk of serious injury and death . Our hope is that these examples will make you more aware of seating positions that are dangerous . Therefore , whenever the vehicle is moving : - never never never never never never never never never never never never of the - never - never stand up in the vehicle stand on the seats kneel on the seats ride with the seatback recl ined lie down on the rear seat lean up against the instrument panel sit on the edge of the seat sit sideways lean out the window put your feet out the window put your feet on the instrument panel rest your feet on the seat cushion or back seat ride in the footwell ride in the cargo area 0 co .... N ,..._ .... N 0 0 :c '<t l) Vehicles w ith reclinin g rear seat: This fun ct ion is not avai lable fo r t he fro nt passenger's seat . 211 Dr iv ing sa fe ty A WARNING Improper seating positions increase the risk of serious personal injury and death whenever a vehicle is being used. - Always make sure that all vehicle occupants stay in a proper seat ing position and are properly restrained whenever the vehicle is being used. Driver's and front passenger's footwell Important safety instructions A WARNING Always ma ke sure that the knee airbag can inflate without inter ference. Objects between yourself and the airbag can increase the risk of injury in an acc ident by interfering with the way the airbag deploys or by being pushed into you as the airbag deploys. - No persons (children) or animals shou ld ride in the footwell in front of the passenger seat. If the airbag dep loys, th is can result in serious or fatal injuries . - No objects of any kind shou ld be carried in the footwell area in front of the driver's or passenger's seat . Bulky objects (shopping bags, for example) can hamper or prevent prope r deployment of the airbag. Small objects can be th rown through the vehicle if the a irbag deploys and injure you or your passengers. Pedal area Pedals The pedals must always be free to move and must never be interfered with by a floor mat or any other object. Make sure that all peda ls move freely without interference and that noth ing prevents them from returning to the ir origina l positions. Only use floor mats that leave the peda l area free and can be secured wit h floor mat fasteners. 212 If a brake circuit fails, increased brake pedal trav el is required to bring the vehicle to a fu ll stop. A WARNING Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle contro l and increase the risk of serious injury. - Never place any objects in the drive r's footwell. An object could get into the pedal area and interfere with pedal funct ion. In case of sudden braking or an acc ident , you would not be able to brake or acce le rate! - Always make sure that nothing can fall or move into the driver's footwell. Floor mats on the driver side Always use floor mats that can be securely attached to the floor mat fas teners and do not interfere with the free movement of the pedals . .,. Make sure that the floor mats are properly secured and cannot move and int erfere w ith the pedals ¢ _& . Use only floor mats that leave the peda l area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they can not s lip out of position . You can obtai n su itable floor mats from your author ized Audi Dealer . Floor mat fasteners are installed in your Audi. Floor mats used in your vehicle must be attached to these fasteners. Properly secur ing the floor mats will prevent them from sliding into positions that could interfere with the pedals or impair safe operat ion of your vehicle in other ways . A WARNING Pedals that cannot move freely can result in a loss of vehicle contro l and increase the ris k of serious pe rsonal injury. - Always make sure that floo r mats are properly secured. - Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured in place to preven t them from slipping and interfer ing wit h the pedals or the ab ility to cont rol the vehicle . Driving - Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats. Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals . - Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been taken out for cleaning. - Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving . Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of veh icle control. Storing cargo correctly Loading the luggage compartment All luggage and other objects must be properly stowed and secured in the luggage compartment. Loose items in the luggage compartment can shift suddenly, changing vehicle handling characteristics. Loose items can also increase the risk of serious personal injury in a sudden vehicle maneuver or in a collis ion. .. Distribute the load evenly in the luggage compartment. .. Always place and properly secure heavy items in the luggage compartment as fa r forward as possible. .,.Secure luggage items using the tie-downs provided ¢ page 65 . A 0 co .... N ,..._ .... N WARNING Improperly stored luggage or other items can fly through the vehicle causing serious personal injury in the event of hard braking or an accident. To help reduce the risk of serious personal injury: - Always put objects, for example, luggage or other heavy items in the luggage compartment. - Always secure objects in the luggage compartment using the tie-down hooks and suitable straps . A safety WARNING - Heavy loads will influence the way your vehicle handles. To help reduce the risk of a loss of control lead ing to serious personal injury: - Always keep in m ind when transporting heavy objects, that a change in the center of gravity can also cause changes in vehicle handling: - Always distribute the load as evenly as possible . - Place heavy objects as far forward in the luggage compartment as possible. - Never exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating or the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating specified on the safety compliance sticker on the left door jamb. Exceeding permissible weight standards can cause the vehicle to slide and handle differently. - Please observe information on safe driving ¢page 207 . A WARNING To help prevent poisonous exhaust gas from being drawn into the vehicle, always keep the rear lid closed while driving . - Never transport objects larger than those f itting completely into the luggage area because the rear lid cannot be fully closed. - If you absolutely must drive with the rear lid open, observe the following notes to reduce the risk of poisoning: - Close all windows, - Close the power roof, - Open all air outlets in the instrument panel, - Switch off the air recirculation , - Set the fresh air fan to the highest speed . A WARNING Always make sure that the doors, all windows, the power roof and the rear lid are securely closed and locked to reduce the risk of injury when the veh icle is not being used. - After closing the rear lid, always make sure that it is properly closed and locked . 0 0 :c '<t 213 Driving safety - Never leave your vehicle unattended especially with the rear lid left open. A child could crawl into the vehicle through the luggage compartment and close the rear lid becoming trapped and unable to get out . Being trapped in a vehicle can lead to serious personal injury. - Never let children play in or around the vehicle. - Never let passengers ride in the luggage compartment. Vehicle occupants must always be properly restrained in one of the vehicle's seating positions. - Air circulation helps to reduce window fogging . Stale air escapes to the outside through vents in the trim panel, on the left side of the luggage compartment. Be sure to keep these slots free and open. - The tire pressure must correspond to the load. The tire pressure is shown on the tire pressure label. The tire pressure label is located on the driver's side B·pillar. The tire pressure label lists the recommended cold tire inflation pressures for the vehicle at its maximum capacity weight and the tires that were on your vehicle at the t ime it was manufactured. For recommended tire pressures for normal load conditions, please see chapter ¢ page 294. Tie-downs The luggage compartment is equipped with four tie-downs to secure luggage and other items . Use the tie-dow ns to secure your cargo properly ¢ page 213, Loading the luggage compartment . In a coll ision, the laws of physics mean that even smaller items that are loose in the vehicle will become heavy missiles that can cause serious injury . Items in the vehicle possess energy which vary with vehicle speed and the weight of the item. Vehicle speed is the most significant factor. For example, in a frontal collision at a speed of 30 mph (48 km/h), the forces acting on a 10 -lb (4 .5 kg) object are about 20 times the normal 214 weight of the item. This means that the weight of the item would suddenly be about 200 lbs. (90 kg) . You can imagine the injuries that a 200 lbs. (90 kg) item flying freely through the passenger compartment cou ld cause in a collision like th is. A WARNING - Weak, damaged or improper straps used to secure items to tie-downs can fail during hard braking or in a collision and cause serious personal injury. - Always use suitable mounting straps and properly secure items to the tie-downs in the luggage compartment to help prevent items from shifting or flying forward as dangerous missiles. - Never attach a child safety seat tether strap to a tie-down. Reporting Safety Defects Applicable to U.S.A. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)in addition to notifying Audi of America, Inc. If NHTSAreceives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defects exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individual problems between you, 11> Driving safety your dealer, or Audi of America, Inc. gations and Recalls, may either call Transport Canada toll-free at: To contact the NHTSA, you may either call: Tel.: 1-800-333-0510 or Tel. : 1-819-994-3328 (Ottawa region and from other countries) TTYfor hearing impaired: Tel.: 1-888-67 5-6863 Tel.: 1-888-327-4236 1-800 -424 -9153) or 1-800-424-9393 (TTY: or you may wr ite to : or contact Transport Canada by mail at: NHTSA U.S. Department of Transportation 1200 New Jersey Ave., S.E. West Building Washington, DC 20590 Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Invest igations Laboratory 80 Noel Street Gatineau, QC You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from: http:/ /www.safercar .gov Applicable to Canada J8Z 0Al For additional road safety information, please visit the Road Safety website at: http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/ roadsafety/menu.htm If you live in Canada and you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash , injury or death , you should immediately inform Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls. You should also notify Audi Canada. ~ N ~ Canadian customers who wish to report a safety -related defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investi- o 0 ... :c 215 Audi Audi pre sense pre sense Preventative protection passenger App lies to: vehicles with Audi pre se nse Pre sense can initiate steps to protect vehicle occupants in certain dangerous situations. The fu nctions described a re available depending on ve hicle equi pment: Audi pre sense basic The fo llow ing funct ions can be triggered in certain driving situations: - Tighten ing of the safety belts (for examp le, during heavy braking): the front safety belts have reversible belt tensioners. If a coll is ion does not occur, the safety belts loosen slightly and are ready to trigger again. - Closing the windows and the sunroof* The fu ncti on of the pre sense basic is activated at a speed of 20 mp h (30 km/h) or higher. The de ployment time is adapted in the drive select dynamic mode. Audi pre sense front (vehicles with adaptive cruise control*) Pre sense front contains the functions of pre sense basic. In add ition, the likelihood of a rearend collis ion with the vehicle ahead is also calculated, withi n the limits of the system. If the risk of a collision is detected, the following functions can t rigge r: - Audi braking gua rd¢ page 99 - Tensioning of the safety belts - Closing the windows and the sunroof * Audi pre sense rear (vehicles with side assist* ) Pre sense rear contains the functions of pre sense basic. In addition, the like lihood of a rear-end col lision from the vehicle be hind is a lso ca lculated, w ith in the lim its of the system . If the risk of a collis ion is detected, the following functions can tr igger: - Tens ioning of the safety be lts - Closing the windows and the sunroof * 216 - Adjusting the sea t s: the settings for the powe r head restrains, the upper sections of the backrests and the pne umatic side bolsters* change on the front seats and the outer rear seats*. If a collision does not occur, the seat sett ings that were previously used are restored . Audi pre sense plus Pre sense plus contains the functions of pre sense front and pre sense rear. Error message Audi pre sense: Unavailable Preventative passenger protection is not ava ilable. Drive to your autho rized Audi dea le r o r a ut hori zed Aud i Service Facility immedia t ely to have t he malfunct ion corre cte d . .&_WARNING Pre sense canno t overcome natura l phys ical laws . It is a system designed to assist and it cannot prevent a collision. Do not let t he increased sa fety provided tempt you into tak ing risks . This could increase your ris k of a collision. - The system can dep loy inco rrectly. - Please note that the sensors do not always detect a ll objects. This increases the ris k of a collision. - Pre sense does not react to peop le or animals or objects that a re crossing the vehicle's path or are difficu lt to detect ¢page 94. - Reflective objects such as gua rd ra ils or the entrance to a tunne l, heavy rain and ice can affect the funct io n of the radar sensors a nd t he system 's ability to de t ect a collision risk. (D Note The sensors can be d isplaced by impacts or damage to the bumper , wheel housing a nd underbody . Pre sense can be impaired by this . Have an autho rized Aud i deale r or autho rized Audi Service Facility check their funct io n. .,.. Audi @ pre sense Tips - Certain pre sense f ront functions switch off when sport mode is swit ched of f or when driving in reverse. - The pre sense functions may not be available if there is a malfunction in the ESCsystem or the airbag contro l modu le. - The pre sense front/plus funct ions are not available if the re is a ma lf unction in the adaptive cruise contro l* system ¢page 101. - The pre sense rear/plus f unctions are not available if the re is a ma lf unction in the side assist* system ¢pag e 101. 0 co .... N ,..... .... N 0 0 :c '<t 217 S a fety belt s Safety General belts information Always wear safety belts! - Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are safety be lts available . - Be s ure everyone riding in the vehicle is properly restrained with a separate safety be lt or ch ild restraint. Wearing safety belts correctly saves lives! This chapter explains why safety be lts are necessary, how they work and how to adjust and wear them correctly. .. Read all the information that follows and heed all of the instructions and WARNINGS. ~ Safety belt warning light Your vehicle has a warning system for the driver and front seat passenger to remind you about the importance of buckling-up . "' .,, N .. "' 0 &_ WARNING Not wearing safety belts or wearing them improperly increases the risk of serious personal injury and death. - Safety belts are the s ingle most effective means ava ilable to reduce the risk of serious injury and death in automobile accidents. For your protect ion and that of your passengers, always correctly wear safety be lts when the vehicle is moving . - Pregnant women, injured, o r physically impaired persons must a lso use safety belts. Like all vehicle occ upants, they are mo re likely to be serio us ly injured if they do not wea r safety be lts. The best way to protect a fetus is to protect the mother - throughout the ent ire pregnancy . Number of seats Your Aud i has a total of five seating positions: two in the front and three in the rear. In some veh icles, there are four seating positions: two in the front and two in the rear . Each seating position has a safety belt . &_ WARNING Not wea ring safety belts or wearing them improperly incre ases t he risk of ser ious personal injury and dea t h. - Never st rap more tha n one person, including small ch ild ren, into any be lt . It is especia lly da ngerous to place a safety belt over a child sitting on your lap . 218 m Fig. 220 Safety belt wa rning light in the instrument clus· ter - en larged Before driving off, always; .. Fasten your safety belt and make sure you are wearing it properly. .. Make sure that your passengers a lso buckle up and properly wear the ir safety belts. .. Protect chi ldren with a child restraint system appropr iate for the size and age. The warning light . in the instrument cluster lights up when the ign ition is on as a reminder to fasten the safety belts. In addition, you will hear a war ning tone for a certain period of time. Fasten your safety belt and make sure that your passenge rs also properly put on thei r safety belts . &_ WARNING - Safety belts are the single most effective means available to red uce the risk of ser ious injury and death in a utomobile accidents. For your protection and that of your passengers, a lways correct ly wear safety belts when t he vehicle is moving . - ..,. Safety - Failure to pay attention to the warn ing light that come on, could lead to persona l injury. Why use safety belts? Frontal collisions and the law of physics Frontal crashes create very strong forces for people riding in vehicles . belts The same principles apply to people sitting in a vehicle that is involved in a fronta l collision. Even at city speeds of 20 to 30 mph (30 to 50 km/h), the forces acting on the body can reach one ton (2,000 lbs, or 1,000 kg) or more. At greater speeds, these forces are even higher . People who do not use safety belts are a lso not attached to the ir vehicle. In a frontal collis ion they will also keep moving forward at the speed their vehicle was travelling just before the crash . Of course, the laws of physics don't just apply to frontal collisions, they determine what happens in all kinds of accidents and collisions . What happens to occupants not wea ring safety belts? Fig. 221 Unbe lted occupants in a vehicle heading for a wall In crashes unbelted occupants cannot stop themselves from flying forward and being injured or killed. Always wear your safety belts! Fig. 222 The vehicle crashes into the wall Fig. 223 A dr iver not wearing a safety belt is violently The physical principles are simple. Both the vehicle and the passengers possess energy which varies with vehicle speed and body weight. Engineers call this energy "kinetic energy." thrown forward The higher the speed of the vehicle and the greater the vehicle's we ight, the more energy that has to be "absorbed" in the crash. Vehicle speed is the most significant factor. If the speed doubles from 15 to 30 mph (25 to 50 km/h), the energy increases 4 t imes! C) .... C0 ,.... "' .... "' 0 0 :r Because the passengers of this veh icle are not using safety belts ¢fig . 221, they will keep moving at the same speed the vehicle was moving just before the crash, until something stops them here, the wall¢ fig. 222 . Fig. 224 A rear passe nger not wearing a safety belt will fly forwa rd a nd strike the driver Unbelted occupants are not able to resist the tremendous forces of impact by holding tight or bracing themselves . Without the benefit of safety restraint systems, the un restrained occupant will slam violently into the steering wheel, <t 219 Ill>- Sa f e ty belts instrument panel, windshield, or whatever else is in the way r:!>fig. 223. This impact with the vehicle interior has all the energy they had j ust before the crash. plied to the body in an accident , and help prevent the uncontrolled movement that can cause serious injuries. In add ition, sa fety belts red uce the danger of being thrown out of the vehicle. Never rely on airbags alone for protection . Even when they deploy, airbags provide only additional protection. Airbags are not supposed to dep loy in all kinds of accidents. Although your Audi is equipped w ith airbags, all vehicle occupants, including the driver, must wear safety belts cor rectly in order to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in a crash . Safety be lts attach passengers to the car and g ive them the benefit of being slowed down more gently or "soft ly" thro ugh the "give" in the safety belts, crush zones and other safety feat ures engineered into today's vehicles. By "absorbing" the kinet ic energy over a longer per iod of t ime, the safety belts make the forces on the body more "tolerab le" and less likely to cause inju ry. Remember too, that airbags will deploy only once and that your safety belts are always there to offer protect ion in those accidents in wh ich airbags are not supposed to deploy or when they have a lready deployed . Unbel ted occupants can also be thrown out of the veh icle where eve n mo re severe or fatal injuries can occur . Although these examples are based on a frontal collision, safety be lts ca n also substantially reduce the risk of injury in ot her kinds of crashes . So, whethe r you're on a long trip or just goi ng to the cor ne r store, a lways buckle up and make sure othe rs do, t oo. Acciden t st at ist ics show that veh icle occupants prope rly wearing safety bel t s have a lowe r risk of being injured and a much better chance of surviving an acc ident . Properly using safety be lts also great ly increases the ability of the supp lemental airbags to do their job in a collis ion. For this reason, wearing a safety belt is legally required in most countries including much of the United States and Canada . It is also important for the rear pass engers to wear safety belts correctly. Unbelted passengers in t he rear seats endanger no t on ly themse lves but also the drive r and other passengers ~ fig . 224. In a frontal collision they will be thrown forward violently, where they can hit and inj ure the driver and/or front seat passenger. Safety belts protect People think it's possible to use the hands to brace the body in a minor collision . It's simply not true! Although your Audi is equipped with airbags, you still have to wear the safety belts provided. Front airbags, for examp le, are activated only in some frontal collisions. The front airbags are not act ivated in all frontal collisions, in side and rear collis ions, in roll overs or in cases where the re is not eno ugh deceler ation t hroug h impa ct t o the front of t he vehicle . The same goes for the other a irbag systems in your Audi. So, always wear your safety belt and make sure everybody in your vehicle is properly rest rained! Important safety instructions about safety belts Fig. 22 5 Driver is corr ectly restrai ned i n a sudden brak ing m aneuver Safety belts used properly can make a big d ifference. Safety belts help to keep passengers in their seats, gradually reduce energy levels ap- 220 Safety belts must always be correctly positioned across the strongest bones of your body. .,.Always wear safety belts as illustrated and de scribed in this chapter. .,. Make sure that your safety be lts are always ready fo r use a nd are not damaged . Safet y bel ts A C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 0 :r WARNING Not wearing safety belts or wearing them improperly increases the risk of serious personal injury and death . Safety belts can work only when used correct ly. -Always fasten your safety belts correctly before driving off and make sure all passengers are cor rect ly restrained. - For maximum protection, safety belts must always be posit ioned properly on the body . - Never strap more than one person, including small ch ildren, into any belt . - Never place a safety belt over a child sitt ing on your lap. - Always keep feet in the footwell in front of the seat wh ile the vehicle is being driven. - Never let any person ride with their feet on the instrument panel or st icking out the window or on the seat . - Never remove a safety belt while the vehicle is moving . Doing so will increase your risk of being injured or killed. - Never wear belts twisted. - Never wear belts over rigid or breakable objects in or on your clothing, such as eye glasses, pens, keys, etc., as these may cause injury. - Never allow safety belts to become damaged by being caught in door or seat hardware. - Do not wear the shoulder part of the belt under your arm or otherwise out of position . - Several layers of heavy clothing may interfere with correct positioning of belts and reduce the overall effectiveness of the system. - Always keep belt buckles free of anything that may prevent the buckle from latching securely . - Never use comfort clips or devices that create slack in the shoulder be lt . However, special clips may be requ ired for the proper use of some child restraint systems. - Torn or frayed safety belts can tear, and damaged belt ha rdware can break in an accident. Inspect belts regularly. If webbing, bind ings, buckles, or ret ractors are damaged, have belts rep laced by an authorized Audi dea ler or qualified workshop. - Safety belts that have been worn and loaded in an accident must be replaced with the correct replacement safety belt by an author ized Audi dealer. Replacement may be necessary even if damage cannot be clearly seen. Anchorages that were loaded must also be inspected. - Never remove, mod ify, d isassemble, or try to repair the safety belts yourse lf. -Always keep the belts clean . Dirty belts may not work properly and can impair the function of the inert ia reel q table Interior cleaning on page 308. Safety belts Fastening safety belts Safety first - everbody buckle up! Fig. 226 Belt buckle and to ngue on the driver's seat To provide maximum protect ion, safety belts must always be positioned correctly on the wearer's body . .. Adjust the front seat and head restraint properly ¢ page 54, Seats and storage. .. Pull the safety belt evenly across the chest and pelvis ¢ fig. 226, ¢ ,&.. .. Insert the tongue into the correct buckle of your seat unt il you hear it latch secu rely . .. Pull on t he belt to make sure that it is securely latched in the buckle. Automatic safet y belt retractors Every safety belt is equipped with an automatic belt retractor on the sho ulder belt. This feat ure locks the belt when t he bel t is pulled out fast, <t 221 .,.. Sa f e ty belts during hard braking and in an accident. The be lt may a lso lock when you drive up or down a steep h ill or through a sharp curve. During normal driving the belt lets you move freely . Safety belt position Correct belt position is the key to getting maximum protection from safety belts . Safety belt pret ensioners The safety be lts are equ ipped with a belt preten sioner that helps to tighten the safety belt and remove slack when the pretensioner is activated ¢ page 224 . The function of the pretensioner is monitored by a warn ing light ¢ page 23. Convertibl e locking retra ctor Every safety be lt except the one on the driver seat is equipped with a convertible locking retractor that must be used when the safety belt is used to attach a child seat. Be sure to read the important information about this feature ¢page 258. A WARNING Improperly pos it ioned safety belts can cause ser ious injury in an accident ¢ page 222, Safety belt position. - Safety belts offer optimum protection only when the seatback is upright and belts are prope rly positioned on the body. - Never attach the safety belt to the buckle for another seat. Attaching the belt to the wrong buckle will red uce safety belt effect iveness and can cause serious persona l injury. - A passenger who is not p roper ly restrained can be serio usly injured by the safety be lt itself when it moves from the stronger parts of the body into crit ical areas like the abdo men. - Always lock the convertible locking retractor when you are secur ing a child seat in the vehicle ¢ page 260. @ Tips For information on safety be lt pretensioners, refer to ¢ page 224. 222 Fig. 2 27 Safety belt pos it ion Use the height adjus t ment to change the posit io n of the shoulder belt of the front safety belts. A WARNING Improperly positioned sa fety belts can cause serious personal injury in an accident. - The shou lder belt should lie as close to the center of the collar bone as possib le and should fit well on the body. Hold the belt above the latch tongue and pull it evenly across the chest so that it s its as low as possible on the pe lvis and there is no pressure on the abdome n. The belt sho uld a lways fit snug ly¢ fig. 22 7. Pu ll on the belt to tigh t en if necess ary. - A loose-fit t ing safety belt can cause serious injuries by s hift ing its posi t ion on your body from the strong bones t o mo re vulnera ble, so ft tissue and cause serious inju ry. - Always read and heed a ll WARNINGS an d ot her impor tan t information¢ page 220 . Safet y bel ts Pregnant women must also be correctly restrained The best way to protect the fetus is to make sure that expectant mothers always wear safety belts correctly - throughout the pregnan cy. Unfastening safety belts Unbuckle the safety belt with the red release button only o~er the vehicle hos stopped . 0 ..... N 0 :i: "' CD J-L Fig. 2 29 Releasing the tong ue from the buckle Fig. 228 Safety belt positio n dur ing pregnancy To provide max imum protection, safety belts must always be posit ioned correctly on the wearer 's body ¢ page 222. .,.Adjust the front seat and head restraint correctly c>page 54, Seats and storage. .,.Pull the safety belt evenly across the chest so that it sits as low as possible on the pelvis and there is no pressure on the abdomen ¢ fig. 228, c>_&. .,.Inse rt the tongue into t he correct buckle of you r seat until you hea r it lat ch secure ly <=> page 221 , fig. 226 . .. Pull on the belt to make sure that it is securely latched in the buckle . .&_WARNING Improperly posit ioned safety be lts can cause ser ious personal injury in an accident. - Expectant mothers must always wear the lap portion of the safety belt as low as possible across the pelvis and below the rounding of the abdomen. - Always read a nd heed all WARNINGSand other important information <=> &. in Fastening safety belts on page 222 . .. Push the red re lease but t on on t he buck le ¢ fig. 229. The belt tongue will spring out of the buck le¢ &_ . .,. Let the belt wind up on the retractor as you guide the belt tongue to its stowed position . - _& WARNING Never unfasten safety belt wh ile the vehicle is moving . Doing so will increase your risk of being injured or killed . Adjusting safety belt height You con adjust the height of the driver's and front passenger's safety belts . The safety belt he ight adjusters for the front seats can be used to adjust the height of the shoulder portion of the safety belt so that it is pos itioned correctly . The shoulder belt shou ld lie as close to the center of the collar bone as possible and s hou ld fit well on the body ¢ &. in Safety belt position on page 222 . Power safety belt height adjustment* You can adjust the he ight of the safety be lts using the multifunction button on the driver or front passenger seat ¢ page 54 . C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 0 :r <t 223 S a fety A belt s Always read and heed all WARNINGS and other important informat ion c:>page 220 . (D Tips You can also adjust the height of the front seats to change the position of the safety be lts. Improperly worn safety belts Incorrectly posit ioned safety belts can cause severe injuries. Wearing safety belts imprope rly can cause serious injury or death. Safety belts can on ly work when they a re correctly positioned on the body. Improper seating positions reduce the effect iveness of safety belts and will even increase the risk of injury and deat h by mov ing the safety bel t to crit ica l areas of t he body . Imp roper seating posi t ions a lso increase t he risk of serio us injur y an d deat h when an air bag deploys and str ikes an occupan t who is no t in the correct seat ing pos ition. A d river is responsib le for the safety of a ll vehicle occupants and especia lly for children. Therefo re: ...Never permit anyone to ass ume an incorrect sitting position in the vehicle while trave ling c:>& . A Belt WARNING WARNING Improperly worn safety belts increase t he risk of se rious personal injury and deat h wheneve r a vehicle is being used. - Always make sure that all vehicle occupants are correctly restra ined and stay in a correct seat ing pos ition whenever the veh icle is be ing used. - Always read a nd heed all WARNINGS and othe r important information c:>pag e 220. ' tensioners How safety belt pretensioners work In front, side and rear-end collisions above a particular sev erity and in a rollover, safety belts are tensioned automatically. Reversible safety belt tensioners The safety belts on the front seats a re equipped with power revers ible tensione rs. The following funct ions are available whe n the drive r's/front passenger 's safety belts are faste ned: - Automatic tens ione rs: at the start of a dr ive, the safety belts automat ically adjust to t he passe nger after a certain time period or ve hicle speed. To switch t he automatic tensioners off, select t he follow ing in the MMI: !CARI fu nction but t on > Car systems > Vehicle setting s > Seats > Driver's seat or Passenger'sseat > Automatic belt tensioner > Off . - In ce rta in dr iving situ at ions , the safe ty belts may t ighten with a reve rsib le t ensioning func page 216 . t ion c:> - The safety be lts ma y als o ti gh t en with th is revers ible te ns ion ing funct ion in m ino r collisions. Pyrotechnic safety belt pretensioners The safety belts are eq uipped wit h safety bel t pretens ione rs . The system is activa t ed by sensors in front, side a nd rear-e nd coll isions of grea t severity and in a rollover. This tig htens t he bel t and .&.in Service an d disposal of t akes up belt sla ck c:> safety belt pretensioner on page 22 5. Taking up the slack he lps to reduce forward occupant movement during a collision. A WARNING - It is poss ible for the pretensioners to dep loy incor rect ly. - The pyrotechnic system can only provide protection for one collision. If t he pyrotechnic pretens io ners deploy, the pretensioning syst em must be replaced . (1) Tips The pyrotechnic sa fety belt pretensioners on ly dep loy once . 224 can ..,_ S a fet y b e lts - The safety belt pretensioners do not dep loy in minor fronta l, side and rear-end collis ions . - A fine dust is released when the pyrotechnic safety belt pretensioners deploy. This is normal and is not caused by a fire in the vehicle. - The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the veh icle or components of the system are scrapped. A qualified dealersh ip is familiar with these regulations and will be pleased to pass on the information to you . - Be sure to observe all safety, environmental and other regu lations if the veh icle or individual parts of the system, particularly the safety be lt o r airbag, a re to be disposed . We recommend you have your author ized Audi dealer perform this serv ice for you. Service and disposal of safety belt pretensioner procedures are required fo r removal, installation and disposal of this system. - For any wo rk on the safety belt system, we strong ly recommend that you see yo ur author ized Audi dealer or qualified techn ician who has an Audi approved repa ir manual, tra ining and special equipment necessary . (® For the sake of the environment Undeployed airbag modules and pretensioners might be classified as Perchlorate Material -special handling may apply, see www.dtsc .ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. When the vehicle or parts of the restrain t system including airbag modu les safety belts with pret ensioners are scrapped, all applicable laws and regu lations mus t be obse rved . Your authorized Audi dealer is familiar with these requirements and we recommend that you have your dealer perform this service for you. The safety belt pretens ioners are parts of the safety belts on your Audi. Insta lling, removing, servic ing or repa iring of belt pretensioners can damage t he safety belt system and prevent it from wor king cor rect ly in a collision. There are some important things you have to know to make sure that the effectiveness of the syst em will not be impaired and that discarded components do not cause injury or pollute the e nvironment. _& WARNING 0 co .... N ,..... .... N 0 0 :c Improper care, serv icing and repa ir procedures can increase the risk of personal injury and death by preventing a safety be lt pretensioner from activating when needed or activating it unexpectedly: - The be lt pretensioner system can be activated only once. If belt pretensioners have been activated, the system must be replaced . - Never repair, adjust, or change any parts of the safety belt system . - Safety belt systems including safety belt pretens ioners cannot be repaired. Specia l '<t 225 Airb a g syste m Airbag system Important information Importance of wearing safety belts and sitting properly Airbags are only supplemental restraints . For airbags to do their job, occupants must always properly wear their safety belts and be in a prop er seating position. For your safety and the safety of your passenge rs, before driving off, always : "' Adjust the dr iver's seat and steering wheel properly ¢ page 208, "' Adjust the front passenge r's seat properly ¢ page 54 , "' Wear safety belts properly ¢ page 220, "' Always prope rly use the proper child restraint to protect children ¢ page 248 . In a coll isio n, airbags mus t inflate within the blink of an eye and wit h considerab le force . The supp lemental airbags can cause injuries if the driver or the front seat passenger is not seated properly. Therefore in order to he lp the airbag to do its job, it is important, both as a dr iver and as a passenger to sit properly at all t imes. By keeping room between your body and the steering whee l and the front of the passenger compartment, the a irbag can inflate fully and completely and provide supplemental protect ion in certain frontal collisions ¢ page 208, Correct passenger seating positions . For details on the operation of the seat adjustment con t rols ¢ page 54. It's especially important that children are proper ly restra ined ¢ page 248 . There is a lot that the driver and the passengers can and must do to help the ind ividual safety features installed in your Audi work together as a system . Proper seating posit ion is important so that the front airbag on the drive r side can do its job. If you have a physical impairment or cond ition that prevents you from sitting properly on the driver seat with the safety be lt properly fastened and 226 reaching the peda ls, or if you have concerns with regard to the function or operation of the Advanced Airbag System, please contact your a uthori zed Audi dea ler or qua lified workshop, or call Audi Customer Relations at 1-800-822-2834 for poss ible modifications to your vehicle . When the airbag system dep loys, a gas generator will fill the airbags, break open the padded covers, and infla t e between t he steering wheel and the driver and between the instrument panel and t he front passenger . The a irbags will deflate immed iate ly after deployment so that the front occupants can see t hrough the windsh ie ld again without interruption. All of th is takes place in the blink of an eye, so fast that many people don't even rea lize that the a irbags have deployed. The airbags a lso infla t e with a g reat deal of force and nothing should be in the ir way when they deploy. Front airbags in combination with properly worn safety belts slow down and limit the occupant 's forward movement . Together they he lp to prevent the driver and front seat passenger from hitting pa rts of the ins ide of the vehicle while reduc ing the fo rces acting on the occupant dur ing the cras h. In th is way they help to reduce the risk of injury to the head and uppe r body in the crash . Airbags do not protect the arms or the lower pa rts of the body. Both front airbags will not inflate in all frontal collisions . The t riggering of the a irbag system depends on the veh icle decelerat ion rate caused by t he coll isio n a nd regis t ered by t he ele ctroni c con tro l unit . If t his rat e is be low t he refe rence value programmed int o t he contro l unit, the airbags will not be trigge red, even tho ugh the car may be badly damaged as a resu lt of the collision. Vehicle damage, rep a ir costs or even the lack of vehicle damage is not necessarily an indication of whether an a irbag should inflate or not . Since the circumstances will vary cons iderab ly between one collision and another, it is not possi ble to define a range of veh icle speeds that will cover every poss ible kind and angle of impact that w ill always t rigger t he a irbags . Important factors include, for examp le, the nat ure (hard or soft) of the object which the ca r hits, the angle of imp act , vehicle speed , etc. The front airbags will .,. Airb a g sys tem also not inflate in side or rear coll isions, or in roll-overs. Always remember: Airbags will deploy only o nce, and on ly in certain kinds of coll isions. Your safety be lts are always there to offer protection in those situations in which airbags are not supposed to deploy, or when they have a lready deployed; for examp le, when your vehicle str ikes or is struck by another vehicle after the first collis ion. This is just one of the reasons why an airbag is a supp lementary restraint and is not a substitute for a safety belt. The airbag system works most effect ively when used with the safety belts. Therefore, always properly wear your safety belts r:::;,page218 . A WARNING Sitting too close to the steer ing whee l or inst rument panel will decrease the effect iveness of the airbags and will increase t he risk of persona l injury in a collision. - Never sit closer than 10 inches (25 cm) to the steering wheel or instrument panel. - If you cannot sit mo re than 10 inches (2 5 cm) from the steering wheel, inves t igate whethe r adaptive equipment may be available to help you reach the pedals and increase your seating distance from the steering wheel. - If you are unrest rained, leaning forward, sitting s ideways or out of position in any way, your risk of inju ry is much higher. - You will also receive serious injur ies and cou ld even be killed if you are up against the airbag or too close to it when it inf lates even with an Advanced Airbag. - To reduce the risk of inj ury when an airbag inflates, a lways wear safety belts properly i=>page 0 co .... N ,..._ .... N 0 0 :c 221, Safety belts . -Always make certain that ch ildren age 12 or younger always ride in the rear seat. If children are not properly restra ined, they may be severe ly injured or killed when an airbag inflates . - Never let children ride unrestrained or imprope rly restrained in the veh icle. Adjust the fro nt sea t s properly. - - Never ride with the back rest recl ined. -Always sit as fa r as possible from the steering wheel o r the instrument panel r:::;,page208. - Always sit upright with your back against the backrest of your seat. - Never place your feet on the instrument panel or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat to help prevent ser ious injuries to the legs and hips if the airbag inflates. - Never recline the front passenger's seat to transpo rt objects. Items can also move into the area of the s ide a irbag or the front airbag during braking or in a sudden maneuver. Objects nea r the airbags can become proje ct iles and cause injury when an airbag inflates. A WARNING Airbags t hat have deployed in a crash must be replaced. - Use o nly orig inal equipment airbags ap proved by Audi a nd insta lled by a t rained technici a n who has t he necessary tools and diagnostic equipment to properly replace any airbag in your vehicle and assu re system effect iveness in a crash. - Never permit salvaged or recycled airbags to be installed in you r vehicle . Child restraints on the front seat - some important things to know .,. Be sure to read the important informat ion and heed the WARNINGS for important deta ils about ch ildren and Advanced Airbags r:::;, page248 . Even though your veh icle is equipped wit h an Advanced Airbag System, make certa in that a ll childre n, espec ia lly those 12 yea rs and yo unger, always ride in the back se at prope rly res train ed for their age and size. The airbag on t he pa sse nger side makes t he fron t seat a potentia lly dange rous place for a child to ride. The front seat is not the safest place for a child in a forward-facing child .,. '<t 227 Airb a g syste m seat . It can be a very dangerous place fo r an infant or a child in a rearward -facing seat. The Advanced Airbag System in your veh icle has been ce rt ified to comp ly with the requirements of United States Federa l Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208, as well as Canada Motor Veh icle Safety Standard (CMVSS) 208 as applica ble at the time your vehicle was manufactured. According to requirements, the front Advanced Airbag System on the passenger s ide has been certified for "suppression " for infants of about 12 month old and younger and for "low risk deployment " for children aged 3 to 6 years old (as defined in the standard). The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light in the instrument panel tells you when the front Advanced Airbag on the passenger side has been t urned off by the ele ct roni c con tr ol un it. Each t ime you sw itch on the ign it ion, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light will come on fo r a few seconds and: - will stay on if the front passenger seat is not occupied, - will stay on if there is a small child or child restraint on the front passenger seat, - will go off if the front passenger seat is occupied by an adult as reg istered by the weight sensing mat ¢ page 236, Monitoring the Advanced Airbag System . The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light comes on when the control unit detects a tota l we ight on the front passenger seat that requires the front a irbag to be turned off. If the tota l weight on the front passenger seat is more than that of a typical 1 year -old child but less than the we ight of a small adult, the front a irbag on the passenger side can deploy (the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ligh t does not come on) . If t he PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not come on, the front a irbag on the passenger side has not been turned off by the electronic control unit and can deploy if the control unit senses an impact that meets the condit ions stor ed in its memory. For example, the airbag may deploy if: 228 - a small ch ild that is heav ier than a typica l 1 year-o ld child is on the front passenger seat (regard less of whether the child is in one of the child seats listed ¢ page 250), or - a child who has outgrown child restraints the front passenger seat. is on If t he front passenger a irbag is t urned off, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light comes on in the instrument cluster and stays on. The fro nt airbag on the passenge r side m ay not deploy (the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not illuminate and stay lit) even if a small adu lt or teenager, or a passenger who is not sitting upright with their back against a non-recl ined backrest with the ir fee t on the vehicle floor in front of the sea t is on t he front passenger seat <=> page 208 , Proper seating position for the driv er . If the front passenger a irbag deploys, the Federal Standard requires the airbag to meet the "low risk" deployment cr iteria to reduce the risk of inj ury th rough interaction w ith the airbag . "low risk" deployment occurs in t hose crashes that ta ke place at lowe r d ecele rations as defi ned in the e lec t ronic co nt rol unit ¢ page 23 7, PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF light. Always remembe r, a ch ild seat or infant ca rrie r insta lled on the fron t seat may be str uck a nd knocked out of pos it ion by t he rapid ly inflat ing passenger 's airbag in a frontal co llision . The a irbag cou ld great ly reduce the effectiveness of the child rest raint and even seriously injure the child during inflat ion. For th is reason, and beca use the back seat is the safest place for children - when proper ly restrain ed according to their age and size - we strongly recommend that children always sit in the back seat c>page 248, Child safety . A WARNING A child in a rearward-facing child seat installed on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured and can be killed if the front airbag inflates - even with an Advanced Airbag Syst em. Airb a g sys tem - The inflating airbag will hit the child seat or infant carrier with great force and will smash the ch ild seat and child against the backrest, center armrest, door or roof . - Always install rear-facing child seats on the rear seat. - If you must install a rearward fac ing ch ild seat on the front passenger seat because of exceptional circumstances and the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFFlight does not come on and stay on, immediately insta ll the rearfacing child seat in a rea r seat ing position and have the airbag system inspected by yo ur Audi dealer. - Forward-fac ing ch ild seats insta lled on the front passenge r's seat may int erfere with the deployment of the airbag and cause serious persona l injury to the child. ,&. WARNING ,&. WARNING To reduce the risk of serious injury, make sure that the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFFlight will be d isplayed whenever a child restraint is installed on the front passenger seat and the ignition is switched on . - If the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFFlight does not stay on , perform t he checks described ~ page 236, Monitoring the Advanced Airbag System. - Take the child restra int off t he front passenge r seat and install it prope rly at one of the rear sea t positions if the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFFlight does not stay on . - Have the a irbag system inspec t ed by your Audi dealer immediately. - Always carefully follow ins t ructions from child restrain t manufacture rs when installing child restraints . I= If, in exceptional circumstances, you must i;stall a forward-facing chi ld restraint on the front passenger's seat: - Always ma ke sure the forward -facing seat has been designed and certified by its manufact urer for use on a front seat with a passenger front and side a irbag. - Never put the forward-facing child restraint up against or very near the instrument panel. 0 co .... - Always move the front passenger seat to the highest position in the up and down adjustment range and move it back to the rearmost position in the seat's fore and aft adjus t ment range, as fa r away from the airbag as possib le, before insta lling the forwa rd-facing child restra int. - Always make sure tha t the safety belt upper anchorage is beh ind the child restrain t and not next to or in front of the chi ld res t raint so that the safety belt will be properly pos itioned. - Make sure t ha t the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFFlight comes on and stays on all the time whenever the ignition is switched on . If, in exceptional circumstances, you must install a forward or rearward-facing child restra int on the front passenger's seat: - Imp roper installation of child restraints can reduce their effectiveness or even prevent them from providing any protect ion. - An improperly installed child restra int can interfere with the airbag as it deploys and serious ly injure or even kill the chi ld - even with an Advanced Airbag System. - Always care fully follow the manufacturer 's instr uctions provided with the child seat or car rier. - Never place add itiona l items on the seat that can increase the total weight registered by the weight -sensing mat and can cause injury in a crash. N ,..... .... N 0 0 :c '<t 229 Airbag Front syste m airbags Description of front airbags The airbag system can provide supplemental protection to properly restrained front seat occupants. There is a lot you need to know about the airbags in your vehicle . We urge you to read the detai led information about airbags, safety belts and child safety in this and the other chapters that make up the owner's literature. Please be sure to heed the WARNINGS - they are extremely important for your safety and the safety of your passengers, especially infants and small children . .&_WARNING - Fig. 230 Location of driver airbag: in steering whee l Never rely on airbags alone for protection. - Even when they deploy, airbags provide only supp lemental protection. - Airbag work most effectively when used with properly worn safety be lts . - Therefore, always wear your safety belts and make sure that everybody in your veh icle is properly restrained . .&_WARNING Fig. 231 Location of fro nt passenger's airbag: in t he instrument panel Your veh icle is equipped with an "Adva nced Airbag System " in compliance with United States Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208 , as well as Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (CMVSS) 208 as applicable at the time your vehicle was manufactured. he safety belts for the seats have "pretensioners" that help to take s lack out of the belt system. The pretensioners are also activated by the electronic control unit for the airbag system. The front safety be lts also have load limiters to help reduce the forces applied to the body in a crash. The airbag for the driver is in the steering wheel hub~ fig. 230 and the airbag for the front passenger is in the instrument panel ~ fig. 231. The general location of the airbags is marked "AIRBAG". 230 A person on the front passenger seat, especially infants and small ch ildr en, will receive serious injuries and can even be killed by being too close to the airbag when it inf lates. - Although the Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle is designed to turn off the front passenger airbag if an infant or a small child is on the front passenger seat, nobody can absolutely guarantee that deployment under these special conditions is impossible in all conceivable situations that may happen during the useful life of your vehicle. - The Advanced Airbag System can deploy in accordance with the "low risk" option under the U.S. Federal Standard if a child that is heav ier than the typical one-year old ch ild is on the front passenger seat and the other conditions fo r airbag deployment are met. - Accident statistics have shown that children are generally safer in the rear seat area than in the front seat ing pos ition . - For their own safety, all chi ldr en, especially 12 years and younger, should always ride in the back proper ly restrained for their age and size . - Airb a g sys tem Advanced front airbag system Your veh icle is equipped with a front Advanced Airbag System in compliance with United States Federa l Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208, as well as Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (CMVSS)208 as applicable at the time your vehicle was manufactured . The front Advanced Airbag System supp lements the safety belts to provide additional protection for the driver 's and front passenger's heads and upper bodies in frontal crashes . The airbags inf late only in frontal impacts when the veh icle decele ration is high enough. The front Advanced Airbag System for the front seat occupants is not a substitute for your safety be lts . Rather, it is part of the overall occupant rest ra int system in your vehicle. Always remember that the airbag system can on ly help to protect you, if you are sitting upr ight, wear ing your safety belt and wear ing it prope rly. This is why you and your passengers must always be prope rly restra ined, not just beca use the law req uires you t o be . The Advanced Airbag System in your veh icle has been ce rtified to meet the "low risk" requi rements fo r 3 and 6 year -old children o n the passenger side and very sma ll adults on the drive r side . The low risk dep loyment criteria are intended to help reduce the risk of injury through interaction with the front a irbag that can occur, for examp le, by being too close to the steering wheel and instrument panel when the airbag inflates . in Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208 with which the Advanced Airbag System in your veh icle was certif ied. For a Listing of the child restraints that were used to certify your vehicle's compliance with the US Safety Standard ¢ page 250, - weight less than a threshold level stored in the cont rol un it is detected on the front passenger seat . When a person is detected on the front passenger seat, weighing more than the total weight of a chi ld that is about 1 year old restra ined in one of the rear-facing or forward -fac ing infant restraints (listed in Federal Motor Veh icle Safety Standard 208 with which the Advanced Airbag System in your veh icle was certified), the front airbag on t he passenge r s ide may o r may not deploy . The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light comes o n whe n the elect ronic control unit detects a tota l weight on the fron t passenger sea t t hat req uires the front airbag to be turned off . If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not come on, the front airbag on the passenger side has not been turned off by the control unit and can dep loy if the control unit senses an impact that meets the condit ions stored in its memory . If the total weight on the front passenger seat is more than that of a typica l 1 year-old, but less than the weight of a small adult, the front airbag on the passenger s ide may deploy (the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not come on) . For example , the ai rbag may deploy if : In addition , the system has been certified to comp ly with the "suppression" requi rements of the Safety Standard, to turn off the front a irbag for infants 12 months old and younger who are restrained on the front passenger seat in child restra ints that are listed in the Standa rd page 250, Child restraints and Advanced Airbags. ¢ "Suppress ion" requ ires the front a irbag on the passenger side to be turned off if: 0 co .... - a ch ild up to about one year of age is restra ined N on the front passenger seat in one of the rear.... 0 N ,..... 0 :c facing or forward -fac ing infant restra ints listed - a sma ll chi ld that is heav ier t han a typ ica l 1 yea r-old child is on the front passenger seat (regard less of whether the child is in one of the child seats listed ¢ page 250), - a child who has outgrown child restraints is on the front passenger seat. If the front passenge r a irbag is t urned off, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light in the center of the instrument pane l will come on and stay on . The front airbag on the passenger side may not deploy (the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not illuminate and stay lit) if: ..,. '<t 231 Airb a g syste m - a small adu lt or teenager is on the front pas senger seat - a passenger who is not sitting upright with their back against a non -reclined backrest with their feet on the vehicle floor in front of the seat is on the front passenger seat. If the front passenger airbag dep loys, the Feder al Standard requires the airbag to meet the "low risk" deployment criteria to help reduce the risk of injury through interaction with the airbag. "Low risk" deployment occurs in those crashes that take place at lower decelerations as def ined in the electronic control unit¢ page 236 . Always remember: Even though your vehicle is equ ipped with Advanced Airbags, the safest place for children is properly restrained on the back seat . Please be sure to read the important informat ion in the sections that follow and be sure to heed a ll of the WARNINGS. A WARNING To red uce the risk of injury when an airbag infla t es, a lways wear safety bel t s properly. - If you are unrestrained, leaning fo rwa rd, s itt ing s ideways or out of pos ition in any way, your risk of inju ry is much higher . - You will also receive serious injur ies and could even be killed if you are up aga inst the airbag or too close to it when it inflates even with an Advanced Airbag ¢ page 226. A WARNING A child in a rearward-facing chi ld seat insta lled on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured and can be killed if the front airbag inflates - even with an Advanced Airbag System. - Although the Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle is designed to turn off the front airbag when a rearward-facing child restraint has been installed on the front passenger seat, nobody can absolutely g uarantee that deployment is impossible in all conceivable s ituations that may happen during the usef ul life of your vehicle . - The inflating a irbag will hit the child seat or infant carrier w ith great force and will 232 smash the child seat and child against the backrest, center armrest, door, or roof. - Always install rearward-facing child restraints on the rear seat. - If you must install a rearward facing child seat on the front passenge r seat because of except ional circumstances and the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF light does not come on and stay on, immed iate ly install the rearfacing chi ld seat in a rear seating posit ion and have the airbag system inspected by your Audi dea le r. A WARNING If, in exceptional circums t ances, you must install a forward-facing child restraint on the fron t passenger's seat: - Always make sure the forward-fa cing sea t has been des igned and certified by its manufacturer for use on a fr ont seat with a pas senger front and side airbag. - Never put the forwa rd-facing child restrain t up against or very near the instr ument pan - el. - - Always move the front passenge r seat to the highest position in the up and down adjustment range and move it back to the rearmost posit ion in the seat's fore and aft adj ustment range, as far away from the a irbag as poss ible, before install ing the forward-facing chi ld restraint. - Always make sure that the safety be lt upper anchorage is behind the ch ild restraint and not next to or in fron t of the child restraint so that the safety be lt will be properly positioned. - Make sure that the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF light comes on and stays on a ll the time wheneve r the ign it ion is switc hed on. · Advanced Airbag System components The fro nt passenge r sea t in your veh icle has a lot of very important parts of the Advanced Airbag System in it. These parts include t he weightsensing mat, sensors, wiring, brackets, and more. The function of the system in the front passenger seat is checked by the electronic 1111> Airb a g sys tem control unit when the ignition is on. The contro l unit monitors the Advanced Airbag System and turns the airbag indicator light on when a ma lfunction in the system components is detected. The funct ion of the a irbag indicator light is descr ibed in greater deta il below . Because the front passenger seat contains important parts of the Advanced Airbag System, you must take care to prevent it from being damaged. Damage to the seat may preven t the Advanced Airbag for the fron t passenger seat from doing its job in a crash . The front Advanced Airbag System consists of the follo wing : 0 .... co ~ .... N 0 0 :c - Crash sensors in the front of the vehicle that measure vehicle acceleration/deceleration to provide information to the Advanced Airbag System a bout the severity of the crash. - An electronic control unit, with integrated crash sensors for front and side impacts. The control unit "decides" whether to fire the front airbags based on the information received from the crash sensors. The control unit also "decides" whether the safety belt pretens ioners should be activated . - An Advanced Airbag with gas generator and control valve for the driver ins ide the steer ing wheel hub . - An Advanced Airbag with gas generator and control valve inside the instrument pa nel for the front passenger. - A weig ht-sensing mat under the upholstery padd ing of the front passenger seat cushion that meas ures the total weight on the seat. The information registered is sent continuously to the e lectron ic cont rol unit to reg ulate dep loyment of the front Adva need Airbag on the passenger side . - An airbag monitoring system and indicator light in the instrument cluster ¢ page 236. - A sensor in eac h front seat registers t he distance between the respective seat and the steering wheel or instrument pane l. The information registered is sent contin uously to the electronic control unit to regulate deployment of the front Adva need Airbags. - The PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF light comes on and stays on in the center of the instrument pane l ¢ page 237, fig. 233 and te lls you when the front Advanced Airbag on the passenger side has been turned off. - A sensor below the safety be lt latch for the front seat passenger to measure the tension on the safety belt. The t ension on the safety belt and the we ight registered by the weight -sensing mat help the contro l unit "decide" whether the front airbag fo r the front passenger seat should be tu rned off or not ¢ page 22 7, Child restraints on the front seat - some important things to know. - A sensor in the safety belt latch for the driver and for the front seat passenger that senses whether that safety be lt is latched or not and transmits this information to the electronic control unit. A ,- WARNING Damage to the front passenger seat can prevent the front airbag from working properly. - Improper repair or disassembly of the front passenger and driver seat will prevent the Advanced Airbag System from funct ion ing properly . - Repairs to the front passenger seat must be performed by qualified and properly trained workshop personnel. - Never remove the front passenger or driver seat from the vehicle. - Never remove the upholstery from the front passenger seat. - Never d isassemble or remove parts from the seat or disconnect wires from it. - Never carry sharp objects in your pockets or place them on the seat. If the weight-sensing mat in the passenger seat is punctured it cannot work properly . - Never carry things on your lap or carry objects on the passenger seat . Such items can increase the weight reg istered by the weight-sensing mat and send the wrong information to the a irbag cont rol unit. - Never store items under the front passenger seat. Parts of the Advanced Airbag System under the passenger seat cou ld be '<t 233 ~ Airb a g syste m - - - - - damaged, preventing them and the airbag system from working properly. Never place seat covers or rep lacement upholstery that have not been specifically approved by Audi on the front seats . Seat covers can prevent the Advanced Airbag System from recognizing child restraints or occupants on the front passenger seat and prevent the side a irbag in the seat backrest from deploying properly. Never use cush ions, pillows, blankets or similar items on the front passenger seat. The add it ional padding will prevent the weight-sens ing mat in the seat from accurately reg istering the ch ild restraint or person on the seat and prevent the Advanced Airbag System from funct ioning properly. If you must use a child rest raint on the front passenge r seat and t he child restraint manufacturer 's instructions require the use of a towel, foam cushion or something else to properly position the ch ild restraint, make certain that the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF light comes on and stays on whenever the child restraint is installed on the front passenger seat. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not come on and stay on, immed iately install child restraint in a rear seating position and have the airbag system inspected by yo ur Audi dealer. eration as well as the mass and stiffness of the vehicle or object involved in the crash . On the passenger side, regard less of safety be lt use, the airbag will be turned off if the weight on the passenger seat is less than the amount programmed in the electronic control unit . The front airbag on the passenger side will also be turned off if one of the child seats that has been certified under Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208 has been recognized on the seat. The PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF light comes on and stays on to tell you when the front Advanced Airbag on the passenger side has been tu rned off q page 22 7, Child restraints on the front seat- some important things to know. A WARNING To reduce the risk of injury when an airbag inf lates, always wea r safety belts properly. - If you are un restrained, leaning forward, sit ting sideways or out of position in any way, your risk of injury is much higher. - You will a lso receive serious injuries and could even be killed if you are up against the airbag or too close to it when it inflates even with an Advanced Airbag q page 226. More important things to know about front airbags How the Advanced Airbag System components work together The front Advanced Airbag System and the side airbags supplement the protection offered by the front three-po int safety belts with pretensioners and load limiters and the adjustable head restra ints to help reduce the risk of injury in a wide range of accident and crash situations. Be sure to read the important informa t ion about safety and heed the WARNINGS in t his chapter. Deployment of the Advanced Airbag System and the act ivat ion of the safety belt pretensioners depend on the deceleration measu red by the crash sensors and regis t ered by the electronic control unit. Crash severity depends on speed and decel2 34 Fig. 232 Inflated front airbags Safety be lts are important to help keep front seat occupants in the proper seated position so that airbags can unfold properly and prov ide supplemental protection in a fronta l collision . ..,. Airb a g sys tem The front airbags are designed to provide additional protection for the chest and face of the driver and the front seat passenger when: - safety belts are worn prope rly, - the seats have been positioned so that the occupant is properly sea t ed as far as possible from the airbag, - and the head restra ints have been properly adjusted. Because airbags inflate in the blink of an eye w ith g reat fo rce, things you have on your lap or have placed on the seat cou ld become dangerous projectiles , and be pushed into you if the ai rbag inflates. When an a irbag deploys, fine dust is released. This is normal and is not caused by a fire in the vehicle. This dust is made up mostly of a powder used t o lubricate the airbags as they deploy. It could irritate skin. It is important to remember that whi le t he supplemental air bag system is designed t o reduce the likel ihood of ser ious injuries, other inj uries, for example swelling, bru ising and minor abrasions, can a lso happen when airbags inflate . Airbags do not protect the arms or the lower parts of the body. Front airbags supplement the threepoint safety belts only in some frontal collisions in which the ve hicle decelerat io n is high enough to deploy the airbags . Front airbags will not deploy: - if the ignit ion is switched off when a crash occurs, - in side collisions, - in rear-end collisions, - in rollove rs, - when the crash decelerat ion meas ured by the airbag system is less t han the minimum t hresho ld needed for airbag deployment as registered by the electronic contro l unit. The front passenger airbag also will not de ploy: 0 co .... N ,..... .... N 0 - when the front passenger seat is not occ upied, - when the we igh t on t he fron t passenge r seat as sensed by t he Advanced Airbag System indicates that the front a irbag on the passenger side has to be turned off by the e lectronic control unit (the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF light comes on and stays on). A WARNING Sitting in the wrong position can increase the risk of ser ious injury in crashes . - To reduce the risk of injury when the airbags inflate, the driver and passengers must always sit in an upright posit ion, must not lean aga inst or place any part of their body too close to the area where the airbags are located. - Occupants who are unbelted, out of posit ion or t oo close to the airbag can be serio us ly injur ed by an airbag as it unfolds with g reat force in t he blink of an eye ~ page 22 7. A WARNING - A child in a rearward-facing child seat installed on the front passenger seat will be seri ously injured and can be killed if the front airbag inflates - evenwith an AdvancedAirbag System. - The inflating airbag will hit the child seat or infant carrier with great force and will smash the child seat and child against the backrest, center armrest, door or roof. - Always install rear-fac ing child seats on the rear seat. - If you must install a rea rward facing child seat on the front passenger seat because of except ional circumstances and the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF light does not come on and stay on, immed iate ly install the rearfacing chi ld seat in a rear seating posit io n a nd have the airbag system inspected by your Audi dea le r. A WARNING Objects between you an d the airbag will increase the risk of injury in a crash by interfer ing with the way the airbag unfolds or by being pushed into you as the airbag inflates . - Never hold things in your hands or on your lap when the vehicle is in use . 0 :c '<t 235 Airb a g syste m - Never t ra nsport items on or in the area of t he fr ont passenger seat. Objects could m ove into the area of the front airbags during brak ing or oth e r sudden maneuvers and become dangerous projectiles that can cause serious pe rsonal injury if the a irbags inflate. - Never place or attach accessor ies or other objects (such as cup holders, te lephone brackets, large, heavy or bulky objects) on the doors, over or ne ar t he area marked "AIRBAG"on the steering wheel, instru ment pane l, seat bac krests or between t hose areas and yourself. These objects could cause injury in a crash, especially when the airbags inflate. - Never recline the front passenge r's seat to transport objects. Items can also move into the area of the side airbag or the front a irbag dur ing braking or in a s udden maneuver. Objects near t he airbags can become projectiles and cause inj ury, particularly when the sea t is re clined. .8, WARNING The f ine dust create d when airbags d eploy can cause breathing problems for people w ith a hist ory of asthma or ot her breathing conditions . - To reduce t he risk of brea t hing pro blems, those w ith asthma or ot her respiratory con ditions should get fresh air right away by gett ing out of the vehicle or opening w indows or doors. - If you are in a collision in which airbags deploy, wash your hands and face with mild soap and water before eat ing. - Be careful not to get the dust into your eyes, or into any cuts or scratches. - If the resid ue should get into your eyes, flush them with water. 236 Monitoring Advanced the Airbag System tli (USA models )/ !{' (Canada model s) Airbag monitoring indicator light Two separate indicators monitor the function of the Advanced Airbag System: the airbag monitoring indicator light and the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF light. The Advanced Airbag System (including the e lectronic control unit, sensor circuits and system wiring) is monitored continuously to make sure that it is functioning properly whenever the ignition is o n. Each time you sw itch on the ig nition, (USA the a irbag mo nitor ing indica t or light models)/ fll (Canada models) w ill come o n for a few seconds (se lf d iagnost ics) . II The system must be inspected when the (USA models) / E,I (Canada indicator light models) : fl - does not come on when t he igni t ion is sw itched on, - does not go out a few se cond s afte r you have sw itched on the ignit ion, or - comes on while driving. If an airbag system malfunction is detected, the indica t or light will come on to se rve as a constant rem inder to have t he system inspected immediate ly. If a ma lfunction occurs that turns the front airbag on the passenge r side off, the PASSENGER AI R BAG OFF light w ill come on and stay o n whe never the ignition is on. _& WARNING An a irbag system t hat is not functioning prope rly cannot provide sup plemental pro t ect ion in a fronta l crash . - If t he a irbag ind icat or ligh t <=? page 23 comes when the vehicle is being used, have the system inspected immediately by your author ized Audi dealer . It is possib le that the airbag will inflate when it is not supposed to, or will not inflate when it should. Airb a g sys tem PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light AIR BAG OFF light will stay on . Never insta ll a rearward -facing child restraint on the front passenger seat, the safest place for a child in any kind of child restraint is at one of the seating pos itions on the rear seat ¢ page 22 7, Child restraints on the front seat - some important things to know and ¢ page 248, Child safety. I f the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light come s on Fig. 233 Section fr om the instrument panel: PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF lig ht The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light is located in the center of the instrument panel ¢ fig. 233 . The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light will come on and stay on to tell you when the front Advanced Airbag on the passenger side has been turned off by the electronic control unit . Each time you switch on the ignition, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light will flash for a few seconds and : - will stay on if the front passenger seat is not occupied, - will stay on if there is a small child or child restraint on t he front passenger seat, - will go out if the fro nt passenge r seat is occupied by an adul t as reg istered by the weightsensing mat . The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light m ust come on and st ay on if the ignition is on and 0 co .... N ,..... .... N 0 - a car bed has been installed on the front seat, or - a rearward-facing child restraint has been installed on the front passenger seat, or - a forward-facing child restra int has been installed on the front passenger seat, or - the weight reg istered on the front passenger seat is equal to or less than the combined we ight of a typical 1 year -old restrained in one of the rear-facing or forward-fac ing infant restraints listed in Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208 with which the Advanced Airbag System in your ve hicle was certified . If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the front a irbag will not deploy, and the PASSENGER when one of the conditions listed above is met, be sure to check the light regularly to make cer ta in that the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light stays on continuously whenever the ignition is on. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not appea r on and does no t stay on all the time , stop as soon as it is safe to do so and - reactivate the system by sw itching the ign ition off and then switching it on aga in; - remove and re install the child restraint . Make sure that the child restra int is properly insta lled and t ha t the safety belt for the front passenger seat ha s bee n correct ly routed th rough the child restraint as desc ribed in the child restraint manufacturer's instructions; - make sure that the convert ible locking retracto r on the safety belt for the fro nt passenge r seat has been activated and that the safety belt has been pulled tight. The belt must not be loose or have loops of slack so t hat the sensor be low the safety belt latch on the seat can do its job ¢ page 258 . - make su re that th ings that may increase the weight of the child and ch ild seat are not being transported on the front passenge r seat; - make su re that the safety be lt tens ion sensor is not blocked. Shake the safety belt latch on the front passenger seatback and forth; - If a strap or tether is being used t o tie t he child seat to the front passenger seat, make su re that it is not so tight that it causes the weightsensi ng mat to measure more weight than is act ually on the seat. If th e PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light still does not come on and does not stay on continuously (whe n the ign ition is sw itc hed on), - take the child restra int off the front passenger seat and install it properly at one of the rear 0 :c -<t 237 ..,_ Airb a g syste m seat positions. Have the airbag system inspected by your Audi dealer immediately. - move the chi ld to a rear seat position and make sure that the child is properly restrained in a child restraint that is appropriate for its size and age . The PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF light shou ld NOT come on when the ignition is on and an adu lt is sitting in a proper seating position on the front passenger seat. If the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF light comes on and stays on or flashes for about 5 seconds while driving, under these circumstances, make sure that: - the adu lt on the front passenger seat is properly seated on the center of the seat cushion with his or her back up aga inst the backrest and the backrest is not recl ined r=>page 208, Correct passenger seating positions, - the adult is not taking weight off the seat by hold ing on to the passenger assist handle above the front passenger door or supporting their we ight on the arm rest, - the safety be lt is be ing properly worn and that there is not a lot of slack in the safety belt webbing, - accessory seat covers or cushions or other th ings that may cause an inco rrect read ing o r imp ression on t he weight-sens ing mat under the upho lst ery of t he seat have been removed from the front passenger seat, - a safety be lt extende r has not been left in the safety belt latch for the front passenge r seat . In addition to the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF light in the center of the inst rument panel, the message PASSENGERAIR BAGOFFor PASSENGERAIR BAGON will briefly appear in the inst rument cluster display. This is to inform the driver of the current front passenger airbag status. Important safety instructions on monitoring the Advanced Airbag System _& WARNING An airbag system that is not funct ion ing proper ly cannot provide supplemental protection in a frontal crash. 238 - If the airbag indicator light r=>page 23 comes when the veh icle is being used, have the system inspected immediately by your author ized Audi dealer. It is possible that the airbag will inflate when it is not supposed to, or will not inflate when it should. _& WARNING If the front a irbag inflates, a ch ild without a chi ld restraint, or in a rea rwa rd-facing child safety seat, or in a forward-fa cing child restra int that has not been properly insta lled will be seriously injured and can be killed. - Even tho ugh you r vehicle is equipped with an Advanced Airbag System, make certain that a ll children, espec ia lly 12 years and younge r, always ride on the back seat properly restrained for their age and s ize. - Always install forward or rear-facing child seats on the rear seat - even with an Advanced Airbag System. - If you must insta ll a rearwa rd-facing child seat on the front passenger seat because of exceptional circumstancesand the PASSEN· GERAIR BAGOFFlight does not appear and stay on, immediate ly install the rear-facing child seat in a rea r seat ing pos ition and have the airbag system inspected by your Audi dea le r. - A t ight tether or other strap on a rearwardfacing chi ld restraint attached to the front passenger sea t can put too much pressure on the weight-sensing mat in the seat and register more weight than is actually on the seat. The heavier weight registered can make the system work as though an adu lt were on the seat and deploy the Advanced Airbag when it must be suppressed causing serious or even fatal injury to the child. - If, in exceptional circumstances, you must install a forward-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat, always move the seat into its rearmost position in the seat 's fore and aft adj ustment range, as far away from t he air bag as poss ible. The back rest must be adjus t ed to an upr ight position. Make sure that the PASSENGERAIR BAG Airbag OFF light comes on and stays on all the time whenever the ignition is switched on. A WARNING - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not go out when an adult is sitting on the front passenger seat after taking the steps described above, make sure the adult is properly seated and restrained at one of the rear seating positions. - Have the airbag system inspected by your Audi dealer before transporting anyone on the front passenger seat. {D) Tips If the weight-sensing mat in the front passenger seat detects an empty seat, the front airbag on the passenger side will be turned off, and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light will stay on. Repair, care and disposal of the airbags Parts of the airbag system are installed at many different places on your Audi. Installing, removing, servicing or repairing a part in an area of the vehicle can damage a part of an airbag system and prevent that system from working properly in a collision . There are some important things you have to know to make sure that the effectiveness of the system will not be impaired and that discarded components do not cause injury or pollute the environment. A 0 co .... N ,..._ .... N 0 0 :c WARNING Improper care, servicing and repair procedures can increase the risk of personal injury and death by preventing an airbag from deploying when needed or deploying an airbag unexpectedly: - Never cover, obstruct, or change the steering wheel horn pad or airbag cover or the instrument panel or modify them in any way. - Never attach any objects such as cup holders or telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units. system - For cleaning the horn pad or instrument panel, use only a soft, dry cloth or one moistened with plain water. Solvents or cleaners could damage the airbag cover or change the stiffness or strength of the material so that the airbag cannot deploy and protect properly. - Never repair, adjust, or change any parts of the airbag system. -All work on the steering wheel, instrument panel, front seats or electrical system (including the installation of audio equipment, cellular telephones and CB radios, etc.) must be performed by a qualified technician who has the training and special equipment necessary. - For any work on the airbag system, we strongly recommend that you see your authorized Audi dealer or qualified workshop. - Never modify the front bumper or parts of the vehicle body. - Always make sure that the side airbag can inflate without interference: - Never install seat covers or replacement upholstery over the front seatbacks that have not been specifically approved by Audi. - Never use additional seat cushions that cover the areas where the side airbags inflate. - Damage to the original seat covers or to the seam in the area of the side airbag module must always be repaired immediately by an authorized Audi dealer. - The airbag system can be activated only once. After an airbag has inflated, it must be replaced by an authorized Audi dealer or qualified technician who has the technical information, training and special equipment necessary. - The airbag system can be deployed only once. After an airbag has been deployed, it must be replaced with new replacement parts designed and approved especially for your Audi model version. Replacement of complete airbag systems or airbag components must be performed by qualified workshops only. Make sure that any airbag '<t 239 Ill- Airb a g syste m service action is entered in your Audi Warranty & Maintenance book let under AIRBAG REPLACEMENT RECORD. - For safety reasons in severe accidents, the alternator and starter are separated from the vehicle battery with a pyrotechnic circuit interrupter. - Work on the pyrotechnic circuit interrupter must only be performed by a qualified dea ler· risk of an accident! - If the veh icle or the circuit interrupter is scrapped, all applicab le safety precautions must be followed . @ For the sake of the environment Undeployed airbag modu les and pretension ers might be classified as Perch lorate Material - special handling may apply, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. When the vehicle or parts of the restraint system including airbag modules and safety belts with pretensioners are scrapped, all applicable laws and regulations must be observed. Your authorized Audi dealer is fam iliar with these requirements and we recommend that you have your dealer perform this serv ice for you . Other things that can affect Advanced Airbag performance Changing the vehicle's suspension system can change the way that the Advanced Airbag System performs in a crash. For example, using t ire-r im comb inat ions not approved by Audi, lower ing the veh icle, chang ing the st iffness of the suspens ion, including the springs, suspension struts, shock absorbers etc. can change the forces that are measured by the airbag senso rs and sent t o t he electronic contro l unit. Some suspension changes can, for example, increase the force levels measured by the sensors and make the airbag system deploy in crashes in which it would not deploy if the changes had not been made. Other kinds of changes may reduce the force levels meas ured by the sensors and prevent the airbag from deploying when it should . 240 A WARNING Changing the vehicle's suspension including use of unapproved tire-rim comb inations can change Advanced Airbag performance and increase the risk of serious personal injury in a crash. - Never insta ll suspension components that do not have the same performance character istics as the components origina lly inst alled on you r vehicle. - Never use t ire-r im combinations that have not been approved by Audi. A WARNING It ems stored between the safety belt buckle and the center conso le can cause the sensors in the buckle to send the wrong information to the electronic contro l module and prevent the Advanced Airbag System from working proper ly. - Always make sure that nothing can interfere with the safety belt buckles and that they are not obstructed. Knee airbags Description of knee airbags The knee airbag system can provide supplemental protection to properly restrained front seat occupants. Fig. 234 Driver's knee airbag The driver knee airbag is in the instrument panel underneath the steering wheel ~ fig. 234, the airbag for the passenger is at about the same height in the instrument panel underneath the glove compartment . ..,_ Airb a g sys tem The knee airbag offers additional protection to the driver's and passenger's knees and upper and lower th igh areas and supp lements the protection provided by the safety belts. If the front airbags dep loy, the knee airbags also deploy in fronta l collisions when the dep loyment threshold stored in the contro l unit is met c:::> page 234, More important things to know about front airbags. In addition to their normal safety function, safety belts help keep the driver or front passenger in position in a frontal coll is ion so that the a irbags can prov ide supplemental protect ion. The airbag system is not a substitute for your safety belt. Rather, it is part of the overall occu pant restraint system in your vehicle . Always remember that the airbag system can only help to protect you if you are wearing your safety belt and wear ing it properly . This is why yo u should always wear your safety belt, not j ust because the law requires you to do so <=> page 218, General information. Remember too, airbags will deploy only once and on ly in certain kinds of accidents -your safety be lts are always t here t o offer protection in those accidents in wh ich airbags are not supposed to deploy or w hen they have a lready dep loyed, for examp le when your vehicle strikes or is struck by another after the first collision . - The a irbag indicator light in the instrument panel The knee airbag system will not deploy: - when the ignit ion is switched off - in fronta l collisions when the decelerat ion meas ured by t he contro l unit is too low - in side collisions - in rear-end collisions - in rollovers - in the event of a system malfunction (warning/ ind icator light is on) c:::> page 23. A - WARNING - Safety belts and the airbag system can only provide protect ion when occupants are in page 234. the prope r seat ing pos ition c:::> - If the airbag ind icator light c:::> page 23 comes when the veh icle is being used, have the system inspected immediately by your author ized Audi dealer. It is possib le that the airbag will inflate when it is not supposed to, or w ill not inf late w hen it should. How knee airbags work The risk of injury to the leg area can be reduced by fully inflated knee airbags . This is jus t one of the reasons why an airbag is not a substitute for the safety belt . The a irbag system works most effectively when used with the safety belts . Therefore, a lways wear your safety belts correct ly. It is important to remember that wh ile the supplemental knee airbag system is designed to red uce the likelihood of serious injuries, other injuries, for example, swell ing, bruising and minor abrasions and friction burns can also occur when an airbag inf lates. The knee airbag system basically consists of: C) - The electronic contro l module .... - Two inf latab le airbags (airbag and gas genera"' ""'.... tor), one for the driver and one fo r the front 0 C0 0 :r passenger Fig. 235 Inflated airbags protect ing in a fro nta l collision The knee airbag system has been designed so that the airbags for the driver and front passenger deploy in certain but not all frontal collisions . If the front airbags deploy, the knee airbags also deploy in frontal collis ions when the deployment threshold stored in the control unit is met. When the system deploys, the airbags fill with a Illprope llant gas, and infla t e between the lower <t 241 Airbag system part of the instrument panel and the driver and the lower part of the instrument panel and the front passenger c>poge 234, fig. 232. Although they are not a soft pillow, they can "cushion" the impact and in this way they can help to reduce the risk of injury to the lower extremities. All of this takes place in the blink of an eye, so fast that many people don't even realize that the airbags have deployed. The airbags also inflate with a great deal of force and it is important for occupant safety that nothing should be in their way when they deploy. Fully inflated airbags in combinat ion with properly worn safety belts slow down and limit the occupant's forward movement and help to reduce t he risk of injury. Important safety instructions on the knee airbag system Airbags ore only supplemental restraints. Always wear safety belts correctly and ride in a proper seating position. There is a lot that you and your passengers must know and do to help the safety belts and airbags to provide supplemental protection . A WARNING An inflating knee airbag can cause serious injury. Wearing safety belts incorrectly and improper seating positions increase the risk of serious personal injury and death whenever a vehicle is being used. - The knee airbag system cannot protect you properly if you are seated too close to any of the airbag locations. When adjusting their seat positions, it is important that both the driver and the front passenger keep their upper bodies and knees at the following minimum safe distances : - at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the chest and the steering wheel/instrument panel. 242 - at least 4 inches (10 cm) between the knees and the lower part of the instrument panel. - The risk of personal injury increases if you lean forward or to the side, or if the seat is improperly positioned and you are not wearing your safety belt . The risk increases even more should the airbag deploy. - Always make sure that the knee airbag can inflate without interference . Objects between you and the airbag can increase the risk of injury in an accident by interfering with the way the airbag deploys or by being pushed into you as the airbag deploys. - Never let anybody, especially children or animals ride in the footwell in front of the passenger seat. If the airbag deploys, this can result in serious or fatal injuries . - Never carry objects of any kind in the footwell area in front of the driver's or passenger's seat. Bulky objects (shopping bags, for example) can interfere with or prevent proper deployment of the airbag. Small objects can be thrown through the vehicle if the airbag deploys and injure you or your passengers. - Make sure there are no cracks, deep scratches or other damage in the area of the instrument panel where the knee airbags are located . - If children are incorrectly seated, their risk of injury increases in a collision c>page 248, Child safety. Airbag Side airbags system since the circumstances will vary considerably between one collision and another. Important fac tors include, for example, the nature (hard or soft) of the impacting object, the angle of impact, vehicle speed, etc. ¢ page 244, Important Description of side airbags The airbag system can provide supplemental protection to properly restrained occupants. safety instructions on the side airbag system . N N I Fig. 236 Side airbag location in t he dr iver's seat The side airbags are locat ed in the sides of the front seat backrests¢ fig. 236 and the rear backrest facing the doors. They are identified by the word "AIRBAG". The side airbag system basically consists of: - the electronic control module and external side im pact sensors - the two side airbags located in the sides of the front backrests - two rear side airbags - the a irbag warning light in the instrument cluster . The airbag system is monitored electronically to make certain that it is functioning properly at all times. Each time you sw itch on the ign ition, the a irbag system indicator light will come on for a few seconds (self diag nostics). C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 0 :r <t The side airbag system supplements the safety belts and can help to reduce the risk of injury to the dr iver's, front and rear passenger's upper tor so on the side of the vehicle that is struck in a side coll is ion. The airbag deploys only in side impacts and only when the vehicle acceleration registered by the control unit is high enough. If this rate is below the reference value programmed into the control unit, the side curtain ai rbag will not be triggered, even though the car may be badly damaged as a result of the collision. It is not possible to define an airbag triggering range that will cover every poss ible angle of impact, Aside from their normal safety funct ion, safety belts work to help keep the driver or front passenger in position in the event of a side collision so that the side airbags can provide protection. The airbag system is not a substitute for your safety belt. Rather, it is part of the overall occupant restraint system in your vehicle. Always remember that the side airbag system can only help to protect you if you are wearing your safety belt and wear ing it prope rly. This is another re ason why you should always wear your safety belts, not just because the law requires you to do so ¢ page 218, General information . It is important to remember that while the supplementa l side airbag system is designed to reduce the likelihood of ser ious injuries, other injuries, for example, swelling, bruising, and minor abrasions can also be associated with deployed side airbags . Remember too, side airbags will deploy only once and only in certain kinds of accidents - your safety belts are always there to offer protection. Vehicle damage, repair costs or even the lack of vehicle damage are not necessar ily an ind ication of over-sens itive or fa iled a irbag activation. In some collisions, both front and side airbags may inflate . Remember too, that a irbags w ill deploy only once and only in certa in kinds of collisions you r safety belts are always t here to offer protection in those accidents in which airbags are not supposed to deploy or when they have already deployed. The side airbag system will not deploy: - when the ignition is switched off - in side collisions when the acceleration measured by the sensor is too low - in front-end collis ions - in rear-end collisions - in rollovers . 243 Airb a g syste m In some types of accidents the front airbags, side curtain airbags and side airbags may be triggered together . A WARNING - Safety belts and the airbag system will only provide protection when occupants are in the proper seating position ¢ page 244. - If the airbag indicator light¢ page 23 comes when the vehicle is being used, have the system inspected immediately by your authorized Audi dealer . It is possible that the a irbag will inflate when it is not supposed to, or will not inflate when it should. How supplemental side airbags work Side airbags deploy instantly and can help reduce the risk of upper torso injuries for occupants who are properly restrained. Although they are not a soft pillow, they can "cushion" the impact and in this way they can help to reduce the risk of injury to the upper part of the body . A fine dust may develop when the airbag dep loys. This is norma l and does not mean there is a fire in the veh icle. Important safety instructions on the side airbag system Airbags are only supplemen tal restrain ts. Always properly wear safety belts and ride in a proper seating position . There is a lot that you and your passengers must know and act accordingly to help the safety belts and airbags do their job to prov ide supplemental protect ion. A WARNING An inflating side a irbag can cause se rious or fata l injury. Imp roperly weari ng safety be lts and improper seating posit ions increase the risk of serious persona l injury and dea t h whenever a vehicle is being used . - In order to reduce the risk of injury when the s upplemental side airbag inflates: Fig. 237 Inflated side airbags on left side of vehicle , rear side airbag When the system is triggered, the a irbag is filled wit h propellant gas and breaks through a seam in the seat surface area marked "AIRBAG". It expands between the side trim pane l and the passenger. In orde r to help provide this additional protection, the side airbag must inflate within a fraction of a second at very high speed and with great force . The supplemental side airbag could injure you if your seating position is not proper or upright or if items are located in the area where the supplemental side airbag expands . This applies especially to children ¢ page 248, Child safety. Supplemental side a irbags inf late between the occupant and the door panel on the side of the vehicle that is struck in certain side coll ision ¢ fig. 23 7. 244 - Always s it in an upright position and never lean against the area where the supp lemental s ide airbag is located. - Never let a child or anyone e lse rest their head against the side tr im panel in the area where the supplemental side airbag inflates . - Always make sure that safety be lts are worn correctly, - Do not let anyone s itting in the front seat put their hand or any other parts of their body out of the window . -Always make sure that the side a irbag can inflate w ithout interfe rence . - Never insta ll sea t covers or replacement upholstery over the front seatbacks that have not been specifically approved by Audi. Airb a g sys tem - Never use additiona l seat cushions that cover the areas where the s ide airbags deploy. - Damage to the origina l seat covers or to the seam in the area of the side airbag module must always be repaired immediately by an authorized Audi dealer. - Objects between you and the airbag can increase the risk of injury in an accide nt by interfering with the way the a irbag unfolds or by being pushed into you as the a irbag inflates. - - - - C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 - Never place or attach accessories or other objects (such as cup holders, telephone brackets, or even large, bu lky objects) on the doors, over or near the area marked "AIRBAG"on the seat backrests. - Such objects and accessories can become dangerous projectiles and cause injury when the supplemental side airbag dep loys . - Never carry any objects or pets in the deployment space between them and the ai rbags or allow ch ildren or other passenge rs to travel in this posit ion. Always use the bui lt-in coat hooks only for lightwe ight cloth ing . Never leave any heavy or sharp-e dged objects in the pockets th at may interfere wit h side ai rbag dep loyment and can cause pe rsonal injury in an accident . Always preven t the side airbags from be ing damaged by heavy objects knocking against or hit t ing the sides of t he seatbacks. The air bag system can on ly be t rigge red once . If the airbag has been t riggere d, the system must be replaced by an authorized Audi dealership. Dama g e (cracks, deep scratches etc.) to the original seat covers or to the seam in the area of the s ide airbag mod ule m ust always be repaired immed iate ly by an authorized Audi dealer. If children are seated improper ly, their risk of injury increases in the case of an accident i=>page 248, Child safety . - Never attempt to modify any components of the airbag system in any way . - In a side coll ision, side airbags will not function properly if sensors cannot correctly measure increasing air pressure inside the doors when air escapes through larger, unclosed openings in the door panel. - Never dr ive with inte rior door trim panels removed. - Never dr ive when parts have been removed from the inside door pane l and the openings they leave have not been properly closed . - Never drive when loudspeakers in the doors have been removed unless the speaker holes have been properly closed. - Always make certain that open ings are covered or filled if additional speakers or other equipment is installed in the inside door panels. - Always have work on the doors done by an authorized Aud i dea ler o r qualified workshop. Side curtain airbags Description of side curtain airbags The side curtain airbag system can provide supplemental protection to properly restrained occupants. Fig. 238 Side curta in airbags, driver's side: side curtai n airbag locat ion The side curtain airbags are located on both sides of the inter io r above the front and rear side w indows c>fig. 238. They are identified by t he word "AIRBAG"on the windshie ld frame and the center roof pillar. .,.. 0 :r <t 245 Airb a g syste m The side curtain airbag system supplements the safety belts and can he lp to reduce the risk of injury for occupants' heads and upper torso on the side of the vehicle that is struck in a side collision . The side curtain airbag inflates in side impacts and only when the vehicle acceleration reg istered by the control unit is high enough . If this rate is below the reference value programmed into the control un it, the side ai rbags will not be tr iggered, even though the car may be bad ly damaged as a result of the collision. It is not possible to define an airbag triggering range that will cover every poss ible ang le of impact, since the circumstances will vary cons iderably between one collision and another. Important factors include, for example , the nature (hard or soft) of the impacting object, the angle of impact, vehicle speed , etc. c:>page 246, How side curtain airbags work . Aside from their normal safety function, safety belts work to help keep the driver or front pas senger in pos it io n in the event of a collision so that the side curtain airbags can provide protection . The airbag system is not a substitute for your safety belt. Rather, it is part of the overall occupant restraint system in your vehicle . Always remember that t he airbag system can only help to protect yo u if you are wea ring your safety belt and wear ing it properly . This is another reason why you should always wear your safety belts, not just because the law requires you to do so c:>page 218, General information. - The side curtain a irbags above the front and rear side windows - The a irbag indicator light in the instrument panel The airbag system is mon itored electro nical ly to make certain it is func t ioning properly at all times. Each t ime you switch on the ignit ion, the airbag system indicator light will come on for a few seconds (self diagnostics) . The side curtain airbag is not activated: - if the igni t ion is switched off, - in side collisions whe n the acceleration measured by the sensor is too low, - in rear-end collisions . A WARNING - Safety belts and the airbag system will only provide pro t ect ion when occupants are in t he prope r seating pos ition c:>page 54, Seats and storage. - If the a irbag ind icator light c:>page 23 comes when the veh icle is being used, have the system inspected immediately by your authorized Audi dealer . It is possib le that the airbag will inflate when it is not supposed to, or will not inflate when it should. How side curtain airbags work Side curtain airbags can work together with side airbags to help reduce the risk of head and upper torso injuries for occupants who are properly restrained. It is important to remember that whi le the side curtain airbag system is designed to help reduce the likelihood of serious injuries, other injuries, for example, swe lling, bruising, and m inor abrasions can a lso be associated with these airbags upon deployment. Remember too, these a irbags will deploy only once and only in certa in kinds of accide nts - your safety belts are a lways the re to offer protection. The side curtain airbag system basically consists of: - The electronic control module and external s ide impact senso rs 246 Fig. 239 Illust rat ion of principle : Inflated s ide curta in airbag s on the left side II> Airbag The side curtain airbags inflate between the occupant and the windows in a side collision c::> fig. 239. When the system is triggered, the side curtain airbag is filled with propellant gas and breaks through a seam above the front and rear side windows identified by the AIRBAG label. In order to help provide this additional protection, the side curt ain airbag must inflate within the blink of an eye at very high speed and with great force. The side curtain airbag could injure you if your seating position is not proper or upright or if items are located in the area where the supplemental side curtain airbag inflates . This applies especially to children c::>page 248. Although they are not a soft pillow, side curtain airbags can "cushion " the impact and in this way they can help to reduce the risk of injury to the head and the upper part of the body. A fine dust may develop when the airbag deploys . This is quite normal and does not mean there is a fire in the vehicle. Important safety instructions on the side curtain airbag system Airbags are only supplemental restraints. Always properly wear safety belts and ride in a proper seating position. There is a lot that you and your passengers must know and do to help the safety belts and airbags do their job to provide supplemental protection. .&, WARNING 0 co .... N ,..... .... N 0 - Improperly wearing safety belts and improper seating positions increase the risk of serious personal injury and death whenever a vehicle is being used . - Never let occupants place any parts of their bodies in the area from which the side curtain airbags inflate . - Always make sure that the side curtain airbags can inflate without interference. Unsuitable accessories fitted inside the expansion range of a side curtain airbag can dangerously interfere with its function. A de- system ploying head airbag develops enough force to catapult any piece of add-on component out of its path of inflation and into the passenger compartment. An occupant hit by such a projectile can suffer serious injury or death c::> page 338, Technical Modifications. - Do not swivel the sun visors to the side if you have any objects clipped onto them (for example pens). If the airbag should deploy, you could be injured by these objects. - Use the built-in coat hooks only for lightweight clothing. Never leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets that may interfere with airbag deployment and can cause personal injury in an accident. - Never use hangers to hang clothing from the hooks. - Only use factory-installed sun shades or, in the case of shades installed after the vehicle leaves the factory, only Audi roll-up sunscreens may be used c::> page 338, Addi- tional accessories and parts replacement. -Always sit in proper seating position and wear safety belts while traveling so that the side curtain airbags can help provide protection . - The airbag system can only be triggered once . If the airbag has been triggered, the system must be replaced by an authorized Audi dealer or qualified workshop. - Always have work involving the side curtain airbag system, removal and installation of the airbag components, or other repairs performed by a qualified dealership . Otherwise the airbag system may not work correctly. - Never attempt to modify any components of the airbag system in any way. 0 :c '<t 247 Ch ild safety Child safety Important information Introduction The rear seat is generally the safest place in a collision. The physical principles of what happens when your vehicle is in a crash apply also to children page 219, What happens to occupants not wearing safety belts? . But unlike adults and ¢ teenagers, their muscles and bones are not fully developed. In many respects children are at g reater risk of serious injury in crashes than adults . Because children's bodies are not fully developed, they require restraint systems especially des igned for their size, we ight, and body structure. Many countries and all states of the United States and provinces of Canada have laws requiring the use of approved child restraint systems for infants and small children . In a frontal crash at a speed of 20-35 mph (30-56 km/h) the forces acting on a 13 -pound (6 kg) infant will be more than 20 times the weight of the child. This means the weight of the child would suddenly be more than 260 pounds (120 kg) . Under these conditions, only an appropriate child restraint properly used can reduce the risk of serious injury . Child restra ints, like adu lt safety belts, must be used properly to be effect ive. Used improperly, they can incr ease the risk of serious injury in an acc ident. All ch ildren, especially those 12 years and younger must always ride in the back seat properly restra ined for their age and size. If you must insta ll a child restraint on the front passenger seat in exceptional circumstances, be sure to read and heed the important information and warnings ¢ page 22 7. Infants and other children who are properly restrained in an appropriate child restraint that is for their size and age can benefit from the protection that supplemental side airbags provide in some kinds of crashes . For more information please see information provided by the: 248 - National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), currently at: http :/ /www.safercar.gov (for the USA) - Transport Canada Information Centre, currently at: http://www.tc.gc.ca (for Canada) Consult the ch ild safety seat manufacturer's instructions in order to be sure the seat is right fo r your chi ld's size ¢ page 251, Important safety instructions for using child safety seats . Please be sure to read and heed all of the important information and WARNINGS about child safety, Advanced Airbags, and the installation of child restra ints in this chapter . There is a lot you need to know about the Advanced Airbags in your vehicle and how they work when infants and children in child restraints are on the front passenger seat . Because of the large amount of important informat ion , we cannot repeat it all here. We urge you to read the detailed information in this owner's manual about airbags and the Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle and the very important information about transporting children on the front passenger seat. Please be sure to heed the WARNINGS - they are extremely important for your safety and the safety of your passengers, especially infants and small children . A WARNING - Accident statistics have shown that children are generally safer in the rear seat area than in the front seat ing pos ition. Always restrain any child age 12 and unde r in the rear. -All vehicle occupants and especially children must be restra ined prope rly whenever rid ing in a vehicle. An un restrained or improperly restrained child could be injured by striking the interior or by being ejected from the vehicle during a sudden maneuver or impact. An unrestrained or improperly restrained child is a lso at greater risk of injury or death through contact w ith an inflating airbag. -A suitable ch ild restraint properly installed and used at one of the rear seating positions provides the highest degree of protect ion for infants and small children in most acc ident situat ions. Ch ild safety A WARNING Child ren on the front seat of any car even w ith Advanced Airbags can be seriously injured or even killed when an airbag inflates. A child in a rearward-facing child safety seat installed on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured and can be killed if the front airbag inflates. - The inflating airbag will hit the child safety seat or infant carrier with great force and will smash the ch ild safety seat and child against the backrest, center armrest, or door. - Always install rear-facing child safety seats on the rear seat. - If you must install a rearward fac ing ch ild safety seat on the front passenger seat in exceptiona l circumstances and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not come on and stay on, immediately insta ll the rear facing child safety seat in a rear seating position and have the airbag system inspected immediately by your Audi dealer. A 0 co .... N ,..... .... N 0 0 :c WARNING If, in except ional circumstances, you must install a forward-facing chi ld restraint on the front passenger's seat : - Always make sure the forward-fac ing seat has been designed and certified by its manufacturer for use on a front seat with a passenger front and s ide a irbag . - Always follow the manufacturer's instruct ions prov ided with the ch ild safety seat or carrier. - Always move the front passenger seat to the highest position in the up and down adjustment range and move it back to the rea rmost position in the seat's fore and aft adjustment range, as fa r away from the airbag as possib le, before insta lling the forward- facing child restra int . - Always ma ke sure t hat the safety bel t upper anchorage is beh ind the child restraint and not next to or in front of the chi ld restraint so that the safety belt will be properly pos it ioned. - Always make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light comes on and stays on all the time whenever the ignition is switched on. @ Tips Always replace child restraints that were installed in a vehicle du ring a crash. Damage to a child restraint that is not visible could cause it to fai l in another collision situat ion. Advanced front airbag system and children Your vehicle is equipped with a front "Advanced Airbag System" in compliance with United States Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standa rd (FMVSS) 208, as we ll as Canada Moto r Vehicle Safety Standard (CMVSS)208 as app licab le at the t ime your vehicle was manufactured. The Advanced Airbag system in your vehicle has been certified to meet the "low- risk" requirements fo r 3- and 6-year old ch ild ren on the passenger side and sma ll adu lts on the driver side. The low risk deployment criter ia are intended to red uce the risk of injury t hrough interaction with the airbag that can occur, for example, by be ing too close to the steering wheel and instrument panel when the airbag inflates. In addition, the system has been cert ified to comply with the "supp ression" requirements of the Safety Standard, to t urn off the front a irbag fo r infants up to 12 months who are restrained on the front passenger seat in child res tr aints t hat are list ed in t he Standard. Even though your veh icle is eq uipped wit h an Advanced Airbag system, all ch ild ren, especially those 12 yea rs and you nger, sho uld a lways ride in the back seat proper ly restrained for t heir age and size . The airbag on the passenger side makes the front seat a potentia lly dange rous place for a child to ride. The front seat is not the safest place for a ch ild in a forward-fac ing ch ild safety seat. It can be a very dangerous place fo r an infant or a larger ch ild in a rearward-facing seat . '<t 249 Child safety Advanced Airbags and the weight-sensing mat in the front seat The Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle detects the presence of an infant or child in a child restraint on the front passenger seat using the weight -sensing mat in the seat cushion and the sensor below t he safety belt latch on the front passenger seat that measures the tension on the safety belt . The weight-sensing mat measures total weight of the child and the child safety seat and a child blanket on the front passenger seat . The weight on the front passenger seat is related to the design of the child restraint and its "footprint ", the size and shape of the bottom of the child restraint as it sits on the seat. The weight of a child restraint and its "footprint" vary for different kinds of child restraints and for the different models of the same kind of child restraint offered by child restraint manufacturers. The weight ranges for the individual types, makes and models of child restraints that the NHTSAhas specified in the Safety Standard together with the weight ranges of typical infants and typical 1 year-old child have been stored in the control unit of the Advanced Airbag System . When a child restraint is being used on the front passenger seat with a typical 1 year-old child, the Advanced Airbag System compares the weight measured by the weight sensing mat with the information stored in the electronic control unit. The electronic control unit also registers the tension on the front passenger safety belt. The tension on the safety belt for the front passenger seat will be different for an adult who is properly using the safety belt as compared to the tension on the belt when it is used to attach a child restraint to the seat. The sensor below the latch for the safety belt for the front seat passenger measures the tension on the belt. The input from this sensor is then used with the weight to "decide" , whether there is a child restraint with a typical 1 year-old child on the front passenger seat and whether or not the airbag must be turned off. 250 · Child restraints and Advanced Airbags Regardless of the child restraint that you use, make sure that it has been certified to meet Safety Standards and has been certified by its manufacturer for use with an airbag. Always be sure that the child restraint is properly installed at one of the rear seating positions . If in exceptional circumstances you must use it on the front passenger seat, carefully read all of the information on child safety and Advanced Airbags and heed all of the applicable WARNINGS. Make certain that the child restraint is correctly recognized by the weight-sensing mat inside the front passenger seat, that the front passenger airbag is turned off and that the airbag status is always correctly signaled by the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF light. Many types and models of child restraints have been available over the years, new models are introduced regularly incorporating new and improved designs and older models are taken out of production. Child restraints are not standardized. Child restraints of the same type typically have differen t weights and sizes and different 'footprints,' the size and shape of the bottom of the child restraint that sits on the seat, when they are installed on a vehicle seat. These differences make it virtually impossible to certify compliance with the requirements for advanced airbags with each and every child restraint that has ever been sold in the past or will be sold over the course of the useful life of your vehicle. For this reason, the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration has published a list of specific type, makes and models of child restraints that must be used to certify compliance of the Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle with the suppression requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208. These child restraints are: Subpart A - Car bed child restraints Model Manufactured on or after Angel Guard Angel Ride AA2403FOF September 25, 2007 Child safety Subpart B - Rear-facing child restraints Model Manufactured on or after Century SmartFit 4543 December 1, 1999 Cosco Arriva 22-013PAW and base 22-999WHO September 25, 2007 Evenflo Discovery Adjust Right 212 December 1, 1999 Evenflo First Choice 204 December 1, 1999 Graco Infant 8457 December 1, 1999 Grace Snug ride September 25, 2007 (D Peg Perego Primo Viag- September 25, 2007 gio SIP IMUNOOUS Subpart C - Forward-facing and convertible child restraints Model Manufactured on or after Britax Roundabout E9L02xx September 25, 2007 Cosco Tour iva 02519 December 1, 1999 Cosco Summit Deluxe High Back Booster 22-262 September 25, 2007 Cosco High Back Booster 22-209 September 25, 200 7 Evenflo Tribute V 379xxxx September 25, 2007 Evenflo Medallion 2S4 December 1, 1999 Evenflo Generations 352xxxx September 25, 2007 Grace ComfortSport September 25, 2007 Grace Toddler Safety Seat Step 2 September 25, 2007 Grace Platinum Cargo September 25, 2007 A 0 co .... N ,..... .... N 0 0 :c - Take the child restraint off the front passenger seat and install it properly at one of the rear seat positions if the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFFlight does not stay on. - Have the airbag system inspected by your authorized Audi dealer immed iately. Tips The child seats listed in categor ies A to C have been statically tested by Audi only for the Advanced Airbag function. Important safety instructions for using child safety seats Correct use of child safety seats substantially reduces the risk of injury in an accident! As the driver, you are responsible for the safety of everybody in the vehicle, especially children: .,.Always use the right child safety seat for each child and always use it properly ¢ page 254 . .,.Always carefully follow the chi ld safety seat manufacturer's instructions on how to route the safety belt properly through the child safety seat . .,.When using the vehicle safety belt to install a child safety seat, you must first activate the convertible lock ing retractor on the safety belt to prevent the chi ld safety seat from moving ~page 258 . .,. Push the chi ld safety seat down with your full weight to get the safety belt really tight so that the seat cannot move forward or sideways more than one inch (2.5 cm). .,.If a strap or tether is being used to tie the child safety seat to the front passenger seat, make sure that it is not so tight that it causes the weight-sensing mat to measu re more weight than is actually on the seat. .,.Secure unused safety belts on the rear seat ~page 253 . WARNING To reduce the risk of serious injury, make sure that the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFFlight comes on and stays on whenever a child restraint is installed on the front passenger seat and the ignition is switched on. Always remember: Even though your veh icle is equipped with an Advanced Airbag system, all children, especia lly those 12 years and younger, shou ld a lways ride in the back seat proper ly restrained for their age and size. '<t 251 liJJ.. Child safety A WARNING Not using a child safety seat, using the wrong child safety seat or improperly installing a child restraint increases the risk of serious personal injury and death. - All vehicle occupants and especially children must always be restrained properly whenever riding in a vehicle. - An unrestrained or improperly restrained child can be injured or killed by being thrown against the inside of the vehicle or by being ejected from it during a sudden maneuver or impact. - An unrestrained or improperly restrained child is at much greater risk of injury or death by being struck by an inflating airbag. - Commercially available child safety seats are required to comply with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 213 (in Canada CMVSS213). - When buying a child restraint, select one that fits your child and the vehicle. - Only use child restraint systems that fully contact the flat portion of the seat cushion. The child restraint must not tip or lean to either side. Audi does not recommend using child safety seats that rest on legs or tube-like frames. They do not provide adequate contact with the seat. - Always heed all legal requirements pertaining to the installation and use of child safety seats and carefully follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the seat you are using . - Never allow children under 57 inches (1.45 meters) to wear a normal safety belt. They must always be restrained by a proper child restraint system . Otherwise, they could sustain injuries to the abdomen and neck areas during sudden braking maneuvers or accidents. - Never let more than one child occupy a child safety seat. - Never let babies or older children ride in a vehicle while sitting on the lap of another passenger . 252 - - - - - - Holding a child in your arms is never a substitute for a child restraint system. - The strongest person could not hold the child with the forces that exist in an accident. The child will strike the interior of the vehicle and can also be struck by the passenger. - The child and the passenger can also injure each other in an accident. Never install rear-facing child safety seats or infant carriers on the front passenger seat . A child will be seriously injured and can be killed when the passenger airbag inflates - even with an Advanced Airbag System. The inflating airbag will hit the child safety seat or infant carrier with great force and will smash the child safety seat and child against the backrest, center armrest, door or roof. Always install rear-facing child safety seats or infant carriers on the rear seat. Make sure there is enough space in front of the child in the child seat. If necessary, adjust the angle and position of the seat in front of the child seat. Forward-facing child safety seats installed on the front passenger's seat can interfere with the airbag when it inflates and cause serious injury to the child. Always install forward-facing child safety seats on the rear seat. If exceptional circumstances require the use of a forward-facing child restraint on the front passenger's seat, the child's safety and well-being require that the following special precautions be taken: - Make sure the forward-facing seat has been designed and certified by its manufacturer for use on a front seat with a passenger front and side airbag. - Always carefully follow the manufacturer's instructions provided with the child safety seat or carrier. - Always move the front passenger seat to the highest position in the up and down adjustment range and move it back to the rearmost position in the seat's fore and ~ Ch ild sa f ety aft adjustment range, as far away from the airbag as possible, before installing the forward-facing child restraint. - Always make sure that the safety be lt upper anchorage is behind the child restraint and not next to or in front of the child restra int so that the safety belt will be properly positioned. - Always make sure that nothing prevents the front passenger's seat from be ing moved to the rearmost posit ion in its fore and aft adjustment range. - Always make sure that the backrest is in the upr ight position. -Always buckle the child safety seat firmly in place even if a child is not sitting in it. A loose child safety seat can fly around du ring a sudden stop or in a collision. - Always read and heed all WARNINGS whenever using a child res t ra ined in a veh i.cle is being used~ page 218, Safety belts, ~ page 226, Airbag system and ~ page 248, Child safety. & WARNING To reduce the risk of serious injury, make s ure that the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF light comes on and stays on whenever a child restraint is installed on the front passenger seat and the ignition is switched on. - Take the ch ild restraint off the front passenger seat and install it properly at one of the rear seat positions if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not stay on. - Have the airbag system inspected by your authorized Audi dealer immediately. C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 Secure unused safety belts on the rear seat Fig. 24 0 Schema tic overview: keep unused safety belts away from children in child safety seats. @ · outer rear safety belt, @ - center rear safety belt If a child safety seat is used on the rear bench, especially with LATCHuniversal lower anchorages, the unused safety belts must be sec ured so that the child in the child restra int cannot reach them ~ .&.- Guide the safety belt webbing behind the head restraint of the adjacent seat ~ fig . 240 . When doing so, do no t engage the conve rt ible locking ret ractor ! You should not hear a "clicking" sound when wind ing up the safety belt. - Let the bel t ret racto r wind up t he safety belt webbing. & WARNING A child in a child safety seat installed with the LATCHlower anchorages o r with the st andard safety be lt or a child in a booster seat on the rear seat could play with unused rear seat safety be lts and become entangled. This could cause the child serious personal injury and even death . - Always secure unused rear seat safety belts out of reach of children in child seats such as by properly rout ing them around the head restraint of the seat where the child restraint is installed . - Never activate the convert ible locking retractor when rout ing the safety belts a round the head restraints. - Never let anyone s it at the center rear seating position if the center rear safety belt has been routed a round a rear head restra int. 0 :r <t 253 Child safety Child seats Infant seats Babies and infants up to about one year old and 20 lbs. or 9 kg need special rearward-facing child restraints that support the back, neck and head in a crash. A WARNING Not using a child safety seat, using the wrong child safety seat or improperly installing a child restraint increases the risk of ser ious personal injury and death in a crash . - Never install rear-facing child safety seats or infant carriers on the front passenger seat - even with an Advanced Airbag System . A child will be serio usly inju red and can be killed when the inflating airbag hits the child safety seat or infant carrier with great force and smashes the child safety seat and child against the backrest, center armrest, door or roof ¢ page 22 7, Child restraints on the front seat - some important things to know . Fig. 241 Schema tic overview: rearwa rd-facing infan t seat , properly installe d on the rea r seat • When using the vehicle safety belt to install a child safety seat, you must first activate the convertible locking retractor on the safety belt to prevent the child safety seat from moving ¢ page 258 or install the seat using the LA TCH attachments. • Push the child safety seat down with your full weight to get the safety belt really tight so that the seat cannot move forward or sideways more than one inch (2 .5 cm) . • Secure unused safety belts on the rear seat ¢ page 253. Infants up to about one year (20 lbs . or 9 kg) are best protected in special infant carriers and child safety seats des igned for their age group. Many experts believe that infants and small children should ride only in spec ial restraints in which the chi ld faces the back of the veh icle. These infant seats support the baby 's back, neck and head in a crash ¢ fig. 241 . The airbag on the passenger side makes the front seat a potentially dangerous place for a child to ride . The front seat is not the safest place for a child in a forward -facing child seat. It is a very dangerous place for an infant or a larger child in a rearward-facing seat. 254 - Always install rear-facing ch ild safety seats or infant carriers on the rear seat . - Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the forward-facing direction. Such restraints are designed for the special needs of infants and very small children and cannot p rotect them properly if the seat is forward-facing. - If you must install a rearward facing child safety seat on the front passenger seat because of exceptional circumstances and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not come on and stay on, imm ediately install the rear-facing child safety seat in a rear seating position and have the airbag system inspected by your Audi dealer . -Always read and heed all WARNINGS whenever using a child restrained in a vehicle is being used <=) page 218, Safety belts, ¢ page 226, Airbag system and ¢ page 248, Important information. Child safety Convertible child safety seats Properly used convertible child safety seats can help protect toddlers and children over age one who weigh between 20 and 40 lbs. (9 and 18 kg) in a crash. Toddlers and children who are older than one year up to about 4 years old and weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) up to 40 lbs. (18 kg) must always be properly restrained in a child safety seat certified for their size and weight Q fig. 242 and q fig . 243. The airbag on the passenger side makes the front seat a potentially dangerous place for a child to ride. The front seat is not the safest place for a child in a forward -facing child safety seat. It is a very dangerous place for an infant or a larger child in a rearward-facing seat . _&.WARNING Fig. 242 Schemat ic overview: installatio n of the attac h- ments app licable to a LATCH seat Fig. 243 Schematic overview: installat ion of t he seat using the vehicle's safe ty belt syste m .. When using the vehicle safety belt to install a child safety seat, you must first activate the convertible locking retractor on the safety belt to prevent the child safety seat from moving Q page 258 or install the seat us ing the LATC H attachments . .. Push the child safety seat down with your fu ll weight to get the safety be lt really tight so that the seat cannot move forward o r sideways more than one inch (2.5 cm) Q page 258. .. If the child safety seat is equipped with a tether strap, attach it to the tether anchors Q page264. .. Secure unused safety belts on the rear seat Q page 253 . ~ A toddler or child is usually too large for an in;:::: fant restraint if it is more than one year old and " weighs more than 20 lbs . (9 kg). 8 Not using a child safety seat, us ing the wrong child safety seat or imprope rly instal ling a child restraint increases the risk of serious personal injury and death in a collision or oth er emergency situation. - Children on the front seat of any car, even with Advanced Airbags, can be seriously injured or even killed when an airbag inflates. A child in a rearward-facing ch ild safety seat installed on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured and can be killed if the front airbag inflates - even with an Advanced Airbag System . - The inflating airbag will hit the ch ild safety seat or infant carr ier with great force and will smash the child safety seat and child against the backrest, center arm rest, door or roof. -Al ways install rear-fa cing child safety seats on the rear seat . - If you must insta ll a rearward facing child safety seat on the front passenger seat because of excep t ional circumstances and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not come on and stay on, immediately install the rea r-facing child safety seat in a rear seating position and have the a irbag system inspected by your Audi dealer . - The rear side of the ch ild safety seat shou ld be positioned as close as possible to the backrest on the veh icle seat. Adjust the rear seat head restraint if it is difficult to install the child seat with the head restraint in 0 :r <t 255 ~ Child safety place Q page 210. Driving with head restra ints that are not properly adjusted increases the risk of ser ious or fatal neck injury dramatically . - Always read and heed all WARNINGSwhenever using a child restrained in a vehicle is being used c::> page 218, Safety belts, ¢ page 226 , Airbag system and c::> page 248, Important information. _& WARNING If exceptional circumstances require the use of a forward-facing child restra int on the front passenger's seat, the child's safety and well -being require that the fo llowing special precautions be taken: - Make s ure the fo rward-facing seat has been designed and certified by its manu facturer for use on a front seat with a passenger front and side airbag. - Always follow the manufacturer's instructions prov ided with the ch ild safety seat or infant carrier. - Always move the front passenger seat to the highest position in the up and down adjustment range and move it back to the rearmost position in the seat's fore and aft adjustment range, as far away from the airbag as possible, before installing the forward-facing child restra int . - Always make sure that the safety belt upper anchorage is beh ind the child restraint and not next to or in front of the child restraint so that the safety belt will be properly pos it ioned. - Always make sure tha t noth ing prevents the front passenge r's seat from being moved to the rearmost position in its fore and aft adjustment range . - Always make sure t he backrest is in an up right position . - Make s ure tha t the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFFlight comes on and st ays on all the t ime whenever the ignition is switched on. - If the light does not stay on, perform the checks c::> page 236, Monitoring the Advanced Airbag System. - Take the child restra int off the front passenger seat and install it properly at one of the rear seat positions if the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFFlight does not stay on whenever the ignition is switched on . Booster seats and safety belts Properly used booster seats can help pro tect children weighing between about 40 lbs . and 80 lbs . (18 kg and 36 kg) who are less than 4 ft. 9 in . (57 inches/1 .45 meters) tall . Fig. 244 Rear seat: child prope rly restrained in a booster se at The vehicle 's safety belts alone will not fit most childre n until they are at least 4 ft. 9 in. (57 inches/1.45 meters) tall and weigh about 80 lbs. (36 kg). Booster seats raise t hese children up so that t he safety belt will pass properly over the stronger parts of their bodies and the safety be lt can he lp protect them in a crash. .,.Do not use the convertib le locking retr act or when us ing the ve hicle's safety be lt to restra in a child on a booster seat. .,.The shoulder belt must lie as close to the center of the child's collar bone as possible and must lie flat and snug on the upper body. It must never lie across the throat or neck. The lap belt must lie across the pelvis and never across t he stomach or abdomen . Make sure the belt lies flat and snug . Pull on the belt to tighten if necessary. .,.If you must transport an olde r child in a boos ter sea t on t he front passenge r seat, you can use the safety belt height adjus t ment to help adjust the shoulder portion properly . .,.Secure unused safety belts on the rear seat c::> page253 . 256 Ch ild safety Children up to at least 8 years old (over 40 lbs or 18 kg) are best protected in chi ld safety seats designed for their age and we ight . Experts say that the skeletal structure, particularly the pelvis, of these children is not fully developed, and they must not use the vehicle safety belts without a suitable child restraint . It is usually best to put these children in appropriate booster seats. Be sure the booster seat meets all applicable safety standards . Booster seats ra ise the seat ing pos ition of the child and repos ition both the lap and shoulder parts of the safety belt so that they pass across the child 's body in the right places. The routing of the belt over the child's body is very important for the child's protection, whether or not a booster seat is used. Children age 12 and unde r must a lways ride in the rear seat. Children who are at least 4 ft . 9 in. (57 inches/ 1.45 meters) tall can genera lly use the veh icle's three po int lap and shoulder be lts. Never use the lap belt po rtion of the vehicle 's safety belt alone to restrain any child, regardless of how big the child is. Always remember that children do not have the pronounced pelvic structure required for the proper function of lap belt portion of the vehicle 's three point lap and shoulder belts. The child's safety absolutely requires that a lap bel t portion of the safety belt be fastened snugly and as low as possible around the pelvis. Never let the lap belt portion of the safety belt pass over the child's stomach or abdomen. In a crash, airbags must inflate within a blink of an eye and with considerable force . In order to do its job, the airbag needs room to inflate so that it will be there to protect the occupant as the occupant moves forward into the a irbag. A vehicle occupant who is out of position and too close to the airbag gets in the way of an inflating a irbag. When an occupant is too close, he or she will be st ruck violently and will receive ser ious or possib ly even fatal injury. 0 In order for the airbag to offer protection, it is 0 cause of exceptional circumstances, co .... N ,..... important that all vehicle occupants, espec ia lly N .... any chi ldren, who must be in the front seat be0 :c be properly restrained and as far away from the airbag as possible . By keeping room between the chi ld's body and the front of the passenger compartment, the airbag can inflate completely and provide supplementa l protection in certain frontal collisions . A - WARNING Not using a booster seat, using the booster seat imp roperly, incorrect ly installing a booster seat o r us ing the vehicle safety belt improperly increases the risk of serious personal injury and death in a collision or other emergency situation. To help reduce the risk of se rious personal injury and/or death: - The shou lder belt must lie as close to the center of the chi ld's collar bone as possible and must lie flat and snug on the upper body. It must never lie across the throat or neck . The lap belt must lie across the pelvis and never across the stomach or abdomen. Make sure that the belt lies flat and snug . Pull on the belt to tighten if necessary. - Failure to properly route safety belts over a child's body will cause severe injuries in an accident or othe r emergency situation ¢ page 218. - The rear side of the ch ild safety seat should be positioned as close as possible to the backrest on the veh icle seat. Adjust the rear seat head restrain t if it is diffi cult to install the child seat with the head restraint in place ¢ page 210. Driving with head restraints that are not properly adjusted increases the risk of serious or fatal neck injury dramat ically . - Children on the front seat of any car, even with Advanced Airbags, can be seriously injured or even killed when an airbag inflates. - Never let a chi ld put the shoulder belt under the arm or behind the back, because it could cause severe injuries in a crash. - Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat, for example the front seat. - Never let a child ride in the cargo area of your veh icle . - Always remember that a chi ld leaning forward, sitt ing sideways or out of position in '<t 257 Child safety any way during an accident can be struck by a deploying airbag. This will result in serious personal injury or death. - If you must install a booster seat on the front passenger seat because of exceptional circumstances the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light must come on and stay on, when ever the ignition is switched on . - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not come on and stay on, perform the checks described ¢ page 236 , Monitoring the Advanced Airbag System. - Take the child restraint off the front passenger seat and install it properly at one of the rear seat positions if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not stay on whenever the ignition is switched on. - Always read and heed all WARNINGS whenever using a child restrained in a vehicle is being used ¢ page 218, Safety belts, ¢ page 226, Airbag system and ¢ page 248, Important information. Securing child seats Securing a child safety seat using a safety belt Safety belts for the rear seats and the front passenger can be locked with the convertible locking retractor to properly secure child safety seats . The safety belts emergency locking retractors for the rear seats safety belts and for the front passenger 's seat safety belt have a convertible locking retractor for child restraints. The safety belt must be locked so that belt webbing cannot unreel. The retractor can be activated to lock the safety belt and prevent the saf ety belt webbing from loosening up during normal driving. A child safety seat can only be properly installed when the safety belt is locked so that the child and child safety seat will stay in place . Always remember: Even though your vehicle is equipped with an Advan ced Airbag system, all children, especially those 12 years and younger, should always ride in the back seat properly restrained for their age and size. 258 A WARNING - Improperly installed child safety seats increase the risk of serious personal injury and death in a collision . - Always make sure that the safety belt retractor is locked when installing a child safety seat . An unlocked safety belt retractor cannot hold the child safety seat in place during normal driving or in a crash. -Always buckle the child safety seat firmly in place even if a child is not sitting in it. A loose child safety seat can fly around during a sudden stop or in a collision. - Always make sure that the rear seat backrest to which the center rear safety belt is attached is securely latched whenever the rear center safety belt is being used to secure a child restraint. - If the backrest is not securely latched, the child and the child restraint will be thrown forward together with the backrest and will strike parts of the vehicle interior. The child can be seriously injured or killed . - Never install rear-facing child safety seats or infant carriers on the front passenger seat . A child will be seriously injured and can be killed when the passenger airbag inflates . - The inflating airbag will hit the child safety seat or infant carrier with great force and will smash the child safety seat and child against the backrest , center armrest, door or roof. - Always install rear-facing child safety seats or infant carriers on the rear seat . - Forward-facing child safety seats or infant carriers installed on the front passenger's seat may interfere with the deployment of the airbag and cause serious injury to the child. - It is safer to install a forward-facing child safety seat on the rear seat. - Always read and heed all WARNINGS whenever using a child restrained in a vehicle is being used ¢ page 248. Special precautions apply when installing a child safety seat on the front passenger seat ¢ page 22 7, Child .,. Ch ild safety restraints on the front seat - some important things to know . A WARNING Always take special precautions if you must install a forward or rearward-facing child restraint on the front passenger's seat in exceptional situations: - Whenever a forward or rearward-facing child restraint is installed on the front pas senger seat, the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF light must come on and stay on whenever the ignition is switched on . - If the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFFlight does not come on and stay on, perform the checks descr ibed~ page 236, Monitoring the Advanced Airbag System. - Take the ch ild restraint off the front passenger seat and install it properly at one of the rear seat positions if the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFFlight does not stay on whenever the ignition is switched on . - Improper installation of chi ld restraints can reduce their effectiveness or even prevent them from providing any protection. - An improper ly installed chi ld restraint can interfere with the airbag as it deploys and seriously injure or even kill the child . - Always carefu lly follow the manufacturer 's instructions provided with the child safety seat or carrier. - Never place additional items on the seat that can increase the total weight registered by the weight-sensing mat and can cause injury in a crash . A 0 co .... N ,..... .... N 0 0 :c WARNING Forward-facing child restraints : -Always make sure the forward-facing seat has been designed and certified by its manufacturer for use on a front seat with a passenger front and s ide a irbag . - Never put the forward-facing child restraint up, against or very near the instrument pan el. - Always move the front passenger seat to the highest position in the up and down adjustment range and move it back to the rearmost posit ion in the seat's fore and aft adjustment range, as far away from the airbag as possible , before installing the forward-facing child restraint. - Always make sure that the safety belt upper anchorage is behind the ch ild restraint and not next to or in front of the child restraint so that the safety be lt will be properly positioned. - Make sure that the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFFlight comes on and stays on a ll the time wheneve r the ignit ion is switched on. A WARNING Rearward-facing ch ild restraints: - A child in a rearward-fac ing ch ild safety sea t installed on the front passenger seat will be serio usly injured and can be killed if the front airbag inflates - even with an Advanced Airbag System. - The inflating airbag will hit the child safety seat or infant carrier with great force and will smash the child safety seat and child aga inst the backrest, center armrest, door or roof. - Always be especially carefu l if you must install a rearward facing child safety seat on the front passenger seat in except iona l circumstances. - A t ight tether strap on a rearward-facing child restraint attached to the front passenger seat can put too much pressure on the weight-mat in the seat and reg ister a heav ier weight in the Advanced Airbag System . The heavier weight reg istered can make the system work as though an ad ult we re on the seat and deploy the Advanced Airbag when it must be suppressed causing serious or even fata l injury to the child. - Make sure that the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFFlight comes on and stays on all the time whenever the ignition is switched on . - If the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFFlight does not come on and stay on, immediately install the rear-facing child safety seat in a rear seating posit ion and have the airbag system inspected by your Audi dealer. '<t 259 Ch ild safet y Activating the convertible locking retractor - Always make sure the seat back rest to which the child restraint is installed is in an upright position and securely latched into place and cannot fold forward. Otherw ise, the seatback with the child safety seat attached to it could fly forward in the event of an accident o r othe r emergency situation. - Always read and heed all WARNINGS wheneve r us ing a child restrained in a vehicle is be ing used~ page 248. Spe cial precau t ions ap ply when installing a child safety seat on the front passenge r seat ~ page 22 7, Child Use the convertible locking retractor to secure a child restraint. Always heed the child safety seat manufacturer 's instructions when installing a child restraint in your veh icle . To activate the convertible locking retractor: .,.Place the child restraint on a seat, preferab ly on the rear seat. .,.Slowly pull the belt all the way out . .,.Route it around or through the ch ild restraint belt path ~ ,&.. ""Push the child safety seat down wit h your fu ll weight to get the safety be lt rea lly tight. .,.Inse rt the belt tongue into the buckle for that seating position . .,.Guide the safety belt back into the retractor unti l the belt lies flat and snug on the child safety seat. .,.You should hear a "clicking" no ise as the belt winds back into the inertia reel. Test the convertib le locking ret ractor by pu lling on the belt . You should no longer be ab le to pu ll the belt out of the retracto r. The conve rt ible locking retra cto r is now act ivated . .,.Make sure that the red release button is fac ing away from the child restraint so that it can be unbuck led q uickly. .,.Pull on the be lt to make sure the safety belt is properly tight and fastened so that the seat cannot move forward or sideways more than one inch (2 .5 cm) . A WARNING Using the wrong child restra int or an im properly installed ch ild rest raint can cause s er ious perso nal injur y o r de at h in a crash. - Always make sure tha t the safety belt ret ractor is loc ked when inst all ing a child safe ty seat. An unlocke d safety bel t ret ractor cannot hold the child safety seat in place during no rma l driving or in a crash . - Always buckle the child safety seat firmly in place even if a child is not s itting in it. A loose child safety seat can f ly arou nd du ring a sudden stop or in a crash. 260 restraints on the front seat - some important things to know . ' Deactivating the convertible locking retractor The convertible locking retractor for child restraints will be deactivated automatically when the belt is wound all the way back into the retractor . .,. Press the red button on the safety belt buck le. The belt tongue will pop out of the buckle. .,.Guide the safety be lt all the way back into its stowed posit io n. Always let the safety be lt retract completely into its stowed pos it ion. The safety be lt can now be used as an ord inary safety belt w it hout the convertib le locking retractor for ch ild restraints . If the conve rtible locking retractor should be activated inadvertently, the safety belt must be unfastened and guided comp letely back into its stowed pos ition to deactiva t e th is feature . If the conve rtible locking retractor is not deactivated, the safety be lt will g radually become t ighter and uncomfortab le t o wear. A WARNING Improperly installed child safety seat s increase the risk of serious personal injury and death in a collision. - Never unfasten the safety belt to deactiv ate the convertible locking ret ractor fo r ch ild restraints wh ile the vehicle is mov ing. You ~ Child safety would not be restrained and could be seriously injured in an accident. - Always read and heed all WARNINGS whenever using a child restrained in a vehicle is page 248 . Special precautions being used c::> apply when installing a child safety seat on the front passenger seat c::> page 22 7, Child restraints on the front seat - some important things to know. LATCH system (Lower anchorages and tethers for children) Child Restraint System anchors and how are they related to child safety To provide a simpler and more practicable way to attach the child restraint on the vehicle seat, Federal regulations require special lower anchorages in vehicles and devices on new child restraints to attach to the vehicle anchorages. In the United States, the combination of the tether anchorages and the lower anchorages is now generally called the LATCHsystem for "Lower Anchorages and Tethers for Children" . In Canada, the terms "top tether" with "lower universal anchorages" (or "lower universal anchorage bars") are used to describe the system. push-on connectors attached to adjustable straps. In addition to t he LATCHlower anchorages, these child rest ra int systems usua lly require the use of tether straps to help keep the child restraint firmly in place. A WARNING -Improper installation of child restraints will increase the risk of injury and death in a crash. -Always follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint you intend to insta ll in your vehicle. - Never install a child restraint without a proper ly attached top tether strap if t he child restraint manufacturer's instructions require the top tether strap to be used. - Improper use of child restraint LATCHlower anchorage points can lead to injury in a collision. The LATCH lower anchorage points are des igne d to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. - Never mount two child restraint systems on one LATCHlower anchorage point. - Never secure or attach any luggage or other item to the LATCH lower anchorages. Location In other countries the term ''ISO FIX" is used to describe the lower anchorages . Forward-facing child restraints manufactured after September 1, 1999, are required by U.S. federal regulations to comply with new child head movement performance requirements. These new performance requirements make a tether necessary on most new child seats. Installing a child restraint that requires a top tether without one can serious ly impair the performance of the chi ld restraint and its ability to protect the chi ld in a collision. Installing a chi ld restraint that requires a top tether without the top tether may be a violation of state law. C) Fig. 245 Schematic overv iew: LATCH anchorage poi nt locatio ns The illustration shows the seating locations in your vehicle which are equipped with the lower anchorages system. .... Child restraint manufacturers offer LATCHlower C0 "' anchorages on the ir ch ild seats with hook-on or ""'.... 0 0 :r <t 261 Child safety child restraints specifically certified for use with LATCHlower anchorages. Child restraints that are not equ ipped with the lower anchorage attachments can still be installed in compliance with the chi ld restraint manufacturer's instructions on us ing vehicle safety be lts . Description The lower anchorage positions are marked for quick locating . _& WARNING Fig. 246 Rear seatbacks: locator buttons for lower anchorages I :c ~ Imp roper use of LATCHlower anchorages can cause ser ious persona l injury in an accident. -Always carefully follow the ch ild restraints manufact urer's inst ructions for proper installation of the child restraint and prope r use of the lower an chor ages or safety belts in your vehicle . - Never secure or attach any luggage or othe r items to the LATCH lowe r anchorages. - Always read and heed the important informat ion about ch ild rest raints in this chap t er and WARNINGS Q page 248, Child safety . Guidance fixtures for lower anchorages /( Fig. 247 Rear seats: lower anchorage bracket locations Special guidance fixtures increase the convenience of the lower anchorages and are available from your authorized Audi dealer. Att achment locator markers for low er anchorages Circular locator buttons on the rear seatback ind icate the lower anchorage locations on the rear seating positions Q fig. 246. Lower anchorages The lower anchorage attachment points are located between the rear seatback and rear seat cushion Q fig . 247 . Fig. 248 Oute r rear seats: install ing the guidance fixtures Lower anchorages secure the child restraint in the seat without using the vehicle's safety belts . Anchorages provide a secure and easy-to -use at tachment and minim ize the possibility of improper ch ild rest raint insta llation . All child restraints manufactured after September 1, 2002, must have lower anchorage attach ments for the LATCHsystem . Remember that the lower anchorage points are only intended for installation and attachment of 262 Fig. 249 Close-up: fitt ing the guidance fixture over the lower anchorage bracket Ch ild sa f ety The lower anchorage attachment points are located on the rear seats between the seatback and the seat cushion. Special gu idance fixtures increase the convenience of the lower anchorages and help protect the seat material from possible damage when installing child restraints . In stall ing t he guidance fi xtu res .,.Push down on the seat cushion so that the lower anchorages are visible. .,. Hold the guidance fixture with the part number facing downward and push it in the direction of the arrow onto the anchorage c> fig. 249 . .,.Make sure that each of the two guidance f ixtures per seat snaps into place. Removing the guidance fi xtu res .,.Remove the child restraint according the child restraint manufacturer's instructions. .,.Push down on the seat cushion so that the lower anchorages are visible . .,. Pull off the guidance fixtures from the lower anchorages. .,.Always remove the guidance fixt ures and keep them in a safe place when not in use. You may find it easier to install ch ild restraints eq uipped with hooks attached to st raps without the guidance fixt ures in place. If th is is t he case, remove the guidance fixtures by pu lling them off the anchorages . However, the guidance fixtures can help you to locate the LATCHanchorages. A C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 WARNING Improper use of tether anchorages or lower anchorages can cause serious persona l injury in a crash . - Always carefully follow the child restra int manufacturer's instruct ions for proper installation and use of child restra int systems . - Never use the LATCHor tether anchorages to attach safety belts or other kinds of occupant restra ints. - Child restra int tether attachments and lower attachments are only designed to secure a ch ild restraint that has been equipped to use these anchorages . - - Tether anchorages and lower anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances can they be used safely for adu lt or ch ild safety belts or harnesses. - Never mount more than one child restraint to a sing le tether or to a lower anchorage point. Attaching two child restra ints to a sing le anchorage point can cause the anchorage to fail and cause serious personal inj ury in a crash. (D Note - Remove the guidance f ixt ures before fo lding the rear seatback to preven t damag ing the seat cushion . - To attach the child rest raint securely, the sea t must be moved to the farthest rear position, the seat heigh t set to the lowest position and the head restraint must be adjusted to the vertical position. - If you leave the guidance fixtures installed for several days, they cou ld leave a mark on the upholstery on the seat cushion and backrest in the area that the guidance fixtures were installed. The upholstery would also be permanently stretched around the guidance fixtures. This applies especially to leather seats. Installing a child restraint with LATCH lower anchorages Whenever you install a child restraint always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions. Fig. 250 Lower anchorages: proper mounting 0 :r <t 263 Child safety Mounting .. Make sure the seatback of the rear seat bench is in the upright position and securely latched in place . .. Attach both hook-on connectors with the spring catch re lease on the child safety seat onto the LATCHlower anchorage so that the connectors lock into place c>fig. 250. .. Pull on the connector attachments to make sure they are properly attached to the LATCH lower anchorage . .. Pull straps t ight follow ing the child restra int manufacturer's instructions. Releasing .. Loosen the tension on the straps following the child restraint manufacturer's instructions . .. Depress the spring catches to release the ancho rage hooks from the lower anchorages. Remember: Use tether straps to he lp keep the child restraint firmly in place . .,&.WARNING Improper use of the LATCHsystem can increase the risk of serious personal injury and death in an accident . - These anchors were deve loped only for child safety seats using the "LATCH" system. - Never attach other child safety seats, belts or other objects to these anchors . - Always make sure that you hear a click when latch ing the seat in place. If you do not hear a click the seat is not secure and could fly forward and hit the interior of the vehicle, or be ejected from the vehicle . .,&.WARNING Improper installation of child restraints will increase the risk of injury in an accident. - Always follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions for proper installation of the child restraint system and proper use of tether straps as well as the lower anchorages or safety belts in your vehicle . - Always read and heed the important information and WARNINGS about child safety 264 and the installation of child restraint systems c>page 248, Child safety . (D Note On vehicles with power adjustable rear seats* some crite ria must be observed when attaching the child restraint using the LATCH system: - To attach the ch ild restraint securely, the seat must be moved to the farthest rear position, the seat height set to the lowest posit ion and the head restraint must be adjusted to the vertical position. - If a child safety seat is attached to one of the rear seats, this seat must not be adjusted using the power controls under any circumstances. The Entry assistancefor this seat must also be deactivated in the MMI c>page 58. The child safety seat as well as the rear seat can be damaged by the adjustment process. Tether anchors and tether straps Fig. 251 Tether ancho rs: recess flaps behind the rear seat - backs The tether anchors for the two* /three rear seating positions are located in recesses in the rear window shelf c>fig. 251 . Vehicles with two rear seat ing positions* are equipped with two tether anchors . A tether is a straight or V-shaped strap that attaches the top part of a child restraint to special anchorage points in the veh icle. The purpose of the tether is to reduce the forward movement of the child restraint in a crash, in order to help reduce the risk of head injury 111JJ, Child safety that could be caused by striking the vehicle inte rior . Forward facing child restraints manufactured after September 1, 1999, are required by U.S. federal regulations to comply with new child head movement performance requirements. These new performance requirements make a tether necessary on most new child safety seats . A C) .... C0 ,.... "' .... "' 0 PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF light does not come on and stay on , immediately install the rear-facing child safety seat in a rear seating position and have the airbag system inspected by your Audi dealer. Installing the upper tether strap on the anchorage WARNING Improper installation of child restraints will increase the risk of injury and death in a crash. - Always follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint you intend to install in your Audi. - Improper use of child restraint anchors (including tether anchors) can lead to injury in a collision. The anchors are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. - Never mount two child restraint systems on one LATCHlower anchor point. - Never attach two child restraint systems to one tether strap or tether anchorage. - Never attach a tether strap to a tie-down hook in the luggage compartment. - Never use child restraint tether anchorages to secure safety belts or other kinds of occupant restraints. - Never secure or attach any luggage or other items to the LATCHlower anchorages or to the tether anchors. - If a tether or other strap is used to attach a child restraint to the front passenger seat, make sure that it is not so tight , that it causes the weight-sensing mat to measure more weight than is actually on the seat. - The heavier weight registered can make the Advanced Airbag System work as though an adult were on the seat and deploy the Advanced Airbag when it must be suppressed causing serious or even fatal injury to the child. - If you must install a rearward facing child safety seat on the front passenger seat because of exceptional circumstances and the Fig. 252 Tether strap: proper rout ing and mount ing Installing the tether strap .,. Release or deploy the tether strap on the child restraint according to the ch ild restraint manu facturer's instructions . .,.Guide the uppe r tether strap under the rear head restraint ¢ fig . 252 (raise the head restraint if necessary). For child restraints with Vtether straps, always make sure that the head restraint guide rods do not interfere with any part of the top tether strap . .,.Center seating position*: Guide the upper tether strap over the rear head restraint. .,.Tilt the recess f lap up to expose the anchor bracket. .,.Attach the tether strap anchorage hook into the opening of the tether anchorage . .,. Pull on the tether strap hook so that the spring catch of the hook engages. .,.Tighten the tether strap firmly following the child restraint manufacturer's instructions. Releasing the tether strap .,. Loosen the tension following the child restraint manufacturer's instructions . .,.Depress the spring catch on the hook and release it from the anchorage. 0 :r <t 265 Ch ild safet y CJ) Note If you leave the child restraint with the tether strap firmly installed for several days, this could leave a mark on the upholstery on the seat cush ion and backrest in the area where the tether strap was installed. The upholstery would also be permanently stretched around the tethe r strap . This applies especially to lea t her seats . Using tether straps on rearward-facing child restraints Curre nt ly, few rear -facing child restraint systems come with a tether . Please read and heed the child restra int system manufact urer 's instruct ions carefully to determine how t o properly install the tether . A WARNING A child in a rearwa rd-faci ng child safety seat installed o n the front passenge r seat will be ser iously injured and ca n be killed if the fron t airb ag infla t es - even with an Adva nced Airbag System. - The inflati ng air bag will hit the child sa fety seat or infant carrier wit h great force and will smash t he child safety seat and child against the bac krest, center armrest, or doo r. - A tight tether or other strap on a rearwardfacing child restraint attached to the front passenger seat can put too much pressure on the we ight-mat in the seat and register a heavie r weig ht in the Advanced Airbag System . The heav ier weight registered can make the system wo rk as t hough an adult were on the sea t and deploy t he Advanced Airbag whe n it must be supp res sed ca us ing serious or even fat al injury to t he ch ild. - If you mus t install a rearward fac ing ch ild sa fety seat on the front passenger sea t because of exceptiona l circumstances and t he PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF light does not come on and stay o n, immed iate ly install the rear-fac ing ch ild safety seat in a rear seat ing pos ition and have the airbag system inspected by your Audi dealer. 266 Additional information · Sources of information about child restraints and their use There are a number of sources of addi t ional information about ch ild rest raint se lection, instal lation and use : NHTSA advises t hat t he bes t child safety seat is the one t ha t f its your child and fits in your vehi cle, and that you will use correct ly and consiste nt ly. Try befo re you buy! U.S National Highway Traffic Safety Administra tion Tel.: 1-888 -3 2 7-42 36 (TTY: 1-800- 4 24 -9153) htt p://www.nh t sa.gov http:/ /www .saferca r.gov National SAFE KIDS Campaign Tel.: (20 2) 662-0600 htt p://www.safekids .org Safety BeltSafe U.S.A Tel.: (800) 745-SA FE (English) Tel.: (80 0) 747-SA NO (Spanish) htt p://www.ca rseat.o rg Transport Canada Information Centre Tel.: 1-800-333-0371 or call 1-613-998-86 16 if you are in the Ottawa area http://www.tc.gc.ca/ eng/ roadsafety/menu. htm Audi Customer Relat ions Tel.: (800) 82 2-2834 Checking Checking and Filling Gasoline Fuel supply Applies to: vehicles with gasoline engine Using the right fuel helps keep the environment clean and prevents engine damage . Fuel recommendation The fuel recommended for your vehicle is unleaded premium grade gasoline. Audi recommends using TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline with a minimum octane rating of 91 AKI(95 RON). For more information on TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline, please go to the official website (www.toptiergas .com) . The recommended gasoline octane rating for your engine can also be found on a label located on the inside of the fuel filler flap . This rating may be spec ified as AKIor RON. Your vehicle may also be operated using unleaded regular gasoline with a minimum octane rat ing of 87 AKl/91 RON. However, using 87 AKl/91 RONoctane fuel will slightly reduce engine performance. Use unleaded gasoline only . Unleaded gasoline is available throughout the USA,Canada, and in most European count ries . We recommend that you do not take your vehicle to areas or countries where unleaded gasol ine may not be available. For more information on refueling your vehicle, see ~ page 268 . Octane rating Octane rating indicates a gasoline's ability to resist engine damaging "knock" caused by premature ignit ion and detonation . Therefore , buying the correct grade of gasoline is very important to help prevent possible engine damage and a loss of eng ine performance. Gasoline most commonly used in the United States and Canada has the following octane rat~ .... ings that can usually be found on the filler pump: N ~ .... 0 0 :c '<t - Premium Grade: 91 - 96 AKI and Filling - Regular Grade: 87 - 90 AKI Explanation of the abbreviations: AKI= Anti Knock Index = (R+M)/2 = (RON+MON)/ 2 RON= Research Octane Number MON= Moto r Oct ane Number. (D Note - Do not use any fuel with octane ratings lower than 87 AKIor 91 RONotherwise expensive engine damage will occur. - Do not use leaded gasoline. The use of leaded gasoline will severe ly damage your vehicle's catalytic converter and its ability to control exhaust emissions . Blended gasoline Applies to: vehicles with gasoline engine Use of gasoline containing alcohol or MTBE (methyl tertiary butyl ether) You may use unleaded gasoline blended with alcohol or MTBE (commonly referred to as oxygenates) if the blended mixture meets the following criteria: Blend of gasoline methanol (wood alcohol or methyl alcohol) - Anti-knock index must be 87 AKIor higher. - Blend must contain no more than 3% methanol. - Blend must contain more than 2% co-solvents. Blend of gasoline and ethanol (grain alcohol or ethyl alcohol) - Anti-knock index must be 87 AKIor higher. - Blend must not conta in more than 15% ethanol. Blend of gasoline and MTBE - Anti-knock index must be 87 AKI or higher. - Blend must contain not more than 15% MTBE. Seasonally adjusted gasoline Many gasoline grades are blended to perform especially well for winter or summer driving. During seasonal change-over, we suggest that you ..,. 267 Checking and Filling fill up at busy gas stations where the seasonal adjustm ent is more likely to be mad e in time. 0 After an extended period of using inadequate fuels, carbon deposit build-ups can rob your engine of peak performance. Note - Methanol fuels which do not meet these requirements may cause corrosion and damage to plastic and rubber components in the fuel system. - Do not use fuels that fail to meet the specified criteria in this chapter . - If you are unable to determine whether or not a particular fuel blend meets the specifications, ask your service station or its fuel supplier. - Do not use fuel for which the contents cannot be identified. - Fuel system damage and performance problems resulting from the use of fuels different from those specified are not the responsibility of Audi and are not covered under the New Vehicle or the Emission Control System Warranties. - If you experience a loss of fuel economy or driveability and performance problems due to the use of one of these fuel blends, we recommend that you switch to unblended fuel. Gasoline additives App lies to: vehicles with gasoline engine A major concern among many auto manufacturers is carbon deposit build-up caused by the type of gasoline you use . Although gasoline grades differ from one manufacturer to another, they have certain things in common. All gasoline grades contain substances that can cause deposits to collect on vital engine parts, such as fuel injectors and intake valves. Although most gasoline brands include additives to keep engine and fuel systems clean, they are not equally effective . Audi recommends using TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. For more information on TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline, please go to the official website (www.toptiergas .com) . 268 ([) Note Damage or malfunction due to poor fuel quality is not covered by the Audi New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Refueling · Fuel filler neck The fuel filler neck is located on the right rear side panel behind the fuel filler flap . If the power locking system should fail, you can still open the flap manually - for detailed instructions see ~ page 2 70. You can find the fuel tank capacity of your vehicle in ~ page 334 . The label on the inside of the fuel filler flap tells you the correct fuel for your vehicle. For more information about fuel specifications, see ~ page 267. Your vehicle fuel tank has an on board refuelling vapor recovery system. This feature helps to prevent fuel vapors from escaping from the tank and polluting the environment while you refuel your vehicle. In order to fill the tank properly while protecting the environment, please follow this refueling procedure carefully. & WARNING - Under normal operating conditions, never carry additional fuel containers in your car. Gas canisters and other containers used to transport fuel can be dangerous. Such containers, full or empty, may leak and could cause a fire in a collision. If you must transport fuel to use for your lawn mower, snow blower, etc ., be very careful and always observe local and state laws regarding the use, transportation and storage of such fuel containers. Make certain the container meets industry standards (ANSI/ASTM F8S2 - 86). Checking (D Note Never drive your vehicle until the fuel tank is completely empty. The irregular supply of fuel can cause misfiring. Gasoline could enter the exhaust system and damage the catalytic converter. Fueling procedure and Filling Once the pump nozzle switches off, the fuel tank is "full". Do not fill the tank more . Otherwise the expansion space in the tank will be filled. The correct fuel type for your vehicle can be found on a label located on the inside of the fuel filler door. For additional information on fuel, see c:!;>page 267. The fuel tank capacity of your vehicle is listed in the Technical Data section c:!;>page 334. To avo id fuel spilling or evaporat ing from the fuel tank always close fuel cap properly and completely. An improperly closed fuel filler cap may also cause the MIL lamp c:!;>page 25 to come on. A Fig. 253 Right rear side of the vehicle: opening the fue l f iller door Fig. 254 Fuel filler door with attached fuel cap The fuel filler door is unlocked or locked by the central locking system. Opening the fuel cap ""Press on the left side of the fuel filler door to open c:!;>fig . 2 53. ""Unscrew the tank cap counterclockw ise. ""Place the cap from above on the open fuel filler door c:!;>fig. 254. Closing the fuel cap C) .... C0 ,.... "' ""Screw the tank cap on to the right on the filler neck until it cannot turn any farther . ""Then press on the left side of the tank door unti l it latches . WARNING Not paying attention when fueling or handling fuel incorrectly can lead to fires, explosions or serious injuries. - Fuel ignites easily and can cause serious burns and other injuries. - If you do not switch the engine off when fueling and/or do not insert the fuel nozzle completely into the tank opening, fuel can leak out or run over. Leaked fuel can ignite and start a fire. - Do not use the telephone while fueling. The electromagnetic rays can cause sparks, which can ignite fuel vapors and start a fire . - Do not sit in your vehicle while fueling. If you must make an exception and enter your veh icle aga in while fueling, close the door and touch metal to discharge stat ic electricity before touching the fuel nozzle. Static electricity can create sparks, which can ignite vapors when fueling. - Do not smoke or have an open flame in the area when fueling your vehicle or filling a fuel container because this increases the risk of an explosion. - For your safety, carrying fuel containers in your vehicle is not recommended. Whether full or empty, the container can leak and cause a fire in the event of an accident. - If you must make an exception and transport a fuel container, note the following: .... "' 0 0 :r <t 269 Checking and Filling - Never fill the fuel container with fuel while it is in or on the vehicle. Static electricity is discharged when filling which can cause the fuel vapors to ignite and increases the risk of an explosion . - Always place a fuel container on the ground before filling . - Always hold the fuel nozzle completely in the fuel container when filling . - If the fuel container is made of metal, the fuel nozzle must always be in contact with the container when filling it with fuel. This prevents static electricity from discharging. - Never spill fuel in the vehicle or the lug gage compartment . Evaporated fuel is explosive and increases the risk of serious injury or death. - Follow legal requirements when using , storing and transporting fuel containers. - Make sure the fuel container conforms to industry standards (ANSI/ASTM F852-86). 0 For the sake of the environment Do not overfill the fuel tank, otherwise fuel can leak out when the vehicle is warming up. (0 If the cent ral locking system is faulty, the fuel filler door can be unlocked manually . .., 9 :c tn "' a, Fig. 255 Vehicles with selective ca talytic reduc tion•: righ t side trim panel in the lugg age compartment Note - Remove spilled fuel from vehicle paint immediately, because it can damage paint. - Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty . The irregular supply of fuel that results from that can cause engine misfires . Uncombusted fuel will enter the exhaust system and increase the risk of damage to the catalytic converter. @ Fuel filler door emergency release Tips The fuel filler door on your vehicle does not lock if you lock the vehicle from the inside . Fig. 256 Right side trim pane l in the luggage com part· ment : emerg e ncy release mechan ism The emergency release mechanism is located behind the right side trim panel in the luggage compartment. In vehicles with selective catalytic reduction*, remove the vent grille first: .. Press both tabs @ ¢ fig. 255 and tilt the vent grille downward. You can then remove the grille upward . .. Loosen the loop q fig . 256 from the retainer and then pull on the loop carefully q (I) . The fuel filler door releases. .. Press on the left side of the fuel filler door to open it ~ page 269 , fig . 253 . (D Note Only pull on the loop until you feel resistance. You will not hear it release . Otherwise you could damage the emergency release mechanism. 270 Ch e c k ing an d Filling Catalytic converter Applies to: vehicles with gasoline engine It is very important that your emission control system (catalytic converter) is functioning properly to ensure that your vehicle is running in an environmentally sound manner . ...Always use lead-free gasoline c:>page 267, Fuel supply. ...Never run the tank down all the way to empty. ...Never put too much motor oil in your engine c:>page 2 76, Adding engine oil 'l:::r. . .,.Never t ry to push- or tow-start your vehicle. The catalytic converter is an efficient "clean-up" device built into the exhaust system of the vehicle . The catalytic conve rter burns many of the pollutants in the exhaust gas before they are released into the atmosphe re. The exclusive use of unleaded fue l is critically important for the life of the catalyt ic converter and proper functioning of the engine. - The temperature of the exha ust system is high, both when driving and afte r stopping the engine . - Never to uch t he exha ust tail pipes once they have become hot . This could result in bu rns. - Do not park or operate the vehicle in areas where the hot exhaust system may come in contact with dry grass, br ush, fuel spill or other material which can cause a fire . - Do not apply additional undercoating or rustproofing on or near the exhaust manifold, exhaust pipes, catalytic converter or heat shields. During dr iving, the substance used for undercoating could overheat and cause a fire . 0 co .... N ,..... .... N 0 0 :c '<t Note - Be aware that just one tank filling with leaded fuel will already ser iously degrade the performance of the catalytic converter. - Do not exceed the correct eng ine o il level c:>page 2 76. - Do not drive until the fuel tank becomes complete ly empty. The engine could mis- - Have your vehicle maintained properly and in accordance with the serv ice recommendat ions in yo ur War ranty & Maintenance booklet . - Lack of proper ma intenance as well as improper use of the veh icle w ill impa ir the function of the emission control system and could lead to damage. @ For the sake of the environment Even when the Emiss ion Control System is op- .&, WARNING (D fire. Unburned fue l could also get into the exhaust system and this could cause the catalytic converter to overheat. - Do not switch off the ignition whi le the vehicle is moving . - Do not continue to ope rate your vehicle under these conditions, as otherwise fuel can reach the catalytic converter . This could result in overheat ing of the converter, requiring its replacement . - To assure efficient operat ion of the Emission Contro l System : erating properly, the exhaust gas can have a su lfur-like exhaust gas sme ll under some operating states. This depends on the sulfur content of the fuel being used. Using a d ifferent brand of fuel may help, or f illing the tank with lead-free super grade gasoline. Engine compartment Working in the engine compartment Special care is required if you are working in the engine compartment For work in the engine compartment such as checking and filling fluids , there is a risk of injury , scalding, accident s, and burn s. For thi s reason, follow all the warnings and general safety precauti ons provided in the following information. The engine compartment is a dangerous area on the vehicle. c:>.&.. .&, WARNING ~ - Turn the engine off . - Switch the ignition off . 271 Checking - - - - - - - - - and Filling Set the parking brake. Select the P selector lever position. Let the engine cool down. Never open the hood when there is steam or coolant escaping from the engine compartment, because there is a risk that you could be burned. Wait until no steam or coolant is escaping. Keep children away from the engine compartment. Never spill fluids on a hot engine. These fluids (such as the anti-freezing agent contained in the coolant) can ignite. Avoid short circuits in the electrical system. When working in the engine compartment , remember that the radiator fan can switch on even if the ignition is switched off, which increases the risk of personal injury. Never open the cap on the coolant expansion tank when the engine is warm. The cooling system is under pressure. To protect your face, hands, and arms from hot steam or coolant, cover the cap with a large cloth when opening. Do not remove the engine cover under any circumstances. This increases the risk of burns. If tests need to be performed with the engine running, there is additional danger due to moving components (such as the ribbed belt, alternator and radiator fan) and from the high-voltage ignition system . Do not under any circumstances activate the throttle inadvertently (for example, by hand from the engine compartment) if the vehicle is stationary but the engine is running and a gear is engaged. Otherwise, the vehicle will start to move immediately and this could result in an accident. Pay attention to the following warnings listed when work on the fuel system or on the electrical equipment is required. - Do not smoke . - Never work near open flames. - Always have a working fire extinguisher nearby - All work on the battery or electrical system in your vehicle can result in injuries, chemi- 272 cal burns, accidents or burns. Because of this, all work must be performed only by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. - To reduce the risk of electric shock and injury, never touch the following components when the engine is running or is being started: - Ignition cable - Other components in the electronic highvoltage ignition system - If you must check or perform work on the engine while it is running: - Set the parking brake and place the selector lever in the P (park) position first. - Always proceed with extreme caution so that clothing, jewelry or long hair do not become caught in the radiator fan, fan belt or other moving components or do not come into contact with hot components . Tie back long hair before beginning work and do not wear clothing that can hang down into the engine . - Limit your exposure to exhaust and chemicals to as short a time as possible c:>,&.. .&_WARNING California Proposition 65 Warning: - Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm . - Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harms . Wash hands after handling. Checking (D Note When filling fl uids, be sure not to mix the fluids up. Otherwise severe ma lf unctions and en gine damage w ill occur. and Filling Make sure the wiper arms are not raised up from the windshie ld . Otherwise the paint could be damaged. Opening the hood .,.With the d river's doo r open, pull t he lever below the instrument pane l in the d irection of the arrow q fig. 257 . .,. Raise the hood slightly ¢ _& . .,. Press the rocker switch under the hood upward q fig. 258 . This releases the catch. .,.Open the hood . @) For the sake of the environment You sho uld regular ly check the ground u nder your veh icle in order to detect leaks qu ickly. If there are visible spots from oil or other f luids, bring your vehicle to an authorized Aud i dea ler or author ized Audi Service Facility to be checked. Closing the hood .,. Push the hood down until you override the force of the strut. .,. Let the hood fall lightly into the latch . Do not press it in. q _& . Opening/closing the hood The hood is released from inside the vehicle. A Fig. 257 Driver footwell: re lease lever ,-.. ~ co 0 :± ... IX) WARNING - Never open the hood when there is steam or coo lant escaping from the engine compartment, because there is a risk that you could be burned. Wait unt il no steam or coolant is escapi ng. - For safety reasons, the hood m ust always be closed securely while driv ing. Because of this, always check t he hood afte r closing it to make sure it is latched correct ly. The hood is latched if the front corners cannot be lifted. - If you notice that the hood is not latched while you are driving, stop immediately and close it, because driving when the hood is not latched increases the risk of an accident. Fig. 258 Rocke r switch un der the hood C) .... C0 ,.... "' .... "' 0 0 :r <t 273 Checking and Filling Engine compartment overview The most important check points. Fig. 259 Typical location of the rese rvoir and the engine oil fille r open ing (D Washer fluid reservoir (Q) c::>page 281 @ Jump start point(-) with hex head screw @ Jump start point( +) under a cover 280, c::>page 32 7 @ Engine oil label* w ith VW standard c>page 274 ® Eng ine oil filler opening(~) c>page 276 @ Brake fluid reservoir((()}) c::>page 2 79 (j) Coolant reservoir (-L) c::>page 2 78 The engine oil f illing opening (item @ ) may be located in a different area depending on the en gine version. A WARNING Read and follow all WARNINGS before checking anything in the engine compartment c::>&. in Working in the engine compartment on page 271. 274 oil Engine oil specifications c::> page 280, c::> page 32 7 c>page Engine The engine oil used must conform to exact specifications. The service interval display in the inst rumen t cluster of your vehicle will inform you when it is time for an o il change. We recommend that you have your oi l changed by an authorized Audi Se rvice Advisor. If you must add oil between oil changes, use an oi l that matches the Audi oil quality standard listed on the sticker. The sticker is located at the page 274, front of the eng ine compartment c::> fig. 259 Audi recommends ~ Castrol /fg/j;Sf.g;fg f'r<OJ:-,:;~J.D,'lAl. Audi recommends Longlife high performance engine oil from Audi Genuine Parts liJI, Ch e c k ing an d Filling Using the prope r engine oil is important for the functionality and service life of the engine. Your engine was factory-filled with a high-quality oil which can usually be used throughout the entire year. Note Your Limited New Vehicle Warranty does not cover damage or malfunctions due to failure to follow recommended maintenance and use requirements as set forth in the Audi Owner's Manual and Warranty & Maintenance booklet. - Use only a high quality engine oil that expressly complies with the Audi oil quality standard specified for your vehicle's engine. Using any ot her oil can cause serious engine damage. - Do not mix any lubricants or other additives into the engine oil. Doing so can cause engine damage. @ Tips If you need to add oil and there is none available that meets the Audi oil quality standard your eng ine requ ires, you may add a total of no more than 0.5 quart/li ter of a high-quality "synthet ic"oil that meets the following speci fications. - Vehicles with gasoline eng ine: ACEAA3 or API SM with a viscosity grade of SAE OW-30, SAE SW-30 or SAE SW-40. - For more information about engine oil that has been approved for your vehicle, please contact either your authorized Audi dea ler or Audi Customer Relat ions at 1 (800) 822-2834 or visit our web site at www.audiusa.com or www.aud icanada .ca. the engine. Typically, engines with a specified break-in period (see ¢ page 73) consume more oil during the break -in per iod than they consume after oil consumption has stabili zed. Under normal cond itions, the rate of oil consumption depends on the quality and viscosity of the oil, the RPM (revolutions per minute) at which the engine is operated, the amb ient temperature and road condit ions. Further factors are the amount of oil dilution from water condensat ion or fuel residue and the oxidat ion level of the oil. As any engine is subject to wear as mileage builds up, the oil consumption may increase over t ime unt il repla cement of worn components may become necessary . With all these variab les coming into play, no sta ndard rate of oil cons umption can be established or spec ified. The re is no alternative to regular and frequent checking of the oil level, see Note . If t he yellow engine oil level warning symbo l in lights up, you should t he instr ume nt cluster check t he oil level as soon as possible ¢ page 2 76 . Top off the oil at your earliest convenience ¢ page 276. II A - Before you check anyth ing in the engine compartment, always read and heed all WARNINGS ¢ .& in Working in the engine compartment on page 271 . @ The engine in your vehicle depends on an adequate amount of oil to lubricate and cool all of its moving parts . In order to provide effective lubr ication and cooling of internal engine components, all internal co .... N combustion engines consume a certain amount ,..._ N .... of oil. Oil consumption varies from engine to en0 0 :c gine and may change significant ly over the life of '<t 0 Note Driving with an insufficient oil level is likely to cause severe damage to the eng ine. (D Engine oil consumption WARNING Tips - The oil pressu re warning display. is not an indicator of the o il level. Do not rely on it. Instead, check the oil level in you r engine at regular intervals , preferably each time you refuel, and always before go ing on a long trip. - If you have the impression your engine consumes excessive amou nts of oil, we recommend that you consult your Audi dea ler to 275 .,,. Checking and Filling have the cause of your concern properly diagnosed. Keep in mind that the accurate measurement of oil consumption requires great care and may take some time. Your Audi dealer has instructions about how to measure oil consumption accurately. · Adding engine oil ~ Checking the engine oil level App lies to: vehicles with oil leve l indicator The engine oil level can be checked in the Infotainment system Observe the safety precautions c:::>&. in Working in the engine compartment on page 2 71. .. Park your vehicle on a level surface. .. Shut the engine off when it is warm . .. Switch only the ignition back on. .. Wait approximately two minutes. function button > Car systems .. Select: the ICARI control button > Servicing & checks> Oil level. .. Read the oil level in the display . Add engine oil if the bar in the oil level indicator is just before page 276. "min" <=:> The engine oil consumption may be up to 0 .5 quart/600 miles (0.5 liter/1,000 km), depending on driving style and operating conditions. Consumption may be higher during the first 3,000 miles (5,000 km). Because of this, the engine oil level must be checked regularly. It would be best to check each time you refuel your vehicle and before long drives. @ Fig. 260 Engine compartment : engine oil filler opening cover Read and follow the WARNINGS before checking anything in the engine compartment c:::> page 2 71 . .. Turn the engine off . .. Unscrew the engine oil filling opening cap "I::?: c:::> fig. 260, c:::> page 2 74. .. Carefully add 0.5 quart (0.5 liter) of the correct page 2 74. oil c:::> .. Check the oil level again after two minutes c:::> page 2 76, Checking the engine oil level . .. Add more oil if necessary. .. Close the engine oil filler opening cap. A WARNING - When adding oil, do not let oil drip onto hot engine components. This increases the risk of afire. - Always clean skin thoroughly if it comes into contact with engine oil. Tips The oil level indicator in the display is only an informational display. If the oil level is too low, a minimum oil warning appears in the instrument cluster. Add oil and close the hood. The current oil level is displayed in the Infotainment system the next time the ignition is switched on . (D Note - Check the oil level. If the message Please reduce oil level appears, contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have excess oil extracted if necessary. - Do not mix any additional lubricants into the engine oil. Damage caused by such additives is not covered by the warranty. (® For the sake of the environment - Oil should never enter the sewer system or come into contact with the ground. 276 Ch e c k ing an d Filling - Pay attention to legal requirements when disposing of empty oil containers . Changing the engine oil We recommend that have your oil changed by an authorized Audi dealer or a qualified service station. Before you check anyth ing in the eng ine compartment, always read and heed all WARNINGS ¢ & in Working in the engine compartment on page 271. The engine oil must be changed according to the intervals specified in your Warranty & Maintenance booklet . This is very important because the lubricat ing propert ies of oil diminish gradually during normal vehicle use. Under some circumstances the engine oil should be changed more frequently. Change oil more often if you drive mostly short distances, operate the vehicle in dusty areas or under predominantly stop-and-go traffic condit ions, or have your vehicle where temperatures remain below freezing for extended periods . Detergent additives in the oil will make fresh oil look dark after the engine has been running for a short time . This is normal and is not a reason to change the oil more often than recommended . Because of the problem of proper disposal, along with the special tools and necessary expertise required, we strongly recommend that you have your oil changed by an authorized Audi dea ler or a qualified service station . If you choo se to change yo ur o il yo urse lf, please note the following important information: A 0 co .... N ,..... .... N 0 WARNING - To red uce the risk of personal injury if you must change the engine oil in your vehicle yourself: - Wear eye protection . - To reduce the risk of burns from hot engine oil, let the eng ine cool down to the touch. - When removing the oil drain plug with your fingers, stay as far away as poss ible. Always keep your forearm parallel to the ground to help prevent hot oil from running down your arm. - Drain the oil into a container designed for this purpose, one large enough to hold at least the total amount of oil in your engine. - Engine oil is poisonous. Keep it well out of the reach of children. - Continuous contact with used engine oil is harmful to your skin. Always protect your skin by washing oil off thoroughly with soap and water . CI) Note Never mix oil additives with your engine oil. These additives can damage your engine and adversely affect your Audi limited New Vehicle Warranty. ® For the sake of the environment - Before chang ing your oil, first make sure you know where you can properly dispose of the used oil. - Always dispose of used engine oil properly. Do not dump it on garden soil, wooded areas, into open streams or down sewage drains. - Recycleused engine oil by tak ing it to a used eng ine oil collection facility in your area, or contact a service station . Cooling system Coolant The engine cooling system is filled with a mixture of purified water and coolant additive at the factory. This coolant must not be not changed . The coolant level is monitored through the . indicator light ¢ page 20. However, we do recommend occasionally checking the coolant level manually. If you must add coolant, use a mixture of wate r and coolant additive . Mixingthe coolant additive with dist illed water is recommended. ll> 0 :c '<t 277 Che ck ing and Filling Coolant addit ive Adding coolant The coolant additive is made of anti-freezing and corrosion protection agents. Only use t he fo llowing coolant additives . Coolant additive Specification G13 TL 774) G12++ TL 774 G These additives may be mixed with each other . The amount of coolant additive that needs to be mixed w ith water depends on the climate where the vehicle will be operated . If the coolant additive percentage is too low, the coo lant can freeze and damage the engine. Coolant additive Freeze protection Warm reg ions min . 40%, max. 45% m in. -13 °F (-25 °C) Cold regions min . 50%, max. 55% max . -40 °F (-40 °C) (D Note - Before the start of winter, have your authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Fac ility check if the coolant additive in you r vehicle matc hes the percentage appropriate fo r the clim ate. This is espe cially important when driving in colder climates . - If the appropriate coolant addi t ive is not available in an emergency, do not add any other additive for risk of damaging the en gine. If this happens, only use water and restore the correct mixture ratio with the specified coolant additive as soon as possible. - Only refill with new coo lant. - Radiator sealant must not be mixed with the coo lant. 278 Fig. 261 Engine compartment: coolant expans ion tank cover Observe the safety precautions ¢ .&. in Working in the engine compartment on page 2 71. Checking the engine coolant level .,. Park the vehicle on a level surface . .,.Switch the ignit ion off. .,.Read the coolant level on the coolan t expansion tank ¢page 274. The coolant leve l must be between the MIN and MAX markings when the engine in cold . When the engine is warm it can be slightly above the MAXmarking . Adding coolant Requireme nt: t here m ust be a residua l amount of coolant in the expansion t a nk ~CD. .,. Let the engine cool down . .,. Place a cloth over the coolant expansion tank cap and unsc rew the cap cou nte rclockw ise ~.&... Add coo lant mixed in the correc t ratio ~ page 277 up to the MAXmarking. .,. Make sure that the fluid level remains stab le. Add more coolant if necessary . .,.Close the cap securely . Coolant loss usually indicates there is a leak . Immed iate ly drive your vehicle to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility and have the cooling system inspected. If the cooling system is not leak ing, a loss can come from the coolant boiling through overheat ing and being pushed ou t of the cooling system . Checking Filling Changing the brake fluid _& WARNING Have the brake fluid changed regularly by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. - The cooling system is under pressure. Do not open the coolant expansion tank cap when the engine is hot. This increases the risk of burns . - The coolant add itive and the coolant can be dangerous to your health . For this reason, keep the coolant in the original container and away from children. There is a risk of poisoning. - When working in the engine compartment, remember that the radiator fan can switch on even if the ignition is switched off, which increases the risk of injury. A WARNING - - If the brake fluid level is below the MIN marking, it can impair the braking effect and driving safety, which increase the risk of an accident . Do not continue dr iving. See an author ized Audi dealer or author ized Audi Service Facility for assistance. - If the brake fluid is old, bubbles may form in the brake system dur ing heavy braking. This would impair braking performance and driving safety, which increases the risk of an accident. - To ensure the brake system functions correctly, only use brake fluids that comply with VW standard 50114 or FMVSS-1 16 DOT4. CDNote Do not add coolant if the expansion tank is empty. Air could enter the cooling system and damage the engine. If this is the case, do not continue driving. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance. Brake and CDNote fluid N N " N co IXl - If the brake f luid level is above the MAX marking, brake f luid may leak out over the edge of the reservoir and result in damage to the vehicle. - Do not get any brake fluid on the vehicle paint, because it will corrode the paint. Battery General warnings about batteries Fig. 262 Engine compartment: cap on brake flu id reservoir Observe the safety precautions c:>&. in Working in the engine compartment on page 2 71. Checking the brake fluid level " Read the brake fluid level on the brake fluid reservoir c:>page 2 74, fig. 259. The brake fluid level must be between the MIN and MAXmarkings c:>&_. Because of the complex power supply, all work on batter ies such as disconnecting, replac ing, etc. should only be performed by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility c:>& . The term "vehicle battery" refers to the 12 Volt battery in your vehicle. Detailed warnings for the vehicle battery: ® Wear eye protection. C) ~ "...... N 0 The brake fluid level is mon itored automatically . I.)._ Bat~ery acid is highly corrosiv~. Wear pro~ tect 1vegloves and eye protection. 0 :r <t 279 Ill- Che ck ing and Filling @ Fire, sparks, open flame and smok ing are forb idden. ~ A highly explosive mixture of gases can form when charging batteries. ® Keep children away from bat t ery acid and batteries. A WARNING All work on the battery or electrica l system in your vehicle can result in injuries, chemical burns, accidents or burns. Because of this, a ll work m ust be performed only by an authorized Audi dea le r o r autho rized Audi Serv ice Facility. A Even when electrical equipment is switched off, the eq uipment can st ill dra in the vehicle batte ry if the veh icle is not dr iven for long pe riods of time . Deep drai ning results in a chemica l reaction that destroys t he ins ide of the vehicle battery . The vehicle battery must be charged every mon t h to reduce the risk of this happening c::>page 280 . Contact an a ut ho rized Audi dea le r or a ut ho rized Audi Service Facility for mo re informa t ion. Winter operat ion WARNING California Proposit io n 65 Warning: - Battery posts, termina ls and re lated accesso ries contai n lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the Sta t e of Californi a to cause ca nce r and rep roduct ive problems. Wash hands after handling. 0 funct ions, such as interior lighting or power seat adjustment, may not be avai lab le under certain circumstances. These convenience functions will be available again once you switch the ignition on and start the eng ine. Cold weather places higher demands on the vehi cle battery . This res ults in reduced starting ab ility. Have the vehicle batte ry checked by an authorized Audi dea le r or authori zed Audi Service Facility befo re t he cold time of year. Charging the vehicle battery Note Protect the vehicle ba ttery against freezing if t he vehicle will be par ked for long per iods of time so th at it is not destroyed by "free zing" c::>page 280. @ For the sake of the environment ~ Batteries cont ain poll ut ing substances suc h as sulfuric ac id and lead. Contac t a n authorized Audi dealer or aut horized Audi Service Facility for more information. Vehicle battery The term "vehicle battery" refers to the 12 Volt battery in your vehicle. Not running the vehicle for long periods of time If you do not drive your vehicle for seve ral days or weeks, e lect rical equipment is gradually scaled back or switched off. This reduces energy use and ensures the veh icle will be able to start after long periods of time c::>page 130 . Some conven ience 280 Fig. 2 63 Engine compa rt ment: con nectors for a cha rge r and jum p start cables Requirement: only use chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 30 amps/ 14 .8 Volts . The vehicle battery cab les remain connected . .. Read the warnings c::>A in General warnings about batteries on page 280 and c::>A . .. Switch off the ign it ion and all electrica l equ ipment. .. Open the hood c::>page 273. .. Remove the cove r © by pressing on the ar row ¢ fig. 263 . " Open the cover @ on t he pos itive terminal. .,. Ch e c k ing an d Filling ~ Clamp the charger terminal clamps to the jump start pins according to the instructions. (pin under the cover= "pos it ive", pin with hexagonal head = "negative"). ~ Insert the power cable for the charging device into the socket and switch the device on . ~ At the end of the charging process, switch the charger off and pull the power cab le out of the socket. ~ Now remove the charg ing device terminal clamps. ~ Close the cover @ on the positive terminal and re-install the cover (D. ~ Close the hood c:>page 2 73. {!) Tips - Only charge the vehicle battery through the connect ions in the engine compartment. - Read all of the manufacturer's instructions for the charger before charging the vehicle battery. Windshield system washer M N ~ N "' co m A drained battery can freeze at temperatures around 322 F (OQC).A frozen or thawed out battery must no longer be used. The battery housing could be cracked by the formation of ice, which could cause battery acid to leak out c:>A . Charging the batt ery Only use chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. The battery connecting cables do not needto be disconnected.Do not open the battery when charg ing . Read a ll of the manufact urer 's instructions for the charger before charging the battery. A 0 WARNING - A highly exp losive mixture of gases can form when charging batter ies. Only charge the vehicle battery in well-vent ilated areas. - A drained battery can freeze at temperatures around 32 °F (0 °C). A frozen or thawed ve hicle battery must not be charged and must not be used anymore. The battery housing can crack and battery acid can leak out if ice fo rms, wh ich increases the risk of an exp losion and chemica l burns. Conta ct an au t hori zed Audi dealer or autho rized Aud i Service Facility fo r mo re information. - Do not connect or disconnect t he charg ing cable while charg ing because th is increases the risk of an exp losion. Fig. 264 Engine compartmen t: washer fluid reservoir cap The windshield washer fluid reservoir O contains the cleaning solution for the w indshield and the headlight washer system¢ fig. 264, ¢ page 2 74. The reservoir capacity is found in c:>page 334 . To reduce the risk of lime scale deposits on the spray nozzles, use clean water with low amo unts of calcium. Always add window cleaner to the water. When the outside temperatures are cold, an anti-freezing agent should be added to the water so that it does not freeze . (D Note - The concentration of ant i-freez ing agent must be adjusted to the veh icle operat ing conditions in the respective climate . A concentration that is too high can lead to vehicle damage. - Never add radiator anti-free ze or other additives to the washer fluid. - Do not use a glass cleaner that cont a ins pai nt so lvents, because t his could damage t he paint. co .... N ,..... .... N 0 0 :c '<t 281 Checking Service and Filling interval display The service interval display detects when your vehicle is due for service. The service interval display works in two stages: - Inspection or oil change reminder: after a certain distance driven, a message appears in the instrument cluster display each time the igni tion is switched on or off . The remaining distance or time is displayed briefly. - Inspection or oil change due: if your vehicle has reached an inspection or oi l change interval or both intervals at the same time, the message Inspection due! or Oil change due! or Oil change and inspection due! appears briefly after switching the ignition on/off . Checking service intervals You can check the remaining distance or time until the next oil change or next inspection in the Car menu. To do this, select : the ICARI function but t on > Car systems control button > Servicing & checks > Service intervals . Resetting the indicator Your authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility will reset the service interval display after performing service. If you have changed the oil yourself, you must reset the oil change interva l. To reset the indicator, select : the ICARI function button > Car systems contro l button > Servicing & checks > Service intervals. Turn the control knob downward to Reset oil change interval and press the control knob. ([) Note - Only reset the oil change indicator if the oil was changed . - Following the service intervals is critical to maintain ing the service life and value of your vehicle, especially the engine. Even if the mil eage on the vehicle is low, do not exceed the time for the next service. 282 Wheels Wheels Wheels and Tires General information .,.Checkyour tires regularly for damage (punctures, cuts, cracks and bulges). Remove foreign objects from the tire tread. .,.If driving over curbs or similar obstacles, drive slowly and ap proach the curb at an angle. .,.Havefaulty tires or rims replaced immediately. .,.Protect your tires from oil, grease and fuel. .,.Marktires before removing them so that the same running direction can be maintained if they are reinstalled . .,.Laytires flat when storing and store them in a cool, dry location with as little exposure to light as possible. (D 0 a:, .... N ...... .... 0 N 0 and braking ab ility. If summer tires are used in very cold temperatures, cracks can form on the tread bars, result ing in permanent tire damage that can cause loud driving noise and unbalanced tires. -Burnished, polished or chromed rims must not be used in winter driving conditions. The surface of the rims does not have sufficient corrosion protection for this and could be permanently damaged by road salt or sim ilar substances. Ti re designations Note -Please note that summer and winter tires are designed for the conditions that are typical in those seasons. Audi recommends using winter tires during the winter months. Low temperatures significantly decrease the elasticity of summ er tires, which affects traction Fig. 265 Tire specification codes on the sidewall of a tire I <t 283 .,. Wheels (D Tires for passenger vehicles (if applicable) P indicates a tire for a passenger vehicle. T indicates a tire designated for temporary use. @ Nominal width Nominal width of the tire between the sidewalls in millimeters. In general: the larger the number, the wider the tire. @ Aspect ratio Height/width percentage. ratio expressed as a Speed ratIng Maximum permitted speed R up t o 106 mph (170 km/h) s up to 110 mph (180 km/h) T up t o 118 mph (190 km/h) u up to 124 mph (200 km/h) H up t o 130 mph (210 km/h) V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)al z above 149 mph (240 km/h)al w up to 168 mph (270 km/h) al y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)al a) For tires above 149 mph (240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the code "ZR". (j) US DOT number (TIN) and manufacture date @ Tire construction The manufacture date is listed on the tire sidewall (it may only ap- R indicates a radial tire. pear on the inner side of the tire): ® Rim diameter DOT ... 2216 ... Size of the rim diameter in inches. @ Load index and speed rating The load index indicates the tire's load-carrying capacity. The speed rating indicates the maximum permitted speed ¢ & in Winter tires on page 298. "EXTRA LOAD", "xl" or "RF" indicates that the tire is reinforced or is an Extra Load tire. Speed rating Maximum permitted speed p up to 93 mph (150 km/h) Q up to 99 mph (160 km/h) 284 means, for example, that the tire was produced in the 22nd week of the year 2016. @ Audi Original equipment tires Audi Original equipment tires with the designation "AO" have been specially matched to your Audi. When used correctly, these tires meet the highest standards for safety and handling. An authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility will be Wheels able to provide you with more information . ® Mud and snow capability "M/5" or "M+S" indicates the tire has properties making it suitable to drive in mud or snow . & indicates a winter tire . @ Composition of the tire cord and materials The number of plies indicates the number of rubberized fabric layers in the tire. In general: the more layers, the more weight a tire can carry . Tire manufacturers must also specify the materials used in the tire. These inc lude steel, nylon, polyester and other materials. ~ -... ~ This number ind icates the maxi mum pressure to which a tire can be inflated unde r normal operating condit ions. Glossary of tire and loading terminology Accessoryweight @ Uniform tire quality grade Aspect ratio Tread wear, traction and temper ature ranges ¢ page 300. - inflation pressure This number indicates the max imum load in kilograms and pounds that the tire can carry. standards for treadwear, traction and temperature resistance "' @ Maximum permitted means the comb ined weigh t (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transm ission, power steering , power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items are available as facto ry-installed equipment (whether installed or not) . @ Maximum permitted load 0 You must always follow t he specified runn ing d irect ion ¢ page 319 . @ Running direction means the rat io of the heigh t to the width of t he tire in percent . Numbers of 55 or lowe r indicate a low sidewa ll for improved steering response and better overall handling on dry pavement. .,. The arrows indicate the running direction of unidirectional tires . 28 5 Wheels Bead means the part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim. Bead separation means a breakdown of the bond between components in the bead. flation pressures than t he correspond ing standa rd tire. Extra load tires may be identified as "XL", "xl", "EXTRALOAD", or "RF" on the sidewall. Gross Axle Weight Rating ("GAWR ") Cord means the load-carrying capacity of a single axle system , measured at the ti re-gro und interfaces. means the strands forming the plies in the tire . Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ("GVWR") Cold tire inflation pressure means the ti re pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for a t ire of a des ignated size that has not been driven for more t han a couple of miles (kilometers) at low speeds in the three hour period before the tire pressure is measured or adjusted. Curb weight means the weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, air conditioning and additiona l weight of opt ional equipment. Extra load tire means a tire des igned to operate at higher loads and at higher in28 6 means the max imum total loaded weight of the vehicle . Groove means the space between two adjacent tread ribs . Load rating (code) means the max imum load tha t a tire is rated t o carry for a given inflation pressure. You may not find this informat ion on all ti res because it is not required by law. Maximum load rating means the load rating for a t ire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that ti re. Maximum loaded vehicle weight means the sum of: Wheels (a) Curb weight (b) Accessory weight (c) Vehicle capacity weigh t , and (d) Production options we ight Maximum (permissible) inflation pressure means the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a t ire may be inflated. Also called "maxi mum inflation pressure." Normal occupant weight means 150 lbs. (68 kilograms) times the number of occupants seated in the veh icle up to the total seating capacity of your vehicle. Occupant distribution means distribution of occupants in a vehicle. Outer diameter means the overall diameter of an inflated new tire. Overall width -" 0 "' N -... N means the linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs . Ply means a layer of rubber-coated parallel cords . Production options weight means the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over 5 lbs. (2.3 kg) in excess of those standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim . Radial ply tire means a pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread. Recommended inflation pressure ~ page 286, Cold tire inflation pressure . see Reinforced tire means a tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire. Reinforced tires may be identified as 0 0 :c 287 .,. Wheels "XL" "xl" "EXTRALOAD" or "RF" on the sidewall. I I I Rim means a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated. Tire pressure monitoring system* Rim diameter means nominal diameter bead seat . If you change wheel size, you will have chase new tires to match rim diameter . The speed rating letter code, where applicable, is molded on the tire sidewall and ind icates the maximum permissible road speeds ¢ .&.in Winter tires on page 298. of the your to purthe new means a system that detects when one or mo re of a vehicle's tires are underinflated and illum inat es a low tire pressure warning telltale . Rim size designation Tread means rim diameter and width. means that portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road . Rim width means nomina l distance between rim flanges. Sidewall means that portion of a tire between the tread and bead . Speed rating (letter code) means the speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extend ed periods of time. The rat ings range from 93 mph (150 km/h) to 186 mph (298 km/h) ¢ table on page 284. You may not find this information on all tires be cause it is not requ ired by law. 28 8 Tread separation means pulling away of the tread from the t ire carcass . Treadwear indicators (TWI) means the projections within t he principal grooves designed to give a visua l indication of the deg rees of wear of the tread. See ¢ page 292, Treadwear indicator for mo re information on measuring tire wear. .,. Wheels ~ ~ -... ~ Uniform Tire Quality Grading DOT ... 2216 ... is a tire information system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) that is designed to help buyers make relat ive comparisons among tires . The UTQG is not a safety rating and not a guarantee that a tire will last for a prescribed number of mi les (kilometers) or perform in acertain way. It simply gives t ire buy e rs add itional informa t ion to combine with other considera tions, such as price, brand loya lty and dealer recommendations . Under UTQG,t ires are graded by t he tire manufacturers in th ree areas: treadwear, tr action, and tempera ture res istance. The UTQG information on the tires, molded into the s idewalls . means that t he tire was produced in the 2 2nd week of 2016 . The other numbers are marketing codes that may or may not be used by the t ire manufact ur er. This information is used to contact consumers if a tire defec t req uires a reca ll. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN) Vehicle normal load on the tire This is the tire's "serial number". It beg ins with the le t ters "DOT" and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards . The nex t two numbers or letters indicate the plant where it was manufac tu red , and the last fo ur numbers represent the week and yea r of manufacture. For examp le, Vehicle capacity weight means the rated cargo a nd luggage load plus l S0 lbs . (68 kilograms) t imes the vehicle's desig na t ed seating capacity. Vehicle maximum load on the tire means that load on an ind ividual tire tha t is determined by dist ribut ing to eac h ax le its share of the maximum loaded vehic le weight and dividing by two. means that load on a n individual tire that is determined by dist ributing to each ax le its share of the curb weight , accessory weight , and normal occupant weigh t (distributed in accordance wit h c:::>table on page 295) and dividing by two. .,. 289 Wh e el s Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seat ing capacit ies Refer to the tire inflation pressure label ¢ page 293, fig . 268 for the number of seating positions . Refer to the table¢ table on page 295 for the number of people that correspond to the vehicle normal load . New tires or wheels Audi recommends having all work on tires or wheels performed by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility . These facilities have the proper knowledge and are equipped with the required tools and replacement parts. .,.New tires do not yet have the optimum gripping properties. Drive carefully and at moderate speeds for the first 350 miles (500 km) with new tires . .,.Use tires of the same construction, size (rolling circumference) and as close to the same tread pattern as poss ible on all four wheels . 290 .,.Do not replace tires individually . At least replace both tires on the same axle at the same time. .,.Audi recommends that you use Audi Original Tires. If you would like to use different tires, please note that the tires may perform differently even if they are the same size ¢ ,&.. .,.If you would like to equip your vehicle with a tire/rim combina tion that is different from what was installed at the factory, consult with an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility before making a purchase ¢ &,. The spare tire* is different from the regular tires installed on the vehicle - for example, if winter tires or wide tires are installed so only use the spare tire* tempo rarily in case of emergency and drive carefully while it is in use. It should be replaced with a regular tire as soon as possible. All four wheels must be equipped with tires that are the same brand and have the same construction and tread pattern so that the drive system is not damaged by different tire speeds. For this rea son, in case of emergency, only .,. Wheels use a spare tire* that is the same circumference as the regular tires. &_ WARNING - 0 .... ,.... N .... g a, -Only use tire/rim combinations and suitable wheel bolts that have been approved by Audi. Otherwise, damage to the vehicle and an accident could result. -For technical reasons, it is not possible to use tires from other vehicles - in some cases, you cannot even use tires from the same vehicle model. -Make sure that the tires you select have enough clearance to the vehicle. Replacement tires should not be chosen simply based on the nominal size, because tires with a different construction can differ greatly even if they are the same size. If there is not enough clearance, the tires or the vehicle can be damaged and this can reduce driving safety and increase the risk of an accident . -Only use tires that are more than six years old when absolutely necessary and drive carefully when doing so . -Do not use run-flat tires on your vehicle . Using them when not permitted can lead to vehicle damage or accidents. -If you install wheel covers on the vehicle, make sure they allow enough air circulation to cool the brake system. If they do not, this could increase the risk of an accident. Tire wear/damage Fig. 266 Tire profile: treadwear indicator Tire wear Check the tires regularly for wear. -Inflation pressure that is too low or high can increase tire wear considerably. -Driving quickly through curves, rapid acceleration and heavy braking increase tire wear. N .. :r 291 Wheels -Have an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility check the wheel alignment if there is unusual wear . -Have the wheels rebalanced if an imbalance is causing noticeable vibration in the steering wheel. If you do not, the tires and other vehicle components could wear more quickly. Treadwear indicator Original equipment tires contain treadwear ind icators in the tread pattern, which are bars that are 1/16 in (1.6 mm) high and are spaced evenly around the tire perpendicular to the running direction. The letters "TWI" or triangles on the tire sidewall indicate the location of the treadwear indicators. The tires have reached the minimum tread depth l) when they have worn down to the treadwear indicators. Replace the tires with new ones c:::> ..&. . Tire rotation Rotating the tires regularly is recommended to ensure the tires 1> Obey any applicable regulations in your country. 292 wear evenly. To rotate the tires, install the tires from the rear axle on the front axle and vice versa . This will allow the tires to have approximately the same length of service life. For unidirectional tires, make sure the tires are installed according to the running direction indicated on the tire sidewall c:::>page319. Hidden damage Damage to tires and rims can often occur in locations that are hidden . Unusual vibrations in the vehicle or pulling to one side may indicate that there is tire damage. Reduce your speed immediately. Check the tires for damage. If no damage is visible from the outside, drive slowly and caref ully to the nearest authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the vehicle inspected . .&_WARNING Tread that has worn too low or different tread depths on the tires can reduce driving safety. ,.. Wheels pressure specified for normal loads¢ table on page 295. If driving the vehicle when fully loaded, you must increase the tire pressure to the maximum specified pressure ¢ .&,. This can especially have a negative effect on handling, on the risk aquaplaning when driving through water, when driving through curves and when braking, which increases the risk of an accident. Checking/correcting tire pressure Tire pressure Fig. 267 Driver's side B-pillar : tire pressur e label -"'- ,--------------============ •n,.......,.._,.,.. (:=:=a : I =:: I :.. I) ('::~) i ......... _.__......,_ _.., . ... _ ... l ................... . __.......... .......... ..._ .. .,,, .. Fig. 268 Tire pressure label The correct tire pressure for tires mounted in the factory and for the spare tire* is indicated on a label. The label is located on the Bpillar ¢ fig. 267, ¢ fig. 268. ~ N ~ .,..Checkthe tire pressure at least once per month and also check it before every long drive . .,..Alwayscheck the tire pressure when the tires are cold. Do not reduce the pressure if it increases when the tires are warm . .,..Checkthe label ¢ fig. 268 for the correct tire pressure based on vehicle load. .,..Correctthe tire pressure if necessary. .,..Vehicleswith Tire Pressure Monitoring System*: store the modified tire pressure in the Infotain ment system ¢ page 302. .,..Checkthe pressure in the emergency tire* /spare t ire*. Always maintain the maximum temperature that is specified for the tire. .,. When the vehicle is partially loaded (up to 3 peop le), use the tire 0 0 I <t 293 Wheels A WARNING Always adapt the tire pressure to your driving style and vehicle load. -Overloading can lead to loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of an accident. Read and follow the important safety precautions inc:::> page 295, Tires and vehicle load limits. -The tire must flex more if the tire pressure is too low or if the vehicle speed or load are too high. This heats the tire up too much. This increases the risk of an accident because it can cause the tire to burst and result in loss of vehicle control. -Incorrect tire pressure increases tire wear and has a negative effect on driving and braking behavior, which increases the risk of an accident. (D Note Replace lost valve caps to reduce the risk of damage to the tire valves. @ For the sake of the environment Tire pressure that is too low increases fuel consumption. (D Tips Audi recommends using the tire pressure specified for a normal load c:::> table on page 295 or for a full load when the vehicle is partially loaded. Tire pressure table Please note that the information contained in the following table was correct at the time of printing, and the information is subject to change . If there are differences between this information and the tire pressures specified on the label on the driver's side 8pillar, always follow the specifica- 294 tion on the 8-pillar label page 293, fig. 267. c:::> Make sure that the tire designation on your tire matches the designation on the tire pressure label and the tire pressure table. The following table lists recommended tire pressures in cold .. Wheels tires according to the load and the size of the tires installed . Tire pressure Model/ Engine Tire designation Normal load (up to 2*/3 people)al front Maximum load rear front rear PSI kPA PSI kPA PSI kPA PSI kPA 235/55 Rl8 104H 35 24 0 30 210 36 250 38 260 255/45 Rl9 104H 35 240 30 210 36 250 38 260 265/40 R20 104H 35 24 0 30 21 0 36 250 38 26 0 265/40 R20 104V 35 240 30 210 33 230 35 240 265/35 R21 101 Y 38 260 35 240 36 250 38 260 275/35 R21 103V 35 240 30 210 36 250 35 240 235/55 Rl8 104H 36 250 30 210 38 260 38 2 60 255/45 Rl9 104H 36 250 30 210 38 260 38 260 265/40 R20 104H 36 250 30 210 38 260 38 260 265/40 R20 104V 36 250 30 21 0 35 240 35 240 275/35 R21 103V 36 250 30 210 38 260 38 260 58: 265/40 R20 104V 36 25 0 30 21 0 39 27 0 38 26 0 4.0L 265/35 R21101 Y 39 270 33 230 44 300 42 290 275/35 R21103Y 36 250 30 210 44 300 42 290 265/40 R20 104V 38 260 32 220 39 270 38 260 275/35 R21 103V 45 310 39 270 49 340 48 330 A8/A8 L: 3.0L 6 cylinders AS/ASL: 4.0L 8 cylinders 8 cylinders 58 plus: 4.0L 8 cylinders a) Vehicles with 4 seating positions: two people in the front, Vehicles with 5 seating positions: two people in the f ront , one person in the rear A WARNING Please note the important safety precautions regarding tire pressure ¢ page 293 and load limits ¢ page 295. Tires and vehicle load limits ~ N ~ 0 0 :c '<t There are limits to the amount of load or weight that any vehicle and any tire can carry. A vehicle that is overloaded will not handle well and is more difficult to stop . Overloading can not only lead to loss of vehicle control, but can also damage important parts of the vehicle and can lead to sudden tire failure, including a blowout and sudden deflation that can cause the vehicle to crash. Your safety and that of your passengers also depends on making ..,. 295 Wheels sure that load limits are not exceeded. Vehicle load includes everybody and everything in and on the vehicle. These load limits are technically referred to as the vehicle's Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ("GVWR"). The "GVWR" includes the weight of the basic vehicle, all factory installed accessories, a full tank of fuel, oil, coolant and other fluids plus maximum load . The maximum load includes the number of passengers that the vehicle is intended to carry ("seating capacity") with an assumed weight of 150 lbs. (68 kg) for each passenger at a designated seating position and the total weight of any luggage in the vehicle. If you tow a trailer, the weight of the trailer hitch and the tongue weight of the loaded trailer must be included as part of the vehic le load. The Gross Axle Weight Rating ("GAWR") is the maximum load that can be applied at each of the vehicle's two axles. The fact that there is an upper limit to your vehicle's Gross Vehicle Weight Rating means that the total weight of whatever is being 296 carried in the vehicle (including the weight of a trailer hitch and the tongue weight of the loaded trailer) is limited. The more passengers in the vehicle or passengers who are heavier than the standard weights assumed mean that less weight can be carried as luggage . The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and the Gross Axle Weight Rating are listed on the safety compliance sticker label located on the driver's side B-pillar ¢ page 293, fig. 267. .&_WARNING - Overloading a vehicle can cause loss of vehicle control, a crash or other accident, serious personal injury, and even death. -Carrying more weight than your vehicle was designed to carry will prevent the vehicle from handling properly and increase the risk of the loss of vehicle control. -The brakes on a vehicle that has been overloaded may not be able to stop the vehicle within a safe distance. Wheels -Tires on a vehicle that has been overloaded can fail suddenly, including a blowout and sudden deflation, causing loss of control and a crash. -Always make sure that the total load being transported including the weight of a trailer hitch and the tongue weight of a loaded trailer does not make the vehicle heavier than the vehicle's Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. Determining correct load limit Use the example below to calculate the total weight of the passengers and luggage or other things that you plan to transport so that you can make sure that your vehicle will not be overloaded. Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1. Locate the statement "THE COMBINEDWEIGHTOF OCCUPANTSANDCARGOSHOULD NEVEREXCEEDXXXKGOR XXX LBS"on your vehicle's placard 0 (tire inflation pressure label) "' .... c::> page 293, fig. 267 . - 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from "XXX"kilograms or "XXX" pounds shown on the sticker c::> page 293, fig. 267 . 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs . passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 X 150) = 650 lbs .) 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces .,.. N -... N 0 0 :c 297 Wh e els t he available carg o and luggage load capa city of your vehicle. .,.Check th e ti re sidewall (¢ page 2 83, fig. 265) t o determine the desig nated load ratin g for a specific tire . Wheel bolts and rims Wheel bolts Wheel bo lt s must be clean and loosen/t ighten easi ly. Rims with a bol t ed rim ring * or wit h bolted wheel covers * consist of multip le pieces . These components we re bolted together using specia l bolts a nd a speci a l procedu re. You must not repair or d isa ssemble them¢ A . WARNING Whee l bolts that a re tightened or repaired incorrectly can become loose and result in loss of vehicle control, which increases the risk of an acc ident. For the correct t ightening specificat io n, see¢ page 314. - Always keep the wheel bolts and the t hreads in the whee l hub clean and free of grease. - Only use wheel bolts that fit the rim. - Always have damaged rims repaired by an autho rized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. Never repair or d isassemble rims yourse lf, because this increases the risk of an accident . Winter tires Winte r ti res s ignificantly improve the veh icle's handling when d riving in w inte r condit ions. Because of the ir constr uction (width, compound, t read pattern) , summe r ti res provide less trac tion on ice and snow. 298 The effectiveness of winter tires is reduced g reatly when the tread is wo rn down to a depth of 0.157 in (4 mm). The characte rist ics of winter ti res a lso decrease g rea t ly as t he t ire ages, regard less of the remaining t read. _&.WARNING Rims A .,.Use wint er tires on a ll four wheels . .. Only use winter tires that are approved for your veh icle. .,. Please note that the maximum permitted speed may be lower with winter tires¢ &_ . An author ized Audi dealer or autho rized Audi Serv ice Facility can inform you about the maximum permitted speed for your t ires . .,.Check t he tire pressure afte r insta lling wheels ¢ page 293 . - - Never drive faster than the maximum pe rm itted speed for your tires . This could cause the t ires to heat up too much. This increases the risk of an accident because it can cause the t ire to burst . - Always adapt your driving to the road and traffic conditions . Drive carefully and reduce your speed on icy or slippery roads . Even winter t ires can lose t ract io n on black ice. @ For the sake of the environment Reinsta ll summer tires at the appropr iate time, because they prov ide better handling when roads are free of snow and ice. Summer tires cause less road no ise, t ire wear and fuel consumpt ion. (i_) Tips You can also use all season tires instead of winter t ires . Please note that in some countries where wint er tires are required, o nly winter tires wit h t he & symbol may be permit ted. Snow chains Snow chains not on ly improve the driving in winter road conditions, but a lso the braking . .,.Only ins t all snow cha ins on t he fro nt wheels. ..,. Wh e el s ~ ~ Check and cor rect the seating of the snow chains after driving a few feet , if necessary. Follow the instructions from the manufacturer . Note the maximum speed of 30 mph (SO km/ h). Note the local regulat ions. Use of snow chains is on ly permitted with certain rim/tire combinations due to technical reasons. Check w ith an authori zed Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili ty to see if you may use snow chains . You must remove the snow chains on roads without snow. Otherw ise, you could impair dr iving ability and damage the tires. _8 WARNING Using incorrect snow chains or insta lling snow chains incorrectly can result in loss of vehicle cont rol, which increases the risk of an accident. (D Note - Snow chains can damage the rims/wheel covers* if the chains come into direct con· tact with t hem . Remove the whee l covers* f irst. Use coate d snow chains. - Using snow chains tha t add more than 0.4 inch (10.5 mm) of heigh t can severely damage the wheel housings and other vehicle componen t s. - Do not install and use snow chains if t here is a mal f unct ion in the adaptive air suspension, because the vehicle heigh t will be very low . If you drive with snow chains anyway, the wheel housings and other vehicle components can be severely damaged. @ Tips When using snow chains, it may be useful to switch on sport mode ¢ page 127. Low aspect ratio tires o co ~ ,..... ~ 0 0 :c '<t Your Audi is factory-equipped with low aspect ratio tires. These t ires have been thorough ly tested and been selected specifically for your model for their superb performance, road feel and handli ng under a var iety of dr iving condit ions . Ask your authorized Audi dealer for more detai ls. The low aspect rat io of t hese tires is indicated by a numeral of 55 or less in the ti re's size designation . The numera l represents the ratio of the tire's sidewa ll height in relation to its tread width expressed in percentage . Conventiona l tires have a height/width ratio of 60 or more . The performance of low-a s pect- ratio tires is particularly sen sitive to imprope r inflation pressure. It is the refore important that low aspect ratio tires are inflated to the specified pressure and that the inflation pressure is regularly checked and maintained . Tire pressures should be checked at least once a month and always before a long trip ¢ page 293 . What you can do to avo id tire a nd rim damage Low aspect ratio tires can be damaged more easily by impact w ith potho les, curbs, gullies or ridges on the road, particularly if the tire is under inflated . In order to m inimize the occurrence of impact damage to t he tires of your vehicle , we recomme nd tha t you observe the following precautio ns: - Always maintain recommended inflat ion pressures. Check you r ti re pressu re every 2,000 mil es (3,000 km) and add air if necessary. - Drive carefully on roads w it h potholes, deep gullies or ridges. The impact from dr iving t hrough or over such obst acles can damage your t ires. Impac t with a cur b may also cause damage t o your t ires. - After any impact, im mediate ly inspect your t ires or have t hem inspe cted by the nearest aut horized Audi dealer. Replace a damaged tire as soon as possible. - I nspect your t ires every 2,000 m iles (3,000 km) for damage and wear. Damage is not always easy to see. Damage can lead to loss of air and underinflation, wh ich could event ually cause tire fa il ure . If you believe that a tire may have been damaged, replace the tire as soon as possible . - These tires may wear more quickly than others . .,. 299 Wh e els - Please also remember that, while these tires deliver responsive handling, they may ride less comfortably and ma ke more noise than other choices. Reduced performance in winter / cold season condit ions All tires are designed for certain purposes. The low aspect ratio, ultra high performance t ires originally installed on your vehicle are intended for maximum dry and wet road performance and handling . They are not suitable for cold, snowy or icyweathe r cond itions. If you drive under those circumstances, you should equ ip your vehicle with all-season or wint er tires, which offe r bette r traction under those conditions . We suggest you use the recommended snow or all-season tires specified for your vehicle, or their equivalent. Refer to¢ page 298 for more deta iled information regarding wint er ti res. Uniform tire quality grading - Tread wear - Traction AAA B C - Temperatu re ABC Quality grades can be found where applicable on the t ire side wall betwee n tread shou lde r and maximum sect ion widt h ¢pag e 283, fig. 265. For example: Tread wear 2 00 , Traction AA, Temperature A . All passenger car tires must conform to Federa l Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Tread wea r The tread wear grade is a comparat ive rat ing based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under contro lled conditions on a specified government test course. For examp le, a t ire graded 150 would wear one and one ha lf (1 1/2) t imes as well on the govern ment course as a tire graded 100 . The relat ive perfo rmance of tir es depe nds upon the actua l condit ions of t heir use, however, and may depart significant ly from the norm due to 300 variations in driving habits, service pract ices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,A, Band C. Those grades rep resent the tire's ability t o stop on wet pavement as measure d under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance ¢ _&. Temperature The temperature grades are A (t he highest), B, and C, representing the tire 's resistance to the generatio n of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under contro lled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure¢ & . The grade C corresponds to a level of perform ance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than t he minimum requ ired by law. A WARNING - The t ract ion grade assigned to this t ire is based on st raight-a head braking tr action tes t s, and does not include acceler ation, cornering, hydroplaning or peak tr act ion characteristics. A WARNING The temperat ure grade for t his tire is esta blished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla tion, or excessive load ing, either separately or in comb inat ion, can cause heat bu ildup and possible tire failure. - ..,. Wheels _& WARNING Temperature grades apply to tires that are properly inflated and not over or underinflated . Tire Pressure Monitoring System (AS, S8) (D General notes Applies to: AS, 58 Each t ire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the veh icle manufact urer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation press ure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure labe l, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires). As an added safety feature, your veh icle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure te lltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated . Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure . Driving on a signifi cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability . Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire ma intenance, and it is the driver's responsib ility to ma int ain correc t tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 0 :r <t Your veh icle has also bee n eq uipp ed with a TPMS mal function indicator to ind icate when the system is not operat ing properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the te lltale will flash for approximately one mi nute and then remain cont inuously illuminated . This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal function exists . When the malfunction indicator is illuminated , the sys t em may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended . TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, includin g the insta llation of replacement or alternate tires or whee ls on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or a lternate tires and whee ls allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System indicator appears Applies to: A8, 58 The tire pressure indicator in the instrument cluster informs you if the tire pressure is too low or if there is a system malfunction. Fig. 269 I nstrument cluste r: indicator light with message Using the ABS sensors, the tire pressure monitoring system compares the tire tread circumference and vibration characteristics of the individual tires. If the press ure changes in one or more tires, this is indicated in the instrument cluster display with an indicator light [I] and a message. If only one tire is affected, the location of that tire will be indicated. The tire press ures must be stored in the Infotainment system again each time the pressures change (switching between partial and full load pressure) or after changing or replacing a tire on your vehicle c:>page 302. The tire pressure monitoring system only monitors the tire pressure you have stored . Refer to the t ire pressure label for ..,. 301 Wheels the recommended tire pressure for your vehicle ¢ page 293, fig. 268. Tire tread circumference and vibration characteristics can change and cause a tire pressure warning if: - the tire pressure in one or more tires is too low. - the tire has structural damage . - the tire was replaced or the tire pressure was changed and it was not stored ¢ page 302. - the spare tire* is installed. Indicator lights (D Tips - The tire pressure monitoring system can also stop working when there is an ESCmalfunction. - Using snow chains may result in a system malfunction. - The tires with the identification "AO" or "RO" ¢ page 290 have been matched with your Audi tire pressure monitoring system. We recommend that you use these tires. Storing tire pressures IE Loss of pressure in at least one tire ¢ &. . Appli es to: AB, 58 Check the tires and replace or repair if necessary. Check/correct the pressures of all four tires and store the pressure again in the Infotainment system ¢ page 302 . If the tire pressure changes or a tire is replaced , it must be confirmed in the Infotainment system. mm (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) Tire appears pressure: System malfunction!. Ifmm after switching the ignition on or while driving indicator light in the instrument clusand the ter blinks for approximately one minute and then stays on, there is system malfunction . Try to store the correct tire pressures ¢ page 302 . If the indicator light does turn off or turns on again after a short period of time, dr ive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected. IE A (D Tips Do not store the tire pressures if snow chains are installed. Othe rw ise the system could malfunction. WARNING - If the tire pressure indicator appears in the display, reduce your speed immediately and avoid any hard steer ing or braking maneuvers. Stop as soon as possible and check the t ires and their pressure . - The driver is responsible for maintaining the correct tire pressure. You must check the t ire pressure regularly . - Under certain conditions (such as a sporty dr iving style, winter cond itions or unpaved roads), the tire pressure monitoring system indicator may be delayed. - Do not use run-flat tires on your vehicle. Using them when not permitted can lead to vehicle damage or accidents . 302 ...Make sure before storing that the tire pressur es of all four tires meet the specified values and are adapted to the load ¢ page 291. ...Switch the ignition on . funct ion button> Car Systems ...Select: the ICARI control button > Servicing & checks > Tire pressure monitoring > Store tire pressure > Yes, store now. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (S8 plus) (l) General notes Appli es t o : 58 plus Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determ ine the proper t ire inflation pressure for those tires). .,. Wheels As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists . When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. 0 co .... N ,..._ .... N 0 0 :c Description Applies to : 58 plus The tire pressure monitoring system monitors the pressure in the four tires when driving . The system uses sensors that measure the temperature and pressure in the tires. The data is sent from these sensors to the control module by radio frequency. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System shows the current pressures and temperatures of the tires in the Infotainment system o page 304 . It also compares the current tire pressures with the stored tire pressures and gives a warning in the driver information system if the tire pressure is different from what is stored o page 304. The system does not detect if the stored tire pressures match the recommended tire pressures. - Every time the tire pressures change, for example when the load in the vehicle changes, - after replacing a tire, or - if wheels with new wheel sensorsare used, you must store the tire pressures again o page 305. A WARNING - - The tire pressure monitoring system assists the driver in monitoring tire pressures. The driver is responsible for having the tires inflated to the correct pressure. - Do not change the tire pressure when the temperature of the tire is high. This could result in serious damage to the tire and even cause the tire to burst, increasing the risk of an accident. - A tire with low pressure flexes more. This heats the tire up too much. This could cause the tread to separate and even cause the tire to burst, increasing the risk of an accident. - The Tire Pressure Monitoring System does not warn you of damage or defects in the tire construction that could cause the tire to burst, for example. Inspect your tires regularly. '<t 303 Wh e els @ Tire pressure loss For the sake of the environment Applies to: 58 plus Low tire pressure increases fuel consumption and tire wear. @ Tips - The pressure of the spare tire * is not moni tored. - If t ires are re placed, the sensors/valves do not need to be removed or rep laced . Just replaced the valve stem and, if necessary, the valve and the wheel e lectron ics . If you have quest ions, see your autho rized Aud i dea ler or authorized Audi Service Facility. Fig. 270 Display: indicator light wit h a mess ag e If the [I] ind icator light turns on, the pressure in at least one tire is too low or new sensors were not adapted: Displaying tire pressures/temperatures Applies to : 58 plus REindicator light s turn s on after turning the Requirement: the ign ition must be switched on . .,.Select : the ICARI function ignition on button > Car systems > Servicing & checks > Tire pressure mon itor - The tire pressure is too low compared to the spec ified press ure . ing > Display tire pressures. The current tire pressures are shown in green and yellow numbers in the Infotainment system: - Green: the current tire pressure and the specified tire pressure are approximately the same . - Yellow: t he current t ire press ure is too low compared to the specified tire pressure. .. Avoid unnecessary st eering and brak ing maneuvers . .. Adapt your driving sty le to the s ituation. .. Stop as soon as possib le and check the tire(s). .. If it is possib le to cont inue dr iving, see an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately and have your tire(s) repai red or rep laced . Not e that the tire pressure also depends on the t emperature of t he ti re . The ti re pressu re increases as the engine becomes wa rmer wh ile d riving. WARNING Rea d and follow t he important information page 303 . and notes c::> @ Tips The tire pressure or t em perature ar e not displayed in ada ptation mode. Dashe s·- .·- are shown in place of the press ure and t empera ture . 304 REindicator light turns on while driving Wheels with new sensors we re not adapted or the tire pressure has reached a critica l level compared to the specif ied pressure. The spe cified t ire press ure is the last t ire prespage 305. sure th at was st ored c::> & .. Check and store the tire press ure(s) the next page 305. time it is possible c::> - & WARNING Read and follow t he impo rtant info rmation age 303. and notes c::>p - Wh e el s fota inment system. The following are examp les of situations that cou ld cause a malfunction: Storing new tire pressures Applies to: S8 plus Correctly stored tire pressure specifications are necessary for reliable tire pressure monitoring . .. Check the tire pressures in all wheels. 1> If necessary, correct the tire pressure according to the spec ificat ions on the sticker on the driver's door ~ page 291 . Only correct the press ure in tires whose tempera t ure is approx imately the same as the amb ient temperature. If the tempera tu re of the tire is highe r than the ambient a ir temperat ure, the tire pressure must be increased approximately 3 PSI (0,2 bar) above the value on the sticker. .. Switch the ignition on. .. Select : ICARI funct ion button > Car systems > Tire pressure monitoring > Store tire pressures. After stor ing, the tire pressure mon itor - ing system measures the cur rent tire pressures and stores them as the new specified pressures . .. If t he changed t ire press ures are not displayed in t he Infotainment system, dr ive the veh icle for approximate ly 10 minutes so that the sen sor signal from the whee ls is received again . - If the message appears at t he e nd of the adapt ation phase, the system cannot detec t the wheels installed on the veh icle. This may result from one or more whee ls being installed without wheel senso rs or with incompatible whee l sensors. - A wheel sensor or another component has fa iled. - Using snow chains can affect the function of the system beca use of the shielding effect of the chains . - The tire pressure monitoring system is not avai lab le due to a ma lfunction . - Transmitters with the same frequency, such as headphones or remote-cont rolled devices, may cause a temporary system malfunct ion due to the strong electromagnetic field. fim The indicator light t urns off once the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is availab le aga in . If you cannot correct the ma lfunction and the m indicator light stays on, drive immediately to an authorized Aud i dealer or a uthorized Audi Serv ice Facility to have the malf unct ion repaired . During this adap t at ion phase, --,-- is disp layed for pressure and temperature and the Tire Pres sure Monitoring System is only partially available: it only warns you if one or more of the tire pressures is/are under the m inimum permitted va lue. If this is the case, the It] indicator light appears w ith a message . A WARNING - Read and follow the important information and notes ~ page 303. Malfunctions Applies to: S8 plus o co ~ ,..... ~ o 0 :c If t he Tire Pressu re Monito ring System is not ind icator light appe ar s in the available, the m driver informat ion system. The HJ]indicator light a lso blinks for approx imately one m inutes each time the ignition is switched on . The tire pressure monitoring system cannot be selected in the In- '<t 305 Care and cleaning Care and cleaning General information Regular, proper care helps to maintain your vehicle's value. It can also be a requirement when submitting warranty claims for corrosion damage and paint defects on the body. The necessary care products can be obtained from an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. Read and follow the instructions for use on the packaging. A WARNING - Using cleaning and care products incorrectly can be dangerous to your health . - Always store cleaning and care products out of reach of children to reduce the risk of poisoning. @ For the sake of the environment seals on the side windows, doors, lids or the sunroof* or at tires, rubber hoses, insulating material, sensors* or camera lenses* . Keep a distance of at least 16 in (40 cm). Do not remove snow and ice with a pressure washer. Never use cone nozzles or high pressure nozzles. The water temperature must not be above 140 °F (60 °C). Automatic car washes Spray off the vehicle before washing. Make sure that the windows and roof* are closed and the windshield wipers are off . Follow instructions from the car wash operator, especially if there are accessories attached to your vehicle. If possible, use car washes that do not have brushes. - Preferably purchase environmentally-friendly cleaning products. Only use car washes where the veh icle remains stationary and the washing equipment moves around the vehicle when washing and drying. Car - Do not disposeof leftover cleaning and care washesthat move the vehicle through the car products with household trash. Car washes The longer that deposits such as insects, bird droppings, tree sap or road salt remain on the vehicle, the more the surface can be damaged. High temperatures such as those caused by sunlight increase the damaging effect . Before washing, rinse off heavy deposits with plenty of water. Stubborn deposits such as bird droppings or tree sap are best removed with plenty of water and a microfiber cloth. Also, wash the underside of your vehicle once road salt stops being used for the season. Pressure washers When washing your veh icle w ith a pressure washer, always follow the operating instructions provided with the pressure washer. This is especially important in regard to the pressure and spraying distance. Do not aim the spray directly at the 306 wash using a chain are not recommended. Washing by hand Clean the vehicle starting from the top and work ing down using a soft sponge or cleaning brush . Use solvent-free cleaning products. Washing vehicles with matte finish paint by hand To avoid damaging the paint when washing, first remove dust and large particles from your vehicle. Insects, grease spots and fingerprints are best removed with a special cleaner for matte finish paint. Apply the product using a microfiber cloth. To avoid damaging the paint surface, do not use too much pressure. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with water. Then clean using a neutral shampoo and a soft microfiber cloth . Rinse the vehicle thoroughly again and let it air dry. Remove any water residue using a chamois. ..,.. Care and cleaning & WARNING - Only wash the vehicle when the ignition is off and follow the instructions from the car wash operator to reduce the risk of accidents. - To reduce the risk of cuts, protect yourself from sharp metal components when washing the underbody or the inside of the wheel housings. -After washing the vehicle, the braking effect may be delayed due to moisture on the brake rotors or ice in the winter . This increases the risk of an accident . The brakes must be dried first with a few careful brake applications. (D - To reduce the risk of damage, do not wash the power top with a pressure washer. - To reduce the risk of damage to the surface, do not use insect removing sponges, kitchen sponges or similar items. - Matte finish painted vehicle components: - - To reduce the risk of damage to the surface, do not use polishing agents or hard wax. - Never use protective wax. It can destroy the matte finish effect . - Do not place any stickers or magnetic signs on vehicle parts painted with matte finish paint . The paint could be damaged when the stickers or magnets are removed. Note @ - If you wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash, you must fold the exterior mirrors in to reduce the risk of damage to the mirrors. Power folding exterior mirrors* must only be folded in and out using the power folding function. - To reduce the risk of paint damage, do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Cleaning For the sake of the environment Only wash the vehicle in facilities specially designed for that purpose . This will reduce the risk of dirty water contaminated with oil from entering the sewer system. and care information When cleaning and caring for individual vehicle components, refer to the following tables. The information contained there is simply recommendations. For questions or for components that are not listed , consult an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. Also follow the information found in ¢ & . Exterior cleaning Component 0 co .... N ,..... .... N Situation Solution Windshield wiper Deposits blades ¢ page 51 Headlights/ Tail lights Deposits Soft sponge with a mild soap solutiona ) Sensors/ camera lenses Deposits Sensors: soft cloth with solvent-free cleaning solution Camera lenses: soft cloth with alcohol-free cleaning solution Snow/ice Hand brush/solvent-free Road salt Water Brake dust Acid-free special cleaning solution Wheels de-icing spray 0 0 :c '<t 307 Care and cleaning Component Situation Solution Exhaust tail pipes Road salt Water, cleaning solution suitab le for stainless steel, if neeessary Decorative parts/ Trim Deposits Mild soap solution a), a cleaning solution suitable for stainless stee l, if necessary Paint Paint damage Refer to t h e paint number on the vehicle data label, repair with touch up paint ~ page 333 Spilled fuel Rinse with water immediately Surface rust Rust remover, then protect w ith hard wax; for questions, consult an author ized Audi dealer or authorized Aud i Service Facility. Corros ion Have it removed by an authori zed Aud i dea ler or authorized Audi Service Facility. Water no longer beads on the surface of clean paint Protect wi t h hard wax (at least twice per year) No shine even though paint has been protected/paint looks poor Treat wit h suitable polish; then apply paint protectant if the polish that was used does not contain a ny protectant Deposits such as inDampen w ith water immediately and remove w ith a microsects, bird dropp ings, f iber cloth tree sap and road salt Carbon parts a) Grease-based contaminants such as cosmetics or sunblock Remove immediately with a mild soap so lution a) and a soft cloth Deposi ts clean the same way as painted parts ~ page 306 Mild soap solution: maxim um tw o tabl es poo ns of neut ral soap in 1 quart Cl lite r) of water Interior cleaning Component Situation Solution Windows Deposits Glass cleaner, then wipe dry Decorative parts/ Trim Deposits Mild soap so lution al Plastic parts Deposits Damp clo1th Heavier deposits Mild soap solution al, detergent-free tion, if necessary Displays Deposits Soft cloth with LCDcleaner Controls Deposits Soft brush, then a soft cloth with a mild soap so lution al Safety belts Deposits Mild soap solution al, allow to dry before letting them re tract 308 plastic clean ing solu- ... Ca r e and c leaning Component Situation Textil es artificial leat her, Alcantara Deposits adhering to the surface Vacuum cleaner Water-based deposits such as coffee, tea, b lood, etc. Absorbent cloth and mild soap solutiona> Oil-based deposits such as oil, make-up, etc. Apply a m ild soap solution a), blot away the dissolved o il or dye, treat afterward with water, if necessary Special deposits such as ink, nail polish, latex paint, shoe polish, etc. Special stain remover, blot with absorbent material, treat afterward with mild soap solution, if necessary a) Fresh stains Wool cloth with a mild soap so lution a) Water-based deposits such as coffee, tea, b lood , etc. Fresh sta ins: absorbent cloth dried stains: stain remover suitable for leather Oi[-based deposits such as oil, make-up, etc. Fresh sta ins: absorbent cloth and stain remover suitable for leather dried stains: oil cleaning spray Special deposits such as ink, nail polish, latex paint, shoe po lish, etc. Spot remove r suitab le for leather Care Regularly apply cond it ion ing cream that protects from light and penet rates into the material. Use specia lly-colored conditioning cream, if necessary . Dust and d irt Clean the ventilation openings in the luggage com partment Deposits Lukewarm water, mild soap solution if necessarya>, then dry Defrosting Empty the refrigera t or, switch it off and let it thaw with the door open, then dry Deposits clean the same way as plast ic parts Natu ral leath er Refrigerator Carbon parts a) Solution Mild soap solution: maximu m two tablespoons of neu tral soap in 1 quar t (1 liter) of water _&.WARNING 0 The windshie ld may not be treated with water-repelling windshield coating agents. Unfavorable cond itions such as wetness, darkness, or low sun can result in increased glare . Wipe r blade chatter is also possible. co .... N ,..... .... 0 N 0 :c (D Note - - Never clean headlights or tail lights with a dry cloth or sponge. - Do not use any cleaning product that contains alcohol, because they could cause cracks to form . - Wheels - Never use any pa int polish o r other abrasive mate rials. - Headlight s/t ail lig hts '<t 309 Care and cleaning - Damage to the protective layer on the rims such as stone chips or scratches must be repaired immediately. - Sensors/camera lenses - Never use warm or hot water to remove snow or ice from the camera lens. This could cause the lens to crack . - Never use abrasive cleaning materials or alcohol to clean the camera lens . This could cause scratches and cracks. - Door windows - Remove snow and ice on windows and exterior mirrors with a plastic scraper. To avoid scratches, move the scraper only in one direction and not back and forth. - Never remove snow or ice from door windows and mirrors using warm or hot water because this could cause cracks to form. - To avoid damage to the rear window defogger, do not apply any stickers on the heating wires on the inside of the window. - Decorative parts/trim - Never use chrome care or cleaning products. - Paint - To reduce the risk of scratches, the vehicle must be free of dirt and dust before polishing or waxing. - To prevent paint damage, do not polish or wax the vehicle in direct sunlight. - To reduce the risk of paint damage, do not polish away rust spots. - Remove cosmetics and sunscreen immediately- these could damage the paint. - Displays - To avoid scratches, do not use dry cleaning methods on displays. - Controls - Make sure that no fluids enter the controls , because this could cause damage. - Safety belts - Do not remove the safety belts to clean them. - Never clean safety belts or their components chemically or with corrosive fluids or solvents and never allow sharp objects to come into contact with the safety belts. 310 This could cause damage to the belt webbing. - If there is damage to the webbing, the connections, the retractors or the buckles, have them replaced by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. - Textiles/artificial leather/ Alcantara - Never treat artificial leather/ Alcantara with leather care products, solvents, floor polish, shoe polish, spot remove or similar products. - Have a specialist remove stubborn stains to prevent damage. - Never use steam cleaners, brushes, hard sponges, etc. when cleaning. - Do not turn on the seat heating* to dry the seat . - Objects with sharp edges, such as zippers or rivets on clothing or belts, can cause damage to the surface. - Open hook and loop fasteners, for example on clothing, can damage seat covers . Make sure hook and loop fasteners are closed. - Natural leather - Never treat leather with solvents, floor polish, shoe polish, spot remover or similar products. - Objects with sharp edges, such as zippers or rivets on clothing or belts, can cause damage to the surface. - Never use steam cleaners, brushes, hard sponges, etc. when cleaning. - Do not turn on the seat heating* to dry the seat. - To help prevent the leather from fading, do not leave the vehicle in direct sunlight for long periods of time. If leaving the vehicle parked for long periods of time, you should cover the leather to protect it from direct sunlight. - Refrigerator - Do not try to speed up the defrosting process by applying heat. - To help prevent health risks or damage to the refrigerator, do not use any abrasive ..,. Ca r e and c leaning cleaners, solvents, wax or strongly scented or aggressive cleaning products . - Do not clean the refrigerator with rough cleaning too ls s uch as steel wool. @ Tips - Insects a re easier t o remove from pain t that has been fresh ly waxed. - Regular waxing can prevent rust spots from fo rm ing . Placing your of service vehicle out If you wou ld like to take your vehicle out of service for a longer period of time, contact an authorized Audi dealer or authori zed Audi Service Facility. They w ill advise you of impor tant measures, such as corros ion protection, service and storage procedures. Also follow the info rmation about the vehicle batte ry ¢ page 2 79. 0 co .... N ,..... .... N 0 0 :c '<t 311 Emergency assistance Emergency General assistance information ...Park the vehicle as far as possible from moving traffic in the event of a breakdown. In the event of a flat tir e, park the vehicle on a level surface . It you are on a steep hill, be especially careful. .,. Set the parking brake . .,. Switch the emergency flashers on . ...Set up the warning triangle r=;,page 312 . ... Have the passengers exit the vehicle . They should move to a safe place, for example behind a guard rail. A Vehicle tool kit Applies to: vehicles with vehicle toot kit Fig. 272 Lugg age compartmen t: cargo floor cover fo lded upward WARNING Follow the steps given above. This is for your protection and the for the safety of other drivers. Equipment Warning triangle Applies to: vehicles with warning triangle Fig. 273 Luggage co mpartment: exa mpl e of veh icle toot kit and vehicle jack The vehicle tools and vehicle jack* are stored in the luggage compartment under the floor cover . Fig. 271 Luggage compa rt m ent lid: warnin g triangle The warning triangle placed in the vehicle at the factory is located in the luggage compartment. ...To remove the warning triangle, press the fastener in the direction of the arrow and fold the holder down. The luggage compartment lid is only designed to hold the warning triangle offered by th e Audi Genuine Accessories program. 312 ... Lift the cargo floor by the plastic handle . ... Hook the handle into the luggage compa rtment fig. 272 . seal r::> .,.Turn the handwheel counter -clockwise and remove it . .,. Remove the spare tire* to access the vehicle tool kit r::;,fig. 2 72 . Depend ing on the equipment , the veh icle tool kit may be located under the spare tire, under another cover or in the tool box . The position of the vehicle jack* may vary . A WARNING Improper use of the veh icle jack can cause se rious personal injuries. - Never use the screw driver hex head to tighten wheel bolts, since the bo lts cannot attain the necessary tightening torque if you .,.. Em er g e nc y a ss is tanc e - - - use the hex head, potentially causing an accident. The factory-supplied jack is intended only for your vehicle model. Under no circumstances should it be used to lift heavy vehicles or other loads; you risk injuring yourself . Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised, which could cause an accident. Support the vehicle secure ly with appropriate stands if work is to be performed underneath the vehicle; otherwise, there is a potent ial risk for injury. Never use the jack supplied with your Audi on anothe r vehicle, particularly on a heavier one . The jack is only suitable for use on the vehicle it came with. (D Tips The vehicle jack* in your vehicle is maintena nee-free. Replacing wheels Before changing a wheel Observe the following precautions for your own and your passenger's safety when changing a wheel . .,.After you experience a tire failure, pull the car well away from moving t raffic and try to reach level ground before you stop ¢ ,&.. .,.All passengers should leave the car and move to a safe location (for instance, behind the guardrail) ¢ ,&.. .,.Engage the parking brake to prevent your vehicle from rolling unintentionally ¢ ,&.. .,.Move sel ecto r leve r to pos it ion P ¢ ,&.. .,.If you are towing a trailer, unh itch the trailer from your vehicle. .,.Take the jack and the s pare tire out of the luggage compartment ¢ page 312. WARNING 0 co .... N ,..._ .... N 0 You or your passengers could be injured while chang ing a wheel if you do not follow these safety precautions: - If you have a flat tire, move a safe distance off the road. Turn off the eng ine, turn the emergency flashers on and use other warning devices to alert other motorists . - Make sure that passengers wait in a safe place away from the vehicle and well away from the road and traff ic. - To help prevent the vehicle from moving suddenly and possib ly slipping off the jack, always fully set the parking brake and block the wheel diagonally opposit e the wheel being changed. When one front whee l is lifted off t he groun d, placing t he Automatic Transmission in "P" (Park) will not prevent the vehicle from moving. - Before you change a wheel, be sure t he ground is level and firm. If necessary, use a sturdy board under the jack. - Always st ore the vehicle tool kit, the jack and the replaced tire in the luggage compartment r::>page 213 . (D Tips Befo re changing the wheel, you must activate t he jacking mode, so that the automat ic contro ls for the Adaptive Air Suspension do not make it more difficult to lift the vehicle with the jack ¢ page 315 . Changing a wheel When you change a wheel, follow the sequence described below step-by-step and in exactly that order . 1. Activate the vehicle jack mode ¢ page 315 . 2. Remove the decorative wheel cover*. For more detai ls see also r:::> page 314, Decorative wheel covers or ¢ page 314, Wheels with wheel bolt caps. 3. Loosen the wheel bolts r:=> page 315 . 4 . Locate the proper mounting point for the jack and align the jack below that point r:::> page 315 or ¢ page 316 . 5. Raise the car wit h the jack ¢ page 315 or r:::> page 316 . 6. Remove the whee l with the flat tire and then insta ll the spare r:::> page 318 . 0 :c '<t 313 IJII> Emergency assistance 7. Tighten all wheel bolts light ly. 8. Lower the vehicle with the jack . 9. Use t he whee l bolt wrench and firmly t ighten page 315 . all whee l bolts <=:> 10. Replace the decorative wheel cover* . 11. Deactivate t he vehicle jack mode in the MMI: ICA R Ifu nction butto n > Car systems control button > Servicing & checks > Air susp.: jack Decorative wheel covers Applies to: vehicles with decorative wheel covers The decorative wheel covers must be removed first to access the wheel bolts. mode > Off . The vehicle jack mode switches off automat ically at speeds above 10 km/ h. ,& WARNING Always read and fo llow all WARNINGS and informat ion c;, .&.in AB: Raising t he vehi cl e on p oge316 and <=:>page 319 . After changing a wheel A wheel change is not complete without the doing the following. • Always store the veh icle tool kit, the jack* and the replaced t ire in the luggage compartment <=:> page 2 13. • Check the tire pressure on t he spare whee l immed iate ly after mo unti ng it . • As soon as possible, have the tightening torques on all whee l bolts checked with a torque wrench. The correct tightening torque is 90 ft lb (120 Nm). • Have the flat tire replaced as soon as possible. (D Fig. 2 74 Changi ng a whee l: Removing t he whee l cover Removing • Insert t he hook (provided with t he vehicle tool kit ) in the hole in t he wheel hub cover. fig. 2 74 . • Pull off the decorative wheel cover <=:> Wheels with wheel bolt caps Applies to: vehicles wit h wheel bolts with caps The cops mus t be removed fir st from t he wheel bol ts before the bol t s con be unscrewed. Tips - If you notice t hat the whee l bolts are corroded and difficult to t urn while cha nging a tire, they should be rep laced before you check the tighte ning torque . - Drive at reduced speed until you have the tighte ning torques checked. - After changing a wheel, the tire pressure in all four tires must be checked/co rrect ed and the t ire press ure mon itor ing indicato r must page 302 . be stor ed in t he MMI <=:> Fig. 275 Cha ng ing a wheel: remov ing th e wheel bolt caps Removing • Push t he plastic clip (provided with the vehicle tool kit) over the whee l bolt cap until the inne r reta iners on the clip align with t he edge of the cover. • Remove the cap wit h t he plastic clip (vehicle too l kit) c;, fig. 2 75. Refitting • Place the caps over the whee l bolts and push them back on. 314 Emergency The caps are to protect and keep the wheel bolts clean. Loosening and tightening the wheel bolts The wheel bolts must be loosened before raising the vehicle. assistance on the end of the whee l bolt wrench with one foot only. As you do so, hold on to the car to keep your balance and take care not to slip. AS: Raising the vehicle The vehicle must be lifted with the jock first before the wheel can be removed. Fig. 276 Changing a wheel: loose ning the wheel bo lts Loosening Fig. 277 Sill panels: markings .. Slide the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt as far as it will go . .. Take tight hold of the end of the wrench handle and turn the wheel bolts counter-clockwise about one single turn in the direction of arrow ¢fig. 276. Tightening .. Slide the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt as far as it w ill go. .. Take tight hold of the end of the wrench handle and turn each whee l bolt clockwise until it is seated . & WARNING - Do not use force or hurry when changing a wheel - you can cause the vehicle to slip off the jack and cause serious personal injuries . - Do not loosen the wheel bolts more than one turn before you raise the vehicle with the jack. - You risk an injury. (D C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 0 :r Tips - Never use the hexagonal socket in the handle of the screwdriver to loosen or tighten the wheel bolts . - If a whee l bolt is very tight, you may find it easier to loosen by carefully push ing down Fig. 278 Sill: pos ition ing t he veh icle jack "' Activa te the veh icle jack mode in the MMI: !CARI function button > Car systems control button > Servicing & checks > Air susp.: jack mode> On . .. Engage the parking brake to prevent your vehicle from rolling unintentiona lly. .. Move the selector lever to position P. .. Find the marking (imprint) on the sill that is nearest the wheel that will be changed c:::;, fig. 2 77 . Behind the marking, there is a lifting point on the sill for the veh icle jack. .. Turn the vehicle jack located under the lift ing point on the sill to ra ise the jack unt il its arm @ c:::;, fig. 278 is located under the designated plastic mo unt c:::;,& c:::;, (D . fig. 278 en .. Align the jack so that its arm @ c:::;, gages in the designated lifting point in the door sill and the movable base @ lies flat on the ..,. <t 315 Em e rg e n cy assis t a n ce ground . The base @ must be vertical under the lifting point @ . .. Wind the jack up further unt il the flat tire comes off the ground c:>&, . Position the vehicle jack only under the designated lifting points on the sill c:>fig. 2 77. There is exactly one location for each wheel. The jack must not be positioned at any other location c::,,&.c:>Q). An unsta ble surface under the jack can cause the veh icle to slip off the jack. Always provide a firm base for the jack on the ground. If necessary place a sturdy board or similar support under the jack. On hard, sli ppery surfaces (such as tiles) use a rubber mat or similar to prevent the jack from sl ipping c:>,&.. A WARNING - You or your passengers could be injured wh ile chang ing a wheel if you do not follow these safety precaut ions: (D Note Do not lift the veh icle by the s ill. Pos ition the vehicle jack only at the designated lifting points on the sill. Otherwise, your vehicle will be damaged. (D Tips The vehicle jack mode switches off automatically at speeds above 10 km/h. 58: Raising the vehicle The vehicle must be li~ed with the jock first before the wheel con be removed. - - Position the vehicle jack only at the designated lifting points and align the jack. Otherw ise, the vehicle jack cou ld slip and cause an injury if it does not have sufficient hold on the vehicle. - A soft or unstable surface under the jack may cause the vehicle to slip off the jack. Always provide a firm base for the jack on the grou nd. If necessary, use a sturdy board under the jack. - On ha rd, s lippery surface (such as tiles) use a rubber mat o r similar to prevent the jack from slipping. - To help prevent injury to yourself and yo ur passengers: - Do not ra ise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged. - Passengers must not remain in the vehicle when it is jacked up. - Make sure that passengers wait in a safe place away from the vehicle and well away from t he road and traff ic. - Make sure jack position is correct, adjust as necessary and then cont inue to raise the jack. 316 - Changes in temperature or load can affect the height of the vehicle . Fig. 279 Sill panels: ma rkings Fig. 28 0 Sill: pos ition ing the vehicle jack "'"Activate the vehicle jack mode in the MMI: !CARI function button> Car system s control button > Servicing & checks > Air susp.: jack mode > On. .. Engage the parking brake to prevent your vehicle from rolling unintentiona lly. .. Move the select or lever to position P. "'"Find the mar king (imprint) on the sill that is nearest the wheel that will be changed Iii>- Emergency ¢ fig. 279. Behind the marking, there is a lifting point on the sill for the vehicle jack. ~ Turn the vehicle jack located under the lifting point on the sill to raise the jack until its arm @ ¢ fig . 280 is located under the designated plastic mount ¢ .&. in AB: Raising the vehicle on page 316 ¢ (D. ~ Align the jack so that its arm @ ¢ fig . 280 engages in the designated lift ing point in the doo r sill and the movable base @ lies flat on the ground . The base @ must be vertical under the lifting point @ . ~ Wind the jack up further until the flat tire comes off the ground ¢ .&. in AB: Raising the vehicle on page 316. Position the vehicle jack only under the designated lifting points on the sill ¢ page 315, fig. 277. There is exactly one location for each wheel. The jack must not be positioned at any other location ¢ &. in AB: Raising the vehicle on page 316¢(]) . An unstable surface under the jack can cause the vehicle to slip off the jack . Always provide a firm base for the jack on the ground. If necessary place a sturdy board or similar support under the jack . On hard, slippery surfaces (such as tiles) use a rubber mat or s imilar to prevent the jack from sl ipping Q &.. A WARNING - You or your passe ng ers could be injured wh ile chang ing a wheel if you do not follow these safety precautions: 0 co .... N ,..... .... N 0 0 :c assistance - Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged. - Passengers must not remain in the vehicle when it is jacked up. - Make sure that passengers wait in a safe place away from the vehicle and well away from the road and traffic. - Make sure jack position is correct, adjust as necessary and then continue to raise the jack. - Changes in temperature or load can affect the height of the vehicle. (D Note Do not lift the vehicle by the si ll. Position the vehicle jack only at the designated lifting points on the sill. Otherwise, your vehicle will be damaged. (D Tips The vehicle jack mode switches off automatically at speeds above 10 km/h. - - Position the veh icle jack only at the designated lifting points and align the jack . Otherw ise, the vehicle jack could slip and cause an injury if it does not have sufficient hold on the vehicle. -A soft or unstable surface under the jack may cause the vehicle to s lip off the jac k. Always provide a firm base for the jack on the ground. If necessary, use a stu rdy board un der the jack . - On ha rd, slippery surface (such as tiles) use a rubber mat or similar to prevent the jack from slipping . - To help prevent inju ry to you rself and your passengers: '<t 317 Emergency assistance Taking the wheel off/installing the spare Follow these instructions step-by-step for changing the wheel . Putting on the spare wheel • Lift the spare wheel and carefully slide it over the alignment pin to guide it in place ¢ 0 . • Use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to screw in and tighten all wheel bolts slightly. Fig. 281 Chang ing a wheel: using the screwdriver handle (with the bla de removed) to t urn the bolts • Remove the alignment pin and insert and tighten the remaining wheel bolt s lightly like the rest. • Turn the jack handle counter-clockwise to lower the vehicle until the jack is fully released. • Use the wheel bolt wrench to tighten all wheel bolts firmly¢ page 315. Tighten them crosswise, from one bolt to the (approximately) opposite one, to keep the wheel centered. (D Note When removing or installing the wheel, the rim could hit the brake rotor/ceramic brake rotor* and damage the rotor. Work carefully and have a second person help you. (D Fig. 282 Chang ing a whee l: alignment pin inside the top hole After you have loosened all wheel bolts and raised the vehicle off the ground, remove and replace the wheel as follows: Removing the wheel • Use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to completely remove the topmost wheel bolt and set it aside on a clean surface ¢ fig. 281. • Screw the threaded end of the alignment pin from the tool kit hand-tight into the empty bolt hole c>fig. 282 1) _ • Then remove the other wheel bolts as described above. •Ta keoff the wheel leaving the alignment pin in the bolt hole ¢ 0 . l) Applies to ve hicles with ce ram ic brake rot ors*: Use a second alignment pin* (sto red in the spa re wheel well mo lding) for the lower hole, follow ing t he description for the first alignment pin. 318 Tips Never use the hexagonal socket in the handle of the screwdriver to loosen or tighten the wheel bolts. - Pull the reversible blade from the screwdriver before you use the hexagonal socket in the handle to turn the wheel bolts. - When mounting tires with unidirectional tread design make sure the tread pattern is pointed the right way¢ page 319. - The wheel bolts should be clean and easy to turn. Check for dirt and corrosion on the mating surfaces of both the wheel and the hub. Remove all dirt from these surfaces before remounting the wheel. Emergency Tires with unidirectional tread design Tires with unidirectional tread design must be mounted with their tread pattern pointed in the right dir ection . Using a spare tire w ith a tread pattern intended for use in a specific direction When us ing a spare t ire with a tread patte rn inten d ed fo r use in a specific direction, please note the following: - The direct io n of rotat io n is ma rked by an a rrow o n the side of the tire . - If the spare tire has to be installed in the incorrect d irection, use the spare tire only temporarily s ince the t ire w ill not be ab le to achieve its opt imum performanc e cha racte ristics wit h re g ard to aqua planing, noise and we a r. - We recommend t hat you pay particular attent io n t o t his fa ct du ring we t wea th e r and th at you adju st your s peed t o m at ch road conditi o ns . - Repl ace t he flat tir e wit h a new one and have it inst a lled on your vehicle as soon as possible to res t ore t he handlin g advanta ges of a unidi rectiona l tire . - Replace the flat tire with a new one and have it installed on your vehicle as soon as possible. Remount the wheel cover. Until then , drive with extra care and at reduced speeds. A WARNING Please read the info rmation <=> page 29 0 if you are going to use a spare tire which is d ifferent from t he tires on your vehicle. - - If you are going to equip your vehicle with tires or rims which diffe r from those which were factory installed, the n be sure to read the information r:>page 290. - Always make sure the dama ged w heel or even a flat tire and the jack and tool kit ar e prope rly sec ured in the luggage compa rtmen t a nd a re not loose in t he passenger compa rt me nt. - In an accident or sudde n maneuv e r th ey could fly forward , inj uring a nyone in the vehicle. - Always store damaged w he el, jack and tools se cur e ly in t he luggage compartment. Ot he rwise, in an accide nt or sud de n mane uver t hey could fly forw ard , causing inju ry to pas se nger s in th e vehicl e. Spare Notes on wheel changing assistance tires General information Applies to : vehicles with spare tire/space-saving spare tire (comp act s pa re t ire) Afte r you change a ti re: C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 - Check the tire pressure on the spare immedi ately after installation. - Have the wheel bolt tightening torque checked with a torque wrench as soon as possible by your authorized Audi dealer or a qualified service station. - With steel and alloy wheel rims, the wheel bolts are correctly tightened at a torque of 90 ft lb (120 Nm). - If you notice that the wheel bolts are corroded and diff icult to turn while changing a tire, they should be replaced before you check the tightening torque . Fig. 28 3 Luggage compa rt ment: cargo floo r cover folded upward The spare tire is intended for s hort-term use only. Have the damaged tire checked and, if necessary, rep laced by an authorized Audi dealer or autho rized Aud i Serv ice Facility as soon as possible. II>- 0 :r <t 319 Em e rg e n cy assis t a n ce There are some restrictions on the use of the spare tire. The spare tire has been designed specifically for your type of vehicle. Do not replace it with the spare tire from another type of vehicle. There are different types of spare tires availab le page 320. depending on the equipment c::> Removing t he spare tire • Lift the cargo floor by the plast ic handle ~fig. 283. • Hook the hand le into the luggage compartment seal. • Turn the handwhee l counter-clockwise and remove it. • Remove the spare tire. as soon as possible with the normal whee l and tire. - For technical reasons, the use of tire chains on the spare tire is not permitted. If it is necessary to drive with tire chains, the spare wheel must be mounted on the front axle in the event of a flat in a rear t ire. The newly ava ilable front wheel must then be installed in place of the rear wheel with the flat tire. Installing the tire chain befo re mounting the wheel and tire is recommended. - Loose items in the passenger compa rtment can cause se rious personal injury during ha rd braking or in an accident. Never store the inflatable spare tire or jack and tools in the passenger compartment . Snow chain s For technica l reasons, the use of snow chains on the compact spare tire is not permitted. Spare tire types If you have to drive with snow chains and a front tire fa ils, mount the spare wheel in place of a rear tire. Insta ll the snow cha ins on the rear tire that you removed, and install that in place of the front tire that failed. A WARNING -After installing a spare t ire, the tire pressure must be checked as quickly as poss ible. - Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h) with a compact spare tire. Driving faster than that increases the risk of an accident. - To reduce the risk of an accident, avo id fu llthrottle acceleration, heavy braking, and fast cornering with the compact spare t ire. - To reduce the risk of an accident, never drive with more than one compact spare tire. - Norma l summer or winter tires must not be mounted on the compact spare wheel rim. A (compact spare tire) WARNING - Never use the spare tire if it is damaged or if it is worn down to the tread wear indicators. - If the spare tire is more than 6 years o ld, use it only in an emergency and with extreme caution and careful dr iving. - The spare tire is intended on ly for temporary and short-term use. It should be replaced 320 Fig. 284 Luggage compartment: space -saving spare tire (D Spare tire* If you have to mount a spare tire oppos ite the runn ing direction because of a flat tire, drive ca refully and restore the cor rect runn ing d irection as soon as poss ible ¢page 319. Emergency assistance @ Space-saving spare tire (compact spare tire ) * The ti re pressure must be 6 1 PSI (4 .2 bar) . 0 co .... N ,..._ .... N 0 0 :c '<t 321 Fuses and bulbs Fuses and bulbs Fuse color identification Electrical Color Current rating in amps Black 1 Purple 3 Light brown 5 Brown 7.5 Red 10 Blue 15 Yellow 20 Wh ite or tr anspa re nt 25 Green 30 Orange 40 fuses Changing fuses A fuse that has blown will have metal strips that have burned through . Fig. 28 5 Driver side of t he cockpit: fuse panel cover A WARNING - Do not repair fuses and never replace a blown f use with one that has a higher amp rat ing. This ca n cause damage to t he e lectr ica l system and a fire. (D I l I Fig. 2 86 Luggage compartment: fuse panel cover The fuses are loca t ed on front left and right of the cockpit and behind the trim on the right side of the luggage compartment. .. Swit ch the ignition and all e lect rica l equipment off. .. Check the following table to see which fuse belongs to the equipment . .. Remove the cover c::> fig. 285 or c:>fig . 286 . .. Remove the colored plastic clip from the fuse page 323, fig. 287. You panel, if necessary c:> can d ispose of the plastic clip . .. Remove the clamp from the rear s ide of the cove r c::> fig. 285 . .. Remove t he fuse usi ng the clamp . .. Replace the blow n fuse only wit h an identi cal new one . .. Install the cover. 322 Note If a new fuse burns out again sho rtly after you have insta lled it, have the electrical system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility . (D Tips - The following table does not list fuse locat ions that are not used . - Some of the equipment listed in the fo llowing tables applies on ly to certai n model versions or certa in optional equipment . Fuses and bulbs Driver's side cockpit fuse assignment Fuse panel © (black) 3 Front exterior lighting 4 Sliding/tilting s Driver power window 6 Driver's seat (pne umat ic) 7 Panorama roof 8 Dynamic steering 9 Front exterior lighting sunroof 10 Windshield/headlight washer system 11 Left rear power window 12 Panorama roof Front passenger side cockpit fuse assignment Fig. 287 Driver s ide cockpit : fuse panel with plastic bracket Fuse panel @ (brown) No. Equipment 1 Light switch 2 Eme rgency start coil (driver identification) 3 Left rear door control module 4 Head-up display 5 Horn 6 Interior lights (headliner) 8 Steering column lever, multifunction steer ing whee l controls, steering wheel heating 10 Power steering column adjustment 11 Driver door control module Fig. 288 Front passenger side cockpit: fuse panel with plastic bracket 12 Diagnostic connector, light/rain sensor 14 Power steering column adjustment lS Power steering, A/C compressor .... Anti-theft alarm system 2 Transmission control module Fuse panel © (black) 3 Front climate control fan No. Equipment 4 Engine supply C0 "' ""'.... 0 0 No. Equipment 1 16 Brake booster C) Fuse panel @ (black) 1 Front seat heating 6 Engin e control module 2 Windshield wipers 7 Front passenger door control module :r <t 323 Fuses and bulbs Fuse panel @ (black) Fuse panel @ (black) 8 Front passenger power window 11 Right rear power window 9 ESCcontrol module 12 Front passenger's seat (pneumatic) 10 ESC control module Luggage compartment fuse assignment Fig. 289 Luggage compartment: fuse panel with plastic bra cket Fuse panel @ (black) No. Equipment Fuse panel @ (black) 10 Rear seat heating, refrigerator , rearview mirror l ESC button , data logger, diagnostic connector, BCM- 1, adaptive light 11 Electromechanical 2 Networking gateway 12 Selector lever, BCM-2 voltage 3 adaptive air suspension 13 Side assist 4 Park ing aid 14 Eng ine control module 5 Steering column lever 15 Starter 6 Suspension control system sensor 7 Belt tensioners, airbag control module 8 Heated washer flu id nozzles, Home Link (garage door opener) , night vision system control module, sport differential, ionizer 9 Electromechan ical parking brake control module 324 16 steering Left headlight (headligh ts w ith adaptive lig ht)/head light range control Fuse panel ® (red) No. Equipment l Left reversible belt tensioner 2 Right reversible belt tensioner Fuses and bulbs Fuse panel @ (red) Fuse panel @ (black) Starter diagnosis, DC/DC converter (with Start/Stop system) 7 Electromechanical 8 Rear seat heating 4 DC/DC converter (with Start/Stop 9 Rear exterior lighting 5 Image processing 10 Rear climate control blower 6 Right headl ight (headlights with adaptive light) 7 ESC control module Rear sun shade, closing aid, luggage com11 partment lid lock, convenience key, fuel filler door 8 Sound actuator, AEM contro l modu le/ crankcase housing heater 9 Adapt ive cru ise control 3 system) 3 Left rear seat (pneumatic) Fuse panel © (brown) s Tra iler hitch control module No. Equipment 6 Left rear seat 7 Right rear seat Suspension control system sensor 8 Tra iler hitch control module Rear Infotainment 9 Tra ile r hitch control module Electromechanical parking brake 3 4 Sma rt mod ule (tank) 5 Front climate control system controls 6 Rear climate control system control panel 7 Networking gateway 8 Refrige rator 9 Special functions interface system control panel Fuse panel ® (brown) No. Equipment 1 Start/Stop amplifier 2 Sound amplifier 10 Cell phone adapter, Bluetooth handset 11 AEM control module 3 Start/Stop system, Rear Seat Entertainment, radio receiver/sound amplifier 12 Selector lever 13 Interior lighting s Automat ic dimming interior rearview mirror (for Start-Stop system) 14 Rear exter ior light ing 15 Fue l pump 6 DVDchanger (glove compartment) 7 TV tuner 16 Electromechan ica l parking brake 8 Infotainment 9 Instrument 1 Luggage compa rt ment lid movement-activated opening 2 Luggage compartment 3 Rea r socket 0 co 4 Front cigarette lighter ,..... 5 adaptive air suspension 6 1 lS V socket :c buttons 10 Right rear seat (pneumatic) No. Equipment 0 No. Equipment Rear seat adjustment Fuse panel @ (black) .... 0 lid control module 1 1 2 N 12 Luggage compartment Fuse panel © (red) 10 Transmission control module 11 Climate control system sensors .... N parking brake sockets system, ra dio receiver/sound system control panel/drives cluster, ana log clock 10 Infotainment system display 11 Radio receiver 12 Rearview camera, peripheral cameras (parking system) '<t 325 Fu ses a nd bul bs Bulbs Replacing light bulbs Foryour safety, we recommend that you have your authorized Audi dealer replace burned out bulbs for you. It is becoming increasingly more and more difficult to replace vehicle light bulbs since in many cases, other parts of the car must first be removed before you are able to get to the bu lb. This applies espec ially to the light bulbs in the front of your car wh ich you can only reach through the engine compartment . Sheet metal and bulb holders can edges that can cause ser ious cuts, m ust be correctly taken apa rt and put back together to help prevent parts and long term damage from enter housings that have not been sealed. have sharp and parts then properly breakage of water that can properly re- For your safety, we recommend that you have your authorized Audi dealer replace any bu lbs for you, since your dealer has the proper tools, the correct bulbs and the expertise. Gas discharge lamps (Xenon ligh ts): Due to the high electrical voltage, have the bulbs replaced by a qua lified technic ian . Headlights with Xenon light can be identified by the high voltage sticker. LED headlights* require no maintenance. Please contact your authorized Aud i dealer if a bulb needs to be replaced. A WARNING Contact w ith high-voltage components of the electrical system and improper rep lacement of gas discharge (Xenon) headlight bulbs can cause serious personal injury and death. - Xenon bulbs are pressurized and can explode when being changed. - Changing Xenon lamps requires the special training, instructions and equipment. - Only an a uthorized Audi dea ler or other qualified workshop should change the bulbs in gas discharge lamps . 326 A - WARNING @ Tips There are parts with sharp edges on the openings and on the bulb holders that can cause serious cuts. - If you are uncertain about what to do, have the work performed by an authorized Audi dealer or other qualified workshop. Ser ious pe rsonal injury may resu lt from improperly pe rformed wor k. - If you must replace the light bulbs yourself, always remember that the eng ine compartment of any vehicle is a hazardous area to work in. Always read and heed all WARNINGS '* page 271. - It is best to ask your authorized Audi dealer whenever you need to change a bulb. Emergency Emergency situations General This chapter is intended for trained emergency crews and working personnel who have the necessary tools and equipment to perform these operations. Starting towing by pushing or - - CDNote Veh icles with an automatic transmission not be started by pushing or towing. can- - Starting cables with jumper If necessary, the engine can be started by connecting it to the battery of another vehicle. If the engine shou ld fail to start because of a dis charged or weak battery, the battery can be connected to the battery of another vehicle, using a pair of jumpe r cables to start the engine. - Jumper cables Use only jumper cables of suffic iently large cross section to carry the starter current safely. Refer to the manufacturer's specifications. Use only jumper cables with insulated term inal clamps which are dis ti nct ly marked: plus (+) cable in most cases colored red minus( -) cable in most cases colored black. A 0 co .... N ,..... .... N 0 0 :c WARNING Batteries contain electricity, acid, and gas. Any of these can cause very serious or fatal injury. Follow the instructions below for safe handling of your vehicle's battery. - Always shield your eyes and avo id leaning over the battery whenever poss ible. - A dead battery can freeze at temperatures around 32 °F (0 °C). If the vehicle battery is frozen, you must thaw it before connecting the jump start cab les. If you do not, this in- - - situations creases the risk of an explosion and chemical burns. After jump starting the vehicle, drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the vehicle battery checked. Do not allow battery ac id to contact eyes or skin . Flush any contacted area with water immed iately. Improper use of a booster battery to start a veh icle may cause an explosion . Veh icle batteries generate explosive gases. Keep sparks, flame and lighted cigarettes away from batter ies. Do not try to jump start any vehicle with a low acid level in the battery . The voltage of the booster battery must also have a 12-Volt rat ing. The capacity (Ah) of the booster battery should not be lower than that of the discharged battery. Use of batter ies of different voltage or substantially different "Ah" rating may cause an exp losion and personal injury. Never charge a frozen battery. Gas trapped in the ice may cause an explosion. Never cha rge or use a battery that has been frozen . The battery case may have be weakened. Use of batter ies of different voltage or substantially different capacity (Ah) rating may cause an exp losion and injury . The capacity (Ah) of the booster battery should not be lower than that of the discharged battery. Before you check anything in the engine compartment, always read and heed all WARNINGS qpage 271. CDNote - App lying a higher voltage booster battery will cause expensive damage to sensitive electronic components, such as control units, relays, radio, etc. - There must be no electrical contact between the vehicles as otherwise current could already start to flow as soon as the positive (+) terminals are connected. '<t 327 Emergency @ situations Connecting the positive cable (red) to the positive terminal Tips The discharged battery must be properly connected to the vehicle's electrical system . When jump starting or charging the battery, never connect the negative ground cable to the battery negative post because the battery manager system must be able to detect the battery's state of charge. Always connect the negat ive ground cable to the negative g round pos t of the battery manager control unit. Using cable the jump start Both jump start cables must be connected in the correct order! ...Open the cover on the positive terminal qfig . 290. 1. Secure one end of the pos itive cab le (red) to t he jump start pin (D q fig. 291 (pin under the cover = "plus") on the vehicle that needs to be started @ . 2. Secure the other end of the positive cable (red) to the positive terminal @ on the ba t te ry provid ing the cur rent @ . Connecting the negative cable (black) to the negative terminal 3. Secure one end of the negative cable (black) to the negative terminal @ on the battery that is providing the current @ . 4. Secure the other end of the negative cable (black) to the jump start pin @ (hex head pin = "negative") on the vehicle that needs to be started @ . Starting the engine Fig. 290 Engine compartme nt : conn ectors for jump start cables an d a charger Fig. 291 Jump starting using a battery in a not her vehicle: A - providing current, B - drai ned The procedure fo r connecting jump start cables that is descr ibed next is designed to help jump start your vehicle. Vehicle with discharged battery: ...Turn off lights and accessories, move automatic transmission lever to N (Neutral) or P (Park) and set parking brake. 328 ...Sta rt the eng ine on the vehicle providing the jump start @ and let it run at idle . ... Now start the engine on the vehicle with the drained battery @ . ...If the engine does not start, stop the starting procedure after 10 seconds and then repeat it after approximately 30 seconds . ... Remove the cables whe n the engi nes are running. Remove them in reverse order from the way they we re installed. " Close the cover on the positive terminal. The battery is vented to the outside to prevent gases from enter ing the vehicle interior. Make sure that t he jumper clamps are well connected with their metal parts in full contact with the battery terminals . A WARNING To avoid serious personal injury and damage to the vehicle, heed all warnings and instructions of the jumper cable manufacturer. If in doubt, call for road service . - Jumper cables must be long enough so t hat the vehicles do not touch. Ill> Emergency - When connect ing jumper cables, make sure that they cannot get caught in any mov ing parts in the engine compartment. - Before you check anything in the engine compartment, a lways read and heed a ll WARNINGS ¢ page 271. (D Note Impro per hook-u p of jum per cables can ru in the generato r. - Always connect POSITIVE(+) to POSITIVE (+), and NEGATIVE(- ) to NEGATIVE(- ) g round post of the battery manager contro l unit. - Check that a ll screw plugs on the batt ery cells are sc rewed in firmly. If not, t ighten plugs p rior to connect ing clamp on negative batte ry te rmi nal. - Please note t hat the procedure fo r con necting a jumper cab le as desc ribed above applies specifica lly to t he case of your vehicle being ju m p started. When you are g iving a ju mp start t o another vehicle, do not connect th e neg ative( -) ca ble to the neg at ive (-) t ermin a l on t he disch arge d bat te ry @ ¢ fig . 291 . Instead, secure ly connect the negative(- ) cab le to either a solid metal com ponent that is f irm ly bolted to the engine block or to the engine bloc k itself. If the battery that is be ing cha rged does not vent to the outs ide, escap ing batte ry gas could ignite and explod e ! Towing with a tow truck General hints Your Audi requires special handling for towing . The fo llow ing information is to be us ed by commercia l tow tr uck opera t ors who know how t o op e rat e the ir equip men t sa fe ly. - Never tow your Audi. Towing will cause damage to the engine and transmission . - Never wrap the safety chains or winch cables ~ around the brake lines. ,.., ~ - To prevent unnecessary damage, your Audi N 8 must be transported with a flat bed truck. 0 situations - To load the vehicle on to the flat bed, use the towing loop found in the vehicle tools and attach to the front or rear anchorage ¢ page 329 and c>page 330. A WARNING - A veh icle being towed is not safe for passengers. Never allow anyo ne to ride in a vehicle being towed, for any reason. Front towing loop Fig. 29 2 Fron t bumper: removing the cap Fig. 293 Fron t bumper: insta lling the tow ing loop The thread for the towing loop is on the right s ide of the fro nt bumper beh ind a cap. .,. Remove the towing loop f rom the vehicle too l kit. .,. Press the cap inward with brief, forceful pressure c>fig. 292 . The cap will loosen from the bumper . .,.Tighten the tow ing loop in the t hreaded opening until it stops c>fig. 293 and then tighten it wit h a wheel wre nch . .,.Afte r usi ng, place th e tow ing loop back in the veh icle tool kit. :r <t 329 ..,. Emergency situations _& WARNING pulled out when towing the vehicle and that could cause an accident . If the towing loop is not tightened until it stops when installing, the threads may be pulled out when towing the vehicle and that could cause an accident. Loading the vehicle onto a flat bed truck I Rear towing loop Fig. 296 Vehicle on f lat bed t ru ck Front hook up .. Align the vehicle with the centerl ine of the car car rier ramp . .. Attach the winch hook to the front towline eye previously installed. Fig. 294 Rear bumper: re m oving the cap Rear hook up .. Align the vehicle wit h the centerl ine of the car car rier ramp . .. Attach the w inch hook to the rear towline eye previously installed. @ Fig. 295 Rear bumpe r: inst alli ng the towing loop Check carefully to make sure the hook-up is secure before moving the car up the flatbed truck ramp . The threaded open ing is locat ed in the bumper on the right rear side . .. Remove the towing loop from the vehicle tool kit . .. Press the cap inward with brief, forceful pressure <:>fig. 294. The cap will loosen from the bumper . .. Tighten the towing loop in t he threaded opening until it stops ¢ fig. 295 and then tighten it with a wheel wrench . .. After using, place the towing loop back in the vehicle tool kit. 8_ WARNING If the towing loop is not tightened until it stops when installing, the threads may be 330 Tips - Vehicle transport Whenever you hove your vehicle transported, be sure to note the following: (D Note Mount the t ie-down chains/cables over the running surface (circumference) of the tires. Never secure the vehicle by the axle, the suspension struts or the front or rear towline eye. For technical reasons, the pressure in the suspension struts may change during the transport and this will adversely affect veh icle handling. Emergency Raising situations Front lifting point the vehicle The lifting poi nt is locate d on th e floor pa n rein forceme nt ab out at t he same level as t he ja ck mounting point c:>fig . 297. Do not lift the vehicle at the vertical sill reinforcement. Lifting with workshop hoist and with floor jack The vehicle may only be li~ ed at the lifting points illustra ted. Rear lifting point ~:c... a, The lifting point is lo cated on th e vert ical rein forcement of th e lower s ill for t he on- boar d jac k <=> fig. 2 98 . Lifting with vehicle jack Refer to c:>pag e 315 . A Fig. 297 Front lift ing point WARNING - To redu ce the risk of se rious inj ury an d vehi cle da mag e. - Always lift the vehicle on ly at the special workshop hoist a nd f loor jack lift points illustrated c:>fig. 297 and c:>fig. 298. Fig. 298 Rear lift ing point .,.Read and heed WARNING c:>&_. .. Activate the vehicle jack mode in the MMI: ICAR I funct ion button> Car systems control button> Servicing & checks> Air susp.: jack mode> On. .. Locat e lift ing po ints c:>fig . 297 and c:>fig . 298 . .. Adjust lifting arms of workshop ho ist or floo r jack t o ma tch vehicle lift ing poin t s. .. Inse rt a rubb er pa d between the f loor jack/ wor kshop hoist and the lifting points . C) .... C0 "' ""'.... 0 - Failure to lift t he veh icle at these points could cause t he veh icle to tilt or fall from a lift if t here is a change in vehicle weight dist ribution and balance . This might happen, fo r example, when heavy com ponents such as the eng ine block o r t ransmis sion are re m oved. - Whe n re mov ing heavy co m ponents like these, anchor vehicle t o hoist or add correspon din g weig ht s t o m ain t ai n the cent er of g ravity. Ot herw ise, t he vehicle mig ht t ilt or slip off t he hoist, caus ing se rious pe rsonal injury . (D Note - Be aware of t he fo llow ing po ints befor e lifting th e vehicle: The vehicle ja ck mode m ust be activate d so th at the au t omatic adj ustment of t he Adaptive Air Suspension does not make it more diffic ult to raise the vehicle w it h the floo r jack. - The vehicle should never be lifted or jacked up from underneath the engine oil pan, the transmission housing, the front or rear axle or the body side members. This could lead to serious damage . If you must lift your vehicle with a floor jack to work underneath , be sure the vehicle is safely supported on stands intended for this purpose. - To avoid damage to the underbody or chassisframe, a rubber pad must be inserted between the floor jack and the lift points . 0 :r <t 331 ..,. Emergency situations - Before driving over a workshop hoist, check that the vehicle weight does not exceed the permissible lifting capacity of the hoist. - Before driving over a workshop hoist, ensure that there is sufficient clearance between the hoist and low parts of the vehicle. 332 Technical Technical Vehicle data The sticker contains the following vehicle data: specifications 0 0 XXXXX XX· X· XXXX XXX XX XXXXXX XX XXX XX XXXXXX XXXXXX CD-+ : ::::: IYPIT'il'! ®i ©+ 11:l :x: .,. al xx xxxxxxx xx xx xx XXX KW XXX xxxx XXXXXX I.AOOIR./ INNENAllSSl. PAI NTIIO./ ffl£ml XXXX I XXXXXXXI XX II.• AIJSlit / OPTIO NS 11)10Al<8 ./lil'IR. k8. a.;.C1lll/TRANS. CIIOE EOA 705 4UB 2EH JOZ 1LB 3FC FOA 9G3 TL6 3KA 8EH l XW 803 7T6 CV7 7KO 3L4 4KC lSA 7GB XX. X data 6XM SSG SRW 1AS l BA SMU 7Xl OG7 OYH OJF Ul A X9B OZ7 908 8Z4 020 4X3 2K2 3YO 413 502 01A 4GO XX X XX X xxxx Fig. 299 Vehicle identifica t ion labe l Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) The VIN number is located in the following places : - In the Infotainment system: se lect: the !CARI func t ion button > Car systems control bu tton > Servicing & checks > VIN number . - on the vehicle identification label - under the windshield on the driver's side Vehicle identification label The vehicle identification label ¢ fig. 299 is located in the luggage compartment under the cargo floor cover in the spare wheel well. (D @ @ @ Vehicle Identification ® Optional equipment Number (VIN) Vehicle type, engine output, transm ission Engine and transmission codes Paint and interior codes numbers Safety compliance sticker The safety compliance sticker is your ass urance that your new veh icle complies w ith all applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards which were in effect at the time the vehicle was manufactured. You can find this sticker on the door jamb on the driver's side. It shows the month and year of production and the vehicle identification number of your vehicle (perforation) as well as the Gross Vehicle Weight Rat ing (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). High voltage warning label The high voltage warning label is located in the engine compartment next to the engine hood re lease. The spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002 . Notes data about technical The values may differ for some markets depending on equ ipment installed in ce rt a in markets and the measuring methods. Please note that the specifications listed in the vehicle documentation always take precedence. (0 Tips Missing technical data was not available at the time of pr int ing. The information of the vehicle identification label can also be found in your Warranty & Maintenance booklet. C) .... C0 ,-... "' .... "' 0 0 :r <t 333 Te c h nical data Dimensions Length (in (mm)) Width (in (mm)) A8 L 207.3 (5,265) 76.7 (1,949) 83.l (2,111) 57.9 (1,471) AB 202.2 (5,135) 76.7 (1,949) 83.1 (2,111) 57.5 (1,460) 58 202.6 (5,147) 76.7 (1,949) 83.l (2,111) 57.4 (1,458) When driving on poor roads, by curbs and on steep ramps, make sure that low-hanging components such as the spoiler and exhaust system do not come into contact w ith these or they could Width acrossthe Height at curb mirrors (in (mm)) weight (in (mm)) be damaged. This especially applies to vehicles that are equipped w ith adapt ive air suspension and when the vehicle is at full load . Capacities Approximate capacitie s 2 1. 7 gal (82.0 L) Fuel tank Windshield and headlight washer system* Weights Gross Vehicl e Weight Rat ing The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for front and rear are listed on a sticker on the door jamb on the driver's side. The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating includes the weight of the basic vehicle plus full fuel tank, oi l and coolant, plus maximum load, which includes passenger we ight (150 lbs/68 kg per designated seating position) and luggage we ight¢ ,&.. Gross Axle W eight Rating The Gross Axle Weight Rating is the maximum load that can be applied at each axle of the vehicle ¢ ,&.. Vehicle capacity weight The vehicle capacity we ight (max. load) is listed either on the driver's side B-pillar or inside the fue l filler flap . A WARNING - The actual Gross Axle Weight Rating at the front and rear axles shou ld not exceed the permissible weights, and their comb inat ion 334 5.3 qt (5.0 L) must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. - Exceeding permissible weight ratings can result in vehicle damage, accidents and personal injury. (D Note - The vehicle capacity weight figures apply when the load is distr ibuted evenly in the vehicle (passengers and luggage) . When transport ing a heavy load in the luggage compartment, carry the load as near to the rear axle as possible so that the vehicle's hand li ng is not impaired. - Do not exceed the maximum perm issible axle loads or the maxim um gross vehicle we igh t . Always remember that the vehicle's hand li ng will be affected by the extra load. Therefore, adjust your speed accordingly . - Always observe local regulat ions. Techn ical dat a Gasoline engines A8 3.0, 6 cylinder Maximum output SAE net hp@rpnn 333 @ 5500 - 6500 Maximum torque SAE net lb-ft@ rpm 326@ 2900 - 5300 Displacement CID (cm 3 ) 182 .7 (2995) Engine oil with filter change 1> Fuel Premium unleaded (9 1 AKI), ¢ page 267, Gasoline A8 4.0, 8 cylinder Maximum output SAE net hp@ rpnn 450@ 5300 - 6000 Maximum torque SAE net lb-ft@ rpm 444@ 1500 - 5250 Displacement CID (cm 3) 243 .6 (3993) Engine oil with filter change 1) Fuel Premium unleaded (91 AKI), ¢ page 267, Gasoline 58 4.0, 8 cylinder Maximum output SAE net hp@ rpnn 520 @ 5800 - 6400 Maximum torque SAE net lb-ft@ rpm CID (cm 3) 481 @ 1700 - 5500 Displacement 243 .6 (3993) Engine oil with filter change 1) Fuel Premium unleaded (91 AKI ), ¢ page 267, Gasoline 58 plus 4.0, 8 cylinder Maximum output SAE net hp@ rpnn 605@ 6100 - 6800 Maximum torque SAE net lb-ft@ rpm 517@ 1750 - 6000 Maximum torque SAE net wit h over boost lb-ft@ rpm 553 @ 2500 - 5500 Displacement CID (cm 3 ) 243.6 (3993) Engine oil with filter change 1l Fuel Premium unleaded (91 AKI) , ¢ page 267, Gasoline For specific engine oil capacities, please see the most current information for the USA at http :/ /www.audiusa.com/help/maintenance or for Canada at http:/ /www.audi.ca/ca/brand/ en/ your _aud i/ aud i_services_and/Care_and_Ma i ntenance/ schedule.html or call 800-822-2834 . l) 0 co .... N ,..._ .... N 0 0 :c '<t 335 Consumer information Consumer Warranty information (D coverages Audi cannot be responsib le for mechanical damage that could result from inadequate fuel, service or parts ava ilability. Your Audi is covered by the following warranties: - New Vehicle Limited Warranty - Limited Warranty Against Corrosion Perforation - Emissions Control System Warranty - Emissions Performance Warranty - California Emissions Control Warranty (USA vehicles only) - California Emissions Performance Warranty (USA vehicles only) Note Audi Service Repair Manuals and Literature Audi Official Factory Service Manuals and Litera ture are published as soon as poss ible after model introduction . Service manuals and literature are available to order from the Audi Technical Lit erature Ordering Center at : www.audi .techliterature .com Detailed information regarding your warranties can be found in your Warranty & Maintenance booklet . Maintenance General ' Operating your vehicle outside the U.S.A. or Canada Government reg ulati ons in the United States and Canada require that automobi les meet specific emission regulations and safety standards. Therefore, vehicles built for the U.S.A. and Cana da differ from vehicles sold in other countries. If you plan to take your vehicle outside the continenta l limits of the United States or Canada, there is the poss ibility that: - un leaded fue ls for vehicles with catalytic converter may not be available; - fuel may have a considerably lower octane rating . Improper fuel may cause eng ine damage; - service may be inadequate due to lack of proper service facilities, tools or testing equ ipment; - rep lacement parts may not be readily available. - Navigation systems for veh icles built for the U.S.A. and Canada will not necessarily work in Europe, and may not wo rk in other countries outside North America. Your vehicle has been designed to help keep maintenance requirements to a minimum. However, a certain amount of regular maintenance is still necessary to assure your vehicle's safety, economy and reliability . For detailed vehicle maintenance consult your Warranty & Maintenance booklet . Under difficult operating conditions, for exam ple at extremely low outside temperatures, in very dusty regions, when towing a trailer very frequently, etc., some service work should be performed between the intervals specified. This applies particularly to : - oil changes, and - cleaning or replac ing the a ir filter . @) For the sake of the environment By regularly maintain ing your vehicle, you help make sure that em iss ion standards are maintained, thus min imizing adverse effects on the environment . ' Important considerations for you and your vehicle The increasing use of electronics, sophisticated fuel injection and emission control systems, and the generally increas ing technica l complexity of 336 ..,_ Consumer today's automobiles, have steadily reduced the scope of maintenance and repairs which can be carried out by vehicle owners. Also, safety and environmental concerns place very strict limits on the nature of repairs and adjustments to engine and transmission parts which an owner can perform . Maintenance, adjustments and repairs usually require special tools, testing devices and other equipment available to specially trained work shop personnel in order to assure proper performance, reliability and safety of the vehicle and its many systems. Improper maintenance, adjustments and repairs can impair the operation and reliability of your vehicle and even void your vehicle warranty . Therefore, proof of servicing in accordance with the maintenance schedule may be a condition for upholding a possible warranty claim made within the warranty period. Above all , operational safety can be adversely affected, creating unnecessary risks for you and your passengers. If in doubt about any servicing, have it done by your authorized Audi dealer or any other properly equipped and qualified workshop. We strongly urge you to give your authorized Audi dealer the opportunity to perform all scheduled maintenance and necessary repairs. Your dealer has the facilities, original parts and trained specialists to keep your vehicle running properly . Performing limited maintenance yourself The following pages describe a limited number of procedures which can be performed on your vehicle with ordinary tools, should the need arise and trained personnel be unavailable. Before performing any of these procedures, always thoroughly read all of the applicable text and carefully follow the instructions given . Always rigorously observe the WARNINGS provided . 0 co .... N ,..... .... N Before you check anything in the engine compartment, always read and heed all WARNINGS c::> .&.and c::>.&.in Working in the engine compartment on page 271 . A information WARNING - Serious personal injury may occur as a result of improperly performed maintenance, ad justments or repairs . - Always be extremely careful when working on the vehicle. Always follow commonly accepted safety practices and general common sense. Never risk personal injury. - Do not attempt any of the maintenance, checks or repairs described on the following pages if you are not fully familiar with these or other procedures with respect to the vehicle, or are uncertain how to proceed. - Do not do any work without the proper tools and equipment. Have the necessary work done by your authorized Audi dealer or another properly equipped and qualified workshop. - The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a potentially hazardous area. Never reach into the area around or touch the radiator fan. It is temperature controlled and can switch on suddenly - even when the engine is off . The radiator fan switches on au tomatically when the coolant reaches a certain temperature and will continue to run until the coolant temperature drops. - Always switch off the ignition before anyone gets under the vehicle . -Always support your vehicle with safety stands if it is necessary to work underneath the vehicle . The jack supplied with the vehicle is not adequate for this purpose and could collapse causing serious personal injury. - If you must work underneath the vehicle with the wheels on the ground, always make sure the vehicle is on level ground, that the wheels are always securely blocked and that the engine cannot be started. - Always make sure the transmission selector lever (automatic transmission) is in "P" (Park position) and the park brake is applied. 0 0 :c '<t 337 ~ Con s umer @ inf o rm a tion For the sake of the env ironment - Changing the engine settings wi ll adversely affect emission levels. This is detrimental to the environment and increases fuel consumption. - Always observe environmental regu lations when disposing of old engine oil, used brake flu id, dirty engine coolant, spent batteries or worn out tires. - Undeployed airbag modules and pretensioners might be classified as Perchlorate Material -special handl ing may apply, see www.dtsc .ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. When the vehicle or parts of the restraint system including airbag modu les safety belts wi t h pretensioners are scrapped, all applicab le laws and regulations must be observed. Your authorized Audi dealer is familiar with these requirements and we recommend that you have your dealer perform this service for you. A - Using the wrong spare parts or using non-approved accessories can cause damage to the vehicle and serious personal injury. - Use on ly accessories expressly approved by Audi and genuine Audi spare parts - These parts and accessories have been specially designed to be used on your vehicle. - Do not use license plate brackets in the front area that are different from the one installed at the fac tory, or add additional license plate brackets. - Never install accessories such as telephone cradles or beverage holders on airbag covers or w it hin the airbag deployment zones. Doing so will increase t he risk of injury if airbags are triggered in an accident! - Before you check anything in the engine compa rtment, always read and heed all WARNI NGS ¢page 271. (D Accessories and technical changes Additional accessories and parts replacement Always consult on authorized Audi dealer before purchasing accessories. Your vehicle incorporates the latest safety design features ensuring a high standard of active and passive safety. This safety could be comp romised by non-approved changes to the vehicle. For this reason, if parts have to be replaced, please observe the fo llowing points when insta lling addit ional accessories: Approved Audi accessories and genuine Audi parts are available from author ized Audi dealers. These dealers also have the necessary facilities, too ls and trained specialists to install the parts and accessories properly. WARNING Note - If items other than genu ine Audi spare parts, add-on equipment and accessory it ems are used or if repair wor k is not performed according to specified met hods, this can resul t in severe damage to your vehicle's engine and body (such as corrosion) and adversely affect your vehicle's warranty. - The innovative aluminium concept of your Audi AB means that all servicing, repairs or other work on the vehicle body must be carried out exclusively by an Audi workshop. - If emergency repairs must be performed elsewhere, have the vehicle exam ined by an authorized Audi dealer as soon as possible. - The manufacture r cannot be held liable for damage which occurs due to failure to comply with these stipulations. Technical Modifications Our guidelines must be complied with when technical modifications ore mode. Always consult an authorized Audi dealer befo re starting work on any modifications . 338 Con s umer This will hel p ensure that vehicle function, performance and safety are not impaired ¢ & . Attempting to work on electronic components and the software used with them can cause ma lf unctions. Because of the way electronic components are inte rconnected with each other, such malfunct ions can also have an adverse affect on other systems that are not directly involved . This means that you risk both a substantia l reduction in the operationa l safety of your veh icle and an increased wea r of vehicle parts¢ .&,. Author ized Audi dealers w ill perform this work in a profess ional and competent manner or, in special cases, refer you to a professional company that specializes in such modifications . A - Head phones - Homelink universal remo t e cont rol - Remote cont rol key - S8 plus : t ire pressure monitoring system FCC Part 15 .19 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the follow ing two condit ions: (1) This device may not cause harmf ul interfer ence, and (2) t his devi ce must accept any inte rference received, incl uding interference that may cause undesired ope ration. FCC Part 15.21 WARNING CAUTI ON: Improper repairs and mod ificat ions can change the way veh icle systems work and cause damage to the veh icle and serious personal injury. ([) inf o rmation Note RSS-Gen Issue 1 If emerg ency repairs must be performed elsewhere, have t he vehicle examined by an aut hori zed Audi dealer as soon as possib le. Declaration Compliance, munication Systems Changes or mod ificat ions not express ly app roved by the party responsible fo r compliance could void the user's aut horit y to ope rate the equ ipment. of Telecomor Electronic Operat ion is subject to the following two condit ions: (1) this device may not cause inte rference, and (2) t his device must accept any inte rference, including interference that may cause undes ired operation of the device. Radio Frequency Devices and Radiocommunica tion Equipment User Manual Notice . The manufactu rer is not respo nsible for any radio or TV inte rf eren ce caused by unauthor ized modifications to this equipment . Devices The fo ll ow ing devices each comp ly w ith FCCPart 15. 19, FCC15.2 1 and RSS-Gen Issue 1: - Adaptive cruise control oco - Audi side assist ~ - Cell phone package N 8 - Convenience key 0 - Electron ic immobilizer .... :c '<t 339 Index Ant i-free ze A A/ C (automat ic climate contro l) . . . . . . . . . . 70 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . .. . . . . 60 , 338 Active lane assist (lane depa rture assist) . . 102 Cleaning the camera area . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Windshie ld washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Ant i-Lock Brakin g System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . 126 Ant i-Slip Regulation (ASR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... ... ... ... ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 157 161 163 159 157 Audi music inte rface . . . . . . . . . . . Adapter cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecti ng and disconnect ing . Screen settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .... .... .... .... 185 185 185 190 Adj usting the tempe rature (automatic climate control system ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Audio player refer to Bluet ooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Adju sting the vol ume RSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Audio trac k (DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Audi Service Repair Manuals and Literatu re 33 6 Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . ............ AUTO Automat ic climate control system . . . . . . . 70 Automat ic headli ght s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Adapter cable (Audi music inter f ace) . . . . . 18 5 Adapt ive air suspension/sport . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Adapt ive cruise control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Cleaning the sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Adj usting the sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Adj usting the sound (tone) Airbag system . . Care . . . . . . . . Children . . . . . Child rest raints .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. ..... ..... ..... ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 . ... . . . 226 ........ ........ ........ ........ . 234, ..... ..... ..... 244 239 249 250 Compo nent s (front airbags) . . . . . . . . . . . 23 2 Danger of fitting a child seat on t he fron t passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 7 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Front airbags . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . 230,23 1 Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Knee airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Mon ito ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light . . . . . . . . . 237 Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Safety inst ructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 3 Side curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 5 We ight -sensing mat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Aircraft Transport ing you r vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Air distribution (autom at ic climate cont rol) . 71 Air pressure (Tire Pressure Moni t oring System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Air suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Alignment pin (changing the whe el) . . . . . . 3 12 All season t ires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Alter nat ive route 340 ..................... 172 Audi connect . . . . . . Data connection . . Data protection . . Services (overview) Setup . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . Auto Lock (central locking) ... ... ... ... ... 55 .............. 27 Automa ti c belt ret ract or . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Automat ic climate contro l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automat ic traffic rerouting Automat ic transmission Emergency mode . . . Hill descent cont rol . Overboost . . . . . . . . . ............. (tiptron ic) . ........... ........... ........... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 69 172 . . . . 83 87 86 87 Parking lock emergency release . . . . . . . . . 88 Automat ic w ipe/wash system . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Auto Safety Hot li ne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Average economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Average speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 B BACKbutto n 134 Balance (sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Belt tens ioners . . . . . . . . . . .. . ... .. . 216,224 Blended gasoli ne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Blowe r (automa ti c climate contro l) . . . . . . . . Bluetoot h Audio player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connect ing a cell phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 183 146 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Index Brake fluid Checking the brake f luid level . . . . . . . . . . 279 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . Brake fluid . . . . . Electromechanical New brake pads . ....... ....... parking ....... ...... ...... brake ...... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 128 . 2 79 . . 81 . 128 Braking Brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Worn brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Braking guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 99 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Break-in per iod Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 . . . . . . . 27 31 30 32 33 30 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Changin g engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Charging and chang in g the battery . . . . . . . 198 Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Danger of using child restra ints in the front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Child safety seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 But tons Mul tif unction steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . Child safety seats Convertib le child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Infant seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 11 185 California Proposition 65 Warning Battery specific .............. ... . . . . 272 . . . ... . 280 Call .. . . . . . . . . . .............. . . . ... . 149 ............................. 148 Call options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Transporting your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Cargo area refer to Luggage compartment.. . . . .... 213 Caring for and cleaning leathe r . . . . . . . . . . 309 Catalytic converter 271 Child restraint system anchors . . . . . . . . . . 261 Installing a child restraint using the LATCH system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LATCH system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lower anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting and releasing the anchorage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety instr uctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 263 263 262 263 251 Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Securing ........................... 258 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Cleaning/removing ice from windows . . . . . 308 Cleaning Alcantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Cleaning art ificial leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Cleaning carbon parts Cleaning controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308, 309 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Cleaning decorative parts and trim . . . . . . . 308 Cleaning displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Cleaning exhaust tail pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 CD refer to Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180, 189 N Cell phone Playing music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 also refer to Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 0 Center armrest :c .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Car carrier .... 0 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Child safety lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Capacities Fuel tank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 .... Certification .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Browsing through album covers . . . . . . . . . 190 Call list N ,..._ Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Centra l locking sw itch . . . . . . . . . . Convenience key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency lo cking . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggag e compartment lid . . . . . . . Remote contro l key . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Guidance fixtures for lower anchorages . . 262 Cable (Audi music inter fac e) co . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Break ing in New brak e pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 New engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 New tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 C 0 Center conso le lighting ........................ Cleaning plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Cleaning tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Cleaning textiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 55 '<t 341 Index Closing Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panorama glass roof . . . . . . . . . . Sunroof.. . . . . . ..... . ........ Sun shade (panoramic sunroof) . Sunshade (sliding/tilting sunroof) Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closing/opening .... .... . ... .... ... .... . . . 273 . . . . 39 . ... 38 . . . . 40 . . . . 38 . . . . 37 ....................... 30 Closing aid (doors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Cockpit (overview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Color number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Defrosting (windows) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 DEF (instrument cluster) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Demo mode refer to Presentation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . Determining correct load limit 172 . . . . . . . . . . 297 Digital compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Digital Rights Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 . . D1mens1ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... . . 334 Directory refer to Contacts 150 ........................ 63 Display Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196, 206 Settings .... . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 190, 196 Compass in the mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S2 Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coming home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Compartments Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Conference call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Connecting and disconnecting an MP3 player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 12 Doors Child safety lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Closing aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Emergency locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Consumer information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Ind icator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Consumer Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Driver seating position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Connections refer to Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 , 189 Consumption (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Contacting NHTSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Drives refer to Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180, 189 Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 I mport ing/exporting 153 Drive select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convenience key Unlocking/locking Driving through water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Driving safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 .................... 30 Driving time Cooling mode (automatic climate control) . . 70 DVD Changer . . . . . . . . Drive . . . . . . . . . . . Full screen display also refer to Media Cooling system Checking/adding coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Coolant temperature indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Cover Flow refer to Browsing through album covers . 190 Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Current economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 110 .......................... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ....... ....... ....... ....... Dynamic steering . . . . . . ........... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .... .... .... 180, 12 182 181 190 189 110, 129 Dynamic volume refer to System volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 E D ........ 13 Data recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Economy (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Date.. . ... . . . . . . . ............ Efficiency program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Data encryption 196 . ... . . . 204 Economy tips (efficiency program) Date display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 204 Electromechanical parking brake . . . . . . . . . 81 Daylight saving time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Electronic Differential Lock (EDL) . . . . . . . . Daytime running lights Electronic immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Declaration of compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 342 126 .................. 28 Electronic speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Index 126 Emergency assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Emergency flashe rs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Emergency locking the front passenger's door .3.2 Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency operation Front passenger's door . . Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . Luggage compartment lid Panoramic sunroof . . . . . . Sliding/tilt ing sunroof . . . Sun shade (roof) . . . . . . . Factory default settings Multi Media Interface ................ . . . . . . . . . .............. RSE ...... Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC) . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . 32 . 270 . . 36 . . 40 . . 39 . . 40 Emergency release Parking lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Emissions data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Energy consumers (efficiency program) . . . . Energy management Engine Start/Stop-System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Starting/stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Starting w ith jumper cables . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Engine compartment ......... . . . . . ... . 271 Opening/closing the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 274 277 . . . ... . 274 Engine sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Entering a destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165, 169 Entering an address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 From the map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Last destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Starting point (presentation mode) . . . . . 172 Entering letters (speller) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Entering numbers/symbols (speller) . . ... . 137 Entry assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 76 Engine oil Changing Specification and viscosity...... Environment Catalytic converter . . .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Environmenta Uy-friendly/ economical driving ... . . . ... . . . .......... 0 co . . . . . 74 Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Proper disposal of drained engine oil . . . . 277 Unleaded f uel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 EPC(engine control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 N ,..... ESN .... .... N 0 0 . ..... refer to Serial number (radio) . . . . . . . . . . 178 132 Exterior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 F 206 . . 196 205 Fader (sound) Fastening Booster seats . . . . . . ... . .......... . . . 256 Convertib le child safety seats ... . . . . . . . 255 Infant seats ... . . . . . .............. . . 254 Fast forwarding/rewinding (audio/video file) ......... ' . . . . . ................ . 190 Foot pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 172 186 212 62 212 Free text search Telephone. . ... . . . ................ 151 Fast forwarding (audio/video file) . . . . . . . . Favorite (navigation) File format (media) Floor mats.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168, ................... . ... . . . . ................ . Folding table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Freeze protection Coolant additive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Front airbags Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Frontal collisions and the laws of physics . . 219 Front passenger seat adjustment ......... 58 Front seats Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Child restraints in the front seat . . . . . . . . 227 also refer to Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . Blended gasoline . Current economy . Economy . . . . . . . . Fuel filler neck . . . Fuel gauge . . . . . . Fuel tank capacity Gasoline . . . . . . . . Gasoline additives Octane rating . . . . Recommendation . Saving fuel . ... . . 267 267 . 12 333 268 9, 10 334 267 268 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 . ............... 74, 110 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. :c '<t 343 Index I Fueli ng Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Fuel tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Ign ition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Full screen displ ay (DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Immobilizer Function buttons I mpo rting and export ing (cont acts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 76 Imbalance (whee ls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 28 Improperly worn safety belts 153 . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Infan t seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 G Garage doo r opener (Home link) 17 . . . . . . . . . . 41 Garment hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Inflation pressure (Tire Pressure Mon itor ing System) ........ . . . . . . . ............ . . 302 I nflation pressure (t ires) 293 Gas statio n message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 2 Info rmation Audi music inte rface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Glossary of tire and loading terminology Infotainment display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Inp ut Using the MMI touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the speller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 137 I nput level (media) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Gas discharge lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 . . 285 Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Valet parking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . 334 H Inspection interva l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 HD radio (digital radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Head-up Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 I nstalling the upper tether st rap on t he anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Headlights Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Headlig ht range contro l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 3 Washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 I nstr ument clus t er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headpho nes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connections (RSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headphones connected by cable (RSE) . . W ireless headp hones (RSE) . . . . . . . . . . . Internet . . . . 197 199 199 197 Head restra ints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Adju sti ng . . . . . . . . . .......... . . . . . . . 2 10 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Heavy clo t hing and safety bel t s . . . . . . . . . . 220 Hex socket. . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. . . . . . . . 312 High beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Hill descent contro l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Hill hold assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 also refer to Hill hold assist . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Hold assist (hi ll) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 9 Interior light ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Interior rearview mirro r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Intermitten t mode (winds hield wipers) . . . . SO refer to Aud i connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 iPod refer to Audi music interface . . . . . . . . . . . 185 J Jukebox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Jump-start ing .. . . . ... . . . ... . ...... 327 . .. Jump start cable 328 K Key............ . . . . . . . . . .......... . .. Key not recognized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 78 Home address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 2 Kick-down (aut omatic transm ission) . . . . . . . 86 Homelink (garage door opener) . . . . . . . . . . 41 Knee airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 L LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 344 Index Lifting jack . . 315,316 . . . . ................ Light Coming/Leav ing home . . . Daytime running lights . . Headlight range contro l . Low beam . . . . ................ Rear fog lights . . . . . . . . . 46 43 43 43 43 Side marker lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 ............ ............ ............ . . ... ............ .. .. .. .. .. Light/rain sensor Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Intermittent mode (windshie ld wipers) . . . 50 Lighting Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 I nter ior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Lights Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Interior/reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 189 185 183 180 186 182 180 202 186 184 Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audi music interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bluetooth aud io player . . . . . Drives (MMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jukebox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restrict ions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RSE . . ..... . . . . . . . .......... Supported formats . . . . . . . . Wi-Fi media player . . . . . . . . . .... .... .... .... .... . .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ...... .... .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Media drives RSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Memory capacity Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 154 Jukebox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Memory card SD card reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Listening to music refer to Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180, 189 Memory funct ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Listening to the radio MMI control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 RSE .......................... . ... . 201 Menu language refer to Setting the language . . . . . . . . . . 205 Locking/unlocking ..................... 30 Low beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Luggage compartment. . 12 volt socket . . . . . . . . Storing cargo correctly Stowing luggage . . . . . Valet parking function . ...... ...... ......... ...... ...... .... .... . .... .... .... .... . ... .... .... . . 65 . . 60 . 213 . 213 . . 40 Luggage compartment lid . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 36 Opening from the inside in an emergency . 36 64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Luggage rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lumbar support MENU button 52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Mirror compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirrors MMI refer to Multi Media Interface . . . . . . . . . . 134 138 MMI touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 MMI control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Monitoring the Advanced Airbag System . . 236 Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134, 194 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134, 194 Multi Media Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mute (muting) Muting (mute) myAudi Finding a destination M 11 ................. 167 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 150 . . . . . . . . 25 Making emergency call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Malfunction I ndicator Lamp (MIL) Map Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 55 .... Massage function N .... 0 Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 29 0 Mechanical key (replacement key) . . . . . . . . . co N ,..._ :c 28 N 154 Name tag Navigating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 MMI control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 RSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Navigation Address input . . . . . . . Map display . . . . . . . . Online destinations . . Route plan . . . . . . . . . ........ ........ ........ ........ .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 165 170 167 17 4 '<t 345 Index Starting/canceling route guidance . . . . . . also refer to Entering a destination . . . . . also refer to Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network connection (Wi-Fi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Next/previous track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NHTSA Contacting N'19ht v1s1on . . assist . ................... . Cleaning the camera .......... . ... . . . Number of seats . . ................ . .. . 170 165 170 160 190 214 107 307 218 0 Occupant seat ing positions 208 Octane rating . . . . ................ . . . . 267 Odometer . . . . .. . .................. . . . 10 OFF (automatic climate control . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Oil refer to Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Oil change interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 On-Board Diagnostic System (OBD) . . . . . . . . 25 On/Off knob MMI control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 RSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Online services refer to Audi connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Opening. . . . . . . . . . . ... ........ . . . . . . . . 27 Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Luggage compartment lid . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 36 Panorama glass roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Sunroof . . . . . . . .............. . ... . ... 38 Sun shade (panoramic sunroof) . . . . . . . . . 40 Sunshade (sliding/tilting sunroof) . . . . . . . 38 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Operating Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Multi Media Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 RSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Overboost (automatic transmission) . . . . . . . 87 Overview Menus and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Overview (Cockpit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 346 p Paint damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Paint number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Panorama glass roof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Panoramic sunroof Sun shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Parental control DVD......... . . . ... .............. . . 190 Parenta l control (DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Parking brake refer to Electromechanical parking brake 81 Parking system Adjusting the display/warning tone .... . 124 Cleaning the sensors/camera ........ . . 307 . . 124 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... Periphera l cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Trailer hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 alsorefertoParkingsystems ...... llS, 116 p ar k'mg systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Rearv1 .ewcamera . . . . . . . . .......... .. 116 Parking (valet parking function) . . . . . . . . . . 40 Parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Pass-through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 PASSENGERAIR BAGOFFlight ........ . . 237 Passenger protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Pause (audio/video file) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Pedals 212 Phone book refer to Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Physical principles of a fronta l collision . . . 219 Point of interest search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Polish ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Pollutant filter (automatic A/C system) . . . . 69 Pregnant women Special considerations when wearing a safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Pre sense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Presentation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Pressure (tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Preventative passenger protection (pre 216 sense) .............................. Prewarming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Prompts (settings) refer to Voice guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Index Retractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Q quattro (all wheel drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Selective wheel torque control 126 R Radio clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Rain/light sensor Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Intermittent mode (windshield w ipers) . . . SO Range (tank level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear lid refer to Luggage compartment lid . Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) . . . . . . . . . . . 46 . . . . . . 43 . . . . . . 33 . . . . . 193 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Rear window defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Rear window sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Recirculation mode (automatic climate control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Recuperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Refrigerator Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Remote control refer to Remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Remote control operation Garage door opener (Homelink) . . . . . . . . . 41 Repair manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Repairs Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Replacement key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Replacing Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Reporting Safety Defects ......... . . 214,215 Reset button (trip odometer) 0 co .... N ,..._ .... N 0 0 :c ............ 10 Reset (restart) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Residual heat (deluxe automatic climate con trol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Restart (reset) Rewinding (audio/video file) . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Rims ...... . ... . . . . . .............. . . 298 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Road noise compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Roof load . . . . . . . . . Roof rack . . . . . . . . . Route refer to Route plan Route criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Route guidance refer to Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Route list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 4 Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Rearview camera refer to Parking systems ..... . . . . . 115, 116 Rearview mirror Reverse gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Route plan Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Route list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 4 Storing 169 s Safe driving habits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Correct seating position . . . . . . . . Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety belt position .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 207 226 218 213 208 212 146 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Safety belts . . ... . . . .............. Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Securing child safety seats . . . . Safety belt warning light . . . . . . . Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 218,221 . . . . 308 . . . . 258 . . . . 218 . . . . 207 Safety features for occupant restraint and protect ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Safety instructions for side curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . for using child safety seats ............ for using safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring the Advanced Airbag System Screwdriver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SD card reader Seat adjustment Head restraints . . 247 251 . . 220 . 238 . . 312 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 '<t 347 Index Seat heating/ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Seating position Driver · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · Front passenger . . . . . . . . Incorrect seat position . . Occupants. . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear passengers . . . . . . . . · ·.... .... .... .... .... Seats Adjusting the front seats . . . Adjusting the rear seats . . . Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convenience side view . . . . . Correct seating position . . . Massage function . . . . . . . . . Seat symmetry . . . . . . . . . . . Seats (number) . . . ................ .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ...... ........ ........ ........ ........ .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . 208 209 211 208 210 .... .... ... .... ... .... .... . .. 54 S5 309 60 208 54 60 218 Selecting a source MMI control panel 189 Selector lever Selector lever position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Serial number (radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Service and disposa l Safety belt pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Serviceinterval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Settings Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Media ............................. System (MMI) . . . . . . . . . . Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice recognition system Setting the frequency band . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 190 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Setting the language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Shades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 49 Shift padd les . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Ship (transport ing your vehicle) . . . . . . . . . 330 Shuff le (media) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Side airbags Description . . . . . . . . . . . . Side assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning the sensors . . . . also refer to Side assist . . Side curtain airbags . . . . . . Description . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety instructions . . . . . . Side marker lights . . . . . . . ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . .. 243 104 307 104 245 245 247 43 SIM card reader . . . . . .......... . ... . . . 157 Sirius (satellite radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 348 Ski bag........ . . . . . . . ................ 66 Sliding/tilting sunroof Emergency closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Emergency operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Socket 115 volt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 volt . · · · · .. . . . . . . . ............ Software update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . also refer to System update (MMI) . . . . Software version . . . . . . . . Software (MMI) Update ... . . . . . . . . . . . Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solar operation (automatic system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . .. .. .. 61 60 196 205 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 ............ . . 206 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 climate control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Sources of information about child restraints and their use .. . . . . . . . . . . . .......... . . 266 Spare tires .... . . . . . . . . . .............. 319 Spare tire (compact spare tire) ......... . 319 Speed-dependent volume increase ...... . 204 Speed warning system . . . .............. . 92 Speller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............ . . 137 Sport differential Start/Stop-System ... . . ..... . ........ Start/Stop system Messages . . . . . Starting/stopping Switching off/on ... .... the ... . 110 ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 ...... ...... engine ...... ... ... .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . Station list Steering Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shift paddles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steering wheel heating . . . . . . . . . also refer to Multifunction steering 78 80 79 80 177 ...... ...... ...... whee l . . . . 129 75 86 72 11 Steps for determining correct load limit . . . 297 Stopover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Subwoofer (sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Sunroof · .. · · ... . . . . . .............. . .. 38 Panorama glass roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Sun shade Emergency operation (panoramic sunroof) 40 Panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Sunshade Rear window, rear doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Index Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 ................. 149 Tone (sound) refer to Adjusting the sound . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Switching the audio output off (RSE) . . . . . 195 Tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Swapping (telephone) Torn or frayed safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Symbols refer to Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 SYNC(Automatic climate control) . . . . . . . . . 71 touch refer to MMI touch 136 System update (MMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Towing Tow trucks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 System volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Towing loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329, 330 System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 TPMS (tire pressure monitoring system) . . . 301 T Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 10 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Telephone . . . . . ............... Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dialing a number . . . . . . . . . Memory capacity (directory) Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storing a number . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 14, 146, ....... ....... ....... ....... ....... 149 147 148 1S4 154 149 Temperature disp lay Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Tether anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Tether strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Tie-downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 214 r ,me . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 tiptronic (automatic transmission) Tire mobility kit ................ co .... N ,..._ .... 0 N 0 :c . . ... . 312 Trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Trailer towing Operating instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 p ar k'ing system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Technical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 90 Train (transporting your vehicle) . . . . . . . . . 330 Transmission malfunction ............... Transporting your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . u Unfastening safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 r ,res . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unlocking/locking .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Tires and wheels Glossary of tire and loading terminology . 285 Tires and vehicle load limits . . . . . . . . . . . 295 TMC/TMCpro refer to Traffic information (TMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 ..................... 30 V Valet parking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 , SO Vehicle Care/cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Out of service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 1 Raising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Vehicle battery . . Charge level . . . Charging . . . . . . Winter operation .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. ........... ........... ........... ........... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . 279 . . 130 . . 280 . . 280 Vehicle control modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 10 Turn signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Uniform tire quality grading 283 . . . . . 299 . . . . . 130 . . . . . 313 291 . . . . . 293 . 301 , 302 . . . . . 294 . . . . . 291 . . . . . 285 . . . . . 300 87 Transport Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Tire Pressure Monitoring System . . . . . . . . . 302 Low aspect ratio tires . . . . . . . . . quattro (all wheel drive) . . . . . . . Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service life Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire pressure monitoring system Tire pressure table . . . . . . . . . . . . Treadwear indicators . . . . . . . . . . Unidirectional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uniform tire quality grading . . . . 0 . . . . . . . . 83 Traffic information (TMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 RSE .... . . . . . . . . . . . ............ . . . . 201 Switching reports on and off . . . . . . . . . . . 176 132 Vehicle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Vehicle jack . . ... . . . . . ........ 312,315,316 '<t 349 Index Vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Vehicle too l kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Vehicle transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Venti lat ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Version informat ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196, 206 Video image settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Video playback combinations (RSE) . . . . . . . 20 2 VIN ................................ 333 Voice guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Voice recognition system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 1 Sett ings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20S Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Win t er driving Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Win t er operat ion Cooling syst em . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defrosting the windows . . . . . . Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steering wheel heating . . . . . . . Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshie ld washer system . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .... .... .... .... .... .... Win t er t ires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Winter use Car washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Removing ice from windows . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . w Wire less headphones (RSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning/Indicator lights Airbag system . .............. . .. 236,237 PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 X Warning lig hts refer to Indicator lig hts . .... Xenon plus headlights . . . . . . . . ... 17 Wa rni ng tr iangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Washing mat t e f inish paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Zoom (map) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wheel bolts Replacing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Wheels ... . . . . . . . ............ . ... . .. Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glossary of tire and loading terminology . Replacing . . . . . ... . .......... . ... . .. Tires and vehicle load limits . . . . . . . . . . . 283 307 285 313 295 W heel wrenc h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 12 W i-Fi ...... . . . . . ................ . ... Media player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..................... 160 184 37 W indows Cleaning/ remov ing ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Defrost ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1 W indshield Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defrost ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . also refer to W indshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SO 71 50 W indshield washe r system . . . . . . . . . . 50, 281 Reservoir capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 W indshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 SO 198 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 z We ight s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 51 Xenon-Light s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Warranty coverages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 W indow reg ulator 277 . 71 . 71 . 72 280 281 172 It has always been Audi's policy to cont inuous ly improve its products. AUDI AG reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications , and to make additions or improvements in its products without incurring any ob ligat ion to install them on products previously manufactured . This Owner's Manual is based on the current data available when it was printed. Text, ill ust rations and specif ications in this owner's manua l are based on the most up-to-date information available at the time of printing, and shall not const itute a basis for liability claims. These instructions may not be reproduced or translated in whole or in part without written consent of AUDI AG. All rights reserved by AUDI AG. @) For the sake of the environment Printed on eco-friendly paper (bleached without chlorine, recyclable) . Owner's Manual Englisch Nordamerika 4H0012721BD 4H0012721BD 05.2016 www.audi.com

Audi 2017 A8 / S8 Owner Manual

Related manuals

Audi

2018 A5

Audi

2018 A8 / S8

Audi

2017 Q7

Audi

2016 TT / TTS Coupe

Audi

2017 R8 Coupe

Audi

2018 A4 / S4

Audi

2016 RS 7 Sportback

Audi

2016 TT Coupe

Audi

2017 A4

Audi

2017 Q3

Audi

2015 A3

Audi

2023 Q3